ADVIA Centaur XP Immunoassay System Operator S Guide, English, REF 078D1064-01 Rev. C, 2013-04 DXDCM 09008b83807ebd85-1457712853956

ADVIA Centaur XP Immunoassay System
Operators Guide
078D1064-01 Rev. C, 2013-04
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide
2013 Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics. All rights reserved.

No part of this operators guide or the products it describes may be
reproduced by any means or in any form without prior consent in writing
from Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics.
ADVIA Centaur, ReadyPack, BR (CA 15-3), CA 125 II, CA 15-3, CA 19-9,
and TnI-Ultra are trademarks of Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics.
RealTime Solutions is a servicemark of Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics.
Corvac and Monoject are trademarks of Sherwood Medical Company.
Lexmark is a trademark of Lexmark International, Inc.
Microsoft Excel is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
Microtainer and Vacutainer are trademarks of Becton, Dickinson and
Company.
Monovette is a trademark of Walter Sarstedt Kunststoff-Spritzgusswerk.
The information in this operators guide was correct at the time of printing.
However, Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics continues to improve products
and reserves the right to change specifications, equipment, and maintenance
procedures at any time without notice.
If the system is used in a manner differently than specified by Siemens
Healthcare Diagnostics, the protection provided by the equipment may be
impaired. See warning and hazard statements.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide:
Using This Guide

1
System Features
Operating the ADVIA Centaur XP System
Calibration
Using Quality Control Features
Performing Maintenance
Identifying System Problems
Managing Data
Configuring the System
Appendix A: Safety Instructions

Appendix B: Service, Ordering, and Warranty
Appendix C: Reagents and System Fluids
Appendix D: Supplies
Appendix E: Specifications
Appendix F: System Symbols
Appendix G: Installation and Relocation
Appendix H: Glossary
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide:
Appendix I: Index
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Using This Guide

This system is intended for professional use in a laboratory environment only.
Tests performed using this system are intended for in vitro diagnostic use. As with
all diagnostic tests, a definitive clinical diagnosis should not be based on the
results of a single test, but should only be made by the physician after all clinical
and laboratory findings have been evaluated.
The ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide provides information for the
following clinical laboratory professionals who use the ADVIA Centaur XP
system:
system operators who perform daily operating tasks such as preparing the
system, processing samples, reviewing results, and performing maintenance
system key operators who perform daily and other tasks such as reviewing
control data, managing data files, and modifying system parameters
Organization
The following table describes how this operators guide is organized.
If you want to . . .
Then refer to . . .
learn about system features such as no-pause reloading

and onboard refrigeration,
learn about user interface components, how to use
online information, and view software maps,
review the hardware and the operating sequence,
review principles of chemiluminescence and assay
reaction formats,
Section 1:
System Features
Hardware Overview,
Software Overview,
Technology.
process samples, monitor status, or manage sample

results,
Section 2:
Operating the System.
review Master Curve and 2-point calibration principles,

define Master Curves and calibrators,
process calibrators,
Section 3:
Calibration.
learn about accessing ADVIA QC,

define quality control materials,
Section 4:
Quality Control.
perform scheduled maintenance activities,

record maintenance activities,
Section 5:
Maintenance.
investigate and correct system problems,
Section 6: Troubleshooting.
learn about saving results data files to an archive,

learn about backing up your system configuration files,
Section 7:
Data Management.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ii
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Using This Guide
Then refer to . . .
modify test definition parameters,

modify system parameters,
set up LIS and LAS parameters,
Section 8:
System Configuration.
review biohazard precautions,

review laser precautions,
Appendix A:
Safety.
view warranty, legal, and support information,

view contact information,
Appendix B:
Warranty and Support
Information.
view information about primary reagents, ancillary

reagents, and system fluids,
Appendix C:
Reagents and System Fluids.
view information about ordering supplies,
Appendix D: Supplies.
view system specifications,
Appendix E: Specifications.
view system symbols,
Appendix F: Symbols.
view the glossary,
Appendix G: Glossary.
Conventions
The ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide uses the following text and symbol
conventions:
Convention
NOTE:
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Description
BIOHAZARD
Biohazard statements alert you to potentially

biohazardous conditions.
LASER WARNING:
Laser Warning statements alert you to the risk of

exposure to lasers.
WARNING:
Warning statements alert you to conditions that

may cause personal injury.
CAUTION:
Caution statements alert you to conditions that may

cause product damage or loss of data. On the
system, this symbol indicates that you should refer
to the operators guide for more information.
Note statements alert you to important information
that requires your attention.
iii
Convention
Description
Bold
Bold type indicates commands on the user

interface, keys, or the exact text that an operator
needs to type.
For example, if the word save appears as Save, it
refers to the selecting the Save button on the user
interface.
Another example is typing a specific entry into a
text box. If the word welcome appears as welcome,
it means that you should type that word into the
specified field.
Italic
Italic type refers to the title of a document or a

section title in this operators guide. For example,
Operating the ADVIA Centaur XP System refers to
Section 2 of this operators guide.
Terminology
The following table explains some of the special terminology used in this
operators guide and the specific actions that you need to take when you see the
terminology:
Term
Description
Select
To select an item, use your finger to touch the item on the touch-screen
monitor or select the item with the system pointing device. The
background of the item changes color or displays a black frame to
indicate that you selected the item.
Enter
Type the specified information using the keyboard and then press
the Enter key.
Scan
Move the hand-held barcode scanner over the specified barcode to enter
the information.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
iv
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: System Overview
1 System Overview
Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Hardware Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
ADVIA Centaur XP System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
Visible Status Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Sample Loading Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5
Reagent Loading Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Test Sequence Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-10
Supplies and Wastes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-14
Computer Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15
Barcode Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16
Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Software Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Workspace Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18
Status Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Task Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19
Function Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-20
Software Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Opening and Closing Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Moving Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Window Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-22
Online Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Accessing Online Help Functions: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Accessing Online Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Window Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Event Code Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24
Software Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25
Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-26
Worklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-27
Quality Control, System View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
Quality Control, Applications View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-28
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29
Setup, System View Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-29
Setup Test Definition Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-30
Setup, System View Profile Summary
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: System Overview
and Data Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Setup, Applications View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions, System View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions, Applications View RealTime Solutions Service
and IFUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Functions, Application View Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-31
1-31
1-32
1-32
1-33
Technology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Direct Chemiluminescence. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-33
Antibody Binding Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Paramagnetic Particles and Magnetic Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-35
Assay Reaction Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36

Sandwich Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Competitive Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AE-labeled Antigen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AE-labeled Antibody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Antibody-capture Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-37
1-39
1-40
1-43
1-45
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-50
078D1064-01 Rev. C
System Features
The ADVIA Centaur XP system is an automated, immunoassay analyzer that
offers optimal productivity and efficiency.
Comprehensive assay groups provide for cost-effective workstation consolidation.
The assay groups include fertility, thyroid function, oncology, cardiovascular,
anemia, therapeutic drug monitoring, infectious disease, adrenal function, and
metabolic.
All the assays use direct chemiluminescent technology. Tests performed using the
ADVIA Centaur XP system are intended for in vitro diagnostic use. As with all
diagnostic tests, a definitive clinical diagnosis is not based on the results of a
single test. Only a physician can make a diagnosis after evaluating all clinical and
laboratory findings.
Intended Use
This system is intended for professional use in a laboratory environment only.
Tests performed using this system are intended for in vitro diagnostic use. As with
all diagnostic tests, a definitive clinical diagnosis should not be based on the
results of a single test, but should only be made by the physician after all clinical
and laboratory findings have been evaluated.
The ADVIA Centaur XP has many features for enhancing laboratory operations:
Feature
Description
No-pause Reloading
You can load samples, reagents, and supplies at any time,

even while the system processes samples.
Optimal Productivity
The throughput is up to 240 tests per hour and the walkaway

time is up to 840 tests.
Automatic Reflex
Testing
The system automatically schedules reflex tests based on

parameters that you define.
Onboard Refrigeration
Reagents remain in the refrigerated reagent areas, so you can

process samples without time-consuming system
preparation.
True Stat Capabilities
The system efficiently processes Stat requests via a

dedicated Stat port without disrupting sample processing.
Clot Detection and

Management
The system ensures sample integrity by detecting complete

obstructions in the sample probe, notifying you of the
condition, and then performing management and recovery
tasks.
Bubble Detection
The system ensures the integrity of the reagent aspiration

and dispense in the reagent and the ancillary probes.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-2
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: System Features
Feature
Description
Automated Cleaning
The system automatically performs the daily cleaning.
Autoschedule Daily
Cleaning
You can set up the system to automatically schedule and log

the daily cleaning procedure in the Maintenance Log.
User Interface
The intuitive graphical user interface is via a touch-screen

monitor making it possible for you to perform your daily
tasks directly on the screen without using the keyboard.
Context-sensitive help is available for any window or field.
LIS Interface
Bidirectional laboratory information system (LIS) interface

allows you to send to and receive information from your
LIS. The system supports the ASTM interface protocol.
Laboratory Automation
The ADVIA Centaur XP STS sample transport system is an

optional feature that enables you to use the
ADVIA Centaur XP system with any laboratory automation
system.
Remote and Laboratory

Server
The ADVIA Centaur XP system has integrated, pro-active

service features that assist in problem detection and
remotely initiated diagnosis of problems, having the effect
of faster support resolution. The system supports remotely
initiated activities like software updates and on-line
documentation updates. Process management functionality
is enhanced with a laboratory dashboard and remote control
of interconnected laboratory instrumentation.
Remote Server
The ADVIA Centaur XP system has integrated, pro-active

service features that assist in problem detection and
remotely initiated diagnosis of problems, having the effect
of faster support resolution. The system supports remotely
initiated activities like software updates and on-line
documentation updates.
Visible Status Light
The ADVIA Centaur XP system has a status light that is

visible from most positions in the room. The status lights
correspond to events that occur on the ADVIA Centaur XP
system.
Hardware Overview
The Hardware Overview section introduces the operating sequence of the system
and describes the location and function of the major subsystems and components.
This information helps you to perform the following tasks:
operate the ADVIA Centaur XP system for maximum efficiency
perform the maintenance tasks
understand the basic test processing sequence, which is essential for effective
troubleshooting
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-3
ADVIA Centaur XP System

The areas of the system that you can access while the system processes samples
are shown in Figure 1-1.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Water bottle
Waste bottle
Primary reagent compartment
Sample tip loader
Visible status light
Cuvette loader
Figure 1-1
7
8
9
10
11
Sample exit queue

Stat entry
Sample entry queue
Cleaning solution
System fluids
ADVIA Centaur XP System
Refer to Software Overview page 1-17.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-4
The ADVIA Centaur XP system uses several areas of the system while processing
samples, as shown in Figure 1-2.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Primary reagent compartment

Primary reagent probes
Incubation ring
Luminometer
Base probe
Waste probe
Cuvette loading bin
Aspirate probes
Magnets
Wash block
Acid probe
Figure 1-2
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Ancillary probe
Sample probe
Ancillary reagent queue
Sample tip tray
Inprocess queue
Sample entry queue
Sample rack
Stat entry
Sample exit queue
User Interface workstation
ADVIA Centaur XP System top view
Visible Status Light

The status light on the system, visible from most positions in the room, displays
colors that correspond to events that occur on the ADVIA Centaur XP system.
Off
No error or warning conditions exist and the ADVIA Centaur XP user

interface screen saver and status buttons are neutral.
The system is turned off.
The light is disabled.
NOTE: If the status light is off for an extended period of time, check the
user interface error conditions.
Yellow
At least 1 warning condition exists.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Red
Blinking
Yellow or
Blinking
Red
Blinking
Green
1-5
At least 1 critical condition exists that may cause the system to stop
aspirating or processing samples.
A new event has occurred.
When you open the status window to view the new condition, the
status light maintains the current color and stops blinking.
When you correct all warning or critical conditions, the status light
turns off.
When you correct all critical conditions and warning conditions
remain, the status light changes to steady yellow.
A remote update is in progress.
If an error occurs during a remote update, the status light changes to
blinking red.
Refer to Enabling the Visible Status Light page 8-52.
Sample Loading Area

The sample loading area consists of 3 areas as displayed in Figure 1-3:
the sample entry queue where you load samples
the inprocess queue where the samples reside during processing
the sample exit queue where you remove samples
Figure 1-3
Sample Loading Area top view
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-6
Samples are placed in the sample racks, which hold 5 primary sample tubes
or sample cups.
1
2
Tube-type selector
Sample rack
Figure 1-4
ADVIA Centaur XP Sample Rack
You load the racks in the sample entry queue and remove them from the sample
exit queue. You can enter stat samples into the stat queue.
1
2
3
Sample entry queue

Sample exit queue
Stat entry
Figure 1-5
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Sample Queues
1-7
Racks enter the inprocess queue where the sample barcode scanner reads the
barcode labels on the rack and on each sample cup or tube. When the sample rack
is in the inprocess queue, the sample probe aspirates the sample.
1
2
3
Sample tip tray

Rack
Inprocess queue
Figure 1-6
Inprocess Queue
After each sample in the rack is aspirated, the rack moves from the inprocess
queue to the sample exit queue.
Reagent Loading Area

You can load ReadyPack primary reagent packs and ancillary reagent packs into
their compartments, Figure 1-7, while the system processes samples.
Figure 1-7
Primary and Ancillary Reagent Compartments top view
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-8
Refer to Loading Reagents page 2-19.
1
2
Primary reagent shelf

Primary reagent door
Figure 1-8
3
4
Reagent holders
LEDs
Primary Reagent Compartment
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs) on the primary reagent door indicate the status of
the primary packs:
Green indicates that the reagent pack is loaded and available for use.
Blinking green indicates that the system detected that a reagent pack is
present but cannot read the barcode.
Neutral indicates that no reagent pack is loaded in that position or that the
pack is depleted, expired, inactivated, or has no barcode.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-9
You load ancillary reagent packs in the ancillary reagent entry. The system
delivers the packs to the ancillary reagent queue. The ancillary reagent queue
stores the packs at a temperature of 4 to 8C (39 to 46F). You remove ancillary
packs at the ancillary reagent entry.
1
2
3
Ancillary queue indicator lights

Ancillary reagent entry
Ancillary pack
Figure 1-9
Ancillary Queue
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-10
Test Sequence Hardware

The test sequence starts at the inprocess queue and the sample probe where
sample is dispensed into a cuvette. The inprocess queue moves the sample tip tray
to the sample probe and the sample probe picks up a sample tip.
1
2
Sample tip tray

Inprocess queue
Figure 1-10
Inprocess Queue
The sample probe aspirates sample from a container in the inprocess queue and
then dispenses sample into a cuvette in the incubation ring.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-11
The incubation ring is a circular, insulated track that advances the cuvette
at 15-second intervals and incubates the cuvette at 37C (98.6F).
1
2
Magnets
Incubation ring
Figure 1-11
Incubation Ring top view
The incubation ring moves the cuvette from the sample probe to the ancillary
probe and to the reagent probes.
The ancillary probe aspirates the ancillary reagents from the packs in the ancillary
reagent queue and dispenses the reagents into the cuvette in the incubation ring.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-12
The rinse station rinses the probe with reagent water before each ancillary reagent
aspiration.
1
2
Ancillary probe
Rinse station
Figure 1-12
Ancillary Probe and Rinse Station
The incubation ring moves the cuvette to the reagent probes. The 3 reagent probes
move independently of each other to aspirate primary reagents from the primary
packs and to dispense the reagents into the cuvette in the incubation ring.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-13
Between samples, the rinse stations rinse the probes with reagent water.
1
2
Reagent probe
Rinse station
Figure 1-13
Reagent Probe and Rinse Station
The incubation ring moves the cuvette to the wash station. After the magnetic
particles are pulled to the side of the cuvette by magnets positioned along the
incubation ring, the aspirate probes draw fluid out of the cuvette. The wash
station dispenses wash fluid into the cuvette to wash the magnetic particles.
1
2
Aspirate Probe 1
Aspirate Probe Clip
Figure 1-14
Wash Block
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-14
The incubation ring moves the cuvette to the acid probe, which dispenses acid
reagent into the cuvette. The incubation ring moves the cuvette to the elevator,
which lifts the cuvette from the incubation ring into the luminometer.
The luminometer has 3 parts: a photomultiplier tube (PMT) with photon-counting
electronics, a base probe, and a waste probe. When base reagent is dispensed into
the cuvette, the chemiluminescent reaction occurs. The luminometer measures the
light emitted as relative light units (RLUs). The central processing unit (CPU)
processes the data from the PMT and converts the RLUs into results. The system
sends the results to an LIS or a printer.
The waste probe aspirates the waste fluid from the cuvette and the cuvette drops
into the cuvette waste bin. As cuvettes exit the incubation ring, the system
continuously adds new cuvettes to the incubation ring.
You load cuvettes in the cuvette loading bin, then the system moves the cuvettes
to the orientation chute. The orientation chute correctly positions the cuvettes
before they enter the vertical cuvette chute. The vertical cuvette chute connects to
the preheater, which warms the cuvettes to a temperature of 37C (98.6F) before
the cuvettes enter the incubation ring.
1
2
3
Cuvette loading bin

Orientation chute
Vertical cuvette chute
Figure 1-15
4
5
Preheater
Incubation ring
Cuvette Cycle
Supplies and Wastes

You can load supplies and empty wastes anytime the system is processing
samples. Refer to Replenishing Supplies page 2-24.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-15
Computer Hardware
The ADVIA Centaur XP computers control system functions and processes data.
The applications module is equipped with a CD-RW drive for software updates
and for data storage. The computer has several serial ports, as well as an Ethernet
port that expands the communication link between Siemens Healthcare
Diagnostics and your laboratory, allowing for enhanced remotely initiated
diagnostics and proactive service. The monitor, keyboard, mouse, and barcode
scanner are all connected to the computer.
Keyboard
The keyboard offers special icon keys.
1
2
3
4
Symbol keys for the status or task areas

Sign In key
Print key
Help key
Figure 1-16
ADVIA Centaur XP Keyboard
You can use the keyboard to make selections, open windows, and enter
information.
Then . . .
open a window from the

workspace,
Press the symbol key for the status or the task area.
Press the key of the underlined character of the window
title.
close a window,
press the Close Win key.
close all windows,
press the Close All key.
go to the previous
window,
press the Prev Win key.
go to the next window,
press the Shift key and the Prev Win key.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-16
Then . . .
print information,
Press the Print key.

Use the down arrow to select the Report Options button
and then press the Enter key.
print the workspace,
Press the Print key.

Use the down arrow to select the Print Workspace
button and then press the Enter key.
access the Applications

view,
Press the QC icon key on the keyboard.
sign in,
Press the Sign In key.

Use the Tab key to move to the New Operator field and
then enter your initials.
Use the Tab key to move to the Password field and then
enter the password.
Use the Tab key to move to the Sign In button and then
press the Enter key.
access help,
Move to the field on which you want help and then press
the help key.
Barcode Scanner
LASER WARNING
Never look directly at the beam of a hand-held barcode scanner or point the
scanner at another person. Also, do not look at the reflection of the beam from a
shiny surface. Only trained field service personnel should perform procedures
related to laser assemblies. For more information about laser safety, refer to
Appendix A, Protecting Yourself from Barcode Scanner Lasers.
Use the hand-held barcode scanner to enter barcoded information, such as the
information on Master Curve cards or Calibrator Assigned Value cards. Place the
scanner on the top barcode of the Master Curve card or Calibrator Assigned Value
card. Slowly move the scanner down the card over the barcodes. The scanner
beeps after successfully reading a barcode.
You can also use the hand-held barcode scanner to enter the Sample ID for patient
samples. Refer to Scheduling Patient Samples Using a Hand-Held Barcode
Reader page 2-51.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-17
Monitor
NOTE: The touch screen may not respond correctly if it is wet or if your finger or
gloves are wet.

The graphical user interface is via a touch-screen monitor, making it possible for
you to perform your daily tasks directly on the screen without using the keyboard.
The monitor is located on a flexible arm so you can adjust the position of the
monitor. The area of software called the workspace is always visible on the
monitor.
Software Overview
Use the ADVIA Centaur XP user interface workstation to control the operation of
the system. The user interface workstation consists of hardware and software that
you use to interact with the system.
Workspace
The workspace provides access to all system functions and information that an
operator requires to operate the system. The workspace is similar to a benchtop.
At a benchtop, you can pull several reports (windows) from different files
(workspace buttons), and spread them out to review or to enter information.
Although you can work on only 1 document at a time (active window), the others
are ready for you. You can return the report to the file (close the window) or you
can leave the report on the benchtop (leave the window open).
The workspace has 2 views:
system view, offering access to system functions

Unless otherwise specified, when the procedure says At the workspace,... it
refers to the system view workspace.
applications view, offering access to a set of applications including the

ADVIA QC analyzer, the RealTime Solutions service, and the online
documentation browser
To change from the 1 view to the other view, press the QC symbol key on the
system keyboard.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-18
Workspace Toolbar
The toolbar buttons are grouped into 3 areas at the top of the workspace: status
buttons, task buttons, and function buttons. These buttons open windows that
contain related information and tasks.
1
2
3
Status buttons
Task buttons
Function buttons
Figure 1-17
Workspace Buttons
Status Buttons
The status buttons open windows that provide information on the condition of the
entire system, specific system areas, supplies, and reagents. The status buttons are
only available in the system view.
1
2
3
4
5
System status
Date and time field
Supplies status
Sample status
Exception button
Figure 1-18
6
7
8
9
Current system state field

Reagent status button
Maintenance status
Event log status
Workspace Toolbar Status Buttons
The System Status button provides access to diagnostic tools and the system
information
The Supplies Status button opens a window that displays information about
the cuvette supply, the sample tip supply, system fluid levels, and waste
levels.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-19
The Sample Status button opens a window that displays information about the
status of samples that are in process.
The Exception Status button directs you to the applications view and the
ADVIA QC application.
The Reagent Status button opens windows that display information about the
onboard primary and ancillary reagents.
The Maintenance Status button opens a window that accesses the maintenance
schedule, the maintenance log, the maintenance definitions, and the
maintenance procedures.
The Event Log Status button opens a window that displays the events that
occurred on the system and provides access to troubleshooting procedures.
Refer to Monitoring Status in Section 2.
Task Buttons
The task buttons provide access to windows associated with specific tasks. When
selected, each button displays a list of the windows that are available.
1
2
3
4
Worklist button.
Quality Control button
Calibration button
Setup button.
Figure 1-19
Workspace Toolbar Task Buttons
Button
System View
Applications View
Worklist
accesses tasks associated with

analyzing samples: scheduling
samples, performing dilutions,
reviewing results
inactive
Quality
Control
accesses control definition

windows
accesses the ADVIA QC

application
Calibration
accesses calibration tasks:

defining Master Curves, defining
calibrators, reviewing calibration
results
inactive
Setup
accesses setup tasks: defining

dilutions, profiles, tube types,
and LIS communications
accesses setup tasks: data

management, enabling the visible
status light
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-20
Function Buttons
The function buttons provide additional capabilities related to the workspace,
such as signing in, closing all windows, and requesting printed reports.
1
2
3
4
5
Close All
Sign In
RealTime Solutions - available in the Applications View
Instructions for Use - available in the Applications View
Print
Figure 1-20
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Function Buttons
1-21
Software Windows
The windows are designed with a common organization. because the purpose of
each window is unique, the organization of each window may vary to best achieve
the objective of each window.
1
2
3
4
5
Title bar with Help button

View, Sort, and Search fields
Information display area
Bottom buttons
Side buttons
Figure 1-21
Diagram of an ADVIA Centaur XP window
The title bar indicates the task area and the name of the specific window. The
title bar also contains buttons that access window help, move the window
behind other windows, or close the window.
The View, Sort, and Search fields control the amount or type of information
that is displayed, control the order of information displayed, and locate
specific items.
The information display area displays the information that you selected in
View, Sort, and Search fields.
The buttons on the bottom of the window perform actions on all information
in the information display area or in open related windows.
The buttons on the side of the window perform actions or open windows that
provide more information about an item you selected in the information
display area.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-22
Opening and Closing Windows

You can open and close windows as needed to perform system functions and
access information.
To close a window, select the Close button.
To open a window that provides more information about an item in the list,
select a side button with an ellipsis (...).
To open a window that provides related information, select a bottom button.
Moving Windows
When you open multiple windows, you can move the windows to more easily
review information or perform tasks.
To move a window to a new position in the workspace:
Using the touch screen, hold your finger on the window title bar and drag the
window to a new position.
Using the system mouse, position the pointer on the title bar and hold down
the left mouse button while dragging the window to a new position.
Window Elements
Window elements enable you to make selections and interact with the windows.
To move a window behind other open windows, select the Move Back button.
Tables allow you to review information and to select items.
Dropdown lists display options.
Data fields allow you to enter or display information.
Scroll bar arrows scroll the view to display items that are not visible in the list.
You can usually select as many options as required in a table.

A check mark displays next to the selected options.
You can enable 1 item from the group of options using a diamond option
button.
You can turn an option on or off by selecting or deselecting the option.
Online Information
The ADVIA Centaur XP system provides online help and procedures to answer
your questions about operating the system, maintaining the system, and correcting
system problems.
The system also provides online documentation that you can view and print as
necessary.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-23
Accessing Online Help Functions:

When you access online help, you can move the window or change its size to
make it easier to view your workspace window while you read the help. The
online help topic sometimes offers additional information:
To access additional information, select the hypertext link.

A hypertext link, when selected, opens another help window containing more
information on the current topic. In the online help windows, hypertext is blue
and underlined.
To print a help topic or a procedure, select File and then select Print.
To move the help window, select the title bar and drag the window to a new
position.
To resize the window, select the corner of the help window and drag the
corner to resize the window.
Accessing Online Documentation

The online document windows available in the browser are in the following list:
Operators Guide
Customer Bulletins
Assays
Library
For more information about using the online browser, perform the following
steps:
1. At the system view workspace, press the QC icon key on the keyboard.
2. At the applications view workspace, select the Instructions for Use button.
The workspace displays the browser with instructions for using the browser
displayed on the page.
Help
To access help for a window element, place the pointer on field or button and
press the right mouse button. You can also move the cursor to a window element
and press the ? key on the keyboard.
Window Help
Window help provides information about options available at each window and
brief instructions for using the window. To access window help, touch the ?
button in the title bar or select the ? using the mouse.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-24
Maintenance Procedures
To access maintenance procedures, select a maintenance activity at the
Status Maintenance window, and then select Procedure. Refer to Performing
Maintenance page 5-1.
Event Code Procedures

Event code procedures provide brief descriptions and procedures for identifying
and solving system events.
Use the following steps to access event codes:
1. At the workspace window, select the Event Log button.
2. At the System Event Log window, select Procedure.
3. At the online information window, select Search.
4. Enter an event code.
5. Select Find.
6. Select the event code from the list.
Refer to Using the Event Log page 6-1.
Software Maps
Workspace buttons open windows that contain related information and tasks.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-25
System
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-26
Status
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-27
Worklist
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-28
Quality Control, System View
Quality Control, Applications View
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-29
Calibration
Setup, System View Summary
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-30
Setup Test Definition Summary
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-31
Setup, System View Profile Summary and Data

Administration
Setup, Applications View
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-32
Functions, System View
Functions, Applications View RealTime Solutions Service and

IFUs
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-33
Functions, Application View Print
Technology
Chemiluminescence is a chemical reaction that emits energy in the form of
light.15 When used in combination with immunoassay technology, the light
produced by the reaction indicates the amount of analyte in a sample.
Direct chemiluminescent reactions directly measure the light energy without the
use of added steps or amplifying molecules.6 The ADVIA Centaur XP assays use
acridinium ester (AE) as the chemiluminescent label, because AE does not require
the addition of a catalyst or substrate.6
Direct Chemiluminescence
It is easy to automate direct chemiluminescence using AE and provides many
benefits, such as long reagent shelf life, fast reaction time, and assay sensitivity.
The ADVIA Centaur XP assays use the dimethyl form of AE because its stability
allows long reagent shelf life.6,8
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-34
In ADVIA Centaur XP assays, hydrogen peroxide oxidizes AE and maximizes

the light emission by changing the environment from acidic to basic. Oxidation of
AE occurs rapidly, with peak light emission occurring within 1 second. The rapid
reaction time and very low background make direct chemiluminescence with AE
faster than RIA or EIA methods.6,8
1
2
3
4
Light intensity
Seconds
Acridinium ester
Other methods
Figure 1-22
Direct Chemiluminescence Comparison
The AE molecule is much smaller than the alkaline phosphatase molecule used
in EIA assays. This smaller size decreases blockage of binding sites, increases
diffusion rates, and increases the assay sensitivity.8
1
2
Alkaline phosphatase (MW 68,000)

AE (MW 481)
Figure 1-23
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Molecule Comparison
1-35
Antibody Binding Principles

Antibodies are proteins that are produced by the immune system in response
to an antigen. Antibodies are ideal for use in immunoassays because they can be
produced to bind to specific antigens. In immunoassays, the antigen is the analyte
that is being measured.
1
2
3
Antigen
Binding site
Antibody
Figure 1-24
Antibody Binding
AE can be covalently bound to an antibody without altering the ability of the

antibody to bind to an antigen. To measure an antigen, many ADVIA Centaur XP
assays use antibodies that are covalently bound to AE.
Paramagnetic Particles and Magnetic Separation

Paramagnetic particles (PMP) are iron oxide crystals that are attracted to a
magnetic field.7 In the ADVIA Centaur XP assays, PMP coated with antibody or
antigen are called Solid Phase.7 Coated PMP provide approximately 50 times the
reactive surface area of coated tubes or beads.6
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-36
During incubation, coated PMP in the cuvette bind to the target antigen or
antibody. When the system exposes the cuvette to a magnetic field, the magnets
draw the PMP bound to antigen or antibody toward them. While the magnets hold
the PMP in place, the system washes away sample and reagent not bound to the
coated PMP.
1
2
PMP
Antibody
Figure 1-25
Free PMPs
Assay Reaction Formats

The ADVIA Centaur XP system directly measures the amount of light that the
chemiluminescent reaction emits. ADVIA Centaur XP assays use AE as the label
in Lite Reagent and PMP as the Solid Phase. The system uses a variety of formats
to detect antigens as well as antibodies. Refer to the ADVIA Centaur Assay
Manual.
The ADVIA Centaur XP system applies the immunoassay binding principles of
antibodies using several formats:
sandwich format
competitive format
antibody-capture format
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-37
Sandwich Format
Sandwich formats use AE-labeled antibody in the Lite Reagent.
1. The system adds Lite Reagent, containing AE-labeled antibody, to the sample.
The AE-labeled antibody binds specifically to the analyte-specific antigen
in the sample.
1
2
Acridinium ester
Antibody
Figure 1-26
3
4
Analyte-specific antigen in the sample

Other antigens
Sandwich Format
2. The system adds Solid Phase containing PMP that are coated with antibody
specific for the antigen in the sample.
The system incubates the cuvette at 37 C (98.6 F). PMP bind to the antigens
that are bound to AE-labeled antibody.
PMP-Antibody-Antigen-Antibody-AE complex
Figure 1-27
Sandwich Format with Solid Phase
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-38
3. The cuvette is exposed to a magnetic field, which draws PMP toward the
magnets.
While the magnets hold PMP in place, sample and reagent not bound to PMP
are washed away. The cuvette now contains AE bound to antigen, which is
bound to PMP by antibody.
1
2
3
Magnets
PMP-Antibody-Antigen-Antibody-AE complex
Cuvette
Figure 1-28
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Sandwich Format Assay in Cuvette
1-39
4. The System adds acid and base to initiate the chemiluminescent reaction.
The system measures the emission of light in relative light units (RLUs).
When the system quantitates the light produced from the oxidation of AE, the
system calculates the concentration of antigen.
In a sandwich format, the analyte-specific antigen concentration in the
sample and the light emission in RLUs have a direct relationship. If more
analyte-specific antigen molecules are present in the sample, then more AE
is present, and therefore light emission is greater.
1
2
Light emissions (RLUs)

Analyte concentration
Figure 1-29
Sandwich Format Result Analysis
Competitive Format
Competitive formats include:
AE-labeled antigen in the Lite Reagent
AE-labeled antibody in the Lite Reagent
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-40
AE-labeled Antigen
1. The system adds Lite Reagent, containing AE-labeled antigen, and Solid
Phase, containing antibody-labeled PMP, to the sample.
The system incubates the cuvette at 37 C (98.6 F). The AE-labeled antigen
competes with analyte-specific antigen in the sample for limited binding sites
on the antibody, which is bound to PMP.
If more analyte-specific antigen is present in the sample, then less AE-labeled
antigen is bound. Alternatively, if less analyte-specific antigen in the sample
is present, then more AE-labeled antigen is bound.
1
2
Antibody
PMP
Figure 1-30
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3
4

AE-labeled antigen
AE-labeled Antigen
1-41
2. The system exposes the cuvette to a magnetic field, which draws PMP toward
the magnets.
While the magnets hold PMP in place, the system washes away sample and
reagent not bound to PMP. The cuvette now contains analyte-specific antigen
from the sample and AE-labeled antigen bound to PMP by antibody.
1
2
PMP-Antibody-Antigen complex
PMP-Antibody-Antigen-AE complex
Figure 1-31
AE-labeled Antigen in The Cuvette
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-42
3. The system adds Acid and base to initiate the chemiluminescent reaction.
The system measures the emission of light in RLUs. When the system
quantiates the light produced from the oxidation of AE, the system calculates
the concentration of the analyte.
If the sample has a low concentration of analyte-specific antigen, most
binding sites on the antibody are bound to AE-labeled antigen. This causes an
elevated reading of RLUs from the oxidation of AE.
If the sample has a high concentration of analyte-specific antigen, most
binding sites on the antibody are bound to antigen from the sample, and few
sites are bound to AE-labeled antigen. This causes a lower reading of RLUs
from the oxidation
of the AE.
In a competitive assay with AE-labeled antigen, the concentration of antigen
in the sample and the light emission in RLUs have an inverse relationship.
1
2

Figure 1-32
078D1064-01 Rev. C
AE-labeled Format Result Analysis
1-43
AE-labeled Antibody
1. The system adds Lite Reagent, containing AE-labeled antibody, and Solid
Phase, containing antigen-labeled PMP, to the sample.
The system incubates the cuvette at 37 C (98.6 F). Antigen bound to PMP
competes with analyte-specific antigen in the sample for limited binding sites
on AE-labeled antibody.
If the sample has more analyte-specific antigen, then it binds less
PMP-labeled antigen. Alternatively, if the sample has less analyte-specific
antigen, then it binds more PMP-labeled antigen.
1
2
3
AE-labeled antibody
PMP-labeled antigen
Figure 1-33
AE-labeled Antibody
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-44
the magnets.
While the magnets hold PMP in place, the system washes away sample
containing analyte-specific antigen and reagent not bound to PMP.
The cuvette now contains PMP-antigen bound to AE by antibody.
PMP-Antigen-Antibody-AE complex
Figure 1-34
078D1064-01 Rev. C
PMP-antigent-antibody-AE Complex in the Cuvette
1-45
3. The system adds acid and base to initiate the chemiluminescent reaction.
quantitates the light produced from the oxidation of AE, the system calculates
the concentration of analyte.
If the sample has a low concentration of analyte-specific antigen, the
PMP-labeled antigen binds to most binding sites on the antibody. This
causes an elevated reading of RLUs from the oxidation of AE.
If the sample has a high concentration of analyte-specific antigen, the antigen
from the sample binds to most binding sites on the antibody, and few sites are
bound to PMP-labeled antigen. This causes a lower reading of RLUs from the
oxidation of AE.
In a competitive assay with AE-labeled antibody, the concentration of analyte
in the sample and the light emission in RLUs have an inverse relationship.
1
2

Figure 1-35
AE-labeled Antibody Result Analysis
Antibody-capture Format
When the substance being measured in the sample is an antibody, the system uses
the antibody-capture format. The assay uses a reagent containing an additional
antibody that is specifically directed against the antibody in the sample.
Antibody-capture formats are usually characterized by 2 cycles of incubation and
wash. The purpose of the first incubation and wash is to remove excess interfering
substances in the sample. The purpose of the second incubation and wash is to
measure the antibody in the sample.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-46
Antibody-capture assays detect specific IgG antibody or IgM antibody in patient

samples. The following example is an antibody-capture assay that detects human
IgM antibody in a patient sample.
1. The system adds Solid Phase, containing anti-human IgM antibody bound to
PMP, to the sample.
The system incubates the cuvette at 37 C (98.6 F). The IgM antibody in the
sample binds to anti-human IgM antibody bound to PMP.
1
2
Anti-human IgM Antibody bound to PMP

Human IgM Antibody in sample
Figure 1-36
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Antibody-capture Format
1-47
the magnets.
While the magnets hold PMP in place, the system washes away sample and
reagent not bound to PMP. The cuvette now contains IgM antibody from the
sample captured by specific anti-human IgM antibody, which is bound to
PMP.
PMP-Anti-lgM Antibody-IgM complex
Figure 1-37
Antibody-capture Format in the Cuvette
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-48
3. The system adds Lite Reagent, containing AE-labeled antigen, to the cuvette
and incubates it at 37 C (98.6 F).
The AE-labeled antigen binds to the sample IgM antibody in the sample.
AE-labeled antigen
Figure 1-38
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-49
the magnets.
While the magnets hold PMP in place, the system washes away the reagent
not bound to PMP. The cuvette now contains AE-labeled antigen bound to
sample IgM antibody, which is bound to anti-human IgM antibody, bound to
PMP.
PMP-Anti-lgM Antibody-IgM-AE-labeled antigen complex
Figure 1-39
5. The system adds acid and base to initiate the chemiluminescent reaction.
quantitates light produced from the oxidation of the AE, the system calculates
the concentration of the analyte.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1-50
In this example of an antibody-capture assay, the sample concentration and

the light emission have a direct relationship. If more sample IgM antibody is
present, then more AE is present, and therefore the light emission is higher.
1
2

Figure 1-40
Antibody-capture Format Result Analysis
References
1. Whitehead TP, Kricka J, Carter JN, Thorpe G. Analytical luminescence: its
potential in the clinical laboratory. Clin Chem 1979; 25/9: 15311546.
2. Woodhead JS, Campbell AK, McCapra F, Beheshti I, Weeks I. Acridinium
esters as high specific-activity labels in immunoassays. Clin Chem 1983; 29/
8: 147479.
3. Weeks I, Woodhead JS. Chemiluminescence immunoassays. J. Clin
Immunoassay 1984; 7/1: 8289.
4. Patel A, Morton MS, Woodhead JS, Ryall MET, McCapra F, Campbell AK. A
new chemiluminescent label for use in immunoassay. Biochem Soc Trans
1982; 10: 2245.
5. Tietz NW. Fundamentals of clinical chemistry, 3rd ed. Philadelphia: W.B.
Saunders Company, 1987; 1010.
6. Kricka LJ. Chemiluminescence immunoassay. The immunoassay handbook,
1st ed. New York: Stockton Press, 1994; 341343.
7. Dudley R. The immunoassay handbook, 1st ed. New York: Stockton Press,
1994; 161164.
8. Dudley R. Chemiluminescence immunoassay: an alternative to RIA. Lab Med
1990; 21/4; 216221.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Operating the ADVIA Centaur XP System
2 Operating the ADVIA Centaur XP System

Signing into or out of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Managing Sample Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Using Sample Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
Loading Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
ADVIA Centaur Sample Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
Loading Samples Using Laboratory Automation Systems . . . . . 2-6

Verifying Barcode Scanning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
Locating Specific Sample Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
Removing Sample Racks from the Inprocess Queue . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Locating Sample Racks in the Sample Exit Queue . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
Monitoring Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9

Workspace Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Supplies Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
Sample Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13
Exception Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14
Reagent Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15
Primary Reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Ancillary Reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
Maintenance Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Event Log Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18
Replenishing Reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

Loading Reagents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19
Printing the Reagent Loading Report. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Relocating Reagent Packs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20
Managing Primary Reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Loading Primary Reagent Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21
Removing Primary Packs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Managing Ancillary Reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22

Loading Ancillary Reagent Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22
Removing Ancillary Reagent Packs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-23
Replenishing Supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Filling the Water Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24
Emptying the Waste Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-26
Attaching the Waste Bottle Stopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-29
Replacing the Cleaning Solution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-30

Adding Cuvettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31
Adding Sample Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32
Emptying the Sample Tip Waste Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Emptying the Sample Tip Tray Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Emptying the Cuvette Waste Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34
Replacing System Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35
Managing the Worklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38

Viewing the Worklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Opening the Worklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-38
Understanding Worklist Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40
Displaying Calibrator Results at the Worklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42

Suspending Update of the Worklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Rescheduling Samples for Control-bracketed Tests. . . . . . . . . 2-42
Reasons for A Canceled Order. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42
Reasons for Discarded Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Rescheduling Samples with Discarded Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-43
Locating Specific Samples in the Sample Exit Queue . . . . . . . 2-44

Moving Final Results to the Historical Worklist. . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-44
Scheduling Samples Using an LIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45

Automatically Scheduling Samples Using an LIS. . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Loading Samples in Host Query Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45
Manually Requesting a Worklist from an LIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Entering First Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Suspending LIS Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46
Configuring the LIS to Accept Results beyond
the Dose Response Curve Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Scheduling Samples Using an LAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47

Manually Scheduling Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47
Scheduling Patient Samples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48
Scheduling by Rack ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Scheduling Non-barcoded Samples by Rack ID. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49
Scheduling Barcoded Samples by Rack ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50
Handling SID Mismatches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51

Scheduling Patient Samples Using a Hand-Held
Barcode Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Entering Patient Demographics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52

Entering Comments for a Patient Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Scheduling Stat Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53
Scheduling Batches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54
Scheduling Calibrators and QC Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Entering Dilution Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55
Entering Reagent Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Changing the Number of Replicates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Using Control-bracketed Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Scheduling Control Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57
Loading Control Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Scheduling Start-of-bracket and End-of-bracket Tests . . . . . . . . . .2-58

Scheduling Calibrators for a Control-bracketed test . . . . . . . . . . . .2-58
Using Multicomponent Assays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-58

Scheduling Calibrators for a Multicomponent Test . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Scheduling Controls for a Multicomponent Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Scheduling Patient Samples for Multicomponent Tests. . . . . . . . . .2-59
Canceling a Multicomponent Test Using the LIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Repeating a Multicomponent Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-59
Repeating a Component Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Calculating the Multicomponent Result
and Reporting an Interpretation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60
Calculating the Multicomponent Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Interpreting the Multicomponent Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-61
Examples of Multicomponent Test Results
for Component Test Results Outside the Reportable Dose Range . . . . 2-62
Modifying the Worklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63

Selecting Multiple Samples or Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64
Editing Requests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
Modifying a Test for a Request Scheduled by Rack ID . . . . . . . . . .2-65
Deleting Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66
Evaluating the Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-66

Result Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68
Repeating a Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72
Locating Samples that Require Further Attention . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Editing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73
Releasing Results that Are on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74
Releasing Results on Hold. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-75
Sending Results to an LIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76

Sending All Results Except Results On Hold to an LIS . . . . . . . . . .2-76
Sending Selected Results to an LIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-76
Deleting Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-77
Printing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78

Printing Results by Sample. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78
Printing Results by Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79
Resetting the Page Numbers for Runtime Reports . . . . . . . . . 2-80
Printing Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-80
078D1064-01 Rev. C
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Operating the ADVIA Centaur XP System

The ADVIA Centaur XP system accommodates many laboratory environments
and workflow styles. Because of this flexibility, operating the
ADVIA Centaur XP system can be as easy as loading samples, removing samples,
and reviewing system and supply status.
The online help for the ADVIA Centaur XP system also contains the most
commonly used instructions and procedures.
Signing into or out of the System

You must sign in if you need to enter comments or to access areas of the system
that are a different level of security, such as selecting system options or editing
test results.
Use this procedure to sign into the system.
1. At the workspace, select Sign In.
2. Use the Tab key to move to the New Operator field and then enter your
initials.
3. Use the Tab key to move to the Password field and then enter the password, if
necessary.
4. Select Sign In.
The operator ID and security level display on the Sign In button at the
workspace.
Use this procedure to sign out of the system.
1. At the workspace, select Sign In.
2. At the Sign In window, select Sign Out.
The system signs out the current operator and closes the Sign In window.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-2
Managing Sample Racks

CAUTION
Do not interfere with the normal loading movement of sample racks into the
inprocess queue. Interfering with the normal loading movement of the sample
racks can cause sample queue movement errors and sample queue barcode read
errors.
You can load samples on to the system at any time, even while the system
processes samples. The inprocess queue holds up to 16 racks. Before loading
samples ensure that you have met the following conditions:
You are using defined tube types

Refer to Specifications page E-1.
You configured the sample racks for the tube types you are loading.
Refer to Specifying Sample Tube Types page 8-5.
Requests are available for the samples you load.

Refer to Managing the Worklist page 2-38.
You have sufficient sample volume.

Refer to Appendix C, Sample Volume Requirements page C-12.
Using Sample Racks

The ADVIA Centaur XP system has sample racks that can handle multiple tube
types.
The system can also use racks from the ADVIA Centaur system. Refer to
ADVIA Centaur Sample Racks page 2-5.
When you move the Tube-Type Selector to position Athe Auto position
you may use multiple tube types in the rack.
NOTE: You can either remove the tube-type selector or move the tube-type
selector to position A to make the rack available for multiple tube types.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
When the Tube-Type Selector is in position 2, 3, or 4, you can use only the
tube type that corresponds with the tube type you selected in the
Setup Tube-Type & Barcode window.
2-3
ADVIA Centaur XP racks have labels for tube-type selector positions: A, 2, 3,

and 4.
1
2
3
4
Tube-type selector in position A

Sample tube barcode label
Rack barcode
Tube-type positions (A, 2, 3, and 4)
Figure 2-1
Refer to the ADVIA Centaur Assay Manual.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-4
Loading Samples
BIOHAZARD
Wear personal protective equipment. Use universal precautions. Refer to Safety

Instructions page A-1 for recommended precautions when working with
biohazardous materials.
1. If you use sample cups, label them with the appropriate barcode labels and
dispense the sample into the labeled sample cups.
Barcode label
Figure 2-2
Sample tube
2. Position the barcode label vertically on the sample cup approximately 2 cm

(0.8 in) from the top.
3. Move the tube-type selector to the position for the tube type you are loading
in the rack or for multiple tube types.
4. Place the sample tubes or cups in the rack.
5. Ensure that the barcode labels are clearly visible above or between the slots in
the rack.
6. Ensure that the tube-type selector is positioned correctly for a single tube type
or multiple tube types.
CAUTION
Do not manually push a rack into the inprocess queue and do not manually place
sample racks near the entrance to the inprocess queue without using the raised
area of the sample entry queue as a positioning guide. Failure to follow this
instruction can lead to a misread of the sample tube positions in the rack.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-5
7. Load the rack in the sample entry queue.

Ensure that the notch in the rack rests on the raised area of the sample entry
queue.
1
2
Sample entry queue

Sample start button
Figure 2-3
Sample Entry Queue
CAUTION
Do not press the sample start button until you close the primary reagent door and
ensure that all reagent barcodes were read correctly. Starting the system before all
reagent barcodes are read correctly can cause erroneous results. Closing the
primary reagent door allows the system barcode scanner to rescan the reagent
barcodes and acknowledge any changes.
8. If the LED above the Sample Start button is not lit, press the button.
The system moves the rack to the inprocess queue. Refer to Verifying Barcode
Scanning page 2-6.
ADVIA Centaur Sample Racks

When you uses an ADVIA Centaur rack, you can only use only 1 tube type in the
rack. ADVIA Centaur racks display tube-type selector positions 1, 2, 3, and 4.
The position of the Tube-Type Selector corresponds to the tube type selected in
the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window, indicating the tube type that is
currently in the rack.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-6
NOTE: If you remove the Tube-Type Selector, it is the same as moving the
Tube-Type Selector to position 1.
1
2
3
4
Tube-type selector in position 1

Sample tube barcode label
Rack barcode
Tube-type positions (1, 2, 3, and 4)
Figure 2-4
ADVIA Centaur Sample Rack
Loading Samples Using Laboratory Automation

Systems
When you load samples using your laboratory automation system, the
ADVIA Centaur XP system detects samples moving past the back of the system
on a conveyor. The sample probe moves out of the back of the system to aspirate
the samples.
When you enable the laboratory automation system, the system can also process
calibrator, QC, and patient samples that you load into the sample entry queue and
the Stat entry. Refer to Defining LAS Communication Options page 8-56.
Verifying Barcode Scanning

Use the Status Samples window to verify that the system read the sample
barcode of the samples that you load on to the system.
1. At the workspace, select the Sample Status button to open the Status
Samples window.
2. To locate a specific sample or sample rack, select SID or Rack in the
drop-down list.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-7
NOTE: If the system cannot read a rack barcode, the system does not test the
samples, the rack field at the Status Samples window is empty, and the
system ejects the rack.
3. Enter a specific search criterion in Search for.
If the system did not read the barcode, the No Barcode message displays
in the Status column and the system does not test the sample.
If the SID for the tube with the No Barcode status is available (for
example, from a sample loading list) manually enter the tube barcode.
4. To manually enter the SID, select the sample and then select Enter SID.
Locating Specific Sample Information

You can locate specific information by using the appropriate View and Sort
combination:
1. At the workspace, select the Sample Status button.
2. To locate a specific sample or sample rack, select SID or Rack in the
drop-down list.
a. Select a View to determine the samples that the system displays.
For example, if you select Inprocess Queue, the system displays the
samples in the inprocess queue. The Lab Automation Queue view is only
available when lab automation is enabled. Refer to Defining LAS
Communication Options page 8-56.
b. Select a Sort to determine the order in which the system displays the
samples.
For example, if you select SID, the system sorts and displays the samples
in ascending SID order.
The following table describes the View and Sort combinations you can use to
perform some routine tasks:
Task
View
Sort
Display samples that have error messages
Inprocess Queue
Errors
Display samples in chronological order of when the

system scanned the barcode
Inprocess Queue
Scanned
Display samples in ascending alphanumeric order

by sample identifier
Inprocess Queue
SID
Display samples in ascending order by rack

identifier
Inprocess Queue
Rack
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-8
Removing Sample Racks from the Inprocess Queue

You can schedule removal of a sample rack without completing sample aspiration
for the scheduled tests, or after sample aspiration for the scheduled tests is
completed.
1. At the Status Samples window, select the sample.
2. Select Remove Rack.
3. When prompted, select Complete or Now.
If you want the system . . .
Then select . . .
to finish sample aspiration for the tests in the rack, and then
remove the rack
Complete
to cancel sample aspiration for the tests in the rack and

remove the rack as soon as possible
Now
NOTE: If you select Now, the system may not eject the sample rack
immediately. The system schedules the rack for ejection and ejects the rack
during the next available cycle. This may cause a slight delay before the
system ejects the sample rack into the sample exit queue.
If sampling stopped due to a problem with the sample tip loader, sample probe, or
a fluid sensor, remove the sample racks from the inprocess queue using diagnostic
tools. Refer to Using Diagnostic Tools.
Locating Sample Racks in the Sample Exit Queue

You can locate specific sample racks in the exit queue. You can access the Status
Exit Queue window from the Status Samples window or the Worklist
Summary window:
1. At the workspace, select 1 of the following options:
Select the Sample Status button to open the Status Samples window.
Select Worklist and then select Summary to open the Worklist

Summary window.
2. Select Exit Queue to open the Status Exit Queue window.

Use the Status Exit Queue window to locate and determine the status of
samples in the sample exit queue.
View the rack position indicators to determine the approximate location in

the exit queue of the 24 most recently ejected sample racks.
View the exit queue table to determine status of the 48 most recently
ejected sample racks.
3. If a flag is associated with the sample and the sample matches a worklist
request, select the sample and then select Result Details for more
information.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-9
NOTE: If you select the Exit Queue button at the Worklist Summary
window with a specific sample or test selected in the worklist table, the
Status Exit Queue window opens and displays the sample rack position.
NOTE: If you select the Exit Queue button at the Worklist Summary
window with no sample or test selected in the worklist table, the Status Exit
Queue window opens with no sample rack position selected.
Monitoring Status
The system tracks the status of supplies, samples, QC exceptions, reagents,
maintenance, and events and alerts you if a system area needs attention. Using the
status buttons on the workspace, you can monitor the status of the different system
areas.
Workspace Status Area

The Workspace Status buttons are only available in the System View. Refer to
Status Buttons page 1-18.
The system provides 2 visible status indicatorsthe status buttons and the visible
status lightto alert you when the system needs attention.
The status buttons and the visible status light change color from neutral to yellow
or red to indicate that the system requires attention.
Yellow indicates that a warning condition exists, such as a low supply.
Red indicates that a critical condition exists, such as an empty supply.

A critical condition can cause the system to stop aspirating or processing
samples.
The status buttons blink to indicate that a new condition has occurred since the
last time you reviewed that status window.
You can also select an audible alarm to complement the visual indicators. Refer to
Defining Alarms page 8-46.
The status area also displays the current date, time, and state of the system. The
status area can display the following system states:
System State
Description
Ready
The system is ready to process samples.
Inprocess
The system is processing samples.
Cleaning
The system is performing the daily or monthly cleaning or

priming.
Warming Up
The system is restarted. The thermals are equilibrating to the

correct temperature.
Diagnostics
You opened the System Diagnostic Tools window.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-10
System State
Description
Mechanics Off
You selected Turn System Mechanics Off in the System Status

menu. Power is removed from the robotics.
Check Status
The system is not able to process samples because of a critical

condition such as depleted supplies or a system error.
Cleaning Failed
The daily or monthly cleaning is incomplete. You must restart

the cleaning procedure at the Status Maintenance window.
System Status
Use System Status to monitor the condition of the system and determine which
area of the system needs attention.
To open the System Status window, at the workspace select the System Status
button and then select System Status in the menu.
Do not allow the system to remain in the Inprocess state or the Check Status state
for longer than 2 hours without processing samples. Refer to Managing
Nonsampling System Status page 6-15.
Areas change color to indicate they require your attention. Select the area to
obtain more detailed information.
Select the area to obtain more detailed information. For example, if the
cleaning solution is low, the color of the Supplies Status button and the
cleaning solution area changes to yellow. If an error occurs in the cuvette
loading area that causes the system to stop, the Event Log button and the
cuvette loading area change to red.
When you position the pointer over an area, the system displays the name of
the area.
You can select a button to obtain more detailed information on the status of
supplies, reagents, samples, maintenance, and the various subsystems.
Supplies Status
Use Supplies Status to monitor the level of system supplies. At the workspace,
the Supplies Status button changes color to indicate the status of system supplies:
Yellow indicates that the system is using the reserve.

The main supply is removed, the supply is depleted, or the waste is more than
80% full or using the reserve.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Red indicates that a supply and its reserve are depleted, the waste and its
reserve are full, or an error condition occurs.
2-11
Select the Supplies Status button to open the Status Supplies window and
determine which supply needs attention. The system does not start if a supply
status is yellow. The system stops processing samples if a supply status is red.
The system displays status messages in the field below the supply name. For a
description of the status messages for each supply and the procedure for
replenishing the supply, move the pointer to the supply field and select the
help (?) button.
The system displays these messages on the Status Supplies window:
Supply Area
Message
Color
Description
Cuvettes
OK
Neutral
At least 1 cuvette is available.
No Cuvette
Detected
Red
The cuvette supply is depleted or an

error in cuvette loading occurred and the
system stopped sampling.
OK
Neutral
At least 120 sample tips are available.
< 120 Tips
Yellow
Less than 120 sample tips are available.
Depleted
Red
No sample tips are available and the

system stopped sampling.
OK
Neutral
The bin is less than 80% full.
> 80% Full
Yellow
The bin is more than 80% full.
Not Present
Yellow
The bin was removed. The system is

using the reserve.
Sampling
Stopped
Red
The system stopped sampling because

the cuvette bin is full.
Full
Red
The bin is full.
OK
Neutral
The bin is less than 80% full.
> 80% Full
Yellow
The bin is more than 80% full.
Not Present
Yellow
The bin was removed. The system is

using the reserve.
Sampling
Stopped
Red

the tip bin is full.
Full
Red
The bin is full.
OK
Neutral
The waste area is less than 80% full.
> 80% Full
Yellow
The waste area is more than 80% full.
Sampling
Stopped
Red

the waste area is full and the current tip
tray is empty.
OK
Neutral
The bottle is present and has enough

space to continue testing.
Tips
Cuvette Waste
Tip Waste
Tip Tray Waste
Liquid Waste
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-12
Supply Area
Water
Acid, Base
Wash 1 and
Wash 3
Cleaning
Solution
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Message
Color
Description
Not Present,
Using
Reserve
Yellow
The bottle was removed. The system is

using the reserve.
Full, Using
Reserve
Yellow
The bottle is full. The system is using

the reserve.
Sampling
Stopped
Red

the reserve is almost full.
OK
Neutral
The bottle is present and contains

enough fluid to continue testing.
Not Present,
Using
Reserve
Yellow

using the reserve.
Sampling
Stopped
Red

the reserve is almost empty.
OK
Neutral

Not Present,
Using
Reserve
Yellow

using the reserve.
Present,
Using
Reserve
Yellow
The bottle is empty. The system is using

the reserve.
Sampling
Stopped
Red

the reserve is almost empty.
Reserve
Depleted
Red

the bottle and the reserve are empty.
OK
Neutral

Not Present,
Using
Reserve
Yellow

using the reserve.
Present,
Using
Reserve
Yellow
The bottle is empty. The system is using

the reserve.
Sampling
Stopped
Red
The system stopped sampling any test

that uses this solution because the
reserve is almost empty.
Reserve
Depleted
Red
The bottle and the reserve are empty.

The system stopped sampling any test
that uses this solution.
OK
Neutral

enough fluid to clean the system.
Supply Area
2-13
Message
Color
Description
Low
Yellow
The bottle does not contain enough fluid

to clean the system.
Not Present
Yellow
The bottle was removed. The system

cannot perform the cleaning procedure.
Sample Status
Use Sample Status to monitor the samples that are loaded on the system. At the
workspace, the Sample Status button changes color to indicate the status of
samples that are in the inprocess queue and the lab automation queue:
Yellow indicates that testing for a sample is not complete because of a

problem with a sample.
Red indicates that testing for all samples in a sample rack is not complete
because of a problem with the sample rack barcode label.
Select the Sample Status button to open the Status Samples window and review
the status of the samples in the inprocess queue and the lab automation queue.
NOTE: The Lab Automation Queue view is only available when lab automation
is enabled. Refer to Defining LAS Communication Options page 8-56.
The following messages indicate the status of a sample:

Message
Color
Description
Aspirated
Neutral
All tests for this sample are aspirated.
Clot
Detected
Yellow
The system detected a clot in the.sample probe. Check

the sample for clots.
Incomplete
Cal Set
Yellow
One of the calibrator levels is not loaded on the system.

Ensure that both the high calibrator and the low calibrator
are loaded.
Incomplete
Set
Yellow
The complete set of controls for this control-bracketed test

is not loaded on the system in the same rack.
This message can apply to start-of-bracket or
end-of-bracket controls. Ensure that all of the controls
specified at the Test Definition window are loaded on the
system in 1 rack.
Insufficient
Yellow
Not enough sample volume exists for the requested tests.
Integrity
Error
Yellow
The system detected an irregular sample aspiration.

Check the sample for bubbles or foam, or check the
sample probe tubing and tip-probe connection for leaks.
When you perform multiple tests on a patient sample, if
the sample produces an integrity error, all tests for that
sample are flagged with the integrity error flag.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-14
Message
Color
Description
LIS Query
Pending
Yellow
A request to the LIS from the system for a worklist entry is

pending.
No Barcode
Yellow
The system did not read the sample barcode. Select the
sample and then select Enter SID to manually enter the
SID.
No Bracket
Yellow
This message applies to control-bracketed tests only. The

system cannot process this sample at this time because the
start-of-bracket controls were not processed or at least 1 of
the control results is unacceptable.
The system processes the sample after the start-of-bracket
controls are processed and produce acceptable results.
No Request
Yellow
The system does not have any test requests for the sample.
Schedule tests at your LIS or at the Worklist Schedule
window.
If you use a non-Siemens barcode label for kit controls in a
control-bracketed test, the system does not recognize the
control samples and displays the No Request flag.
Removal
Pending
Neutral
You requested this sample rack or tube to be removed from

the system. The system removes the rack or tube when
sample aspiration is complete.
NOTE: If you are at the Lab Automation Queue view,
Removal Pending refers to removing a sample tube instead
of a rack.
SID
Mismatch
Yellow
This message displays only when the system identifies

samples by Rack and the system detects an inconsistency
in the SID of the sample tube barcode label. For example,
the SID Mismatch message displays if you schedule a
patient sample with an SID at a specific rack and rack
position, the system aspirates that sample, and then you
schedule another sample with a different SID at the same
rack and rack position.
Verify that the sample tube is in the correct position in the
rack.
Refer to Verifying Barcode Scanning page 2-6.
Exception Status
Selecting this button displays a message directing you to the applications view
and ADVIA QC.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-15
Reagent Status
Use Reagent Status to monitor the status of primary and ancillary reagents on
the system. The Reagent Status button changes to yellow to indicate that a reagent
pack cannot be used.
Select the Reagent Status button to open the status window of the reagent that
requires attention or to open the Worklist Reagent Inventory window.
If . . .
Then . . .
a primary reagent needs attention or if no

reagent needs attention,
the system displays the Status Primary

Reagent window.
an ancillary reagent needs attention
the system displays the Status Ancillary

Reagent window
a reagent pack is not onboard or is below

the defined reagent warning counts for
tests requested in the current worklist
the system displays the

Worklist Reagent Inventory window
a primary reagent and an ancillary reagent

need attention

Status Primary Reagent window and the
Status Ancillary Reagent window
a primary reagent needs attention and a

reagent pack is not onboard or is below

Status Primary Reagent window and the
Worklist Reagent Inventory window
an ancillary reagent needs attention and a

reagent pack is not onboard or is below

Status Ancillary Reagent window and
the Worklist Reagent Inventory window
a primary reagent and an ancillary reagent

need attention, and a reagent pack is not
onboard or is below the defined reagent
warning counts for tests requested in the
current worklist

Status Primary Reagent window, the
Status Ancillary Reagent window, and
the Worklist Reagent Inventory window
Primary Reagents
If a primary reagent requires attention or if no reagent requires attention when you
select the Reagent Status button, the system displays the Status Primary reagent
window.
Pack indicators change color to indicate if a pack is available for use.

The numbers on the pack indicators and the table correspond to the spaces in
the primary reagent compartment.
The system displays Status messages for each reagent pack that requires
attention.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-16
An ellipsis (. . .) after a status message indicates that more than 1 status

message exists.
Select Details to display information about the pack.
The following messages indicate the status of a reagent:
Message
Color
Description
Cal Due
Neutral
The calibration interval for the test expires within 24 hours

or within 25% of the calibration interval, whichever is
shorter. Schedule a calibration at the Worklist Schedule
window. You can waive a calibration with a Due status at
the Calibration Summary window if Waive Cal is
selected at the Test Calibration window.
Cal Expired
Yellow
The calibration for the reagent lot expired.

Schedule a calibration at the Worklist Schedule window.
You can waive an expired calibration at the
Calibration Summary or Calibration Data windows if
Waive Cal is selected at the Test Calibration window.
Cal Required
Yellow
No valid calibration exists for the reagent lot. Schedule a

calibration at the Worklist Schedule window.
NOTE: If the system posts an inappropriate Cal Required
flag, move the reagent pack to another location or load a
new reagent pack. After the system reads the pack
information, it automatically removes the flag.
Check Lot
Numbers
Yellow
The test requires a specific primary reagent, ancillary

reagent, and calibrator lot combination. Ensure that you
use primary reagent, ancillary reagent, and calibrators
from kits with the same lot number.
Depleted
Yellow
The reagent pack is empty.
Lot Expired
Yellow
The reagent lot expired. Load a new lot of reagent. If

necessary, define a Master Curve for the new reagent lot at
the Calibration Master Curve Definition window.
Low Reagent
Yellow
The total number of tests (primary reagent) or milliliters

(ancillary reagent) for all onboard packs is equal to or less
than the Reagent Warning Counts you entered at the
Setup Additional Options window. This message only
displays at the Worklist Reagent Inventory window.
No Ancillary
Yellow
The test requires an ancillary reagent. Load the appropriate

ancillary reagent.
No Barcode
Yellow
The system cannot read the barcode for the reagent pack.
The system opens the Status Enter Primary Barcodes
window at which you can enter the barcode.
No Master
Curve
Yellow
No Master Curve exists for the reagent lot. Define

a Master Curve at the Calibration Master Curve
Definition window and then schedule a calibration
at the Worklist Schedule window.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-17
Message
Color
Description
No Optional
Diluent
Neutral
An optional diluent for this test is present. If you want

to perform dilutions, load the appropriate diluent.
No Required
Diluent
Yellow
This test requires a diluent. Load the appropriate diluent.
No Test
Definition
Yellow
No test definition exists for the test.
Not Onboard
Yellow
Samples are scheduled for this test and no reagent packs

are loaded. This message only displays at the
Worklist Reagent Inventory window.
Pack Inactive
Neutral
The pack is inactivated. At the Status Primary Reagent

window, you can activate the pack by selecting the pack
and then selecting Activate Pack. If you want to specify
that the system use an inactive pack for a particular
calibrator, control, or patient sample, you can select an
inactive pack at the Worklist Reagent Options window.
Removable
Neutral
You selected Remove Pack at the Status Primary

Reagent window. You can remove the pack now.
Removal
Pending
Neutral
You requested to remove this pack. After the system

completes the tests that use this pack, the system notifies
you that you can remove this pack.
Reposition
Neutral
The reagent pack is not positioned for optimal result

throughput. You can improve result throughput by moving
the pack to the location in the primary reagent
compartment indicated by the arrow and the color on the
reagent pack.
Stability
Expired
Yellow
The reagent pack exceeds the stability date. Replace the

reagent pack.
Test Inactive
Neutral
The test is inactivated. At the Status Primary Reagent

window, you can activate the test by selecting a pack
for the test and then selecting Activate Test. All packs
loaded for this test display this status message.
Verify
Stability
Neutral
The reagent pack exceeds the stability date. The system

uses the reagent for testing because you selected Use
Beyond for this test at the Test Definition window.
NOTE: The manufacturer has set some prove wash
reagents to Use Beyond in the test definition and you
cannot change it. If you do not want to run these reagents
beyond their stability, remove and discard them when the
system displays the Verify Stability status.
Ancillary Reagents
If an ancillary reagent requires attention and you select the Reagent Status button,
the Status Ancillary Reagent window is displayed.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-18
The following messages indicate the status of a reagent:

Message
Color
Description
Depleted
Yellow
The reagent pack is empty.
Lot Expired
Yellow
The reagent lot expired. Load a new lot of reagent.
No Test
Definition
Yellow
No test definition exists for the test.
Removal
Pending
Neutral
You requested to remove this pack. After the system

completes the tests scheduled for this pack, the system
ejects the pack.
Stability
Expired
Yellow
The reagent pack exceeded the stability date.
Verify
Stability
Neutral
The reagent pack exceeded the stability date. The system

uses the reagent for testing because you selected Use
Beyond for this test at the Test Definition window.
Maintenance Status
Use Maintenance Status to monitor maintenance activities and automated
procedures. At the workspace, the Maintenance Status button changes color
to indicate the status of maintenance:
Yellow indicates that a maintenance activity is due or overdue.
Red indicates that an automated maintenance procedure did not complete.
Select the Maintenance Status button to display the Status Maintenance window
and display the procedures that require attention.
In the Schedule view, the date column displays the date the activity is due.
In the Log view, the date column displays the date the activity was completed.
The ADVIA Centaur XP system monitors maintenance activities and notifies you
when a scheduled activity is due. The system provides a maintenance schedule for
you to record the completion of scheduled maintenance activities. The system
then uses this information to automatically update the maintenance schedule with
the next time the activity is due. Refer to Defining Maintenance Activities
page 5-3.
Event Log Status

Use Event Log Status to monitor the events that occur on the system. At the
workspace, the Event Log button changes color to notify you of a system warning
or critical condition:
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Yellow indicates that a system warning condition occurred.
2-19
The system continues to operate but requires your attention.
Red indicates that a system critical condition occurred.

The system stops and requires your attention.
Select the Event Log Status button to open the Status Event Log window to
review system events and resolve system problems.
Find events you want to review by selecting a view and then sorting the event log
using selected criteria, such as date or severity.
Select Details to display additional information about the selected event.
Select Comments to display or add comments.
Select Procedures to access online procedures for troubleshooting events.
The ADVIA Centaur XP system monitors system events and notifies you when an
error condition occurs. Refer to Using the Event Log page 6-1.
Replenishing Reagents
You manually mix the primary packs and load them on the reagent holders in the
primary reagent compartment, which stores the reagents at 4 to 8C (39 to
46F). The primary reagent shelf mixes the packs to keep the reagents in
suspension. The arrow indicator and color on each pack indicate where you can
load the packs to optimize sample throughput. Refer to Appendix C, Handling
Reagents, in the ADVIA Centaur Assay Manual.
Each ancillary pack contains 1 ancillary reagent. The system tracks the volume in
the pack. Refer to the ADVIA Centaur Assay Manual. Some ancillary packs are
customer-fillable packs.
Loading Reagents
You can monitor the volumes of primary and ancillary reagents using the
Worklist Reagent Inventory window. To open the Worklist Reagent Inventory
window from the workspace, perform the following steps:
1. Select Worklist.
2. Select Reagent Inventory.
The Worklist Reagent Inventory window fields display reagent information:
The Available column displays the total amount of shared reagent that is
onboard and available.
The Shortage column displays the amount of reagent needed to complete the
scheduled tests.
The Status column displays the primary reagent status and the ancillary
reagent status.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-20
Inventory for primary reagents is expressed in number of tests. Inventory for

ancillary reagents, diluents, and ancillary wash solutions is expressed in
milliliters.
Do not add reagent to reagent packs. Each reagent pack contains enough
reagent to process a predetermined number of tests. Each time the system accesses
a reagent pack, reagent volume inventory tracks the amount of reagent used. The
system does not recognize additional fluid placed in a reagent pack.
NOTE:
If you have multiple systems in your laboratory, record the following information
before you move a reagent pack from 1 system to another:
the number of tests remaining in a primary reagent pack
the stability information that displays at the Status Primary Pack Details
window
the volume remaining in an ancillary reagent pack
the stability information that displays at the Status Ancillary Pack Details
window
Enter this information in the appropriate fields at the Status Primary Pack
Details window and the Status Ancillary Pack Details window when you load
the reagents on a different system.
Printing the Reagent Loading Report

The reagent loading report lists the types and quantities of reagents required to
perform testing for an existing worklist and is designed to help the operator load
and unload reagents to support the worklist.
1. At the workspace, select Print.
2. Select Report Options.
3. At the Print Report Options window, select Reagent Loading Report.
4. Select Print Report.
Relocating Reagent Packs

If you have multiple systems in your laboratory, record the following information
before you move a reagent pack from 1 system to another:
the number of tests remaining in a primary reagent pack
the stability information that displays at the Status Primary Pack Details
window
the volume remaining in an ancillary reagent pack
the stability information that displays at the Status Ancillary Pack Details
window
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-21
Enter this information in the appropriate fields at the Status Primary Pack
Details window and the Status Ancillary Pack Details window when you load
the reagents on a different system.
Managing Primary Reagents

At the workspace, select the Reagent Status button to open the Status Primary
Reagent window. The pack indicators at the top of the Status Primary Reagent
window correlate to the LEDs on the primary reagent door. The LEDs and the
pack indicators turn green or blink to indicate if a pack is available or if the system
read the barcode:
Green indicates that the pack should not be removed when the system is
inprocess because the system may be using that pack.
Blinking green indicates that the system detected that a pack is present but
cannot read the pack barcode.
The system automatically opens the Status Enter Primary Barcodes window.
If . . .
Then . . .
the displayed pack barcode information is correct,
select Save.
no pack barcode information is displayed or the

information is not correct,
enter the correct pack barcode

and select Save.
Neutral indicates that the pack can be removed because the system is not
using that pack or that no pack is loaded in that position.
You can select a pack indicator to display information about the reagent pack in
that position. The colors underneath the pack indicator denote the type of pack
loaded in that pack position. The number in the Status column indicates the
number of tests available in the pack.
Loading Primary Reagent Packs

1. Manually mix the primary packs and load them on the reagent holders in the
primary reagent compartment.
The primary reagent compartment stores the reagents at 4 to 8C

(39 to 46F).
The primary reagent shelf mixes the packs to keep the reagents in
suspension.
The arrow indicator and color on each pack indicate where you can load
the packs to optimize sample throughput.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-22
2. Close the primary reagent door.

CAUTION
3. Press the sample start button for the system barcode scanner to rescan the
reagent barcodes and acknowledge any reagent changes.
Refer to Appendix C, Handling Reagents, in the ADVIA Centaur XP Assay
Manual.
Removing Primary Packs

Before disposing of a reagent, refer to the ADVIA Centaur Assay Manual
to identify any warnings or special instructions that may apply.
NOTE:
1. At the Status Primary Reagent window, select the reagent pack.

2. Select Remove Pack.
3. When prompted, select Complete or select Now.
Then . . .
to complete tests scheduled for the pack,
Select Complete.
to discontinue using the pack without completing the tests,
Select Now.
CAUTION
Do not remove a primary pack when the system is inprocess if the LED on the
primary reagent door is green. Removing a primary pack when the system is
inprocess and the LED is green can cause erroneous results and mechanical
damage to the system. Wait until the LED is neutral before you remove the
primary pack.
When the status changes to Removable and the LED changes to neutral, remove
the reagent pack.
Managing Ancillary Reagents

Each ancillary pack contains 1 cancillary reagent. The system tracks the volume
in the pack. For information about ancillary reagent stability, refer to the
ADVIA Centaur Assay Manual. Some ancillary packs are customer-fillable packs.
Loading Ancillary Reagent Packs

Load the ancillary pack in the ancillary reagent entry with the barcoded side
facing outward.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-23
An LED next to the ancillary reagent entry turns green to indicate that the pack is
loading. The front edge of the pack fits in the notch on the ancillary entry pusher.
The system moves the pack into the ancillary reagent compartment.
1
2
3
LEDs
Ancillary reagent entry
Ancillary pack displaying barcode
Figure 2-5
Ancillary Reagent Entry Queue
Removing Ancillary Reagent Packs

Before disposing of a reagent, refer to the ADVIA Centaur Assay Manual
to identify any warnings or special instructions that may apply.
NOTE:
If you eject an ancillary pack when the system is in the Diagnostics state,
perform the Remove Pack procedure to enable the system to update reagent status.
If you do not perform this procedure, the system does not record the removed
pack and it may cause pack depletion calculation errors.
NOTE:
1. At the Status Ancillary Reagent window, select an ancillary pack.

2. Select Remove Pack.
3. When prompted, select Complete or select Now.
Then . . .
to complete tests scheduled for the pack,
Select Complete
to eject the pack without completing the tests,
Select Now
The system ejects the pack into the ancillary reagent entry. An LED next to
the ancillary reagent entry turns orange to indicate that the pack is exiting
the system.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-24
4. Remove the pack from the ancillary reagent entry.

If the system is not processing samples, you can remove ancillary reagent
packs from the ancillary queue using diagnostic tools. Refer Emptying the
Ancillary Queue page 6-77.
Replenishing Supplies
You can select the Supplies Status button at the workspace to open the Status
Supplies window and review the status of supplies. Refer to Supplies Status
page 2-10.
You can also move the pointer to the supply field and press the help (?) button
on the pointing device for a description of the status messages for each supply
and the procedure for replenishing each supply.
The system has the following capacity for supplies:
Supply
Capacity
Cuvettes
1000 cuvettes
Tips
840 tips
Cuvette Waste
700 cuvettes
Tip Tray Waste
8 trays
Tip Waste
1000 tips
Liquid Waste
7.5 L
Water
10.0 L
Acid
1500 mL
Base
1500 mL
Wash 1
2500 mL
Wash 3
2500 mL
Cleaning Solution
2100 mL
Filling the Water Bottle

You can fill the water bottle any time, even while the system processes samples.
You do not need to use this procedure if your system is directly plumbed to a
water source.
1. Remove the water bottle:
a. Pull out the waste and water drawer.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-25
b. Open the water bottle lid.
1
2
3
4
5
Waste and water drawer

Water tubing
Water bottle lid
Cap
Water bottle
Figure 2-6
Waste and Water Assembly
CAUTION
Do not grasp the tubing when disconnecting the tubing from the top of the
water bottle or reservoir. Pulling the tubing can cause crimps. Grasp the
fittings, not the tubing.
c. Disconnect the water tubing from the water bottle and then set the tubing
on lint-free tissues or gauze to absorb drips.
d. Lift the water bottle up and out.
2. Remove the cap.
3. Fill the spare, clean water bottle with fresh reagent water and install the cap.
Refer to Reagent Water Quality page C-4.
4. Install the spare, full water bottle:
a. Place the water bottle in the waste and water drawer.
b. Connect the water bottle tubing to the bottle.
A blue spiral wrap designates this tubing.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-26
c. Lower the water bottle lid.

d. Push in the waste and water drawer.
Emptying the Waste Bottle

You can empty the waste bottle anytime, even while the system processes
samples. You do not need to use this procedure if your system is directly plumbed
to a drain.
1. Remove the waste bottle:
b. Lift the waste bottle lid.
BIOHAZARD

Disconnect the tubing from the top of the waste bottle and then set the tubing on
lint-free tissues or gauze.
c. Move the clamp on the sensor aside, remove the sensor from the waste
bottle.
d. Wipe the sensor using lint-free tissues or gauze.
Sensor tip
Figure 2-7
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Water and Waste Bottles
2-27
e. Set the sensor on lint-free tissues or gauze.

2. Insert the Waste Bottle Stopper into the sensor and tubing openings.
1
2
3
4
5
Waste bottle
Sensor clamp
Sensor opening
Waste bottle stopper
Tubing opening
Figure 2-8
Waste Bottle Stopper
3. Remove the waste bottle from the waste and water drawer.
4. Empty the waste bottle:
a. At the location in your laboratory designated for waste disposal, loosen
the waste bottle cap.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-28
b. Turn the waste bottle valve counterclockwise to open it.
Waste bottle valve
Figure 2-9
Waste Bottle
c. Close the waste bottle valve, ensuring that the waste bottle valve is closed
completely.
d. Tighten the waste bottle cap.
5. Replace the waste bottle:
a. Install the waste bottle in the drawer.
b. Remove the waste bottle stopper.
c. Clean the stopper using lint-free tissues or gauze and cleaning solution.
d. Replace the stopper under the waste bottle handle.
Refer to Attaching the Waste Bottle Stopper page 2-29.
e. Install the sensor and move the clamp to cover the sensor.
f.
Connect the tubing to the waste bottle.

An orange spiral wrap designates this tubing.
g. Lower the waste bottle lid.

6. Push in the waste and water drawer.
7. When prompted, verify the waste bottle tubing is reconnected.
8. Select Continue.
9. Close the waste and water drawer.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-29
Attaching the Waste Bottle Stopper

This procedure is only applicable when installing or replacing a waste
NOTE:
stopper.
1. Open the waste and water drawer.
2. Lift the waste bottle lid to expose the waste bottle handle.
1
2
3
4
Waste bottle handle

Waste bottle stopper
Waste bottle lid
Cable tie
Figure 2-10
Waste Bottle Stopper Cable Tie
3. Thread the cable tie through the hole on the Waste Bottle stopper.
4. Wrap the cable tie around the handle of the waste bottle.
5. Insert the tip of the tie into the cable tie lock.
Adjust the tie as necessary. Do not secure the cable tie too tight. The stopper
needs to move freely around the handle and be able to reach the tubing and
sensor openings.
NOTE: The cable tie cannot be adjusted after you lock it.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-30
Replacing the Cleaning Solution

You can replace cleaning solution at any time, except when the system is
performing the daily cleaning procedure or an aspirate or reagent probe cleaning
procedure. Cleaning solution is stable for 7 days after preparation.
WARNING
Do not handle cleaning solution without wearing protective equipment, including

gloves, laboratory coat, and safety glasses or protective face shield.
1. Open the sample tip waste area door.
2. Remove the cleaning solution bottle:
a. Pull out the drawer and the cleaning solution bottle.
b. Lift the lid.
1
2
3
4
Lid
Sample tip waste area door
Cleaning solution bottle
Drawer
Figure 2-11
Cleaning Solution Cabinet
c. Remove the bottle.

3. Empty any cleaning solution from the bottle.
NOTE: Use ADVIA Centaur XP Cleaning Solution to achieve optimum
assay and system performance. Do not use other cleaning solutions.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-31
4. Prepare the cleaning solution:

a. Carefully pour a container of ADVIA Centaur XP Cleaning Solution
concentrate into the cleaning solution bottle.
b. Fill the bottle with reagent water up to the bottom rim of the opening.
5. Install the bottle on the system.
6. Lower the lid onto the bottle, ensuring that the tubing is in the bottle.
7. Push in the drawer.
8. Close the sample tip waste area door.
9. If you did not empty the sample tip waste bin, select No at the prompt.
Adding Cuvettes
You can fill the cuvette loading bin any time, even while the system processes
samples.
1. Open the supplies access cover.
1
2
Supplies access cover

Cuvette loading bin
Figure 2-12
ADVIA Centaur XP Cuvette Loading Bin
CAUTION
Do not leave the top cover open when you add cuvettes to the cuvette loading bin.
Leaving the top cover open allows cuvettes to fall into another part of the system
where it may obstruct normal operation. Close the top cover when adding cuvettes
to the cuvette loading bin.
2. Load the cuvettes in the cuvette loading bin.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-32
3. Close the supplies access cover.
Adding Sample Tips

You can load sample tips any time, even while the system processes samples.
1. Open the supplies access cover.
2. Remove the protective cover from the bottom of the sample tip tray bundle.
1
2
3
Supplies access cover

Tab
Protective cover
Figure 2-13
ADVIA Centaur XP Tip Tray Loading Area
3. Install the sample tip trays, ensuring that the tab is facing you and that the
notches in the trays are on the right.
4. Pull the tab to release the strap from the trays and then remove the strap.
5. Close the supplies access cover.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-33
Emptying the Sample Tip Waste Bin

You can empty the bin any time, even while the system processes samples.
Sample tips are collected in a reservoir while the bin is removed from the system.
The reservoir holds enough tips for approximately 5 minutes of operation.
BIOHAZARD

1. Open the sample tip waste area door.
2. Pull the sample tip waste bin toward you.
3. Remove the sample tip waste bin.
1
2
Cleaning solution cabinet door

Sample tip waste bin
Figure 2-14
4. Dispose of the contents of the liner into a container approved for

biohazardous waste.
NOTE: The liners for the cuvette waste bin and the sample tip waste bin are
not interchangeable. Ensure that the sample tip waste bin liner is installed in
the sample tip waste bin.
5. If the liner is damaged, install a new liner.
6. Install the sample tip waste bin, ensuring that the bin is pushed in completely.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-34
Emptying the Sample Tip Tray Waste

You can empty the sample tip tray waste any time, even while the system
processes samples.
1. Open the cuvette waste area door.
2. Remove the sample tip trays.
Sample tip tray waste area
Figure 2-15
Cuvette and Sample Tip Tray Waste Area
3. Dispose of the contents into a waste container.

4. Close the cuvette waste area door.
Emptying the Cuvette Waste Bin

You can empty the bin any time, even while the system processes samples.
Cuvettes are collected in a reservoir while the bin is removed from the system.
The reservoir holds enough cuvettes for approximately 5 minutes of operation.
BIOHAZARD

078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-35
2. Pull the cuvette waste bin toward you.

3. Remove the cuvette waste bin.
Cuvette waste bin
Figure 2-16
Cuvette Waste Cabinet
4. Dispose of the contents of the bin into a container approved for biohazardous
waste.
NOTE: The liners for the cuvette waste bin and the sample tip waste bin are
not interchangeable. Ensure that the cuvette waste bin liner is installed in the
cuvette waste bin.
5. If the liner is damaged, install a new liner.
6. Install the cuvette waste bin, ensuring that the bin is pushed in completely.
7. Close the cuvette waste area door.
Replacing System Fluids

Replace Acid Reagent, Base Reagent, wash 1, and wash 3 when any of the
following conditions exist:
one month on the system
after expiration
insufficient volume.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-36
You can replace the system fluids any time, even while the system processes
samples. The system fluid reservoirs hold enough fluid to allow the system to
complete the contents of the incubation ring.
WARNING
Do not allow contact of Acid and Base reagents with skin and eyes. Acid and Base
reagents are irritating to the skin. Wear suitable eye, face, and skin protection,
which include wearing gloves, protective eye shield, and laboratory coat. In case
of contact with the eyes, rinse the eyes immediately with plenty of water and seek
medical advice. In case of accident or if you feel unwell, seek medical advice. If
possible, show the bottle label and the Material Safety Data Sheet. In case of
accidental ingestion of reagent, call a physician immediately.
Replace Acid and Base reagents at the same time to manage lot numbers
and to obtain optimum reagent performance.
NOTE:
1. Pull the system fluid drawer towards you.

CAUTION
Do not touch the tubing or sensors. Touching the tubing or sensors can cause
contamination.
2. Lift a fluid bottle lid at the front edge.
CAUTION
Dispose of Acid and Base reagents in accordance with local, state, and federal
regulations. Refer to the Material Safety Data Sheets for each material for
additional information.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-37
3. Remove a bottle and discard the fluid into an approved fluid waste container
and discard the bottle into an approved solid waste container.
1
2
3
4
5
Fluid bottle lid

Wash 1 and 3
Base
Acid
System fluid drawer
Figure 2-17
System Fluids
4. Write todays date in the space provided on the new bottle.

NOTE: Each system fluid bottle has a designated position in the system fluid
drawer. Ensure that you place each system fluid bottle in its designated
position.
5. Place the bottle in the drawer and remove the cap, ensuring that you do not
dislodge the tubing on the fluid bottle lid.
6. Lower the lid onto the bottle, ensuring that the tubing is in the bottle and that
the lid fits securely.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for each bottle.
8. Push in the system fluid drawer.
NOTE: If the system is inprocess when you change the system fluids, you do
not need to prime the bottles.

9. Prime the system fluid bottles.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-38
Managing the Worklist

You can use the Worklist Summary window for the following tasks:
accessing the list of current requests
evaluating sample results.
reviewing the time due for pending tests
Moving Final Results to the Historical Worklist page 2-44
Locating Specific Samples in the Sample Exit Queue page 2-44
Viewing the Worklist

The system updates the contents of the Worklist Summary window every 15
seconds. A system update can temporarily interrupt your view of this window.
You should suspend the update if you need to access information immediately.
To suspend the update, perform the following steps:
1. At the Worklist Summary window, select Suspend Updating.
The system temporarily stops updating the worklist table and the label on the
button changes to Resume Updating.
NOTE: The system immediately updates the worklist table regardless of the
setting of this button if you perform 1 of the following actions:
delete a worklist request
edit a result
add or change a request at the Worklist Schedule window
2. When you are finished at the Worklist Summary window, select

Resume Updating to allow the system to continue the update.
Opening the Worklist

To open the Worklist Summary window from the workspace, perform the
following steps:
1. Select Worklist
2. Select Summary.
The sample information is on the left side of the table. The test information is on
the right side of the table.
The Results column displays time due or results.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-39
Task
View
Sort
Results
Display the list of all current requests
Current
SID
Conc or
Index
Display batch requests as a batch, before

the ending rack is scanned
Pending
Batches
Scanned
NA*
Display sample results, not all tests are

complete
Current
Results
SID
Conc or
Index
Display samples that have tests that are

scheduled or inprocess, but not complete
Pending
Tests
SID
NA*
Display Stat sample results
Stats
SID
Conc or
Index
Display sample results, all tests

are complete
Historical
SID
Conc or
Index
Display calibrator results
Calibrators
SID
Conc or
Index
Display samples with tests that have RLU

values, but not a calculated concentration
Stored
RLUs
SID
RLU
Display a list of patient results that have

been moved to the historical worklist.
Historical
PID
Conc or
Index
Display the list of all current tests for a

patient
Current
PID
Conc or
Index
Display a list of samples that need to

process an end-of-bracket set of controls
before the system reports the results
NOTE: This view applies to
control-bracketed tests only. The Repeat
and Release buttons are unavailable in this
view because the results are retained until
the end-of-bracket controls are processed
and acceptable.
Waiting for
Controls
SID
NA*
Display a list of samples with discarded

test results
For more information on discarded test
results, refer to Reasons for Discarded
Results page 2-43.
NOTE: This view applies to
control-bracketed tests only. The Release
button is unavailable in this view because
the results have already been discarded.
Results
Discarded
SID
NA*
NA = Not Applicable
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-40
Understanding Worklist Symbols

For information on the other symbols displayed on the system software and
hardware, refer to System Symbols page F-1.
Symbol
Description
The tests are scheduled as Stat.
A dilution is scheduled for the test. If this symbol displays on the left side
of the worklist, it indicates a manual dilution. If this symbol displays on
the right side of the worklist, it indicates an automatic dilution.
A comment is entered.
The sample is in the inprocess queue.
In the Worklist, this symbol means the sample has been ejected from the
inprocess queue. At the Status Exit Queue window, this symbol means
the sample was scheduled by rack and it has no SID.
The system scheduled a repeat for the test or the result was obtained when
the test was repeated.
On a button, this symbol means the system opens a window when you
select the button. In a table, this symbol means the result has multiple
flags.
The result is on hold so that it can be reviewed before it is released.
The result is excluded or the test is disabled.
In Worklist, this symbol means you changed the number of replicates for
the test or specified a particular reagent lot or pack for the test. In
Maintenance, this symbol indicates a maintenance procedure you defined
for your laboratory.
The test is due to complete at the time displaying to the left of this symbol.
Tests for this sample did not complete. Reschedule the tests and reload
the sample.
This symbol displays only for control-bracketed tests. It represents a
Waiting for Controls test, which is a test that needs an end-of-bracket set
of controls to be completed before the system reports the result.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Symbol
2-41
Description
This symbol displays only for control-bracketed tests. It represents a
Results Discarded test. The test result was discarded for 1 or more of the
following reasons:
An open bracket is a control-bracketed test that has acceptable
start-of-bracket control results but the end-of-bracket controls have
not been processed.
The system did not process the end-of-bracket controls within the
acceptable time interval.
At least 1 of the end-of-bracket control results was unacceptable.
The system aspirated a calibrator before aspirating the end-of-bracket
set of controls for an open bracket.
The calibration expired before the system processed the
end-of-bracket set of controls for an open bracket.
The reagent lot expired before the system processed the
A field service provider performed controller diagnostics before the
system processed the end-of-bracket set of controls for an open
bracket.
A field or setting for the control-bracketed test was modified at the
Test Definition window before the system processed the
You performed 1 of the following functions at the
Setup Data Administration window before the system processed the
end-of-bracket set of controls for an open bracket:
Test Definition, Update
Test Definition, Restore
Reagent Inventory, Restore
Calibration Data, Restore
Quality Control Data, Restore
Worklist, Delete
CAUTION
Use caution when deleting a worklist with unreleased results. When you delete a
worklist with unreleased results, the system permanently removes the associated
unreleased results from the database. If the unreleased results are from an open
bracket, the associated samples do not display in the Results Discarded report
generated at the Print Report Options window or the Results Discarded view at
the Worklist Summary window.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-42
Displaying Calibrator Results at the Worklist

For calibrators, instead of a numerical value, 1 of the following 3 messages
displays in the results column of the Worklist Summary window:
Message
Description
Valid
The calibration is within the observed or defined ranges.
Invalid
The calibration exceeds either the defined or the observed range for 1 or
more calibration expected values. Schedule another calibration at the
Worklist Schedule window.
Verify
The calibration is outside the observed range but within the defined range
and an operator accepted the calibration. Schedule another calibration at
the Worklist Schedule window.
Suspending Update of the Worklist

The system updates the contents of the Worklist Summary window every 15
seconds. A system update can temporarily interrupt your view of this window.
You should suspend the update if you need to access information immediately. To
suspend the update:
1. At the Worklist Summary window, select Suspend Updating.
The system temporarily stops updating the worklist table and the label on the
button changes to Resume Updating.
NOTE: The system immediately updates the worklist table regardless of the
setting of this button if you perform 1 of the following actions:
delete a worklist request
edit a result
add or change a request at the Worklist Schedule window
2. When you are finished at the Worklist Summary window, select

Resume Updating to allow the system to continue the update.
Rescheduling Samples for Control-bracketed Tests

The system carefully manages the reporting of results of control-bracketed tests.
Reasons for A Canceled Order

When a test is scheduled, a result due time is displayed in the Worklist Summary
window. Occasionally, an event prevents the system from performing a test. The
system cancels the order and the scheduled result due time passes.
When the result due time currently displayed on the Worklist Summary window
passes for a test, perform the following:
1. Delete the order for the test that was canceled.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-43
2. Order the test again.

3. Introduce the sample to the system again.
Reasons for Discarded Results

Test results are discarded for 1 or more reasons. Refer to Understanding Worklist
Symbols page 2-40, and refer to the Discarded Results symbol.
CAUTION
Rescheduling Samples with Discarded Results

Use this procedure to reschedule control-bracketed test samples with discarded
test results.
Print a list of samples with discarded results as described in Printing
Results page 2-78 before selecting Repeat at the Worklist Summary window. A
printed list of samples can help you find the samples for reloading. When you
select Repeat at the Worklist Summary window, the printed list of samples with
discarded results is no longer available.
NOTE:
1. Print a list of samples with discarded results:

a. At the workspace, select Print.
b. Select Report Options.
c. At the Print Report Options window, select Results Report.
d. Enter the Starting Date and Ending Date and select the Sort option.
e. At the View drop-down list, select Results Discarded.
f.
Select Print Report.
2. At the Worklist Summary window View drop-down list, select Results

Discarded.
When you access this view, the system automatically selects all listed
samples.
3. If required, deselect any samples you do not want to reschedule.
4. Select Repeat.
Ensure that you reschedule the start-of-bracket and end-of-bracket sets of
controls also. The system does not process the samples that you rescheduled until
the bracket is opened with acceptable start-of-bracket control results. The system
does not report the sample results until the acceptability of the results of the
end-of-bracket controls is established.
NOTE:
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-44
Locating Specific Samples in the Sample Exit Queue

You can view the Status Exit Queue window to determine the status of the
samples in the 48 most recently ejected sample racks. In addition, you can locate
the approximate positions of the 24 most recently ejected sample racks in the exit
queue. For more information about locating sample racks, refer to Locating
Sample Racks in the Sample Exit Queue page 2-8.
1. At the Worklist Summary window, select a specific sample or a test for that
sample.
2. Select Exit Queue.
The system opens the Status Exit Queue window.
If the specified sample is in 1 of the 48 most recently ejected sample racks, the
system selects and displays the sample rack position for that sample.
If the system cannot locate the requested sample, the system displays a
message box.
3. Locate the ejected sample in the sample exit queue.
If you select the Exit Queue button and no sample or test is selected in the worklist
table, the Status Exit Queue window opens with no sample rack position
selected.
Moving Final Results to the Historical Worklist

To manually move worklist entries with final results to the historical worklist,
perform the following steps:
1. At the workspace, select Worklist > Summary.
2. Select Move to Historical.
Selecting Move to Historical schedules all completed samples, regardless of the
date and time the results were obtained, to move to the historical worklist. The
system moves up to 5000 worklist entries at a time, with a worklist entry
consisting of all test results, flags, demographic information, and comments
associated with 1 SID.
Depending on the size of your worklist, it may take several minutes to an hour or
more for the system to move all of the worklist entries with completed results. To
avoid sample processing delays, wait until the system is in the Ready state before
manually moving final results to the historical worklist.
At the Setup Sample Handling Options window, you can define the number of
hours after which you want results to automatically move to the historical
worklist. For more information about setting up an automatic process for moving
results to historical, refer to Moving Final Results to the Historical Worklist in
Section 8.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-45
Scheduling Samples Using an LIS

Calibrator samples must be scheduled manually. Refer to Scheduling
Calibrators page 3-18, for more information.
NOTE:
Before scheduling patient or control samples, ensure that you perform the
following tasks:
Enter test definitions and customize them for your laboratory.

Refer to Modifying or Viewing Test Options page 8-9.
Define Master Curves for each reagent lot.

Refer to Defining a Master Curve page 3-10.
Define calibrators.
Refer to Defining Calibrator Values page 3-14.
Define controls.
Refer to Using Quality Control Features page 4-1.
Load reagents.
Automatically Scheduling Samples Using an LIS

The ADVIA Centaur XP system can receive worklist entries from the LIS. You
can also allow the system to automatically request worklist entries from the LIS
when a sample is added to the inprocess queue. To automatically request worklist
entries, perform the following steps:
1. At the workspace, select Setup > Summary.
2. Select LIS Communications.
3. At the Setup LIS Communications window, select System Automatically
Queries Host for Worklist.
Loading Samples in Host Query Mode

If you set up your system in the Host Query mode and sample identification is by
SID, load the sample in any rack and position. If sample identification is by Rack,
load the sample in the appropriate rack and position.
1. Load the sample.
Refer to Managing Sample Racks page 2-2.
CAUTION
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-46
2. If the LED above the Sample Start button is not lit, press the button.
The system moves the rack to the inprocess queue.
3. If you schedule by SID and the sample tube does not have a barcode label,
you can enter the SID after the sample is scanned:
a. At the workspace, select the Sample Status button.
b. At the Status Samples window, select the sample with a No Barcode
status and then select Enter SID.
c. At the Status Enter SID window, enter the SID.
You can enter the SID only while the sample is in the Inprocess Queue.
Manually Requesting a Worklist from an LIS

If your system is not set up in Host Query mode, load the samples using a sample
loading list generated by the LIS or manually request a worklist from the LIS and
then load the samples.
1. At the workspace, select Worklist.
2. Select Summary.
3. At the Worklist Summary window, select LIS Communications.
4. At the Worklist LIS Communication window, select
Receive Requests from LIS.
Entering First Names

The LIS protocol does not support the use of 2-word first names. If these are used,
the ADVIA Centaur XP system returns the second word of the first name to the
LIS as a middle name. Insert a hyphen between the 2 words of the first name to
keep the 2 parts together.
Suspending LIS Communications

When your LIS is not operational or before LIS communications are
automatically discontinued at the end of operation, suspend communications. If
you do not suspend communications, the ADVIA Centaur XP system continues to
send information to the LIS even though the LIS is unable to accept the
information and system errors can result.
To access the System Communication Diagnostics window, perform the
following steps:
1. At the workspace select Event Log.
2. At the System Event Log window, select Communication Diagnostics.
3. At the System Communication Diagnostics window, select Suspend
Communications.
Refer to Identifying System Problems page 6-1.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-47
Configuring the LIS to Accept Results beyond the

Dose Response Curve Range
If concentration results are beyond the dose response curve range, the
ADVIA Centaur XP system transmits the results to the LIS as > [the value
representing the high limit of the Master Curve or linearity range]. For example, if
the highest value on the Master Curve Card is 204, the system transmits the result
as > 204, with a space between the > symbol and the concentration value.
Ensure that your LIS is configured to accept this format.
Scheduling Samples Using an LAS

If your lab uses a Laboratory Automation System (LAS), be mindful of the
following procedural information:
Do not place sample tubes with duplicate SIDs in the LAS queue of the
ADVIA Centaur XP system.
The system does not allow the processing of sample tubes with duplicate
SIDs.
The System Event Log window may include events associated with
laboratory automation even if your laboratory does not have this feature
enabled.
You can ignore these events.
The ADVIA Centaur XP system may send a red LIS status to the LAS after a
reboot and prevent sample processing.
To avoid this problem, whenever the system is shut down and rebooted,
process a sample with orders through the Inprocess queue. The system
reinitializes the LIS and returns a green status to the LAS.
Manually Scheduling Samples

Before scheduling patient, calibrator, or control samples, ensure that you perform
the following tasks:
Enter test definitions and customize them for your laboratory.

Define Master Curves for each reagent lot.

Refer to Defining a Master Curve page 3-10.
Define calibrators.
Refer to Defining Calibrator Values page 3-14.
Define controls.
Refer to Using Quality Control Features page 4-1
Load reagents.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-48
Scheduling Patient Samples

Do not use the same SID for different samples within the same processing
run. You must move the current SID information to the Historical worklist before
it is safe to reuse the SID. If you are scheduling by batch, ensure that the SID is
unique to the batch. If you use an SID more than once, the system processes only
1 sample request and rejects the other.
NOTE:
When you schedule Hepatitis B Surface Antigen (HBs) or Hepatitis

Surface Antigen Confirmatory (Conf) tests, ensure that 2 Ancillary Probe Wash 1
packs (APW1) are in the ancillary reagent compartment or the system displays a
Low Probe Wash message. The system may not process an HBs or Conf test with
only 1 APW1 pack on the system.
NOTE:

2. Select Schedule.
3. At the Worklist Schedule window, select Patient.
CAUTION
For most sample processing, do not schedule by Rack ID. If, however, it is
necessary to schedule a sample by rack ID, be aware that the system ejects the
sample to the exit queue after aspirating the sample. Reflex or other testing cannot
complete once the system ejects the sample to the exit queue. To obtain final
results for reflex or other testing, reintroduce the sample rack to the front of the
sample entry queue.
If you are scheduling samples for a control-bracketed test, you must schedule
by SID. The system does not allow you to schedule samples for
control-bracketed tests by Rack.
4. Select how you want the system to identify the sample:
If the sample identifier selected at the Setup Tube Type & Barcode
window is SID, you can select Schedule by SID or Schedule by Rack.
Refer to Specifying Sample Identification page 8-4.
window is Rack, you can only select Schedule by Rack.
Refer to Scheduling Non-barcoded Samples by Rack ID page 2-49 and
Scheduling Barcoded Samples by Rack ID page 2-50.
NOTE: After entering the SID or the Rack ID, you must press Enter on the
keyboard. If you do not press Enter after entering the SID or the Rack ID, the
test selection table and the functions at the bottom of the window do not
become active.
5. Enter the SID or the Rack ID and then press Enter.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-49
You can enter up to 13 alphanumeric characters for the SID. Do not use
the % symbol as part of an SID.
The Rack ID consists of 4 numbers (0001 9999) followed by a letter

(A E).
Enter the letter in uppercase.
6. If you want to process the sample before routine samples, select Stat.
7. Select or enter the tests or the profiles for the sample.
If you use the keyboard to enter the tests or profiles in the Test field or the
Profile field, you must enter the test name or profile exactly as it displays on
the schedule window.
8. Select Save.
You can select Summary to view the requests in the worklist.
NOTE: If you have groups of samples with the same tests, scheduling the
tests in batch is the most efficient method of scheduling without using an LIS.
Refer to Scheduling Batches page 2-54 for more information.
Scheduling by Rack ID
Move results to historical before reusing a rack for samples scheduled by
Rack ID. Moving results to historical prevents merging new results with current
results when scheduling samples by rack ID.
NOTE:
Scheduling Non-barcoded Samples by Rack ID
The following table contains information about manually scheduling

non-barcoded samples by rack ID:
If . . .
Then . . .
The system . . .
the system has not

scanned the rack and you
want to add or modify
tests for a request,
select the rack position at the

Worklist Summary window
and then select Schedule.
recalls the existing

request for that rack
position which you can
modify.
the system has scanned

the rack, and the rack
position is in the current
worklist, and you want to
add or modify tests for a
request,

and then select Schedule.
recalls the existing

request for that rack
position which you can
modify.
the system has scanned

the rack, and the rack
position is in the current
worklist, and you want to
create a new request for a
new sample for that rack
position,
either remove the prior

request.
or
if the prior request has
already received results,
move the request to historical
and then create a new
worklist.
creates a new worklist

request for the rack
position.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-50
If . . .
Then . . .
The system . . .
the rack position is not in

the current worklist and
you want to create a new
request for it,
select Worklist from the

workspace and then select
Schedule.
or
do not make any selections at
the Worklist Summary
window and then select
Schedule.
creates a new worklist

request for the rack
position.
The system functions similarly when the LIS schedules samples by rack ID.
If the system has not scanned the rack, the system recalls the existing request
for that rack position and merges additional tests to that request.
If the system has scanned the rack or the rack is not in the current worklist, the
system creates a new worklist request for the rack position.
Scheduling Barcoded Samples by Rack ID
When a sample is scheduled by rack ID, the system does not use the SID to
process that sample even if the tube has a barcode label. In some cases, if the
system scans a barcode label for that sample tube, the system enters the SID from
the barcode label to the worklist request for the rack position. This provides a
check to identify a possible conflict between the SID in the worklist and the SID
on the sample tube barcode label. When the system identifies a possible conflict, it
alerts the operator by displaying the SID Mismatch sample status message.
The following table contains information about how the system uses the SID for
samples scheduled by rack ID:
Did the system
previously scan
the rack position
that is in the
current worklist?
Worklist
SID
Barcode Label
System Action
no
not present
present
makes the SID part of the

rack ID in the worklist
request
no
present
present, different
from worklist
SID
overwrites the Worklist SID
yes, with no barcode

label on the tube
not present
present
makes the SID part of the

Rack ID in the Worklist
request
yes, with no barcode

label on the tube
present
not present
assumes that the sample is the

same tube and performs
pending or new tests
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Did the system

previously scan
the rack position
that is in the
current worklist?
2-51
Worklist
SID
Barcode Label
System Action
yes, with a barcode

label on the tube
present
not present
keeps the existing SID and

Rack ID in the Worklist
request
yes, with a different

barcode label on the
tube
present
present, different
from worklist
SID
displays the SID Mismatch

message; possibly incorrect
tube
Handling SID Mismatches

To prevent an SID Mismatch or SID overwrites, use 1 of the following
procedures:
Move results to historical before using the rack in a new worklist.
Use a rack that is not used in the current worklist.
To clear an SID Mismatch sample status message, perform 1 of the following

corrective actions:
Edit the SID in the worklist to match the SID on the sample tube barcode
label.
Enter the SID on the sample tube barcode label into the worklist request.
Enter the SID from the sample tube barcode label at the Status Enter SID
window.
Eject the rack and place the correct sample tube in the rack position.
Scheduling Patient Samples Using a Hand-Held Barcode

Reader
LASER WARNING
You can use the hand-held barcode scanner to enter the Sample ID for patient
samples:
2. Select Schedule.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-52
3. At the Worklist Schedule window, select only Patient and Schedule by

SID.
These are the default options and are already selected when the window
displays.
4. Select Scan Data.
The system displays a Scan Data dialog box.
5. Aim the hand-held barcode scanner at the SID barcode and press the trigger.
The system displays the progress of the scan in the Scan Data dialog box.
When the barcode scanner completes its scan, the Scan Data dialog box
closes.
6. Select Save.
Entering Patient Demographics

Entering patient demographic information is optional. You can enter patient
demographic information at the following times:
as you schedule samples in the worklist
after you create the worklist
while samples are processing
After you enter the SID or the Rack ID and select or enter the tests or profiles,
perform the following procedure to enter patient demographics:
1. At the Worklist Schedule window, select Demographics.
2. At the Worklist Demographics window, enter the demographic information:
Field
Name
Description
PID
You can enter up to 11 alphanumeric characters for the patient identifier.
Name
You can enter up to 30 alphanumeric characters for the patients name.

An LIS expects the patient name to be formatted Last Name, First
Name.
DOB
Use the DD MMM YYYY format (for example: 11 Aug 1975).

Use the following abbreviations for months: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May,
Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec.
M or F
You can select M (male) or F (female).
Location
You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters for the location of the

patient in the facility.
Physician
You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters for the physicians

name.
Optional
You can enter up to 12 alphanumeric characters for optional information

about the patient or sample.
3. Select Continue.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-53
4. Select Save at the Worklist Schedule window and continue with additional
scheduling activities.
Entering Comments for a Patient Sample

You can enter comments for a patient sample, such as the serum is hemolyzed or
the patient is non-fasting.
If you are not currently signed in, you must sign in to the system to enter
comments.
NOTE:
1. At the Worklist Summary window, select the sample and then select
Schedule.
2. At the Worklist Schedule window, select Demographics.
3. At the Worklist Demographics window, select Comments.
4. At the Comments window, enter a comment.
You can enter up to 3 comments. Comments can be up to 120 alphanumeric
characters. The system enters your initials and the date.
5. Select Save.
6. Select Continue at the Worklist Demographics window.
7. At the Worklist Schedule window, select Summary to return to the
Worklist Summary window.
Scheduling Stat Samples

When you load a sample scheduled as Stat in the sample entry queue, the system
processes the sample before routine samples.
NOTE: When a Stat sample does not process successfully, the system displays a
dialog box indicating that the sample failed to complete. Do not refer to the event
log to verify the SID. The event log may display the sample SID incorrectly. Use
the Worklist Summary window to verify the correct SID.
You can have the system process an existing worklist request as Stat by
performing 1 of the following:
Load the sample into the Stat entry.

When you load any sample into the Stat entry, the system processes the
sample before routine samples.
Before you load the sample, edit the request at the Worklist Schedule
window to schedule the sample as Stat.
Refer to Editing Requests page 2-65.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-54
Scheduling Batches
When the LIS is not operational or not connected, the most efficient method of
scheduling tests is to schedule them in batch at the Worklist Schedule window.
The system performs the requested tests on all samples loaded in the starting rack,
ending rack, and all racks in between.
2. Select Schedule.
3. At the Worklist Schedule window, select Batch.
4. Enter the rack number of the starting rack in Starting Rack.
Rack numbers contain a 4-digit rack identifier. It is not necessary to enter
a letter.
5. Enter the rack number of the ending rack in Ending Rack.
CAUTION: Do not schedule a rack as diluted and then use that same rack in the
same batch, scheduled as undiluted. The system uses the dilution instructions
from the first batch for every appearance of that rack within the batch. Wait until
the batch of diluted samples is no longer in the Pending Batches view of the
worklist before reusing the rack for undiluted samples.
6. Select or enter the tests or profiles.
7. Select Save.
8. Load racks.
NOTE: You can load racks in any order between the starting rack and the
ending rack. Racks loaded before the starting rack and after the ending rack
are not included in the batch even if the Rack ID is numerically between the
Rack IDs of the starting rack and the ending rack.
As samples are scanned, individual requests are added to the worklist using the
primary sample identifier.
Batches display at the Worklist Summary window in the Pending Batches view.
When the system scans the ending rack, the system removes the batch from the
Pending Batches view.
Sample racks loaded in the Stat entry are not recognized as part of a batch and
batch test requests are not added to the Stat test request.
If you schedule a sample in a batch and also schedule an individual test request for
that same sample, the system processes all tests for that sample.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-55
If you select SID for sample identification in Setup, you must use SID barcode
labels to identify the samples.
If sample identification is by SID and the SID barcode label is not recognized by
the system, no request is created for the sample. To create a request for the
sample, reload the sample with a readable SID barcode label before the ending
rack for the batch is loaded.
Scheduling Calibrators and QC Samples
Refer to Scheduling Calibrators page 3-18.
Refer to Scheduling QC Samples page 4-5.
Entering Dilution Options

The ADVIA Centaur XP system provides both automatic and manual dilution
options.
You define automatic dilution options for a specific test, such as diluting all
test results greater than a specified concentration limit, at the Test Ranges
window.
You define dilution profiles, which automatically schedule multiple dilutions

for a test, at the Test Profile Summary window.
Refer to Defining Automatic Dilutions for Tests page 8-33.
You define manual dilution options for a specific sample at the

Worklist Dilutions window.
Use this procedure after you enter the SID or the Rack ID and select or enter the
tests or profiles to enter dilution information for a specific sample:
1. At the Worklist Schedule window, select Dilutions.
NOTE: You must dilute all samples with the correct ADVIA Centaur XP
diluent specified for each test. Physiological saline or commercial albumin are
not acceptable diluents for ADVIA Centaur XP assays. Refer to the
ADVIA Centaur Assay Manual.
NOTE: If the sample has a test selected for which manual dilutions are not
allowed, the Manual Dilution field is not available.

NOTE: If the diluent volume is insufficient for all of the replicates, the
Worklist Summary window displays a flag indicating insufficient diluent. If

you are using a Multi-Diluent ancillary reagent pack with a small amount of
diluent in it and you want to use the remaining liquid in the pack, you can
schedule a dilution in replicates of 1.
2. For manual dilutions, enter the dilution factor in the Manual Dilution field
at the Worklist Dilutions window.
The results are automatically corrected for the specified dilution factor.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-56
3. To define a system-performed dilution option for a specific sample, select a

dilution option for each test performed on the sample:
If the sample is to be tested as defined in the test definition, select

Default.
If the sample is not to be diluted, select Undiluted Only.
If the sample is to be tested only with the specified dilution factor, select
Diluted Only.
If the sample is to be tested both undiluted and also with the specified
dilution factor, select Undiluted & Diluted.
If the sample is to be diluted only if the undiluted value is greater than the
dilution point defined at the Test Ranges window, select Dilute if Over.
NOTE: If a dilution profile is scheduled for the test, Dilution Option displays
only Profile, which you cannot change. Dilution profiles are defined at the
Test Dilution Profile Definition window. Refer to Defining Dilution
Profiles page 8-34.
4. At Dilution, select a dilution factor .
5. Select Continue.
6. At the Worklist Schedule window, select Save.
Entering Reagent Options

Use this procedure to specify the lot number and the pack of the primary reagent,
the ancillary reagent, and the diluent for tests for a specific sample. Change the
reagent options when you want to confirm the performance of the test with
another lot number or pack or when you want to test multiple reagent lot numbers
in parallel.
1. At the Worklist Schedule window, after you enter the SID or the Rack and
select or enter the tests or profiles, select Reagent Options.
2. After selecting a primary reagent lot number, at the Worklist Reagent
Options window, select the following options:
a primary reagent pack
an ancillary reagent pack
a second ancillary reagent pack
a diluent pack
3. Select Continue.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-57
If you are performing control-bracketed tests, the list in the Lot field at
the Worklist Reagent Options window displays a plus sign (+) at the end of any
reagent lot number used in an open control-bracketed test. An open
control-bracketed test is a control-bracketed test that has acceptable
start-of-bracket control results but the end-of-bracket controls are not processed.
NOTE:
The system allows several control-bracketed tests to be open at the same

time, including tests using different lots of the same reagent.
NOTE:
Changing the Number of Replicates

Use this procedure to change the number of replicates for tests for a specific
sample. This option is not available for calibrator samples. You can specify the
number of replicates to routinely perform on each test at the Test Definition
window. Refer to Modifying Sample Replicates page 8-14.
1. At the Worklist Schedule window, after you enter the SID or the Rack and
select or enter the tests or profiles, select Reagent Options.
2. At the Worklist Reagent Options window, enter the number of replicates for
the test.
You can specify up to 30 replicates for each test.
3. Select Continue.
Using Control-bracketed Tests

Refer to the scheduling and loading procedures described in these topics:
Scheduling Samples Using an LIS page 2-45
Manually Scheduling Samples page 2-47
Managing Sample Racks page 2-2
Scheduling Control Sets

Schedule a complete set of controls at the beginning of a group of samples to open
a bracket and at the end of a group of samples to close a bracket.
A control set must contain the number of control levels defined at the
Test Definition window. The system does not allow a value of 0 or a value
greater than 5. The system does not process extra controls but indicates their
status with an Incomplete Set flag at the Worklist Summary window.
In addition, a control set must contain a numerically ascending sequence of
control levels beginning with Level 1. For example, if a test requires 3 controls in
a set, the controls must follow this sequence: Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-58
Loading Control Sets

Place all of the controls within a set in 1 rack. Load the control rack through the
sample entry queue or Stat entry.
Use the end-of-bracket controls from 1 group of samples as the start-of-bracket
controls for the next group of samples, provided the control results are acceptable
and none of the system conditions force the system to cancel the control-bracketed
test.
Refer to Reasons for Discarded Results page 2-43.
Scheduling Start-of-bracket and End-of-bracket Tests

If you schedule the start-of-bracket controls and the end-of-bracket controls at the
same time, you must perform the following tasks:
Schedule the start-of-bracket controls with a specific rack ID for the set and a
unique position for each control within the set.
Schedule the end-of-bracket controls with a different rack ID for the set and a
If you schedule the start-of-bracket controls and wait until they are processed and
have acceptable results before scheduling the end-of-bracket controls, schedule
the controls by SID.
You do not need to enter the rack ID and position of the controls. You can use the
same rack for the start-of-bracket controls and end-of-bracket controls as long as
the system processed the previous set of controls with acceptable results and
ejected the rack.
Scheduling Calibrators for a Control-bracketed test

If you schedule and load calibrators for a control-bracketed test and the system
aspirates a calibrator before processing the end-of-bracket controls, the system
discards any retained patient test results.
Retained patient test results are patient test results that are not reported by the
system until an end-of-bracket set of controls is processed with acceptable results.
Schedule samples for control-bracketed tests by SID only. The system does not
allow you to schedule samples for control-bracketed tests by Rack.
Using Multicomponent Assays

A multicomponent assay uses the results from one or more standard tests or
off-system tests in a formula to provide a calculated result. The standard tests and
off-system tests that are used to determine a multicomponent result are referred to
as component tests of the multicomponent test.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-59
Refer to the scheduling and loading procedures described in these topics:
Scheduling Samples Using an LIS page 2-45
Manually Scheduling Samples page 2-47
Managing Sample Racks page 2-2
Scheduling Calibrators for a Multicomponent Test

Schedule calibrators individually for all the component tests of a multicomponent
test.
Scheduling Controls for a Multicomponent Test

Schedule the multicomponent control manually or by using the LIS. The system
automatically runs the controls for the component tests if they are selected in the
multicomponent control definition.
Scheduling Patient Samples for Multicomponent Tests

Schedule patient samples for multicomponent tests using the following options:
Manually
LIS
As a reflex test
As part of a test profile
As part of a batch
Canceling a Multicomponent Test Using the LIS

If you cancel a multicomponent test using the LIS, the system automatically
cancels all the component tests. You cannot cancel a component test individually
if it is scheduled as part of a multicomponent test.
If a component test is ordered individually, you can cancel the component test
individually.
Repeating a Multicomponent Test

If a component result of a multicomponent test exceeds the result time limit or is
flagged with an error, the system does not calculate the multicomponent test
result.
To repeat the multicomponent test when one or more of the component test results
exceeds the time limit, follow this procedure:
1. At the WorklistSummary window, select the multicomponent test.
2. Select Repeat.
For more information regarding result time limits and multicomponent tests, refer
to section, Result Time Limit page 8-41.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-60
Repeating a Component Test

If an error occurs while running the component of a multicomponent test, the
system does not calculate the multicomponent test result. Repeat the component
test that was invalid.
The system verifies the result time limits for all the components of a
multicomponent test before it aspirates the repeat component.
To repeat the component test, follow this procedure:
1. At the WorklistSummary window, select the component test.
2. Select Repeat.
The system calculates the multicomponent result using the repeated component
test result.
For more information about the autorepeat feature and multicomponent tests, refer
to section, Autorepeating a Component Assay page 8-42.
Calculating the Multicomponent Result and Reporting an

Interpretation
The following sections contain information regarding the calculation and
interpretation of a multicomponent result. The system uses additional criteria to
calculate and interpret the multicomponent result than it uses for existing
ADVIA Centaur XP assays.
Calculating the Multicomponent Result
The system calculates a multicomponent test result if the results of the component
tests are within the reportable dose limits.
The system also calculates a multicomponent test result according to these
additional conditions:
If . . .
And . . .
The system . . .
the result of a component

test is above the highest
limit of the component
assays reportable dose,
no other component
results are below the
lowest limit of their
reportable doses,
uses the highest

reportable dose limit
value in the formula to
calculate the
multicomponent result.

test is below the lowest
no other component
results are above the
highest limit of their
reportable doses,
uses the lowest reportable

dose limit value in the
formula to calculate the
078D1064-01 Rev. C
If . . .
And . . .

test is within the
component assays
reportable dose range,
one or more of the

component results are
lower or higher than the
linearity range,
2-61
The system . . .
reports <or >
Linearity Range for
the component result
uses the component
test result to calculate
the multicomponent
result.
When manually calculating the multicomponent result, use the

manufacturer-recommended linearity value. If you do not use the
manufacturer-recommended linearity value, the multicomponent result may not
match the system calculation.
NOTE:
The system does not calculate a multicomponent test result according to these
conditions:
If . . .
And . . .
The system . . .

test is above the highest
one or more of the other

below the lowest limit of
their reportable doses,
does not calculate a


test is below the lowest
one or more of the

above the highest limit of
does not calculate a

For more information about calculating a multicomponent result refer to the

section Using Multicomponent Tests page 8-39.
Interpreting the Multicomponent Result
The system determines an interpretation for the multicomponent result if the

results of the component tests are within the reportable dose limits.
An example of an interpretation range can be either of the following:
Severe
Moderate
None to mild
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-62
The system also assigns interpretations and reports results for the multicomponent
test according to these conditions:
If . . .
the result of a component test is above
the highest limit of the component
assays reportable dose, and the
multicomponent result is greater than or
equal to the lowest value of the most
severe interpretation range limit,
the result of a component test is below
the lowest limit of the component
multicomponent result is less than the
highest value of the least severe
interpretation range limit,
The system . . .
reports the results as > the lowest
value of the most severe
interpretation range limit
assigns the most severe
interpretation
reports the results as < the highest

value of the least severe
interpretation range limit
assigns the least severe
interpretation
The user-defined interpretations are not used for the multicomponent result when
the component test results are higher or lower than the component assay ranges.
The manufacturer-defined interpretations are used.
Examples of Multicomponent Test Results for Component Test Results
Outside the Reportable Dose Range
Two examples of multicomponent test results when one or more of the component
test results are outside the reportable dose range for a multicomponent assay,
XYZ, are as follows:
a. The result of the XA test, a component of the XYZ test, is greater than the
highest reportable dose limit for the XA test, 1000 ng/mL. The system
reports the XA test result as >1000 ng/mL and uses 1000 ng/mL to
calculate an XYZ multicomponent result.
The lowest value of the most severe interpretation range limit for the
XYZ test is 9.8. If the XYZ result is greater than 9.8, the system reports
the results as > and assigns an interpretation of Severe.
b. The result of the XA test, a component of the XYZ test, is less than the
lowest reportable dose limit for the XA test, 1.6 ng/mL. The system
reports the XA test result as < 1.6 ng/mL and uses 1.6 ng/mL to calculate
an XYZ result.
The highest value of the least severe interpretation range limit for the
XYZ test is 7.7. If the XYZ result is less than 7.7, the system reports the
XYZ test result as < 7.7 and assigns an interpretation of None to Mild.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-63
The system does not assign interpretations and does not report results for the
multicomponent test according to these conditions:
If . . .
the result of a component test is above
the highest limit of the component
multicomponent result is not greater
than or equal to the lowest value of the
most severe interpretation range limit,
The system . . .
reports Error
assigns no interpretation
displays No Interpretation in the
flag field
the result of a component test is below

the lowest limit of the component
multicomponent result is not less than
the highest value of the least severe
interpretation range limit,
reports Error
displays No interpretation in the
flag field
one or more of the component test

results are higher than the highest limit
of the component assays reportable
dose, and one or more of the component
results are lower than the lowest limit of
reports Error
displays No Calculation in the flag
field
For more information about interpreting result flags refer to section Result Flags
page 2-68.
Modifying the Worklist

You can change entries on the worklist or delete entries from the worklist.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-64
Selecting Multiple Samples or Tests

You can select multiple samples or tests at the Worklist Summary window. The
samples or tests can be adjacent or non-adjacent in the worklist table. Use the
multiple select feature to perform the following functions:
delete multiple tests
repeat multiple tests
release results for multiple tests from hold
send results for multiple samples or tests to the LIS
Then . . .
select multiple adjacent

samples or tests in the
worklist summary table,
1.
Use the pointing device to select the first sample or

test.
2. Hold down the Shift key while using the

pointing device to select the last sample or test
to be included in the selection.
The system selects all samples or tests in the
worklist summary table between and including the
first and the last selected item.
3. When the samples or tests are selected, perform

the function.
select multiple non-adjacent
samples or tests in the
worklist summary table,
1.
Hold down the Ctrl key while using the pointing

device to select each sample or test.
2. When the samples or tests are selected, perform

the function.
If you select samples on the left side of the worklist summary table, all
tests for the sample are selected.
NOTE:
If you start selecting on the left side of the worklist summary table, the system
assumes that you want to select samples even if your last selection at the time is
on the right side of the table. The system selects all tests for the samples in the
selected rows.
If you select tests on the right side of the worklist summary table, you can select
specific tests for a sample.
If you start selecting on the right side of the worklist summary table, the system
assumes that you want to select tests even if your last selection at the time is on
the left side of the table. The system selects only tests in the selected rows.
If you need to scroll to continue selecting multiple samples or tests, release the
Shift or Ctrl key, scroll to the desired location, and then again hold down the Shift
or Ctrl key while selecting the sample or test.
When you select multiple tests and then select the Delete button, the following
information applies:
078D1064-01 Rev. C
The system cannot delete tests that are part of a ratio test and calibrators.
2-65
The system only deletes the tests that it can delete.
The system cannot delete tests that are part of an enabled multicomponent
test.
The system can only delete a predetermined number of tests at a time.

If tests remain highlighted, select the Delete button again to delete more tests.
Editing Requests
Use this procedure to perform the following actions:
add tests
change how the system processes a sample (Stat or routine)
change dilutions
specify reagent lots or packs
change the number of replicates
change demographics
To edit worklist requests, perform the following steps:

2. Select Summary.
3. At the Worklist Summary window, select a sample or a test.
4. Select Schedule.
5. At the Worklist Schedule window, edit the request.
6. Select Save to save the change.
Modifying a Test for a Request Scheduled by Rack ID

To modify a test for a worklist request scheduled by rack ID, perform the
appropriate action:
To process . . .
Then . . .
And . . .
pending tests,
check the worklist to identify

sample racks with pending tests
reload the sample rack.
additional tests for a

sample,

Worklist Summary window,
select Schedule, select the tests,
and then select Save
or
schedule tests for the SID
required using an LIS
reload the sample rack.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-66
Deleting Requests
Use this procedure to delete selected samples or tests.
2. Select Summary.
3. At the Worklist Summary window, select a sample, a test, or a batch.
Then . . .
delete a sample or a test,
select a sample or a test.
delete a batch,
select Pending Batches in View and then select a batch.
4. Select Delete.
5. Select Yes.
NOTE:
You cannot delete calibrators that are resulted.
If tests have not started or if tests are complete, the entire request is deleted
immediately from the worklist.
If tests are inprocess, the tests are stopped, the cuvettes are discarded, and the
tests, including any completed results, are deleted from the worklist.
Evaluating the Results

You can review results, interpretations, and flags at the Worklist Summary
window. Refer to Managing the Worklist page 2-38.
The Worklist Summary window provides pop-up windows that display
additional information about the samples and tests. To view these pop-up
windows for a specific sample or test, use the following options:
If you want to view . . .
Then select . . .
the manual dilution factor that you selected at the

Worklist Dilutions window for a sample,
the dilution symbol in the

manual dilution column.
the operator specified dilution option and factor that

you selected at the Worklist Dilutions window for a
sample,
the dilution symbol in the

system dilution column.
the units, up to 4 defined reference ranges, the defined

check range, and the defined linearity range for a
patient result,
NOTE: If the selected result is outside of a range, the
range displays in bold text.
a patient result in the result

column.
the units for a control result,
a control result in the result

column.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-67
If you want to view . . .
Then select . . .
the 3 highest priority result flags for a sample,

NOTE: If multiple flags are associated with a result, an
ellipsis (...) is appended to the flag.
the flag in the flag column.
Pop-up windows do not display in the following circumstances:
The system processes the dilution using operator-specified parameters defined

at the Test Ranges window.
The result is outside of the calculation range.
The result is for a calibrator.
At the Worklist Result Details window, you can review additional information
to help you evaluate results:
replicate and mean results
reference ranges
units
complete list of flags for each result
access to reagent lot and pack information for each replicate result
To view results and flags, perform the following steps:

2. Select Summary.
3. At the Worklist Summary window, select a result.
4. Select Result Details.
The system lists results alphabetically by test and in chronological order.
The window displays the final result in bold.
You can view a control-bracketed test result at the Worklist Result

Details window when the system releases the result.
NOTE:
If the system has not released the result, the Worklist Result Details window
displays the Waiting for Controls symbol.
If the system discarded the result, the window displays the Results Discarded
symbol.
Refer to System Symbols page F-1.
If the control-bracketed test is waiting for controls or the results are discarded, the
Worklist Result Details window does not display RLUs.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-68
Result Flags
Flag
Description
Above Check
The result is above the check range entered in the test definition.
The test is repeated if you select Repeat if > for Check Range at
the Test Ranges window.
Autorepeat
The system automatically repeated this test as specified in the

test definition.
Below Check
The result is below the check range entered in the test definition.
The test is repeated if Repeat if < is selected for Check Range at
the Test Ranges window.
Cal Accepted
The result was obtained using an operator-accepted calibration

for this test.
Cal Assigned
The result was obtained after you assigned a valid calibration

for this test at the Worklist Summary window.
Cal Invalid
The calibration is invalid for this test. If an RLU is displayed for

the test and you have the appropriate level of security, you can
assign the previous valid calibration. At the
Worklist Summary window, select the result and then select
Assign Cal.
Cal Required
No valid calibration is available for the reagent lot. Schedule a

Cancelled
A test was cancelled and unable to complete because of a

conflict or resource problem while processing.
Check Variable
A result was not obtained for the ratio test because of an error
flag for 1 or more of the ratio variables. Check the variables for
the ratio.
Clot Detected
A result was not obtained because a clot was detected in this

sample.
> Conc Range
The result is above the high value for the concentration

calculation defined at the Calibration Master Curve Definition
window. The test is repeated if you select Repeat if > Conc
Range at the Test Ranges window.
< Conc Range
The result is below the low value for the concentration

calculation defined at the Calibration Master Curve Definition
window. The test is repeated if you select Repeat if < Conc
Range at the Test Ranges window.
Conf N/A
The system cannot calculate a result for a confirmatory test on

this sample.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-69
Flag
Description
Control bracketed
The system processed this sample as part of a group of samples

for a specific test that began and ended with a set of controls.
The system does not process samples until it establishes the
acceptability of the results of the beginning set of controls. The
system does not report sample results until it establishes the
acceptability of the results of the ending set of controls.
The system displays this flag at the Worklist Result Details
window and the Worklist Summary window. If your system
transmits results to a laboratory information system (LIS), this
flag is transmitted also.
Control bracketed
restricted
The system processed this sample with a control-bracketed test

in the restricted mode.
A control-bracketed test is a test that requires evaluating a set of
controls at the beginning and end of a group of patient samples.
The system does not process samples until it establishes the
acceptability of the results of the beginning set of controls. The
system does not report sample results until it establishes the
acceptability of the results of the ending set of controls.
The restricted mode is a mode of processing in which the system
performs the same test on a group of samples loaded between
defined starting and ending racks without the interruption of any
other test or samples.
The system displays the Control bracketed restricted flag at the
Worklist Result Details window and the Worklist Summary
window. If your system transmits results to a laboratory
information system (LIS), this flag is transmitted also.
Diluted
The result was obtained on a sample that the system

automatically diluted.
> Dilution Pt
The result is above the dilution point defined for this test at the
Test Ranges window.
Edited
You modified the result that was reported by the system.
Entered
You manually entered the test result (usually for an off-system

test).
Exception
The quality control result caused a defined quality control rule

violation.
Excluded
The quality control result is excluded from statistics or the

calibrator replicate is excluded from the calibration.
Final Result Rule
The result was obtained using the Final Result Rule.
High
The result is above the reference range (normal range) entered

in the test definition.
High CV
The CV (coefficient of variation) for replicates of the sample is

above the acceptable CV entered in the test definition.
Incomplete Cal Set
One of the calibrator levels is not loaded on the system. Ensure

that both the high calibrator and the low calibrator are loaded.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-70
Flag
Description
In Check Range
The result is equal to or above the defined low limit and equal to
or below the defined high limit of the range. The test is repeated
if the appropriate Repeat if criteria is selected for Check Range
> Index Range
The result is above the high value for the index calculation
defined at the Calibration Master Curve Definition window.
The test is repeated if Repeat if > Index is selected at the Test
Ranges window.
< Index Range
The result is below the low value for the index calculation
The test is repeated if Repeat if < Index is selected at the Test
Ranges window.
Insufficient
Not enough sample volume is available for the requested tests.
Integrity Error
A result was not obtained because the system detected an

irregular sample aspiration. Check the sample for bubbles or
foam, or check the sample probe tubing and the tip-probe
connection for leaks.
Investigational
This test is for investigational use only.
> Linearity
The result is above the linearity you entered at the Test Ranges
window. The test is repeated if Repeat if > is selected for
Linearity at the Test Ranges window.
< Linearity
The result is below the linearity you entered at the

Test Ranges window. The test is repeated if Repeat if < is
selected for Linearity at the Test Ranges window.
Lot Expired
The reagent lot expired. Define a Master Curve for a new

reagent lot at the Calibration Master Curve Definition
window.
Low
The result is below the reference range (normal range) entered

in the test definition.
Low Acid
Insufficient acid reagent is available on the system to perform

the test.
Low Base
Insufficient base reagent is available on the system to perform

the test.
Low Tips
Insufficient number of sample tips are available to perform the

test.
Low Wash 1
Insufficient wash 1 reagent is available on the system to perform

the test.
Low Wash 3
Insufficient wash 3 reagent is available on the system to perform

the test.
Low Probe Wash
Insufficient probe wash is available on the system to perform

the test.
Low Water
Insufficient water is on the system to perform the test.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-71
Flag
Description
Manual Dilution
A manual dilution was specified for this test result. The result is
automatically corrected for the specified dilution factor.
No Ancillary
The test requires an ancillary reagent. Load the appropriate

ancillary reagent.
No Bracket
The system cannot process this sample at this time because the
start-of-bracket controls were not processed or at least 1 of the
control results is unacceptable. The system will process the
sample after the start-of-bracket controls are processed and
produce acceptable results.
No Calculation
A result was not obtained because a calculation error occurred.

For example, the RLUs for the sample are off the curve. For
more information, call for technical assistance.
No Cal Lot Match
The test requires a specific primary reagent and calibrator lot

combination. Ensure that you use the primary reagent and the
calibrators from the same kit.
No Dil Allowed
The system cannot calculate this result because a dilution is not

allowed for this test.
No Diluent
An automatic dilution is scheduled and no diluent is loaded for

this test.
No Interpretation
The system cannot report a result interpretation.
No Lot Match
The test requires a specific primary reagent and ancillary

reagent lot combination. Ensure that you use the primary
reagent and the ancillary reagent from the same kit.
No Primary
No primary reagent is loaded for this test.

If you are processing control-bracketed test and you get a No
Primary flag when you are not out of primary reagent, the
system is indicating that patient samples were not processed
because insufficient time remained to complete the bracket.
Out
The result for this control is above or below the limits entered in
the control definition. This flag does not display when quality
control rules are defined and enabled for a test.
Overdiluted
A result was not obtained because the diluted sample result is

below the overdilution point defined at the TestRanges
window.
Priming
The system cannot perform the test because the system needs to
schedule priming for a probe or a pump.
Redilute
Dilute and repeat the test.
repeated
The system automatically repeated the test or you repeated the

test by selecting the test and then selecting the Repeat button at
the Worklist Summary window or the
Worklist Result Details window.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-72
Flag
Description
restricted
The system processed this sample as part of a group of samples

for a specific test loaded between defined starting and ending
racks without the interruption of any other test or samples.
The system displays this flag only at the
Worklist Result Details window. If your system transmits
results to a laboratory information system (LIS), this flag is
transmitted also.
Signal Error
A result was not obtained because a signal error occurred. For

example, the RLUs for the sample are near zero, because of a
low light count to dark count ratio, or of noise. Contact your
local technical support provider or distributor.
System Error
The system cannot perform the test because a subsystem is

offline.
Test Inactive
The test is inactivated. At the Status Primary Reagent window,

you can activate the test by selecting a pack for the test and then
selecting Activate Test.
Time Exceeded
One of the component test results has exceeded the result time
limit.
Waste Full
The system cannot perform the test because the cuvette bin, the
sample tip bin, the tip tray bin, or the waste bottle is full.
Wrong Pack ID
Primary or ancillary reagent with the specified pack serial

number is not loaded for this test.
Waived
The result was obtained using an operator waived calibration for

this test.
Repeating a Test
Use this procedure to manually schedule a repeat for a completed test. Refer to
Defining Automatic Repeats for Sample Error Conditions page 8-30.
2. Select Summary.
3. At the Worklist Summary window, select a test on the right side of
the worklist.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-73
4. Select Repeat.
If . . .
Then . . .
the sample is in the inprocess queue when

the repeat test is scheduled,
the system automatically performs the

repeat test on the sample.
the sample has been ejected from the

inprocess queue before the repeat test is
scheduled,
you must reload the sample.
When the repeat completes, you can review the initial results and the repeated
results at the Worklist Result Details window.
Locating Samples that Require Further Attention

You can use the Status Exit Queue window to locate samples that do not have
results, require dilutions, or require other attention due to errors. Refer to Locating
Specific Samples in the Sample Exit Queue page 2-44.
Editing Results
Use this procedure to change the concentration or index value of a result. You can
also use this procedure to enter the result for an off-system test. You must have the
appropriate level of security to edit results.
2. Select Summary.
3. At the Worklist Summary window, select a sample.
4. Select Result Details.
5. At the Worklist Result Details window, select a result.
6. Select Edit Result.
7. At the Worklist Edit Results window, edit the value:
If the result is a concentration value, change or enter the value in Conc.
If the result is an index value, change or enter the value in Index.
If the result has both concentration and index values, both fields display at
the Worklist Edit Results window; however, you can only edit the Conc
field.
8. Enter comments, as needed, to record why you edited the result:

a. Select Comments.
b. At the Comments window, enter a comment.
You can enter up to 3 comments. Comments can be up to 120
alphanumeric characters. The system enters your initials and the date.
If you are not currently signed in, you must sign in to the system.
c. Select Save.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-74
9. At the Worklist Edit Results window, select Save.
Releasing Results that Are on Hold

If the system is holding results for review before sending them to the LIS, use this
procedure to remove the hold status.
2. Select Summary.
3. At the Worklist Summary window, select test results with the hold status.
4. Open the Worklist Release Results window by performing 1 of the
following actions:
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Then . . .
release the hold status for selected results,
select Release.
review result replicates and flags for a

selected result before releasing the hold
status,
a.
2-75
Select Result Details.
b. Review details for the result.

c.
Ensure the result is selected and

then select Release.
5. At the Worklist Release Results window, you can select how you want the
system to release the hold status for results.
Then . . .
release the status for the result selected at

the Worklist Summary window,
select Release Only Selected Results.
release the status for all results for the test

selected at the Worklist Summary
window,
select Release All Results on Hold for

the Selected Test.
release the status for all results the system

is holding for review,
select Release All Results on Hold.
release the status for results within a

specific date range,
a.
Select Release Results on Hold

within Date Range.
b. Enter the starting date and the

ending date.
6. Select Continue.
When the system releases the hold status for a result, it automatically sends
the result to an LIS if automatic transfer of results is defined for your system.
Refer to Defining LIS Communication Options page 8-54.
Releasing Results on Hold

At the Worklist Release Results window, selecting Release All Results on
Hold for the Selected Test does not transmit all interim and final results on hold
for a selected test to the LIS.
To perform this procedure, at the Setup LIS Communication window,
you must have selected the option System Automatically Sends All Results
and Additional Data except Results on Hold.
NOTE:
Use the following procedure to release all results on hold for the selected test:
2. Select Summary.
3. At the Worklist Summary, select the test with the hold status.
4. Select Release.
5. At the Worklist Release Results window, select Release All Results on
Hold for the Selected Test and then select Continue.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-76
The system transmits all results on hold to the LIS.
Sending Results to an LIS

If automatic transfer of results is not defined for your system, you can manually
send results to an LIS. You can send all results except results that you are holding
for review or you can select specific test results at the Worklist Summary
window and then release these results to the LIS.
Sending All Results Except Results On Hold to an LIS

2. Select Summary.
3. At the Worklist Summary window, select LIS Communications.
4. At the Worklist LIS Communications window, select Send All Results
Except Results on Hold.
5. You can enter a starting date and an ending date.
The default for the starting date field is the date and time of the earliest
request in the current worklist.
The default for the ending date field is the date and time this window was
opened.
6. Select Continue.
The system sends all results to the LIS that match the criteria you defined.
Sending Selected Results to an LIS

2. Select Summary.
3. At the Worklist Summary window, select the results you want to send to the
LIS.
Refer to Selecting Multiple Samples or Tests page 2-64.
4. Select LIS Communications.
5. At the Worklist LIS Communications window, select Send All Selected
Results.
6. Select Continue.
The system sends all selected results, except results on hold, to the LIS.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-77
Deleting Results
Use this procedure to delete results.
Before deleting a worklist, ensure that the system has posted all results
from the worklist. If you delete a worklist while the system is posting results from
that worklist, the system may stop processing samples.
NOTE:
NOTE: You must have the appropriate level of security to access Data
Administration.
Do not delete results or worklists if the system is in the Cleaning Failed

state. Ensure that the system is in the Ready or the Warming Up state and then
delete the results or worklists.
NOTE:
1. At the workspace, select Setup.

2. Select Data Administration.
3. At the Setup Data Administration window, select Worklist.
CAUTION
Use care when deleting results. Deleting results permanently removes the results
from the database.
CAUTION
NOTE: When you delete a worklist from an open control-bracketed test, the
system does not close the bracket. The system discards any retained patient
results. However, it does not delete the controls.
4. Select Delete.
5. At the Setup Data Administration Options window, you can delete the entire
worklist or part of the worklist:
Select Delete Entire Worklist to request the deletion of the entire

worklist.
Continue with step 6.
Select Delete Selected Worklist to request deletion of part of the

worklist.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-78
Select the date ranges and tests that you want to delete from the current or
the historical worklist.
If you want to delete . . .
Then . . .
results for all tests in the current

worklist,
in result, select Current and in Test, select All.
results for a specific test in the

current worklist,
in result, select Current and in Test, select the test

for the results you want to delete.
results for all tests in the

historical worklist,
in result, select Historical and in Test, select All.
results for a specific test in the

historical worklist,
in result, select Historical and in Test select the test

for the results you want to delete.
all results for all tests,
in result, select Current & Historical and in Test,

select All.
all results for a selected test,
in result, select Current & Historical and in Test,

select the test for the results you want to delete.
For the dates, the worklist, and the tests you selected, you can also select the
status of the results you want to delete.
If you want to delete . . .
Then . . .
pending requests,
Select Pending.
tests that have results,
Select Resulted.
printed results,
Select Printed.
results that were sent to the LIS,
Select Sent.
6. Select Continue to begin the deletion.
Printing Results
The system offers 3 printed report types for managing patient results:
Results Report
Test Report
Runtime Report
When you select a report, the system displays the options for that report type.
Printing Results by Sample

The Results Report is a report of all results for samples in a specific date range
according to the specified view and sort options.
NOTE: Changing the display order of a test does not change the print order in the
worklist report.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-79

3. At the Print Report Options window, select Results Report.
4. Enter the starting and ending date, view, and sort.
Select Save as Default to save the selections as default selections.
View determines the information that is printed. You can select 1 of the following
options:
Results requests with results
Pending Tests requests that do not have results
All all requests
Stats Stat requests with results
Results Discarded requests with discarded test results for a

control-bracketed test
The Results Discarded list can help you locate and reload control-bracketed
test samples that require repeat testing. Refer to Reasons for Discarded
Results page 2-43.
NOTE: Ensure that you print the Results Discarded list before selecting
Repeat at the Worklist Summary window. When you select Repeat at the
Worklist Summary window, the printed Results Discarded list is no longer
available.
Sort determines the order in which the data is printed. You can select 1 of the
following options:
RLU Measured in chronological order by the time when the system

generated the RLU measurements for the results
SID in ascending alphanumeric order by the sample identifier (SID)
Rack in ascending alphanumeric order by the rack identifier
Test in alphabetical order by test name
Printing Results by Test

The Test Report is a report of all results for tests that are defined on the system.
3. At the Print Report Options window, select Test Report.
4. Enter the starting and ending date, test, and sort.
Select Save as Default to save the selections as default selections.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
2-80

Results are collated by calibration, starting with the earliest calibration. This
report can include all results stored by the system.
Sort determines the order in which the data is printed. You can select 1 of the
following options:
RLU Measured in chronological order by the time when the system

generated the RLU measurements for the results
Interpretation in alphabetical order by the interpretation of the results
Resetting the Page Numbers for Runtime Reports

The Runtime Report prints sample results as they are generated by the system if
Automatic Runtime Results Report is selected at the Setup Print Options
window. Refer to Specifying Print Options page 8-49.
At the Print Report Options window, you can restart the page numbers for the
runtime report. For example, you can restart the page numbers at the beginning
of each day, or at the beginning of each shift in your laboratory.
3. At the Print Report Options window, select Runtime Report.
4. Select Reset Page Numbers.
Printing Notes
When you turn off or disconnect the printer at your system, ensure that you
deselect the Automatic Runtime Results Report option at the Setup Print
Options window and do not request any other printed report.
If the ADVIA Centaur XP system responds to an automatic or manual print
request when your printer is turned off or disconnected, a software error can
occur.
If you request a printed report when no printer is available, use the following
procedure to cancel the print request:
2. Select Cancel Reports.
If you want to stop printing reports and you select Cancel Reports, printing does
not stop until everything in the printer buffer prints.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Calibration
3 Calibration
Using a Master Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Performing a 2-point Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
Referencing Serum Calibration for T Uptake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Understanding Calibration Evaluation Criteria . . . . . . . 3-4

Using Defined Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Using Observed Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Retained Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Autoexcluding Calibration Replicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Defining a Master Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Using the Barcode Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10
Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11
Procedural Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Deleting A Master Curve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Defining Calibrator Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Adding a New Calibrator Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14
Using the Barcode Scanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
Deleting a Calibrator Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Performing Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16

Reviewing Calibration Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Reviewing Calibration History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Scheduling Calibrators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18
Scheduling Calibrations for Control-bracketed Tests. . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Scheduling Calibrators for a Multicomponent Assay . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Managing Calibration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Reviewing Calibration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20
Excluding a Calibrator RLU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23
Waiving a Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24
Waiving a Calibration at the Calibration Summary Window . . . . .3-24
Waiving a Calibration at the Calibration Data Window . . . . . . . . .3-25
Accepting an Invalid Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25

Assigning a Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25
Managing Calibrations Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26
No Current Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Current Valid Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26
Expired Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27
Printing Calibration Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27
078D1064-01 Rev. C
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Calibration
The ADVIA Centaur XP system uses a Master Curve and a 2-point,
operator-initiated calibration to calibrate qualitative and quantitative assays. The
Master Curve and the 2-point calibration method eliminate the need to measure a
full standard curve or to include a calibration each time the assay is performed.
Using a Master Curve

The Master Curve is part of the manufacturing process for each assay lot number.
Measuring the RLU response at multiple concentration levels is the means of
performing full standard curves on lot numbers. The standard concentrations and
corrected RLUs define the shape of the curve for a particular assay lot number.
The manufacturing process uses reagents from a specific lot to generate a Master
Curve by performing the assay on standards of varying concentrations on multiple
systems over several days. The ensuing standard curve determines the relationship
between the defined analyte levels and the RLUs. These concentrations and RLUs
become the lot-specific Master Curve and Siemens provides them as barcodes on
the Master Curve Card.
The Master Curve for a competitive assay has a negative slope, which indicates
that the analyte concentration is inversely proportional to the light emission in
RLUs.
1
2

Figure 3-1
Master Curve Competitive Assay
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-2
The Master Curve for a sandwich assay has a positive slope, which indicates that
the analyte concentration is directly proportional to the light emission in RLUs.
1
2

Figure 3-2
Master Curve Sandwich Assay
Performing a 2-point Calibration

To minimize instrument-to-instrument variability and variability due to
environmental factors and reagent age, you must perform a 2-point calibration at
regular intervals. The calibration interval is assay specific. Refer to the
To perform a 2-point calibration on the system, you process replicates for 2
calibrators of known value. If the calibrators meet defined validity criteria, the
system compares the average RLUs for each calibrator to the Master Curve and
determines a system-specific formula. The system then adjusts the observed
RLUs to the Master Curve according to this formula:
adjusted RLUs =
observed RLUs defined slope + defined intercept
When patient samples or quality control samples are assayed using a quantitative
assay, the system matches the adjusted RLU value to its corresponding analyte
concentration using the Master Curve.
Qualitative assays have a cut-off point that remains constant for each lot number
of reagent. The manufacturer establishes this cut-off during product development
and bases it on extensive population studies. Manufacturing assigns the analyte
concentration associated with the cut-off as, for example, an index value of 1.0.
See the method specific product insert for the method cut-off value.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-3
The RLU relative to the cut-off is the basis for a Master Curve consisting of 6 to
10 standards. The cut-off or index value is represented as a specific level on the
Master Curve in Figure 3-3.
1
2
3
4
5
Frequency
Nonreactive
Reactive
Cutoff
Index
Figure 3-3
Qualitative Assay Cut-off Point
As with quantitative assays, the assay is calibrated using 2 calibrators of

known value in replicate. If the calibrators meet defined validity criteria, then the
system compares the calibrator RLUs to the Master Curve and determines an
instrument-specific correction formula. When the system assays patient or quality
control samples, the RLUs the system reads are adjusted by the formula derived
from the 2 known calibrators. The system compares the sample RLUs to the
calibration curve, and determines the RLU associated index value.
See the method specific insert for the interpretation of results rule for the method.
For example, the method may have the following interpretation of results.
If the index value is greater or equal to 1.0, the system interprets the sample as
reactive.
If the index value is less than 1.0, the system interprets the sample as
nonreactive.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-4
Referencing Serum Calibration for T Uptake

The T Uptake assay on the system provides an indirect measure of the number of
unoccupied binding sites on thyroxine-binding proteins in a sample. In this assay,
a direct relationship exists between the RLUs the system detects and the number
of binding sites available on the thyroxine-binding proteins. This means a higher
T Uptake ratio when fewer free binding sites exist and a lower ratio when more
free binding sites exist.
The T Uptake Master Curve Card provides only lot number and expiration date
for the assay reagents. A Master Curve is not necessary for the T Uptake assay
because it is a ratio test. The T Uptake assay compares the control and patient
sample uptake results with a euthyroid reference serum of known uptake, such as
Calibrator A.
The T Uptake assay on the system uses Low Calibrator A as follows:
T Uptake ratio =
(Calibrator A RLUs/Unknown RLUs) * reference serum factor
The reference serum factor is printed on the Calibrator Assigned Value Card
provided with Calibrator A.
To report results as % T Uptake, the system requires a % T Uptake reference
(normal) range. The system multiplies the T Uptake ratio by the midpoint of the %
T Uptake reference range to obtain % T Uptake results.
For example, if the % T Uptake reference range is defined as 25 to 35%
(midpoint of 30) and a sample has a T Uptake ratio of 0.82, the system calculates
the % T Uptake as follows:
0.82 30 = 24.6%
The system reports 24.6% as the % T Uptake.
Understanding Calibration Evaluation Criteria

The ADVIA Centaur XP system evaluates a calibration using values entered from
the Master Curve Card when you define a Master Curve for a reagent lot. The
Master Curve definition includes the standard concentrations and related RLUs
and target values used by the system to evaluate calibration data. The system
defines Target values (ranges) for acceptable CV, ratio, slope, and calibrator
deviation. The system determines a valid calibration based on whether the
calibration data is within these defined ranges and system calculated observed
ranges.
Use the Calibration Evaluation Ranges window to review values, review ranges,
and review flags for the selected calibration. Refer to the ADVIA Centaur Assay
Manual.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-5
To open the Calibration Evaluation Ranges window, perform the following

steps:
1. At the workspace, select Calibration > Data.
2. Select Evaluation Ranges.
The values on the Calibration Evaluation Ranges window
Slope is a comparison of high and low calibrator RLUs to the Master Curve.
This value describes the relationship of the RLUs expected from the Master
Curve data to the measured calibrator RLUs.
Slope = (High Cal Expected RLU - Low Cal Expected RLU)/
(High Cal Measured RLU - Low Cal Measured RLU
Ratio is a comparison of low and high calibrator RLUs.

For sandwich assays, this value is the difference between the mean RLU value
of the high calibrator and the mean RLU value of the low calibrator divided
by the mean RLU value of the low calibrator.
Ratio = (High Cal Mean RLU - Low Cal Mean RLU)/
Low Cal Mean RLU
For competitive assays, this value is the difference between the mean RLU
value of the low calibrator and the mean RLU value of the high calibrator
divided by the mean RLU value of the high calibrator.
Ratio = (Low Cal Mean RLU - High Cal Mean)/High Cal Mean
The low and high cal deviations are a measure of how well the high and the
low calibrator RLUs fit the Master Curve.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-6
These values are a relative measure of the deviation of the average RLUs of
the low calibrator and the high calibrator from the Master Curve.
1
2
3
4
5
RLUs
High cal deviation
Master curve
Low cal deviation
Concentration
Figure 3-4
Master Curve and Low/High Deviations
CV is the precision of the calibrator replicates based on RLUs.
Acceptable CV is the maximum CV that is acceptable for a valid calibration.

The percent coefficient of variation (CV) of the individual calibrator
replicates must not exceed a defined acceptable value. This is the first
criterion that the system checks after performing a calibration.
Critical Precision determines whether an outlier is too far out to automatically

exclude it.
Using Defined Ranges

The defined ranges are the values for Slope, Ratio, Low Cal Deviation, and High
Cal Deviation you enter from the Master Curve Card when you define a Master
Curve for a reagent lot. The system always uses these values to evaluate
calibrations, even when the system provides observed ranges. Because these
ranges are reagent lot specific, the relatively narrow limits of the ranges ensure
quality calibration monitoring.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-7
Using Observed Ranges

After performing 4 valid calibrations for a reagent lot and calibrator lot
combination, the system calculates observed ranges for Slope, Ratio, Low Cal
Deviation, and High Cal Deviation. When you perform subsequent calibrations
using the same reagent lot and calibrator lot combination, the system compares
results to the defined ranges from the Master Curve definition and also to the
observed ranges determined by the system. The system recalculates observed
ranges with each valid calibration.
Whenever you use a new reagent lot or calibrator lot, observed ranges do not
apply until the system performs 4 new valid calibrations for the new reagent lot
and calibrator lot combination and establishes new observed ranges. The system
must also establish new ranges for the following reasons:
whenever a calibration expires because the test definition is updated
whenever a field service representative resets the system after replacing a

major hardware component
Because the observed ranges are specific for your system, they are narrower than
the defined ranges and therefore increase the quality of calibration monitoring
over the defined ranges. Whenever a calibration is outside of the observed ranges
but within the defined ranges, you can accept the calibration.
Figure 3-5 shows both defined and observed ranges.
1 4 First 4 valid calibrations

5
Observed ranges begin
6
Valid calibration
7 8 Invalid calibrations
Figure 3-5
Defined and Observed Ranges
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-8
In Figure 3-5, the first 4 calibrations (14) of a reagent lot and calibrator lot
combination are valid. The system begins calculating observed ranges (5) after the
fourth valid calibration. Given this information, you can interpret the following
information correctly:
The point labeled 6 is a valid calibration because it is within the observed

range.
The point labeled 7 is an invalid calibration because it is outside of the

defined range.
The point labeled 8 is an invalid calibration because it is outside of the

observed range.
Retained Calibration
To reduce unnecessary adjustments from calibration to calibration that can cause
minor calibration drift or trends, you can use the Retain Cal feature. The Retain
Cal feature retains a previously valid calibration to calculate patient and control
results. Select the Retain Cal option at the Test Calibration window. Refer to
Defining Calibration Options page 8-16.
For the first 4 calibrations of a reagent lot and calibrator lot combination, the
system gathers statistical data and uses these calibrations, in turn until expiration,
to calculate results. When you select the Retain Cal option, at the fifth and
subsequent calibrations the system can use data from a previous valid calibration
to calculate results if the new calibration is not statistically different from that
previous calibration.
When the system uses data from a previous calibration to calculate results, the
calibration interval expiration date is based on the date of the new calibration. The
system continues to use the same data to calculate results as long as calibrations
do not statistically differ from the retained calibration. When a new calibration is
not statistically different from a previous valid calibration, it meets the retained
calibration limits.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-9
If a new calibration does not meet the retained calibration limits, the system uses
the new calibration to calculate results and set the calibration interval expiration
date. The system repeats the process until you use a new reagent lot or calibrator
lot. The process starts over with 4 new valid calibrations as in Figure 3-6.
1-4
5-7
First 4 valid calibrations

Valid calibrations in the observed range
Figure 3-6
Defined and Observed Ranges
In Figure 3-6, the first 4 calibrations (1-4) of a reagent lot and calibrator lot
combination are valid. The system calculates observed ranges after the fourth
valid calibration.
When the fifth calibration is a valid calibration that is not statistically different
from the fourth calibration, the system retains the fourth calibration and uses it to
calculate results. The system bases the calibration interval expiration date on the
date of this (fifth) calibration.
The sixth calibration is a valid calibration that is statistically different from the
fourth calibration. The system uses data from this calibration to calculate results
and set the calibration interval expiration date.
The seventh calibration is a valid calibration that is not statistically different from
the sixth calibration, so the system retains the sixth calibration and uses it to
calculate results. The system bases the calibration interval expiration date on the
date of this (seventh) calibration.
The system bases the calibration interval expiration date on the date of this
(seventh) calibration.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-10
Autoexcluding Calibration Replicates

When you select Autoexclude Cal Replicates at the Test Calibration window,
the system evaluates the calibrator results for all replicates and excludes replicates
based on Master Curve definition and test definition parameters. To evaluate
calibrator replicates, the system performs the following steps:
1. The system checks the CV of the replicates.
2. If the CV of the replicates exceeds the defined Acceptable CV, the system
checks for an outlier.
3. If the system finds an outlier (replicate causing the unacceptable CV), it
then checks the critical precision. The critical precision is a value in the
Master Curve definition used by the system to determine whether an outlier is
too far out to exclude it.
If the deviation of an outlier does not exceed the critical precision limit,
the system excludes it and re-evaluates the calibration criteria.
If the deviation of an outlier exceeds the critical precision limit, the

system cannot exclude the replicate and the calibration is invalid.
The system excludes as many replicates as needed to obtain a valid calibration;

however, the system ensures that the minimum number of replicates defined in the
test definition are included in the calibration.
Defining a Master Curve

Each ADVIA Centaur XP assay kit includes a Master Curve Card that lists the
analyte concentration and the RLUs for each Master Curve point. The Master
Curve is entered into the system with each new lot number of reagent. You can use
the barcode scanner or the keyboard to define the Master Curve.
Using the Barcode Scanner

LASER WARNING
1. At the workspace, select Calibration.
2. Select Master Curve Definition.
3. At the Calibration Master Curve Definition window, select Scan Data.
NOTE: You can delete a Master Curve if no calibrations are run against the
Master Curve.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-11
4. Scan the barcodes on the Master Curve Card from top to bottom.
Master curve card barcodes
Figure 3-7
Master Curve Card
5. Select Save.
Using the Keyboard

3. At the Calibration Master Curve Definition window, select Add.
4. Enter the Master Curve values.
Master Curve values are displayed on the picture of the Calibration Master
Curve Definition window on the Master Curve Card:
a. Select a test.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-12
b. Enter the lot number and the expiration date.

c. Enter the stability data.
Manual entry of information into the Stability Data field requires 12
digits. Enter the 3 digit stability data on the Master Curve Card and follow
it with 9 zeros (0).
d. Enter a concentration value and an RLU value.
e. Select Save Value.
f.
Repeat steps c. and d. to enter additional values for concentration and

RLU.
g. Enter the remaining values.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-13
Positions of Ratio and Slope on the Master Curve Card are reversed from
those positions on the user interface. When manually entering the
information, be sure to enter the information into the correct field.
1
2
Calibration Master Curve Definition window values

Calibration Lot Details window values
Figure 3-8
Master Curve Card
5. Enter the values for lot-specific components, if necessary:

a. Select Details.
b. At the Calibration Lot Details window, enter the values from the Master
Curve Card.
c. Select Continue.
6. At the Calibration Master Curve Definition window, select Save.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-14
Procedural Notes
Manual entry of information into the Stability Data field requires 12 digits.
Enter the 3-digit stability data on the Master Curve Card and follow it with 9
zeros (0).
Positions of Ratio and Slope on the Master Curve Card are reversed from
those positions on the user interface. When manually entering the
information, ensure you enter the information into the correct field.
Deleting A Master Curve

CAUTION
Do not process samples for a test and reagent lot combination after deleting a
Master Curve for that test unless you reboot the system. If you do not reboot the
system before running that test, the system may continue processing the samples
and never release the results or the system may require a software reload.
Use this procedure to delete a Master Curve before calibrations have been
performed against it. For example, if you typed incorrect information into 1 of the
fields and selected Save before you noticed the error, you can delete the Master
Curve and start over.
3. At the Calibration Master Curve Definition window, select the test and lot
number.
4. Select Delete.
This button is not available if a calibration has been performed for the Master
Curve.
5. Select Yes.
Defining Calibrator Values

This section contains information about adding or deleting calibrator definitions.
Adding a New Calibrator Definition

Use this procedure to add a new calibrator definition or to enter calibrator values
for a new lot number of calibrator material. Each Calibrator Kit includes a
Calibrator Assigned Value Card that provides the calibrator values for each
analyte in the low and high calibrators. You can use the barcode scanner or the
keyboard to enter the calibrator values.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-15
Using the Barcode Scanner

LASER WARNING
2. Select Calibrator Definition.
3. At the Calibration Calibrator Definition window, select Scan Data.
4. Scan the barcodes on the Calibrator Assigned Value Card.
5. Ensure that the calibrator values are correct.
NOTE: After you select Save, you cannot add or delete a test from a
calibrator definition.
6. Select Save.
Using the Keyboard

3. At the Calibration Calibrator Definition window, select Add.
4. Enter the calibrator, the lot number, the expiration date, the LIS Code, and the
checksum.
5. In the fields below the table, enter the calibrator values from the Calibrator
Assigned Value Card.
6. Select a test.
a. Select Test.
The Test Selection window displays.
b. Select a test.
c. Select Continue to close the Test Selection window
7. At the Calibration Calibrator Definition window, enter the low
concentration value and the high concentration value.
8. Select Save Test.
9. Repeat steps 6 through 8 for each test.
10. Ensure that the calibrator values are correct.
NOTE: After you select Save, you cannot add or delete a test from a
calibrator definition. If you save an incorrect value, you must delete the
calibrator definition and then reenter the test information.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-16
11. Select Save.
Deleting a Calibrator Definition

3. At the Calibration Calibrator Definition window, select a calibrator name
and lot number.
CAUTION
Use care when deleting a calibrator definition. Deleting a calibrator definition

permanently removes all associated calibration data and sample results from the
database.
4. Select Delete.
5. Select Yes.
Performing Calibrations
Use the procedures in this section to review the status of calibrations and to
schedule a calibration. Calibration intervals are assay specific. Refer to the
NOTE: If you load the low and high calibrators on the system while the system is
calibrating the TUp assay with other assays using Calibrator A, the system
displays the high calibrator in the pending view of the Worklist Summary
window. Ignore TUp high calibrators in the pending view.
Reviewing Calibration Status

You can use the Calibration Summary window to review the status and due
dates of calibrations. To open the Calibration Summary window from the
workspace, select Calibration and then select Summary.
The system calculates the next due date by adding the calibration interval to the
date of the most recent calibration
Calibration Status
Description
Cal Required
No valid calibration exists for the reagent lot. Schedule a

Current
The calibration is valid. The system uses this calibration to

calculate results.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-17
Calibration Status
Description
Due
The calibration interval for the test expires within 24 hours

or within 25% of the calibration interval whichever is shorter.
Schedule a calibration at the Worklist Schedule window.
You can waive a calibration with a Due status at the
Calibration Summary window if you select Waive Cal at
the Test Calibration window.
Expired
The calibration for the reagent lot expired. Schedule a

calibration at the Worklist Schedule window. You can waive
an expired calibration at the Calibration Summary or
Calibration Data windows if you select Waive Cal at the
Test Calibration window.
Invalid
The calibration exceeded either the defined or the observed

range for 1 or more calibration expected values. Schedule
another calibration at the Worklist Schedule window.
No Master Curve
No Master Curve exists for the reagent lot. Define a Master

Curve at the Calibration Master Curve Definition window,
and then schedule a calibration at the Worklist Schedule
window.
Operator Accepted
An operator accepted a calibration that was outside the

observed ranges but within the defined ranges.
Waived
A calibration expired and an operator waived the calibration.

Schedule a calibration at the Worklist Schedule window as
soon as possible.
You can display specific information by selecting the appropriate View and Sort:
The View that you select determines the information that the system displays.
For example, if you select All Tests, the system displays calibration
information for all the tests.
The Sort that you select determines the order in which the system displays the
calibrations.
For example, if you select Status, the system displays the tests in reverse
chronological order starting with expired calibrations, calibrations that are
due, and then current calibrations.
perform some routine calibration tasks:
Task
View
Sort
Display, in order of calibration status, the calibration

information for all tests
All Tests
Status
Display, in alphabetical order of test, the calibration

information for all tests
All Tests
Test
Display, in order of calibration status, the calibration

information for tests using reagents that are currently loaded
on the system
Available
Reagents
Status
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-18
Task
View
Sort
Display, in alphabetical order of test, the calibration

information for tests using reagents that are currently loaded
on the system
Available
Reagents
Test
Display the calibration history for a reagent lot and

calibrator lot combination for a specific test
Historical
Reviewing Calibration History

When you select Historical for the View at the Calibration Summary window,
you can display all the calibration information for a reagent lot and calibrator lot
combination for a specific test. You can use this information for troubleshooting.
Status
Description
Invalid
The calibration exceeds either the defined or the observed

range for 1 or more calibration expected values. Schedule
Valid
The calibration is within the observed or defined ranges.
Valid, Operator
Accepted
An operator accepted a calibration that was outside the

observed ranges but within the defined ranges.
Valid, using Date of the

Retained Calibration
The status the system displays in the historical view of the

Calibration Summary window for a Valid, Met Retained
Cal Limits calibration.
Waived

soon as possible.
Waived, using Date of

the Retained
Calibration
The status the system displays in the historical view of the

Calibration Summary window for a Valid, Met Retained
Cal Limits calibration that expired and then was waived.
Scheduling Calibrators
Calibrate an assay in the following instances:
the calibration interval expires
a calibration is invalid
you use a new lot of assay reagents
controls are repeatedly out of range
CAUTION
Do not schedule and load the calibrators before processing the end-of-bracket
controls of an open bracket for control-bracketed tests. If you schedule and load
calibrators for a control-bracketed test and the system aspirates a calibrator before
processing the end-of-bracket controls, the system discards any retained patient
test results.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-19
For all tests, you must load the reagent lot you want to calibrate before you
schedule a calibrator.
2. Select Schedule.
3. At the Worklist Schedule window, select Calibrator.
4. Select how you want the system to identify the calibrator:

5. Select or enter a test for the calibrator.
If you use the keyboard to enter the test in the Test field, you must enter the
test name exactly as it is displayed on the schedule window.
The system automatically displays the calibrators previously defined for the
test. You define the calibrator SIDs at the Calibration Calibrator Definition
window.
Calibrators do not display in the following situations:
calibrators are not defined
Master Curves are not defined
no reagent is onboard
the calibration material for defined lots is expired
6. Select a calibrator.
When scheduling by SID, select the appropriate SID. The system fills in
the Rack ID.
When scheduling by Rack, you can select specific racks for the
calibrators.
7. You can select a reagent lot.

8. If you schedule by rack, enter the Rack ID in Rack.
The Rack ID consists of 4 numbers (00019999) followed by a letter (AE).
9. Select Save.
10. Repeat steps 4 through 9 to schedule additional tests for a calibrator.
11. Load low and high calibrators in a rack.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-20
Scheduling Calibrations for Control-bracketed Tests

When processing control-bracketed tests, ensure that the minimum time interval
for calibrations is at least 2 hours over the time entered in the Control Warning
field at the Test Definition window. If you do not, the system does not process
the test.
If the calibration for a control-bracketed test is invalid, do not schedule controls to
start a new bracket until the system processes a valid calibration.
If you schedule a calibration and schedule a control-bracketed test without waiting
for the calibration results, if the calibration is not valid, your controls are also
invalid.
If a bracket is open, ensure that you schedule and load the end-of-bracket controls
that close the bracket before loading any calibrators. If the system aspirates a
calibrator before aspirating the end-of-bracket controls of an open bracket, the
system discards any retained patient test results.
Scheduling Calibrators for a Multicomponent Assay

Schedule calibrators individually for all the component tests of a multicomponent
test.
Managing Calibration Data

This section contains information about reviewing calibration data, excluding a
calibrator RLU, waiving a calibration, accepting invalid calibrations, and
examples of step for managing calibration problems.
Reviewing Calibration Data

Use the Calibration Data window to review the details of a calibration, such as
replicate results, status messages, and flags. To open the Calibration Data
window from the workspace, select Calibration and then select Data.
Calibration Status
Description
Expired
The calibration for the reagent lot expired. Schedule a

calibration at the Worklist Schedule window. You can waive
an expired calibration at the Calibration Summary or
Calibration Data windows if you select Waive Cal at the
Test Calibration window.
Expired, Retained
The calibration for the reagent lot expired, and then the system
retained the calibration. The system uses this calibration to
calculate results.
Invalid, Exceeded
Defined Ranges
The calibration exceeds the defined range for 1 or

more calibration expected values. Ranges display at the
Calibration Evaluation Ranges window. Schedule another
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-21
Calibration Status
Description
Invalid, Exceeded
Observed Ranges
The calibration exceeds the observed range for 1 or

more calibration expected values. Ranges display at the
Calibration Evaluation Ranges window. You can accept the
calibration at the Calibration Data window if you select
Accept Cal at the Test Calibration window.
Valid
The calibration was within the observed or defined ranges.
Valid,
Met Retained Cal
Limits
This calibration sets the expiration date and points to the

retained calibration used to calculate results. The values of this
calibration are almost mathematically identical to the values of
a previous (retained) calibration.
Valid,
Operator Accepted
An operator accepted a calibration that is outside the observed

ranges but within the defined ranges.
Valid,
Operator Accepted,
Retained
An operator accepted a calibration, and then the system

retained the calibration. The system uses this retained
calibration to calculate results.
Valid, Retained
The system uses this calibration to calculate results. The values

of this calibration are almost mathematically identical to the
most recent calibration.
Waived

soon as possible.
The following flags display at the Calibration Data window:

Flag
Description
Bad Replicate
One of the replicates was bad due to signal error. You can
manually exclude the replicate at the Calibration Data window
if you have processed more than the minimum number of
replicates and Autoexclude Cal Replicates is not selected at
the Test Calibration window. If you cannot manually exclude
the replicate, schedule another calibration at the Worklist
Schedule window.
Cal Accepted
An operator accepted a calibration that was outside the observed

ranges but within the defined ranges.
Cal Timeout
One of the replicates was processed after the time allowed for an
acceptable calibration. Schedule another calibration at the
Excluded
An operator excluded a calibrator replicate RLU. You can view

or include the replicate RLU at the Calibration Data window.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-22
Flag
Description
Failed Critical Limit
The system could not exclude a calibrator replicate because

it exceeded the critical precision limit defined at the
Calibration Master Curve Definition window. You can
manually exclude the replicate at the Calibration Data window
if you have processed more than the minimum number of
replicates and Autoexclude Cal Replicates is not selected at the
Test Calibration window. If you cannot manually exclude the
replicate, schedule another calibration at the Worklist
Schedule window.
Failed Defined High

Cal Deviation
The calibration exceeded the high calibrator deviation that is

Schedule another calibration at the Worklist Schedule
window.
Failed Defined Low

Cal Deviation
The calibration exceeded the low calibrator deviation that is

Schedule another calibration at the Worklist Schedule
window.
Failed Defined Ratio The calibration is outside the range for the ratio that is defined
at the Calibration Master Curve Definition window. Schedule
Failed Defined
Slope
The calibration is outside the range for the slope that is defined
at the Calibration Master Curve Definition window. Schedule
Failed Observed
High Cal Deviation
The calibration exceeded the high calibrator deviation that is

calculated by the system. Schedule another calibration at the
Failed Observed
Low Cal Deviation
The calibration exceeded the low calibrator deviation that is

calculated by the system. Schedule another calibration at the
Failed Observed
Ratio
The calibration is outside the range for the ratio that is

calculated by the system. Schedule another calibration at
Failed Observed
Slope
The calibration is outside the range for the slope that is

calculated by the system. Schedule another calibration at
Failed % Neut
The neutralizing reagent did not reduce the assay signal for the
high calibrator to the defined level. Schedule another calibration
at the Worklist Schedule window.
Failed Rgt A
Stability
The calibration did not yield the expected results for the
Reagent A stability check. Schedule another calibration at
Failed Rgt B Ratio
The calibration did not yield the expected results for the
Reagent B ratio check. Schedule another calibration at the
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-23
Flag
Description
High CV
The CV (coefficient of variation) for the replicates of the

calibrator is above the acceptable CV entered in the Master
Curve definition. You can manually exclude a replicate at the
Calibration Data window if you have processed more than the
minimum number of replicates and Autoexclude Cal Replicates
is not selected at the Test Calibration window. If you cannot
manually exclude a replicate, schedule another calibration at
Rgt A
High Cal CV
The CV (coefficient of variation) for the high calibrator

replicate RLU values for Reagent A was too large. Schedule
Rgt A
Low Cal CV
The CV (coefficient of variation) for the low calibrator replicate

RLU values for Reagent A was too large. Schedule another
Rgt B
High Cal CV
The CV (coefficient of variation) for the high calibrator

replicate RLU values for Reagent B was too large. Schedule
Rgt B
Low Cal CV
The CV (coefficient of variation) for the low calibrator replicate

RLU values for Reagent B was too large. Schedule another
System Excluded
The system automatically excluded a calibrator replicate RLU.

This flag only displays if Autoexclude Cal Replicates is selected
at the Test Calibration window.
Too Few Replicates
The number of acceptable replicate results is less than the

number required to calibrate the test. The minimum number of
acceptable replicates is defined at the Test Calibration
window. Schedule another calibration at the Worklist
Schedule window.
Excluding a Calibrator RLU

You can exclude calibrator RLUs that exceed the defined ranges. The system
automatically recalculates the calibration data and rechecks the calibration
criteria. RLUs are only excluded if more replicate results exist than the minimum
number of replicates defined in the test definition.
Further investigation may be appropriate to determine the cause of the outlier. You
can have the system autoexclude calibrator RLUs or the operator can manually
exclude them. You must have the appropriate level of security to change these
settings. Refer to Defining Calibration Options page 8-16.
You can manually exclude calibrator RLUs at the Calibration Data window if
you do not select Autoexclude Cal Replicates at the Test Calibration window. To
manually exclude calibrator RLUs use the following procedure:
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-24
2. Select Data.
3. At the Calibration Data window, select the test and the test lot number.
4. Select the calibration date in Calibrated.
5. Review the calibrator RLUs.
6. Select the calibrator RLU from the table.
7. Select Exclude.
8. At the Comments window, enter a comment.
You can enter up to 3 comments. Comments can be up to 120 alphanumeric
characters. The system enters your initials and the date. If you are not
currently signed in, you must sign in to the system.
9. Select Save at the Comments window.
The Comments window closes.
10. Close and reopen the Calibration Data window to display the symbol
indicating that the calibrator RLU is excluded.
11. If required, you can select Include and then select Save to include an
excluded calibrator RLU in the calibration.
Waiving a Calibration
CAUTION
Do not waive calibrations unnecessarily. Waiving Cals repeatedly may cause

misreported results.
When the calibration interval for a test expires while samples are in process, you
can finish processing samples scheduled for the test by waiving the calibration.
Use the Waive Cal option only when tests are Inprocess.
The system calculates results for the samples and displays the results for the test
as Waived. You must have the appropriate level of security to waive a calibration
and you must select Waive Cal at the Test Calibration window.
When you waive a calibration, enter a comment and recalibrate immediately after
this. Waiving calibrations repeatedly may cause misreported results. A waived
calibration remains waived until the next calibration interval.
Waiving a Calibration at the Calibration Summary Window

2. Select Summary.
3. In the table at the Calibration Summary window, select the most recently
expired calibration for the test.
4. Select Waive.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-25
Waiving a Calibration at the Calibration Data Window

2. Select Data.
4. Select the calibration date of the most recently expired calibration in
Calibrated.
5. Select Waive.
Accepting an Invalid Calibration

You can accept an invalid calibration that falls outside of the observed range
but is within the defined range. The system calculates results for the samples and
displays the results for the test as Cal Accepted. You must have the appropriate
level of security to accept an invalid calibration and you must enable Accept Cal
at the Test Calibration window.
NOTE: If an invalid calibration is accepted, the Verify message displays at the
Worklist Summary window.

2. Select Data.
4. Select the most recent calibration date in Calibrated.
5. Select Accept.
Assigning a Calibration
If a calibration is invalid, you can assign a valid calibration to samples that the
system processed with that invalid calibration. You can assign the last valid
calibration or recalibrate and assign the next valid calibration. The system
calculates results for the samples and displays the results for the test as Cal
Assigned.
You must have the appropriate level of security to assign a calibration to results
and you must enable Assign Cal at the Test Calibration window.
2. Select Summary.
3. At the Worklist Summary window, select a final result with RLU instead of
a concentration value in the result column.
4. Select Assign Cal.
5. At the Worklist Assign Calibration window, select the results to which you
want to assign a calibration.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-26
6. The system displays the sample SID for the result you selected at the Worklist
Summary window.
7. Select Continue.
8. At the Worklist Summary window, select Save.
Managing Calibrations Examples

The following are examples of specific sets of conditions and the available
options for those situations.
No Current Calibration
If all of the following conditions apply:
You have no current valid calibration for the reagent lot that you are using
because it is a new lot.
You process patient and control samples with calibrators.
You perform a calibration and the calibration is invalid because it exceeds

the defined ranges.
The system performs the following actions:
Stops aspirating samples for that test.
Continues with inprocess patient and control samples and displays RLUs
for results if Assign Cal is selected in the test definition.
You can perform the following actions to report patient results:
You must repeat the calibration and any patient and control samples that
were not processed.
The repeated calibration must be valid.
You can use the Assign Cal feature to assign the new valid calibration to
the patient and control samples with RLU results from the invalid calibration.
Control values that are within range indicate that the RLUs of patient samples
processed with the invalid calibration are accurate.
Current Valid Calibration

You have a valid calibration that is due to expire for the reagent lot that you
are using.

the defined ranges.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-27
for results if you selected Assign Cal in the test definition.
Because the calibration is still valid, you can use the Assign Cal feature to
assign the calibration to patient and control samples with RLU results from
the invalid calibration.
You must repeat any samples that were not aspirated with a rescheduled
calibration.
The repeated calibration must be valid. The system does not process samples
with requests for tests with an invalid calibration.
Expired Calibration
You have an expired calibration.

the defined ranges.
for results if Assign Cal is selected in the test definition.
You can waive the expired calibration and use the Assign Cal feature to assign
the waived calibration to the patient and control samples with RLU results
from the invalid calibration.
Printing Calibration Data

For additional information about operating the printer connected to your system,
refer to Printing Notes page 2-80.
3. At the Print Report Options window, select Calibration Data.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
3-28
4. Select a starting date and an ending date.

5. Press the Enter key.
Calibration instances within the selected date range display in the table below
the date fields.
6. To print all of the calibration data for the selected date range, select Print All.
7. To print data for 1 or more calibration instances, select the calibrations in the
table and then select Print Selection.
To select multiple adjacent calibrations, select the first calibration and

then hold down the Shift key while selecting the last calibration.
The system selects all calibrations in the table between and including the
first and the last selected calibration.
To select multiple non-adjacent calibrations, hold down the Ctrl key while
selecting each calibration.
If it is necessary to scroll to continue selecting multiple calibrations,
release the Shift or Ctrl key, scroll to the desired calibration, and then
again hold down the Shift or Ctrl key while selecting the calibration.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Quality Control
4 Quality Control
Adding a New Control Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Manually Entering Kit Control SID Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Entering Expected Values for a New Lot Number . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Deleting a Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
Lot Number and the Expiration Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Pool Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Entering the Test Name and Expected Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
Editing a QC Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4

Scheduling QC Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
Scheduling Controls for Control-bracketed Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
Modifying Test Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7
Clearing a No Request Message for End-of-Bracket Controls . . . . .4-8
Defining the Control Definition for a Multicomponent Test . . . . . 4-8

Scheduling Controls for Multicomponent Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
Exporting Quality Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Quality Control
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Using Quality Control Features

The ADVIA Centaur XP system allows you to define each control for use on the
system. The system has the following data storage capabilities:
allows you to define up to 50 tests per control

For example, for Ligand Plus 1 you can define up to 50 tests including TSH-3,
TSH, T3, T4, FT3, FrT4, and TUp.
allows you to define up to 300 controls
ability to store results for up to 10 lots of data for each test/control

combination
For example, for the ADVIA Centaur XP PSA assay you can define 10
different lot numbers of Ligand Plus level 1, Ligand Plus level 2, and Ligand
Plus level 3. This helps you manage transitions between lots of quality control
material.
Adding a New Control Definition

NOTE: Do not define QC ranges for ratio tests. This can cause the system to stop
processing samples.
Use this procedure to add a new control definition, including defining the tests for
the control and the expected control values for each test.
1. At the workspace, select Quality Control.
2. Select Control Definition.
3. At the Quality ControlControl Definition window, select Add.
4. Enter the name of the control.
For Routine controls, you can enter up to 11 alphanumeric characters for

the control name.
For Kit controls, you must enter 11 alphanumeric characters for the
control name or the system will not accept it.
Ensure that you enter the Kit control name exactly as displayed on the
barcode label card.
NOTE: Use only the barcode labels that are manufactured for the kit controls.
Do not create your own barcode labels. If you use a non-Siemens barcode
label, the system does not recognize the control as a kit control and does not
process it.
The name that you enter displays on the quality control windows.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
4-2
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Using Quality Control Features
NOTE: If you are adding a new control definition for a control-bracketed test,
ensure that you select Kit in the Type field. The system allows only the
kit-type format for a control SID in a control-bracketed test.

5. In the Type field, select Routine or Kit.
Routine controls are not provided with the assay reagent kits.
Control such as Ligand Plus or Tumor Marker Plus are routine controls.
Kit control have specific assay reagent kits.
NOTE: If you are defining a control that does not have a leading K in the
barcode, select SID and edit that field to match the barcode of the control. You
can select SID only after entering the lot number.
6. Enter the information for the new lot of control, such as type, lot, and
expiration date.
The lot number and the expiration date are located on the quality control
material packaging. You must enter a lot number and an expiration date to
save the control definition.
You can enter up to 7 characters for the lot number.
Enter the date in the format DD MMM YY, for example 26 Oct 99.
The system fills in the SID field with the control lot number preceded by K.
The SID can be up to 13 characters. If the control is a Routine type and your
QC SIDs are different than the lot number, you can edit the SID.
7. Select a Test:
a. Select the Test button.
The TestSelection window displays.
b. Select a test.
c. To close the TestSelection window, select Continue.
8. Enter the expected values.
10. Repeat steps 3 through 9 for all tests for the control.
NOTE: Ensure that you select all the component assays that are required in
the multicomponent control definition.

11. Select Save.
Manually Entering Kit Control SID Information

If the system cannot read a kit control barcode or if you run out of Siemens
barcode labels, use this procedure to manually enter the kit control SID.
1. At the workspace, select the Sample Status button.
2. At the Status Samples window, select the control with the No Barcode
status.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
4-3
3. Select Enter SID.

4. At the Status Enter SID window, select Control.
5. Select Kit.
6. Enter the SID.
7. Select Save.
Entering Expected Values for a New Lot Number

NOTE: The system does not allow you to edit the control definition of a kit
control, which is a type of control provided with specific assay reagent kits.
1. Select the name of the control, if required.
2. Select Edit.
3. Enter the information for the new lot of control, such as type, lot, and
expiration date.
Refer to Lot Number and the Expiration Date page 4-4.
4. Select a Test:
a. Select the Test button.
b. Select a test.
c. To close the TestSelection window, select Continue.
5. Enter the expected values.
7. Repeat steps 3 through 5 for all tests for the control.
8. Select Save.
Deleting a Control
3. Select the name of the control.
4. Select the information for the lot of control, such as lot and type.
CAUTION
Use care when deleting a test from a control definition. Deleting a test from a
control definition permanently removes all associated stored data and results from
the database.
5. Select Delete.
6. Select Yes.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
4-4
7. To delete a test from a control definition, select the test, and then select Delete
Test.
Lot Number and the Expiration Date

Locate the lot number and the expiration date on the quality control material
packaging. You must enter a lot number and an expiration date to save the control
definition.
You can enter up to 7 characters for the lot number.
Enter the date in the format DD MMM YY, for example 26 Oct 99.
The system fills in the SID field with the control lot number preceded by K. The
SID can be up to 13 characters. If the control is a Routine type and your QC SIDs
are different than the lot number, you can edit the SID.
Pool Number
You can enter up to 4 numbers for the pool number. For customers using the QC
Online service, the pool number is assigned by the service. If you use your own
quality control pools, you can assign a pool number to track results.
Entering the Test Name and Expected Values

In the fields below the table, select a test name and enter the QC expected values:
If you want to enter . . .
Then . . .
low and high limits,
enter the low and high expected value limits from the
expected values charts provided by the quality control
manufacturer.
The system automatically calculates the mean and 2SD
values when you select Save Test.
mean and 2SD,
enter the mean and 2SD values from the expected values
charts provided by the quality control material
manufacturer.
The system automatically calculates the low and high
limit values when you select Save Test.
Editing a QC Definition
Use this procedure to edit a QC definition:
3. At the Quality Control Control Definition window, select a control name
and a lot number.
4. Select Edit.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
4-5
5. Edit the QC definition.

CAUTION
Use care when deleting a test from a control definition. Deleting a test from a
control definition permanently removes all associated stored data and results from
the database.
Then . . .
edit the control

expected values,
a.
add tests to a defined

control,
Select a test in the table.
b. In the fields below the table, edit the low and high
limits, or edit the mean and 2SD values.
c.
Select Save Test.
a.
Select Test.
The Test Selection window displays.
b. Select a test.
c.
Select Continue to close the Test Selection window.
d. Enter the low and high limits or enter the mean and
2SD values.
e.
Select Save Test.
edit a pool number,
edit the pool number.

You can enter up to 4 numbers for the pool number. The pool
number is assigned by the QC Online service.
delete tests from a

control definition,
a.
Select a test in the table.
b. Select Delete Test.

c.
Select Yes.
6. Select Save.
Scheduling QC Samples
Use this procedure to schedule controls. As a minimum requirement, you must
assay 2 levels of quality control material on each day that samples are analyzed.
You must also assay quality control samples when performing a 2-point
calibration. Refer to the ADVIA Centaur Assay Manual for assay-specific QC
recommendations.
2. Select Schedule.
3. At the Worklist Schedule window, select Control.
NOTE: If you are scheduling controls for a control-bracketed test, you must
schedule by SID. The system does not allow you to schedule samples for
control-bracketed tests by Rack.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
4-6
4. Select how you want the system to identify the control:
The control SIDs are defined at the Quality Control Control Definition
window.

5. Select or enter the tests or the profiles for the control.
The controls previously defined for the tests are automatically displayed.
6. Select the controls.
7. If you schedule by rack, enter the Rack ID in Rack.
8. Select Save.
9. Repeat steps 4. through 8. to schedule tests or profiles for additional controls.
10. Load sample cups of QC material in a rack.
Scheduling Controls for Control-bracketed Tests

NOTE: To ensure optimal system performance, do not include a
control-bracketed test in a test profile that is scheduled for a control.

When scheduling controls for control-bracketed tests, the following requirements
apply:
Each control set must contain a numerically ascending sequence of control

levels beginning with Level 1.
For example, if a test requires 3 controls in a set, the controls must follow this
sequence: Level 1, Level 2, and Level 3.
Do not schedule more control levels for a control-bracketed test than the
number defined in the Control Levels field at the Test Definition window.
The system does not process the extra controls.
The system indicates the status of the extra controls with an Incomplete Set
flag at the Worklist Summary window. If required, you can delete the extra
controls. Refer to Deleting Requests page 2-66.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Schedule a complete set of controls at the beginning of a group of samples to

open a bracket and at the end of a group of samples to close a bracket.
4-7
You define the number of levels required in a complete set of controls at the
Test Definition window. Refer to Viewing Control Bracketing Features
page 8-18.
At the Worklist Summary or Worklist Results Details windows, do not

select the Repeat button for any of the controls in the start-of-bracket or
end-of-bracket control set.
If you select the Repeat button, the system does not repeat the processing of
the control although the Repeat symbol displays. This prevents you from
scheduling an incomplete set of controls. The system requires a complete set
of controls for control-bracketed tests.
You can use the end-of-bracket controls from 1 group of samples as the
start-of-bracket controls for the next group of samples, if the control results
are acceptable and the system is not forced to discard results.
Refer to Managing the Worklist page 2-38.
If you schedule the start-of-bracket controls and the end-of-bracket controls at

the same time, you must perform the following tasks:
schedule the controls by SID
enter a unique rack ID for each set of controls
Ensure that the start-of-bracket control set and the end-of-bracket control set
are in different racks. Ensure that all of the controls within a set are in the
same rack.
If you schedule the start-of-bracket controls and wait until they are processed
and have acceptable results before scheduling the end-of-bracket controls,
schedule the controls by SID.
You do not need to enter the rack ID and position of the controls. You can use
the same rack for the start-of-bracket controls and end-of-bracket controls as
long as the system processed the previous set of controls with acceptable
results and ejected the rack.
You must schedule and load the end-of-bracket controls within the acceptable
time interval displayed in the Control Warning field at the Test Definition
window.
Failure to do so causes the system to discard retained patient results. Refer to
Viewing Control Bracketing Features page 8-18.
Modifying Test Ranges

When modifying test ranges, ensure that no samples are waiting for an ending
bracket. If you modify test ranges for a control-bracketed test that has not
completed, the system may not recognize the ending and the control bracket does
not complete. The system discards results that are waiting for an ending bracket.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
4-8
Clearing a No Request Message for End-of-Bracket Controls

If you schedule the start-of-bracket controls with a unique rack ID and position for
each control, and then schedule the end-of-bracket controls without a rack ID and
position for each control, the system displays the No Request message for the
end-of-bracket controls at the Status Samples window.
To clear the message and close the bracket, use the following procedure:
Refer to Deleting Requests page 2-66, or Scheduling Calibrators and QC
Samples page 2-55.
1. Delete the request for the end-of-bracket controls at the Worklist Summary
window.
2. Reschedule the end-of-bracket controls at the Worklist Schedule window.
To avoid receiving the No Request message, if you are scheduling the
start-of-bracket and end-of-bracket controls at the same time, use the following
guidelines:
Schedule the start-of-bracket controls with a specific rack ID for the set and a
Schedule the end-of-bracket controls with a different rack ID for the set and a
Ensure that the rack ID for the end-of-bracket controls is different from the rack
ID of the start-of-bracket controls.
Defining the Control Definition for a Multicomponent

Test
Define a multicomponent control definition according to section, Adding a New
Control Definition page 4-1. Ensure that you select all the component assays that
are required in the multicomponent control definition.
Scheduling Controls for Multicomponent Tests

Use the procedure referred to in Scheduling QC Samples page 4-5 to schedule a
multicomponent control.
You can schedule the multicomponent test control directly. You do not have to
schedule the individual component test controls. The system automatically
schedules controls for all the component tests and schedules the multicomponent
test. The results for the individual component controls are sent to ADVIA QC.
The system uses the component control results to calculate the multicomponent
result. The multicomponent control result is sent to the ADVIA QC and to the
LIS.
If variable l is available in the multicomponent test definition, the quality control
results of an off-system test can be included in the multicomponent control result.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
4-9
The system orders one replicate for the component controls regardless of the
settings for replicates in the individual component test definitions.
Exporting Quality Control Data

Access the ADVIA QC application and refer to online help for the ADVIA QC
application Tools window.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
4-10
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Performing Maintenance
5 Performing Maintenance
Reviewing Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Recording Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Accessing Online Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
Reviewing the Maintenance Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Printing Maintenance Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
Defining Maintenance Activities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Deleting a Maintenance Activity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
Performing Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Performing Daily Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
Alternating the Water Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7
Rinsing the System with Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Performing Weekly Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

Cleaning the Water Bottles and Reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-8
Emptying the Water Trap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Cleaning the Touchscreen Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
Performing Monthly Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Preparing the Cleaning Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
Cleaning the Exterior of the Reagent Probes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18
Cleaning the Exterior of the Ancillary Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21
Cleaning the Exterior of the Aspirate Probes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
Cleaning the Air Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
Performing the Monthly Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25

Monthly Cleaning Procedure for Systems Using
the System Water Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26
First Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Second Prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Third Prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fourth Prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-28
Monthly Cleaning Procedure for Systems Using

Direct Plumbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29
First Prompt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Second Prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Third Prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fourth Prompt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5-29
5-31
5-32
5-32
As-Needed Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Opening the Top Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-34
Cleaning the Probe Rinse Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-35
Cleaning the Reagent Probe Shutter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39
Cleaning the Primary Reagent Compartment
and Reagent Pack Holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-42
Cleaning the Covers and Pointing Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
Cleaning the Cuvette Waste Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-44
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Cleaning the Sample Tip Waste Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50

Wiping the Waste Probe and Cuvette Ejector Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54
Maintaining the Sample Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57

Cleaning the Sample Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Labeling Sample Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57
Applying Cal and QC Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-58
Applying Numbered or Customized Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Checking the Rack Clips on the ADVIA Centaur Racks . . . . . . . . . 5-61
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Performing Maintenance
The ADVIA Centaur XP system monitors maintenance activities and notifies you
when a scheduled activity is due. In addition, the system notifies you through a
color change at the Maintenance Status button and the Status Maintenance
window when routine and extended certification procedures are due. When a
certification is due, contact your local technical support provider to schedule the
procedure as soon as possible.
The system provides a maintenance schedule for you to record the completion of
scheduled maintenance activities. The system then uses this information to
automatically update the maintenance schedule with the next time the activity is
due.
Reviewing Maintenance
At the Status Maintenance window, the background of the maintenance
activities changes color to indicate status:
Yellow indicates that a maintenance activity is due or overdue.
Red indicates that an automated maintenance procedure did not finish.
At the workspace, the background of the Maintenance Status button also changes
color to indicate status. You can select the Maintenance Status button to open the
Status Maintenance window and display information about maintenance
activities.
Select the appropriate View and Sort combinations to display specific information
at the Status Maintenance window:
For example, if you select Schedule, the system displays the scheduled
maintenance activities.
scheduled activities.
For example, if you select Activity, the system sorts and displays the
scheduled activities in alphabetical order.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-2
Task
View
Sort
Determine which maintenance activities are due
Schedule
Time Due
Find a specific maintenance activity
Schedule
Activity
Review the maintenance activities that were performed

most recently
Log
Time Completed
Review the history of a specific maintenance activity
Log
Activity
Recording Maintenance
After performing a scheduled maintenance activity you can record that activity
as complete. You can also enter and review comments.
NOTE: If you are not currently signed in, you must sign in to the system.
1. At the workspace, select Maintenance Status.

2. At the Status Maintenance window, select an activity.
3. Select Completed.
The system automatically enters your initials and calculates the date when the
activity is due next.
4. You can enter Comments, such as a note that indicates if the maintenance
was performed to correct a system problem:
a. Select Log in View.
b. Select Time Completed in Sort.
c. Select an activity.
d. Select Comments.
e. At the Comments window, enter a comment.
You can enter up to 3 comments. Comments can be up to 120
alphanumeric characters. The system enters your initials and the date.
f.
Select Save.
Repeat these steps to update the maintenance schedule and enter comments for
another activity.
Accessing Online Procedures

Online maintenance procedures provide instructions for some of the maintenance
activities.
2. At the Status Maintenance window, select a maintenance activity.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-3
3. Select Procedure.
An online help window opens and displays the maintenance procedure.
Reviewing the Maintenance Log

Use the Maintenance Log to review completed activities. You can review the most
recent to the oldest activities as well as the history for a specific activity.
The historical log is maintained for the last 5000 entries.
2. At the Status Maintenance window, select Log in View.
3. Select the Sort.
If you want to review . . .
Select . . .
the maintenance activities that were performed most recently
Time Completed
the history of a specific maintenance activity
Activity
Printing Maintenance Reports

You can print a report of either the scheduled maintenance for the system or the
maintenance log.
3. In the list of available reports, select Maintenance.
4. Select the View.
If you want to print . . .
Select . . .
the scheduled maintenance activities
Schedule.
the completed maintenance activities, including comments and

the initials of the person who performed the activities
Log.
5. If you selected Log, enter the Starting Date and Ending Date.
Defining Maintenance Activities

You can define maintenance activities that are specific to your laboratory. These
activities are part of the regular maintenance schedule. You must have the
appropriate level of security to perform these functions.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-4
2. At the Status Maintenance window, you can define or edit a maintenance

activity.
Then . . .
define a maintenance
activity
a.
edit a maintenance
activity
a.
Select Add.
b. Enter the name of the maintenance activity.

Select an activity that you defined.
b. Select Definition.
c. At the Status Maintenance Definition window,
select Edit.
schedule the Daily

Cleaning Procedure
to occur at a
particular time every
day
a.
Select Perform Daily Cleaning.
c. At the Status Maintenance Definition window,
select Edit.
d. Select Autoschedule.
e.
Enter the time that the system should perform the

procedure.
Specify time in a 4 digit, 24-hour format, for
example: 0130 is 1:30 a.m. and 1445 is 2:45 p.m.
3. At the Status Maintenance Definition window, enter or edit the appropriate

information.
4. Select Save.
The system displays a symbol next to the maintenance activity you defined at
the Status Maintenance window.
Deleting a Maintenance Activity

Use this procedure to delete maintenance activities you defined.
2. At the Status Maintenance window, select the maintenance activity that you
defined.
3. Select Delete.
Performing Maintenance Procedures

The online help also contains most maintenance procedures for the
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-5
Performing Daily Cleaning

You can start the daily cleaning procedure when the system is not processing
samples. Allow approximately 35 to 60 minutes for the system to complete the
cleaning procedure, depending on the setup and status of your system.
The cleaning procedure cleans the probes, the rinse stations, wash stations, and
associated tubing. Schedule the cleaning procedure after your peak workload to
optimize effectiveness of the cleaning procedure and enhance system
performance.
WARNING

CAUTION
Do not neglect to perform daily cleaning. Choosing to not perform the

cleaning procedure can result in bacterial contamination, paramagnetic
particle buildup, protein buildup, and crystallization, which can affect patient
results.
NOTE: You cannot process samples while the cleaning procedure is in progress.
1. If the bottle is more than half full, empty the waste bottle.
2. If necessary, replenish the cleaning solution.
Refer to Preparing the Cleaning Solution page 5-17.
3. Ensure that the water bottle is at least 1-quarter full (approximately 2.5 L).
NOTE: If the diluter drawer is not closed (up), the daily cleaning procedure
does not prime the wash station diluters correctly.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-6
4. Ensure that the diluter drawer is closed.
Diluter drawer
Figure 5-1
Diluter Drawer

6. Select Perform Daily Cleaning.
7. Select Perform.
The system starts the cleaning procedure.
NOTE: If the cleaning procedure stops before it completes, the maintenance
button turns red and the system prevents you from testing samples until it
completes the cleaning procedure or completes a rinse cycle.
NOTE: If the cleaning procedure has an error but the rinsing completes
successfully, the maintenance button turns yellow.

8. If an error occurs before the cleaning procedure finishes, perform the
following steps:
a. At the workspace, select Event Log.
b. At the System Event Log window, look for an event that would indicate
the cause of the error.
c. Correct the error.
d. If you are able to correct the error, reschedule the cleaning procedure to
remove the cleaning failed status or select Rinse System With Water.
e. If the error persists, call for technical assistance.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-7
Alternating the Water Bottle

Allowing the water bottle to air dry in between uses helps prevent bacterial
contamination.
1
2
3
4
5
Water tubing
Water bottle lid
Cap
Water bottle
Figure 5-2
Waste and Water Bottles
CAUTION
c. Disconnect the water tubing from the water bottle and set aside on
lint-free tissues or gauze to absorb drips.
2. Remove the cap.
3. Fill the spare, clean water bottle with fresh reagent water and install the cap.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-8
4. Install the spare, full water bottle:

a. Place the water bottle in the waste and water drawer.
b. Connect the water bottle tubing to the bottle.
c. Lower the water bottle lid.
5. Remove the cap and empty the water bottle you just removed from the
system.
6. Rinse the water bottle with reagent water and invert the bottle to dry.
Rinsing the System with Water

If the daily cleaning procedure failed, use this procedure to ensure that cleaning
solution is completely rinsed from the system tubing.
2. Select Rinse the System with Water.
3. Select Perform.
The system rinses the tubing with water.
Performing Weekly Maintenance

You need the following materials to perform weekly maintenance procedures:
clean, spare water bottle
ADVIA Centaur XP Cleaning Solution Concentrate
2 L of prepared cleaning solution
reagent water
maintenance screwdriver
lint-free tissues, gauze, or paper towels
transfer pipettes
clean, spare water reservoir
clean, spare manifold
water reservoir cleaning cover
Cleaning the Water Bottles and Reservoir

WARNING

1. Ensure that the spare water bottle is clean.
2. At the workspace, select System Status.
WARNING
Do not clean the primary reagent compartment while the probes are accessing
reagent packs. Injury can result.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-9
3. Select Turn System Mechanics Off.

When you complete the cleaning procedure and replace the tip tray waste
area, remember to turn system mechanics on.
4. Remove the water reservoir:
CAUTION
Use care when handling the glass sensors. Glass sensors are fragile and errors
occur on the system when the sensors are damaged.
a. Move the clamps that cover the sensors aside, carefully remove the
sensors, and let them hang in the drawer.
CAUTION
b. Disconnect the water tubing fittings and set them aside on paper towels.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-10
5. Lift the water reservoir out of the system.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Reservoir cap
Sensor
Water tubing fittings
Sensor
Manifold
Water reservoir
Water bottle
Figure 5-3
Water and Waste Bottle Assembly
6. Remove the reservoir cap and empty any water from the reservoir.
7. Remove the manifold and install the water reservoir cleaning cover:
a. Loosen the 3 knurled captive screws.
b. Remove the manifold from the reservoir.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-11
c. Install the reservoir cleaning cover on the reservoir.
1
2
Reservoir cleaning cover

Water reservoir
Figure 5-4
Water Reservoir Assembly
d. Set the reservoir and manifold aside.

8. Install the spare manifold on the spare reservoir:
a. Place the manifold onto the spare reservoir and push down into position.
b. Tighten the 3 knurled screws.
9. Install the spare water reservoir and clean the sensors:
a. Place the spare reservoir in the waste and water drawer.
CAUTION
Do not leave cleaning solution residue on the sensors. Residual cleaning solution
on the sensors can affect assay results. Clean and rinse the sensors thoroughly.
b. Clean the sensors by wiping the sensors with lint-free tissues or gauze
saturated with cleaning solution.
c. Rinse the sensors by wiping the sensors with lint-free tissues or gauze
saturated with reagent water.
d. Repeat step c. with fresh lint-free tissues or gauze.
e. Install the sensors in the top of the reservoir.
f.
Secure the sensors with the clamps.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-12
g. Connect the 2 water tubing fittings to the top of the reservoir.

c. Disconnect the water tubing from the water bottle and set aside on paper
towels to absorb drips.
1
2
3
4
5
Water tubing
Water bottle lid
Cap
Water bottle
Figure 5-5
e. Set the water bottle aside.

11. Install the spare water bottle:
a. Fill the spare, clean water bottle with fresh reagent water and install
the cap.
b. Place the spare water bottle in the waste and water drawer.
c. Connect the water bottle tubing to the bottle.
d. Lower the water bottle lid.
e. Push in the waste and water drawer.
12. Select Turn System Mechanics On.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-13
13. Prime the reservoir:

a. At the workspace, select Maintenance Status.
b. Select Prime Water from Reservoir to Manifolds.
c. Select Perform.
d. After the priming is complete, the system is ready for operation.
14. Clean and rinse the water reservoir:
a. Pour approximately 1 L of cleaning solution into the reservoir.
b. Place the cleaning cover on the reservoir and close tightly.
c. Invert the reservoir and swirl the solution a few times.
d. Soak the inverted reservoir for 5 minutes.
e. Swirl the solution again and then soak the reservoir upright for an
additional 5 minutes.
f.
Empty the solution from the reservoir.
g. Remove the cleaning cover.

CAUTION
Do not leave cleaning solution residue in the water reservoir. Residual cleaning
solution in the water reservoir tubing can affect assay performance. Rinse the
water reservoir thoroughly with fresh reagent water.
h. Thoroughly rinse the inside of the reservoir, and the reservoir cleaning
cover at least 3 times to ensure that there is no residual cleaning solution
on the components.
i.
Fill the reservoir with reagent water.
j.
Install the cleaning cover on the reservoir.
k. Invert the reservoir, swirl the water a few times, and return the reservoir
to the upright position.
l.
Remove the cleaning cover and empty the water from the reservoir.
m. Invert the reservoir to dry.

15. Clean and rinse the water bottle:
a. Remove the cap and empty any water from the water bottle that was
removed in step 10.
b. Pour approximately 1 L of cleaning solution into the water bottle.
c. Place the cap on the bottle and close tightly.
d. Swirl the solution around the inside of the bottle a few times.
e. Press some gauze over the holes in the top of the bottle and hold the gauze
with your fingers.
f.
Invert the bottle, swirl the solution a few times and then return the bottle
to the upright position.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-14
g. Soak the bottle in the upright position for 5 minutes.

h. Repeat steps e. and f.
i.
Swirl the solution again and then empty the bottle.
CAUTION
Do not leave cleaning solution residue in the water bottle. Residual cleaning
solution in the water bottle tubing can affect water filter and assay
performance. Rinse the water bottle thoroughly with fresh reagent water.
j.
Rinse the inside of the bottle including the tubing at least 5 times with
fresh reagent water.
k. Invert the bottle to dry.

16. Clean the manifold:
a. Empty the fluid from the tubing using a transfer pipette.
1
2
Manifold tubing
Manifold
Figure 5-6
Manifold
b. Fill the tubing with cleaning solution using a transfer pipette.

c. Soak the water reservoir manifold in cleaning solution for 5 minutes.
d. Empty the fluid from the tubing using a transfer pipette.
CAUTION
contamination.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-15
e. Rinse each tubing by filling it with reagent water using a clean transfer
pipette, removing the fluid and repeating 5 times.
CAUTION
Do not leave cleaning solution residue on the manifold. Residual cleaning

solution on the manifold can cause corrosion. Rinse the manifold thoroughly
with fresh reagent water, including caps, captive screws, and clamps.
f.
Thoroughly rinse the manifold and remove excess water from the
manifold and tubing.
Emptying the Water Trap

Use this procedure to remove condensation that has collected in the water trap.
If the water trap fills with condensation, the system can have vacuum problems.
CAUTION
Do not remove the water trap when the system is in the Inprocess state or the
Cleaning state. Removing the water trap while the system is in one of these
states can cause a low vacuum error and cause the system to stop sampling and
cancel all of the tests in the ring.
1. Ensure that the system is in 1 of the following states:
Ready
Warming Up
Diagnostic
Mechanics Off
Check Status
BIOHAZARD

2. Pull out the waste and water drawer.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-16
3. Unscrew and remove the water trap.
Water trap
Figure 5-7
Water Trap
4. Remove any liquid from the water trap.

The liquid in the water trap is waste condensation.
5. Ensure that the float ball moves freely in the water trap.
6. Ensure that the inner seal of the lid is not missing or damaged.
7. Tightly install the water trap lid and install it in the bracket.
Ensure the tubings are still attached.
8. Close the waste and water drawer.
Cleaning the Touchscreen Monitor

The online help topic Touch Screen includes instructions for you to clean the
touchscreen monitor using a 5% bleach solution with lint-free tissue.
Before cleaning the touchscreen monitor, use the power button on the monitor to
turn the monitor off .
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-17
Performing Monthly Maintenance

Perform the following tasks every month:
prepare the cleaning solution
clean the exterior of the reagent probes
clean the exterior of the ancillary probe
clean the exterior of the aspirate probe
clean the air filter
perform Monthly Cleaning Procedure
You need the following materials to perform the Monthly Cleaning Procedure:
approximately 4 L of prepared ADVIA Centaur XP Cleaning Solution for the
automated portion of the Monthly Cleaning Procedure
approximately 2 L of prepared ADVIA Centaur XP Cleaning Solution used
for soaking and wiping system components
reagent water
large maintenance brush
lint-free tissues, gauze, and paper towels
spare air filter
Preparing the Cleaning Solution

Use the cleaning solution for soaking and wiping system components.
WARNING

Use this procedure to prepare the cleaning solution for soaking and wiping system
components.
1. Carefully pour 1 container of ADVIA Centaur XP Cleaning Solution
Concentrate into the container used for soaking system components.
You can soak the components in a sink, the cuvette waste bin liner, or another
suitable container.
2. Add 2 L of water to the container.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-18
Cleaning the Exterior of the Reagent Probes.

BIOHAZARD

WARNING

CAUTION
Do not bend the probe. Bending the probe can cause system errors.
3. Loosen the screw on the left side of the system that secures the top cover and
then open the top cover.
WARNING
Use care when working with the reagent probes and ancillary probe. The probe
tips are sharp and can cause skin punctures.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-19
4. Remove the reagent probes cover by lifting the cover up and then out.
Reagent probes cover
Figure 5-8
Reagent Compartment
5. Clean the 3 reagent probes:

a. Push the reagent probe assemblies toward the incubation ring by pushing
the motors:
Push reagent probe 1 to the right and then toward the incubation ring.
Push reagent probe 2 to the left and then toward the incubation ring.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-20
1
2
3
4
5
Push reagent probe 3 toward the incubation ring.
Reagent probe 1
Reagent probe 2
Reagent probe 3
Probe side view.
Motor.
Figure 5-9
Diagram Reagent Probes
b. Use a gentle downward motion to wipe each probe with lint-free tissues
or gauze saturated with cleaning solution.
c. Check the probes for damage and to ensure that they are not bent.
CAUTION
Do not leave cleaning solution residue on the probe. Residual cleaning solution
on the probe can damage the probe. Follow the instructions for rinsing the
probe.
d. Thoroughly rinse the reagent probe, especially the middle of the probe.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-21
Rinse the probe using a gentle downward motion to wipe each probe with
lint-free tissues or gauze saturated with reagent water.
Reagent probe
Figure 5-10
Reagent Probe
6. Install the reagent probes cover.

7. Close and secure the top cover.
Cleaning the Exterior of the Ancillary Probe

BIOHAZARD

WARNING

078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-22
WARNING
4. Using cleaning solution, clean the ancillary probe:

a. Move the inprocess queue to the right.
CAUTION
b. Pull the probe toward you by holding the top of the probe assembly.
c. Check the probe for damage and to ensure that it is not bent.
d. Use a gentle downward motion to wipe the probe with lint-free tissues or
gauze saturated with cleaning solution.
e. Thoroughly rinse the ancillary probe, especially the middle of the probe.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-23
Rinse the probe using a gentle downward motion to wipe each probe with
lint-free tissues or gauze saturated with reagent water.
1
2
Probe assembly
Ancillary probe
Figure 5-11
Ancillary Probe

Cleaning the Exterior of the Aspirate Probes

BIOHAZARD

WARNING

078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-24
4. Carefully lift the probe arms up to the highest position.
NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the aspirate probes. Clean only the
visible portion of the probe.

5. Wipe the visible portion of the probes with lint-free tissues or gauze saturated
with cleaning solution.
6. Wipe the probes with lint-free tissues or gauze saturated with reagent water.
1
2
Probe clip
Aspirate probe
Figure 5-12
Wash Block
CAUTION
Use care that you do not damage probes. To prevent damage to the probe, ensure
that each clip is in its locked position.
7. Move the aspirate probes down approximately 1.27 cm (0.5 in) from the
highest position.
Cleaning the Air Filter

1. Remove the air filter bracket.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-25
2. Push the air filter up and then out of the bracket.
Air filter and bracket
Figure 5-13
ADVIA Centaur XP back view
CAUTION
Do not install a wet or damp air filter. The moisture can cause system damage.
3. Install the spare, dry air filter in the bracket.
4. Install the bracket and the filter.
CAUTION
Do not wash the air filter with cleaning solution. The cleaning solution can
damage the filter.
5. Rinse the air filter with water and allow it to dry thoroughly.
Performing the Monthly Cleaning Procedure

Allow approximately 45 minutes to complete this procedure. You cannot use the
system for testing during this procedure.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-26
Perform the appropriate monthly cleaning procedure for your system

configuration:
If your system uses the system water bottle, perform the Monthly Cleaning
Procedure for Systems Using the System Water Bottle page 5-26.
If your system uses direct plumbing for the system water, perform the
Monthly Cleaning Procedure for Systems Using Direct Plumbing page 5-29.
Monthly Cleaning Procedure for Systems Using the System

Water Bottle
BIOHAZARD

WARNING

CAUTION
Do not put cleaning solution in the water bottle until after you select Perform
Monthly Cleaning. If cleaning solution is in the water bottle too soon, it is pumped
throughout the system. Follow all instructions as written.
2. At the Status Maintenance window, select Schedule in View.
3. Select Perform Monthly Cleaning.
4. Select Perform.
5. Select Yes.
The system empties the waste reservoir.
First Prompt
1. Fill the water bottle with 4 L of cleaning solution:

a. When prompted, pull out the waste and water drawer.
b. Remove the water bottle.
c. Carefully pour 2 containers of ADVIA Centaur XP Cleaning Solution
Concentrate into the empty water bottle.
d. Add 4 L of water to the water bottle.
2. Load the water bottle on to the system.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-27
3. Empty the water reservoir and waste bottle:

CAUTION
a. Disconnect the tubing and remove the sensors and cap from the water
reservoir.
b. Remove the water reservoir.
CAUTION
Do not leave water in the water reservoir during the cleaning procedure. Water in
the reservoir dilutes the cleaning solution. Empty the water reservoir completely.
c. Empty the water reservoir.
d. If the system uses an onboard waste bottle, remove the waste bottle and
empty the contents into a container approved for biohazardous waste.
4. Ensure that the water trap is emptied and the bottle lid is tight.
5. Load the empty water reservoir and waste bottle onto the system:
a. Install the empty water reservoir on the system.
b. Connect the tubing and install the sensors.
c. Ensure that the cap on the waste reservoir is tight.
d. Install the waste bottle on the system.
CAUTION
Do not select Cancel during the First Prompt. If you select Cancel, you must
remove the cleaning solution from the system and install the reagent water in a
clean water bottle before you select Continue.
6. Select Continue.
Second Prompt
1. Rinse the water bottle.

Remove and thoroughly rinse the water bottle and cap with reagent water.
2. Add 2 L of reagent water to the water bottle.
Do not add more than 2 L of water to the water bottle. Excess water causes the
waste bottle to fill before the end of the cleaning procedure, causing the
procedure to fail.
3. Place the water bottle on the system.
4. Ensure that the water reservoir contains no more than 1.27 cm (0.5 in) fluid.
5. Select Continue.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-28
Third Prompt
1. Rinse the water bottle and the water reservoir:

a. Disconnect the tubing and remove the sensors from the water reservoir.
b. Remove the water bottle and the water reservoir.
c. Thoroughly rinse the water bottle and the water reservoir with reagent
water to remove residual cleaning solution.
2. Fill the water bottle with 2 L of water and load it onto the system.
3. Load the empty water reservoir onto the system.
Ensure that you connect the tubing and install the sensors.
4. Select Continue.
Fourth Prompt
1. Remove the water bottle and the water reservoir:

b. Remove the water bottle and the water reservoir and set them aside.
2. Fill the alternate water bottle with reagent water and install it on the system:
a. Install the empty alternate water reservoir on the system.
b. Ensure that you connect the tubing and install the sensors.
c. Close the waste and water drawer.
3. Select Continue.
4. Observe the water filter.
5. If required, vent air through the air vent filter.
When priming is complete, the system returns to the Ready state.
6. Thoroughly rinse the water bottle and the water reservoir that you removed
from the system with reagent water, and then invert them to dry.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-29
Monthly Cleaning Procedure for Systems Using Direct

Plumbing
BIOHAZARD

WARNING

CAUTION
Do not put cleaning solution in the water bottle until after you select Perform
Monthly Cleaning. If cleaning solution is in the water bottle too soon, it is pumped
throughout the system. Follow all instructions as written.
2. At the Status Maintenance window, in the View drop down, select
Schedule.
3. Select Perform Monthly Cleaning.
4. Select Perform.
5. Select Yes.
The system empties the waste reservoir.
First Prompt
1. Fill the water bottle with 4 L of cleaning solution:

a. When prompted, pull out the waste and water drawer and remove the
water bottle.
b. Carefully pour 2 containers of ADVIA Centaur XP Cleaning Solution
Concentrate into the empty water bottle.
c. Add 4 L of water to the water bottle.
2. Load the water bottle onto the system.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-30
3. Empty the water reservoir and waste bottle:

CAUTION
a. Disconnect the tubing and remove the sensors and float switch from the
water reservoir.
CAUTION
Do not leave water in the water reservoir during the cleaning procedure. Water in
the reservoir dilutes the cleaning solution. Empty the water reservoir completely.
b. Remove the water reservoir and then empty it.
c. If the system uses an onboard waste bottle, remove the waste bottle and
empty the contents into a container approved for biohazardous waste.
4. Ensure that the water trap is emptied and the bottle lid is tight.
5. Install the empty water reservoir and waste bottle onto the system:
a. Install the empty water reservoir.
b. Ensure that you connect the tubing and install the sensors and float
switch.
c. Install the waste bottle on the system.
d. Ensure that the cap on the waste reservoir is tight.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-31
6. Move the direct plumbing switch to the off position.
1
2
Direct plumbing switch

Off position
Figure 5-14
Direct Plumbing Switch
CAUTION
Do not select Cancel during the First Prompt. If you select Cancel, you must
remove the cleaning solution from the system and install the reagent water in a
clean water bottle before you select Continue.
7. Select Continue.
Second Prompt
1. Rinse the water bottle.

Remove and thoroughly rinse the water bottle and cap with reagent water.
2. Add 2 L of reagent water to the water bottle.
Do not add more than 2 L of water to the water bottle. Excess water causes the
waste bottle to fill before the end of the cleaning procedure, causing the
procedure to fail.
3. Place the water bottle on the system.
4. Ensure that the water reservoir contains no more than 1.27 cm (0.5 in) fluid.
5. Select Continue.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-32
Third Prompt
1. Rinse the water bottle and the water reservoir:

b. Remove the water bottle and the water reservoir.
c. Thoroughly rinse the water bottle and the water reservoir with reagent
water to remove residual cleaning solution.
2. Fill the water bottle with 2 L of reagent water and load it onto the system.
3. Load the empty water reservoir onto the system.
Ensure that you connect the tubing and install the sensors.
4. Select Continue.
Fourth Prompt
1. Remove the water bottle and the water reservoir:

a. Disconnect the tubing and remove the sensors and float switch from the
water reservoir.
b. Remove the water bottle and the water reservoir and set them aside.
2. Install the empty alternate water reservoir and the empty alternate water bottle
on the system.
Connect the tubing to the water reservoir and the water bottle.
3. Clean the float switch and sensors.
Clean the water reservoir float switch and the sensors using gauze soaked
4. Rinse the water reservoir float switch and the sensors twice:
a. Rinse the water reservoir float switch and the sensors in a container of
reagent water.
b. Using fresh reagent water, rinse the water reservoir float switch and the
sensors again.
CAUTION
contamination.
5. Install the float switch and sensors in the water reservoir.
Ensure that the float switch is securely seated in the water reservoir.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-33
6. Move the direct plumbing switch to the On position.

a. Ensure that the dot is visible on the direct plumbing switch, which
indicates that direct plumbing is enabled.
1
2
Direct plumbing switch

On position
b. Close the waste and water drawer.

7. Select Continue.
8. Observe the water filter.
9. If required, vent air through the air vent filter.
When priming is complete, the system returns to the Ready state.
10. Thoroughly rinse the water bottle and the water reservoir that you removed
from the system with reagent water, and then invert them to dry.
As-Needed Maintenance
For online information about performing maintenance procedures, perform the
following steps:
1. At the workspace, select the Status Maintenance button.
2. At the Status Maintenance window, select the appropriate maintenance task:
3. Select Procedure.
4. Follow the instructions in the online help.
NOTE: Most of these procedures are also available in this section of the
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-34
Opening the Top Cover

WARNING
Do not access the system when it is in the Inprocess state or the Cleaning state. In
these states, the system can move a subassembly that could cause injuries.
1. Ensure that the system is in 1 of the following states:
Ready
Warming Up
Diagnostic
Mechanics Off
Check Status

3. Using a Phillips screwdriver, loosen the screw in the top cover.
Screw
4. Lift the top cover.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-35
Cleaning the Probe Rinse Stations

Clean the rinse stations for the 3 reagent probes and the ancillary probe when you
can see paramagnetic particles on the rinse stations.
BIOHAZARD

WARNING

WARNING
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-36
4. Remove the reagent probes cover.
Figure 5-15
CAUTION
5. Push the reagent probe assemblies toward the incubation ring by pushing the
motor.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1
2
3
4
5
5-37
Reagent probe 1
Reagent probe 2
Reagent probe 3
Probe
Motor
Figure 5-16
Reagent Probes and Incubation Ring
6. Gently push the sample probe and ancillary probe assemblies back toward the
incubation ring by pushing the motors.
7. Use a disposable transfer pipette to add 0.5 to 1.0 mL of cleaning solution to
each rinse station.
8. Clean each rinse station using the small maintenance brush.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-38
9. Gently insert the brush into the rinse station to a depth of 6.3 cm (2.5 in), and
swirl the brush inside the rinse station.
1
2
Small brush
Rinse station
Figure 5-17
Rinse Station
10. Remove the brush and then remove the cleaning solution with a transfer
pipette.
11. Clean each rinse station:
a. Wipe the rinse station with lint-free tissues or gauze saturated with
cleaning solution.
b. Wipe the rinse station with lint-free tissues or gauze saturated with
reagent water.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-39
Cleaning the Reagent Probe Shutter

Clean the reagent probe shutter when reagent probe shutter errors occur or splatter
is visible on the reagent probe shutter.
BIOHAZARD

WARNING

4. Remove the primary reagent packs from the primary reagent compartment
and refrigerate them.
Figure 5-18
Reagent Compartment
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-40
6. Push the reagent probe assemblies toward the incubation ring by pushing the
motors.
1
2
3
4
5
Reagent probe 1
Reagent probe 2
Reagent probe 3
Probe
Motor
Figure 5-19
Reagent Probes and Incubation Ring
7. Remove the reagent probe shutter:

a. Lift the shutter drive arm up and off the shutter drive.
b. Slide the shutter to the left until the screw slots are under the screws.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-41
c. Lift out the shutter.
1
2
3
Shutter drive
Shutter drive arm
Reagent probe shutter
Figure 5-20
Reagent Probe Shutter Assembly
8. Clean the shutter:

a. Wipe the shutter with gauze soaked with cleaning solution.
b. Rinse the shutter with water.
c. Thoroughly dry the shutter.
9. Wipe the surface under the shutter with lint-free tissues or gauze saturated
10. Dry the surface under the shutter.
11. Install the shutter by sliding it to the right until the screw slots are under the
screws, and then placing the shutter drive arm down on the shutter drive.
13. When the system is in the Ready state, return the reagent packs to the primary
reagent compartment.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-42
Cleaning the Primary Reagent Compartment and Reagent Pack

Holders
Clean the primary reagent compartment and reagent pack holders when it
becomes difficult to load primary reagent packs.
BIOHAZARD

WARNING
Do not clean the primary reagent compartment while the probes are accessing
reagent packs. Injury can result.
3. Open the primary reagent door.
Figure 5-21
4. Remove the primary reagent packs from the primary reagent compartment
and refrigerate them.
5. Wipe excess water from the primary reagent compartment.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-43
6. Wipe the surfaces of the primary reagent compartment with lint-free tissues
or gauze saturated with water.
1
2
3
4

Primary reagent shelf
Reagent holders
LEDs
Figure 5-22
7. If reagent has spilled onto the reagent pack holders, wipe the reagent pack
holders with lint-free tissues or gauze saturated with water.
8. Dry the primary reagent compartment.
10. When the system is in the Ready state, return the reagent packs to the primary
reagent compartment.
NOTE: Reagent mixing does not occur when System Mechanics are off.
Some settling of the Solid Phase reagents can occur if the reagents have not
been mixed for 2 hours.
11. Ensure that reagents are resuspended before resuming normal operation.
Refer to Appendix C, Handling Reagents in the ADVIA Centaur XP Assay
Manual for information on checking for a Solid Phase pellet and mixing
reagent packs by hand.
12. Close the primary reagent door.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-44
Cleaning the Covers and Pointing Device

BIOHAZARD

WARNING

1. Carefully wipe the following components with lint-free tissues or gauze
saturated with cleaning solution:
sample entry queue
exterior covers
sample exit queue
ancillary entry
Stat entry
pointing device
system fluids tray
tray under the system fluids reservoirs
tray under the waste and water bottles
2. Rinse the components with lint-free tissues or gauze saturated with water.
Cleaning the Cuvette Waste Area

BIOHAZARD

WARNING

2. Remove any empty sample tip trays and covers from the tip tray bin.
3. With a Phillips screwdriver, remove the screw at the left of the tip tray waste.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-45
4. Lift the tip tray bin up and then out of the system.
Tip tray screw
Figure 5-23
5. Remove the cuvette waste bin, empty it, and set it aside.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-46
6. Remove the cuvette waste chute by releasing it from the magnetic fitting.
Slightly rotate the cuvette waste chute, then pull it out and down.
Cuvette waste bin
Figure 5-24
7. Soak the cuvette waste chute in cleaning solution for 5 minutes.

8. While the cuvette waste chute is soaking, clean the cuvette waste reservoir:
a. Open the cuvette waste bin drawer.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-47
b. Wipe the reservoir with lint-free tissues or gauze saturated with cleaning
solution.
Cuvette waste reservoir
Figure 5-25
c. Rinse the reservoir with lint-free tissues or gauze saturated with reagent
water.
WARNING
Do not splatter yourself or work area with cleaning solution. The cleanins solution
is a biohazardous material and must be used carefully. Scrub the cuvette waste
chute gently to avoid splattering yourself and the work area.

9. Clean the cuvette waste chute:
a. Use the large maintenance brush and cleaning solution to gently clean the
chute.
b. Rinse the chute with water.
c. Dry the outside of the chute with paper towels.
CAUTION
Do not pinch or trap cables or tubing when installing the chute. Pinching the
cables or tubing can cause system errors.
10. Install the cuvette waste chute:
a. Place the locator pins at the bottom of the chute in the reservoir.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-48
b. Push up the top of the chute until it attaches to the magnetic fitting.
1
2
3
Magnet fitting
Locator pins
Figure 5-26
c. Rinse the reservoir with lint-free tissues or gauze saturated with reagent
water.
WARNING

11. Clean the cuvette waste chute:
a. Use the large maintenance brush and cleaning solution to gently clean the
chute.
b. Rinse the chute with water.
Dry the inside and the outside of the chute with paper towels.
CAUTION
Do not pinch or trap cables or tubing when installing the chute. Pinching the
cables or tubing can cause system errors.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-49
Install the cuvette waste chute:

a. Place the locator pins at the bottom of the cuvette waste chute in the
cuvette waste reservoir.
b. Push up the top of the chute until it attaches to the magnetic fitting.
Move the top of the cuvette waste chute up until you feel the magnets
connect.
1
2
3

Top of the cuvette waste chute at the magnets
Locator pins
Figure 5-27
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-50
12. Ensure that no wires or cables are interfering with the correct positioning of
the cuvette waste chute.
1
2
Cuvette waste area wires

Cuvette waste chute
Figure 5-28
13. Install the sample tip tray bin.

14. Install the cuvette waste bin in the drawer and close the door.
15. If you emptied the cuvette waste bin, select Yes at the prompt.
16. If you emptied the tip tray bin, select Yes at the prompt.
Cleaning the Sample Tip Waste Area

The sample tip waste area includes the tip remover, tube, chute, and reservoir.
BIOHAZARD

WARNING

078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-51

4. Remove the sample tip remover and sample tip waste tube:
a. Gently push the sample probe and ancillary probe back toward the
incubation ring.
b. Loosen the knurled knob on the sample tip remover.
c. Lift the sample tip remover and sample tip waste tube up and out of the
system.
1
2
3
4
Sample tip waste tube

Sample tip remover
Sample probe
Knurled knob
Figure 5-29
Sample Tip Waste Assembly
5. Access the sample tip waste chute:

a. Open the sample tip waste area door.
b. Remove the sample tip waste bin, empty it, and set it aside.
c. Pull out the drawer.
d. Lift the lid to the cleaning solution bottle and ensure that it remains in the
up position.
e. Ensure that the checkvalve remains on the end of the tubing.
f.
Remove the cleaning solution bottle.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-52
g. Wipe the cleaning solution tubing with fresh lint-free tissues or gauze to
remove excess cleaning solution from the outside and tip of the tubing.
WARNING

6. Remove the sample tip waste chute by pulling it up and out.
1
2
Sample tip waste chute

Sample tip waste reservoir
Figure 5-30
WARNING

7. Unscrew the sample tip waste tube from the sample tip remover.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-53
8. Soak the sample tip remover, sample tip waste tube, and sample tip waste
chute in cleaning solution for 5 minutes.
9. Clean the sample tip waste reservoir:
a. While the sample tip remover, sample tip waste tube, and sample tip
waste chute are soaking, wipe the sample tip waste reservoir with lint-free
tissues or gauze saturated with cleaning solution.
b. Wipe the sample tip waste reservoir with lint-free tissues or gauze
saturated with water.
c. Dry the sample tip waste reservoir with lint-free tissues or gauze.
10. Clean the sample tip remover, sample tip waste tube, and sample tip waste
chute:
a. Use the large maintenance brush to clean the inside of the sample tip
waste tube and sample tip waste chute.
b. Rinse the sample tip remover, sample tip waste tube, and sample tip waste
chute with water.
c. Set the sample tip waste tube and sample tip waste chute aside to dry
completely.
d. Thoroughly dry the sample tip remover.
e. Connect the sample tip remover to the spare sample tip waste tube.
11. Install the sample tip remover and sample tip waste tube:
a. With the slot on the sample tip remover facing away from you, place the
bottom of the sample tip waste tube into the opening below the sample
probe.
b. Align the 2 locator pins on the right side with the holes on the mounting
block.
c. Turn the knurled knob until the sample tip remover is secure.
CAUTION
Use care installing the sample tip waste chute. If the sample tip waste chute is not
installed correctly on the reservoir or is installed upside down, tip jams can result.
Install the chute so that the bottom fits completely in the sample tip waste
reservoir.
13. Align the pins on top of the sample tip waste chute with the hooks inside
the system, and install the bottom of the chute in the reservoir.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-54
14. Ensure the wires do not interfere with the sample tip waste chute.
1
2
3
4
5
Reservoir
Sample tip waste chute
Pin
Hook
Sample tip waste area wires
Figure 5-31
Sample Tip Waste Assembly
15. Install the cleaning solution bottle:

a. Place the bottle in the drawer.
b. Close the lid.
c. Close the drawer.
16. Install the sample tip waste bin.
Wiping the Waste Probe and Cuvette Ejector Rod

Use this procedure to clean the waste probe and the cuvette ejector rod to prevent
waste probe movement errors.
BIOHAZARD

078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-55

4. Access the luminometer:
a. Remove the reagent probes cover.
Figure 5-32
Reagent Compartment
WARNING
b. Slide the retaining clip back and remove the waste probe from the
luminometer.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-56
c. Remove the luminometer cover.
1
2
3
4
Nut
Luminometer cover
Waste probe
Cuvette ejector rod
Figure 5-33
Luminometer Assembly
5. Wipe the probe and the cuvette ejector rod with gauze moistened with water.
6. Dry the waste probe and cuvette ejector rod with lint-free tissue or gauze.
7. Install the luminometer cover but do NOT replace the nut.
8. With the cover ajar, reinstall the waste probe so it sits on the white collar in
the luminometer.
9. Slide the retaining clip back to lock the probe in position.
10. Ensure that the luminometer cover is securely in place and hand-tighten the
nut.
11. Install the reagent probe cover.
14. Dry the components thoroughly.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-57
Maintaining the Sample Racks

Clean the sample racks if they look dirty or the system has trouble loading them.
Use this procedure to prepare sample racks for use on the ADVIA Centaur XP
system. Label the sample racks to match the tube-type positions you specified at
the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window.
BIOHAZARD

Cleaning the Sample Racks

WARNING

1. Wipe the racks with gauze soaked in cleaning solution.
NOTE: Soaking the rack could cause the labels to come off.
2. Rinse the racks with water.

3. Allow the racks to dry thoroughly.
Labeling Sample Racks

CAUTION
Do not use sample racks with duplicate numbers. Using sample racks with
duplicate sample rack identification barcode numbers can result in sample
processing errors. When you receive additional sample rack identification barcode
labels, ensure that the number range is different from ranges you currently use on
your system.
1. If the sample racks are not labeled, position a sample rack identification
barcode label on the rack.
The A label indicates multiple tube types. The vertical numbers2, 3, and
4on the sample rack identification barcode label correspond to the
tube-type
NOTE: If you are using ADVIA Centaur racks, ensure that you use
ADVIA Centaur labels1, 2, 3, and 4 for the Tube-Type Selector and use
the correct barcode.
a. Firmly place the sample rack identification barcode label on the right side
of the rack and carefully wrap the label around to the front of the rack.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-58
b. Ensure that the sample rack identification barcode label does not
cover the indents on the front left side of the rack.

c. Ensure that you do not have duplicate sample rack identification
numbers.
1
2
Sample rack barcode label

Rack identification number
Figure 5-34
Applying Cal and QC Labels
To prepare sample racks to use exclusively for calibrators or QC material, use a

Cal or QC label to identify sample racks that contain calibrators or QC material.
1
2
Calibrator label
Quality control label
Figure 5-35
ADVIA Centaur XP Sample Rack Labels
The Cal and QC labels remind you where to place the tube-type selector to match
the calibrator or QC material tube type in the sample rack. Refer to the
Setup Tube Type & Barcode window to verify the tube-type positions specified
for your system.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-59
On the front of the sample rack identification barcode label, apply a Cal or QC
label at the position corresponding to the tube type you use for calibrators or QC
material.
Sample rack front labels
Figure 5-36
ADVIA Centaur XP Sample Rack front view
Applying Numbered or Customized Labels
For the remaining racks, you can use the tube-type labels to represent the 4 types
of tubes you specified at the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window. The vertical
numbers, 1 to 4, on the sample rack identification barcode label correspond to the
4 tube-type positions specified at the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window.
For example, if you select Large Transfer as Tube Type 1, you can select 1 of the
tube type labels to represent large transfer tubes.
You can use the blank labels to create your own tube-type labels or color-coded
system. Use a permanent marker to write on the blank labels.
1. Apply the tube-type labels to the front of the sample rack identification
barcode label, matching each tube-type label to the tube type position you
specified at the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window.
For example, if Tube Type 1 is Large Transfer, place the tube-type label you
selected to represent large transfer tubes at position 1 on the sample rack
identification barcode label. The tube-type labels remind you where the
tube-type selector should be located to match the type of tube you place in the
sample rack.
2. On the front of the sample rack, align the top and left edge of the first
tube-type label with the top and left edge of the sample rack identification
barcode label.
3. Without overlapping the labels, position the next tube-type label directly
below the previous tube-type label.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-60
Up to 4 tube-type labels can be placed on the sample rack identification

barcode label.
1
2
Sample rack label top, left edge

Sample rack next label
Figure 5-37
4. Install a tube-type selector on the labeled sample rack:

a. Install a tube-type selector on the front of the labeled sample rack.
b. Move the tube-type selector to the position corresponding to the type of
tube you are using in the sample rack.
c. Ensure that the tube-type selector does not cover the sample rack
identification barcode number.
1
2
Tube type selector

Sample rack Identification barcode number
Figure 5-38
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-61
Checking the Rack Clips on the ADVIA Centaur Racks

1. Ensure that each position on the rack has a clip.
2. If required, install clips in the rack:
a. Push the clip down into the sample rack.
Clip
Figure 5-39
Sample Rack Tube Compartment Detail
b. Push the clip using a pen to lock it in place.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
5-62
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Identifying System Problems
6 Identifying System Problems

Viewing System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Using the Event Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Other Event Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Rebooting the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

What to Do after Pressing a Fast Stop Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
Recovering from a System Lockup or a Slow User Interface . . . 6-7
Restarting the System After an Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
Recovering from a Power Disruption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
Corrective Actions for the Shutdown Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9

Checking the Keyboard Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
ADVIA Centaur XP Video Monitor is Black . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Managing Nonsampling System Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
Clearing Cuvette Obstructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
Checking Cuvette Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-16
Verifying the Status of Cuvettes in the Incubation Ring. . . . . . . . . .6-22
Clearing Cuvettes from the Preheater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-22
Clearing a Cuvette Jam from the Luminometer or Elevator. . . . . . .6-24
Replacing System Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28

Replacing the Preheater Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Replacing Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
Replacing the Ancillary Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
Replacing a Reagent Probe. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
Replacing an Aspirate Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
Replacing the Waste Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
Replacing the Waste Bottle Fluid Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
Troubleshooting Obstructions and Leaks. . . . . . . . . . . 6-43

Recovering from a Sample Tip Tray Loading Jam . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
Clearing Obstructions from the Sample Exit Queue . . . . . . . . . 6-47
Troubleshooting Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
Monitoring Ambient Temperature

and Relative Humidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-50
Using Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Using the System Diagnostic Tools Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-51
Accessing Diagnostic Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Cuvette Handling Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52

Empty Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-52
Empty & Fill Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-53
Prime Cuvettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-2
Reagent and Ancillary Probe Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55

Dispense Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-55
Home Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-57
Sample Probe Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58

Home Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-58
Load Tip Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-59
Luminometer Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61

Dark Count with Cuvette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-61
Dark Count without Cuvette . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62
Home Luminometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65
Aspirate Probe Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66

Home Probes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-66
Dispense Wash Fluid & Aspirate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-67
Performing LIS Communication Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73

Troubleshooting Truncated PIDs in the LIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Using System Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73

Homing the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73
Homing the Inprocess Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Homing the Ancillary Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emptying the Inprocess Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emptying the Ancillary Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-74
6-75
6-76
6-77
Resetting the Thermals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78

Performing the Vacuum Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-78
Performing the Sample Barcode Read Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79
Priming Functions Prime System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-80
Priming Functions Prime Fluid Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-82
Priming Functions Prime System Fluid Bottle . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-85
Remote Access. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Resolving Barcode Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86

Resolving Hand-held Barcode Scanner Problems . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Barcode Scanner Reads Sporadically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-86
Barcode Scanner Does Not Read . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Resolving Sample Barcode Scanner Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87

Barcode Scanner Reads Sporadically . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-87
Barcodes Do Not Display at Status Samples Window. . . . . . . . . 6-88
Resolving Reagent Barcode Scanner Problems . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89

Barcodes Do Not Display at Status Primary Reagent Window . . 6-89
Resolving Ancillary Barcode Scanner Problems . . . . . . . . . . . 6-91

Barcodes Do Not Display at Status Ancillary Reagent Window. . 6-91
Recommended Physical Specifications for Barcodes . . . . . . . 6-91

Barcode Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Barcode Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-92
Barcode Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-93
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Barcode Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-95

Barcode Symbology. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-95
Fixed or Variable Length Barcode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-95
Barcode Scan Check Digit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-96
Barcode Scanning Technique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Barcodes Reserved for ADVIA Centaur XP Systems . . . . . . . . 6-97
Printing Event Log Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-97

Investigating Assay Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98
Using Calibration Evaluation Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99
Evaluating Sandwich Assay Calibrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-100
Evaluating Competitive Assay Calibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-101
Investigating Discrepant Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102

Discrepant Calibration Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-102
Discrepant QC Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-105
Discrepant Patient Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-108
Problems with a Single Assay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-110
Problems with Multiple Assays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-111
Assay Specific Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113

Investigating Failed Proficiency Testing Results. . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-113
078D1064-01 Rev. C
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Identifying System Problems

The ADVIA Centaur XP system provides features to help you identify and correct
system problems:
System Status provides a visual indicator that a component or subsystem has a

warning or critical condition.
The event log provides information about system errors and accesses
information about possible causes and corrective action procedures.
Diagnostic tools allow you to test the operation of system components and
move system components when you perform corrective action procedures.
Remote access enables file accessibility through a modem or through

RealTime Solutions service for technical assistance.
WARNING
If the system displays error events, follow the procedures in this guide to resolve
the error event. Do not continue to process samples without first resolving the
error event.
If you have exhausted the procedural steps to resolve the issue and the error event
continues to display, call for technical assistance. Note that your failure to follow
the recommended procedures described in this guide to resolve error events may
cause erroneous results or safety hazards.
If you have questions, contact your local technical support provider or distributor.
Viewing System Status

Use System Status to monitor the condition of the system and determine which
area of the system needs attention.
To determine which area of the system has a warning or critical condition, select
the System Status button at the workspace and then select System Status in the
drop-down list. The System Status window opens, and the affected system area
and the corresponding button change color to indicate status. For example, when
the cleaning solution volume is low, the color of the Supplies button and the
cleaning solution area changes to yellow.
Using the Event Log

Any warning or critical condition that is captured in the event log causes a change
in the background color of the Event Log Status button:
Yellow indicates that a warning condition exists.
Red indicates that a critical condition exists that may cause the system to stop
aspirating or processing sample.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-2
Use the System Event Log window to identify errors and access online
information about possible causes and corrective action procedures.
The system has 3 types of event codes that can display in the event log:
Event Type
Symbol
Definition
Critical
Red triangle
This type of error indicates that the system stopped

processing samples.
Warning
Yellow triangle
This type of error indicates that a problem exists with

a subassembly or supply. The system continues to
process samples.
Information
No symbol
This type of event is not an error condition,

but provides a record of when normal operation
occurrences happened.
You can display specific information at the System Event Log window by
selecting the appropriate View and Sort combinations:
For example, if you select Errors, the system displays only the events that are
errors.
The Sort that you select determines the order in which the system displays
the events. For example, if you select Severity, the system displays the events
in order of most severe to least severe.
Task
View
Sort
Display the events in reverse chronological in order of when

the events occurred
Events
Date
Display the critical and warning events in order of most

severe to least severe
Errors
Severity
Display the events by subsystem
Events
Subsystem
1. At the workspace, select Event Log.

2. Select the appropriate view and identify the problem you want to solve.
To search for a specific event code in the event log, select Event Code in
Search for and then enter the event code.
3. Locate the possible causes and corrective action procedures for the error:
a. At the System Event Log window, select Procedure.
b. At the online information window, select Search.
c. At the Simple Search window, type the event code exactly as it displays
in the event log, including spaces.
You can also enter words that describe the event.
d. Select Enter.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-3
The system displays a list of possible causes and corrective actions.

4. Select a corrective action item to display the procedure on how to perform
that corrective action.
5. If you perform a procedure that is a maintenance activity, log the activity at
the Status Maintenance window.
6. Enter a comment, if necessary, to provide additional information about the
cause or resolution of an individual event code:
a. Select the event.
b. Select Comments.
c. At the Comments window, enter a comment.
You can enter up to 3 comments. You can enter comments of up to
120 alphanumeric characters. The system enters your initials and the date.
If you are not currently signed in, you must sign into the system.
d. Select Save.
If the procedure does not correct the problem or if the problem occurs again, call
for technical assistance.
Other Event Codes

The following event code format indicates a data transfer error:
Undefined event code. Call for technical assistance.
If you see this event, write down the event code or print the window and then call
for technical assistance.
Rebooting the System

CAUTION
Failure to shut down the system correctly can result in unrecoverable system
errors and necessitate the reinstallation of the system software.
Do not disconnect the power to the system or turn the system off using the main
power switch without first following the shut-down procedure in Rebooting the
System page 6-3.
1. At the workshop, select System Status.
CAUTION
Do not disconnect the system. Disconnecting the system turns off the thermal
components of the primary reagent compartment and ancillary queue. Shut down
the system instead.
2.
Select Turn System Off.
3. At the prompt, press any key to continue.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-4
4. Wait until the monitor display turns black.

This does not remove power from the thermal devices such as reagent
refrigeration and probe heaters.
5. Determine that the LED (green light) at the front of the user interface (CUI)
module and application (APC) module is off.
6. Check for obstructions in the following areas before rebooting the system:
sample entry queue
sample exit queue
sample tip loader
ancillary entry
Stat entry
7. Press the main power toggle switch at the back of the system to turn the
system power off.
Wait 1 minute.
8. Press the main toggle switch again to turn the system power back on.
Wait approximately 20 seconds.
9. Press the green computer startup button.
Computer startup button
Figure 6-1
ADVIA Centaur XP System back of the system
10. Log in as centaur and then press Enter twice.

Use all lower case letters for the login. A password is not required.
11. Wait until the system state is Ready, and then resume normal operation.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-5
NOTE: If the workspace is not available, go to the APC module, click on the
system icon, select Turn system off and confirm on the popup window.
What to Do after Pressing a Fast Stop Button

Figure 6-2 displays the 2 fast stop buttons on the system. Use either of these
buttons if there is an obstruction that could cause serious system damage or
personal physical harm. You can also use the fast stop button to safely shut down
the system if the keyboard (or monitor) does not respond.
Fast stop buttons
Figure 6-2
ADVIA Centaur XP front and back of the system
1. Press the fast stop button.

2. Wait for approximately 2 minutes while the system powers down, and the
monitor display turns black.
3. At the prompt, select Continue.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-6
NOTE: If you do not receive this prompt, the system will shut down anyway.
CAUTION
Failure to shut down the system correctly can result in unrecoverable system
errors and necessitate the reinstallation of the system software.
Do not disconnect the power to the system or turn the system off using the main
power switch without first following the shut-down procedure in Rebooting the
System page 6-3.
rack loader
rack exit pusher
sample tip loader
ancillary entry
5. Press the main power toggle switch at the back of the system.
Wait 1 minute.
6. Press the main power toggle switch again.
Green startup button
Figure 6-3
ADVIA Centaur XP System back of the system

Use all lowercase letters for the login. A password is not required.
9. Wait until the system state is Ready.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-7
10. If an error occurs during homing, check the event log and follow the steps
prescribed in online troubleshooting.
12. Select Diagnostic Tools.
13. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Home System.
WARNING
Ensure that you are clear of subassemblies that can move before selecting
Perform. The system moves subassemblies and can cause injury.
14. Select Perform.
15. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Empty & Fill Ring.
WARNING
Ensure that you are clear of subassemblies that can move before closing the
System Diagnostic Tools window. The system returns subassemblies to their
home positions and can cause injury.
16. Close the System Diagnostic Tools window.
17. When the process completes successfully, resume normal operation.
Recovering from a System Lockup or a Slow User

Interface
Call for technical assistance if 1 or more of the following conditions exist:
the software responds very slowly after you make a selection
the software locks up
the event code 700 01 00 is in the event log
Restarting the System After an Error

If the system stops due to an error, ensure that no racks are present in the Stat
entry port and no ancillary packs are present at the ancillary entry queue before
you restart the system. If a rack or an ancillary pack is present in these positions
when you press the Sample Start button, a jam can occur at these positions.
You must also note the position of cuvettes after a system error. Refer to Verifying
the Status of Cuvettes in the Incubation Ring page 6-22.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-8
Recovering from a Power Disruption

Use this procedure to recover from a power outage or power surge. After a power
outage, the power may or may not be restored quickly.
CAUTION
Do not leave the system on if the power is disrupted for an extended period of
time. Leaving the power on could cause serious damage to the system when the
power is restored.
If the system power has not yet been restored, turn the main power toggle
switch off.
If the power has been restored and the system regained power, the system
reboots. The software login screen displays. Continue with the following
steps.

Use all lowercase letters for the login. A password is not required.
3. Use the steps described in Rebooting the System page 6-3, to reboot the
system.
1
2
Main power on/off switch

Figure 6-4
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP back of the system
6-9
Corrective Actions for the Shutdown Procedure

Refer to this section in the event that the system shutdown procedure or the fast
stop shutdown does not resolve the initial system problem.
Shutting down the system should be the last thing that you do to resolve system
problems. The following table provides tips on how to resolve system problems
without shutting down the system. If the mouse, touchscreen, or keyboard is not
responding, follow the actions described in the table to safely reboot the system.
Input Device
Actions
Mouse
If the mouse does not respond, try using the

touchscreen.
If the mouse responds, then use the following steps:
1. Select the system icon and then select Turn
System Off using the mouse.
2. Refer to Rebooting the System page 6-3.
Touchscreen
If the touchscreen does not respond, try using the

keyboard or refer ADVIA Centaur XP Video
Monitor is Black page 6-15.
If the touchscreen responds, then use the following
steps:
1. Select the system icon and then select Turn
System Off using the touchscreen.
2. Refer to Rebooting the System page 6-3.
Keyboard
If the keyboard responds, then use the following

steps:
1. Press the System icon button (top left button)
on the keyboard.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The system menu displays.

Press the down arrow key once.
This selects the Turn System Off option.
Press Enter.
The Do you really want to turn off? dialog
displays with the Yes box selected.
Press Enter again.
The system shuts down.
Refer to Rebooting the System page 6-3.
NOTE: If the system does not respond to the actions listed in the table above, you
can press the fast stop button. Refer to What to Do after Pressing a Fast Stop
Button page 6-5, for details.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-10
Checking the Keyboard Cable Connections

If the keyboard does not respond, check the cable connection for the keyboard
using the ADVIA Centaur XP Keyboard Cable Connections diagram (Figure 6-5)
and ADVIA Centaur XP User Interface Module Back Panel diagram (ADVIA
Centaur XP User Interface Module - Back PanelFigure 6-7).
The cable connection to the back of keyboard is located below the system
monitor. Determine that the keyboard cables at the back of the keyboard and
below the system monitor are firmly connected. The keyboard connections are
shown as items 2 and 6 in the diagram. Check all the keyboard connections.
1
2
3
4
5
6
System switchbox
User interface (UI) module keyboard
Mouse
Cable clamp
Application module mouse
Application module keyboard
Figure 6-5
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Keyboard Cable Connections
6-11
The other end of the keyboard cable is connected to the system input/output (I/O)
panel at the back of the system. If there is a cover in place, lift the panel cover to
gain access to the system I/O panel.
1
2
I/O system panel cover

I/O UI module panel cover
Figure 6-6
ADVIA Centaur System Back View
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-12
Determine that the keyboard cable is firmly connected to the keyboard connector
(item 7 in Figure 6-7).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Barcode scanner cable connector

I/O panel at the back of the system
Touchscreen connector (in)
Touchscreen connectors (out) to the application module and user interface
module
Video connector (in)
Video connectors (out) to the application module and user interface
module
Keyboard connector
Cable routing access (opening)
Lab automation cable connector
Figure 6-7
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP User Interface Module - Back Panel
6-13
Determine that keyboard cable is firmly connected to the keyboard connector (in
Figure 6-8, it is item 2 in the right-hand diagram or item 8 in the left-hand
diagram).
New UI Module
1
2
Original UI Module
Modem
Power control connector (system power)
UNIX keyboard connector
Touchscreen connector
Power control connector
External modem connector
APC
Power cord connector
RTS
Monitor connector
Touchscreen UI connector
UI and RT (real time) connector
LIS
Small computer system interface (SCSI)

connector
Power cord
Keyboard connector
Printer connector
Figure 6-8
Module
ADVIA XP UI Module Cable Connections Back of the UI
Determine that keyboard cable is firmly connected to the keyboard connector on

the APC module.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-14
AC power cord connector
Power switch
UI module connector
Video connector
Touchscreen connector
Keyboard connector
Mouse connector
Figure 6-9
ADVIA Centaur XP System - Back of the Application Module
If the UNIX keyboard connector was disconnected from the computer, and if the
version of the ADVIA Centaur XP software is less than V6.0, then the UNIX
terminal window displays the OK prompt at the bottom of the window.
To correct this issue, use the following steps.
1. Connect the keyboard cable securely.
2. At the OK prompt, type GO, and then press the Enter key.
The UI reboots.
3. At the UI workspace, select the system icon, and then select Turn System
Off.
4. After the system shuts down, verify that the keyboard cables are securely
attached.
5. Go to Rebooting the System page 6-3.
If the UNIX keyboard connector was disconnected from the computer, and if the
version of the ADVIA Centaur XP software V6.0 or later, then once the keyboard
cable is connected, you can continue with normal operations.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-15
ADVIA Centaur XP Video Monitor is Black

If
then
the monitor is black,
determine if the power toggle switch on the

monitor was used to turn the screen off.
the power to the monitor is on,
determine if the monitor cables are securely

connected.
If the cables to the monitor are not firmly connected, use the following steps.
1. Press the fast stop button. Refer to Figure 6-2.
2. Securely insert the monitor cables shown in Figure 6-10.
Monitor
Power
Touchscreen cable (green)
Video cable (white)
Figure 6-10
ADVIA Centaur XP Video Monitor Connections
3. Repeat steps 517 in What to Do after Pressing a Fast Stop Button page 6-5.
4. At the UI workspace, select System icon, and then select Turn System Off.
5. Follow the steps in Rebooting the System page 6-3.
Managing Nonsampling System Status

Do not allow the system to remain in the Inprocess state or the Check Status state
for longer than 2 hours without processing samples. These nonsampling system
states can occur even though sample tubes are in the Inprocess queue and tests are
pending, or all the sample rack are processed and ejected to the sample exit queue.
The system can remain in a nonsampling Inprocess state because of the following
conditions:
sample exit queue is full

To correct this, remove sample racks from the exit queue.
communication between the system and LIS is lost
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-16
To correct this, investigate the communication issue with the LIS vendor to
determine the root cause.
Clearing Cuvette Obstructions

Cuvette obstructions can occur for various reasons. You can troubleshoot and
clear most problems with cuvettes by following the procedures in this section.
CAUTION
Do not leave the top cover open when you add cuvettes to the cuvette loading bin.
Leaving the top cover open allows cuvettes to fall into another part of the system
where it may obstruct normal operation. Close the top cover when adding cuvettes
to the cuvette loading bin.
Checking Cuvette Handling

Use this procedure to recover from cuvette jams in the cuvette loading bin,
orientation chute, or vertical cuvette chute.
BIOHAZARD

078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-17
3. Ensure that the cuvette loading bin is not empty.
1
2
3
4
Ring loader
Elevator
Luminometer
Orientation chute
Figure 6-11
5
6
7
Cuvette loading bin

Preheater
Cuvette Loading Assembly
4. Check to see if the cuvettes are stacked in the bin and are preventing loading.
You can mix the cuvettes in the bin until they are no longer stacked.
5. Inspect the cuvettes in the bin and remove any damaged or deformed cuvettes.
A cuvette can be damaged and contaminated if it was dropped, stepped on,
and then loaded into the cuvette loading bin.
A deformed cuvette can have a string of plastic coming off of it or be
imperfectly molded.
6. Notify your technical representative if you find many deformed cuvettes.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-18
8. Remove and discard all cuvettes from the orientation chute and vertical
cuvette chute using a disposable transfer pipette.
1
2

Orientation chute
Figure 6-12
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Cuvette Loading Assembly
6-19
9. Drop a clean cuvette into the vertical cuvette chute.
1
2
Cuvette
Bottom window
Figure 6-13
Vertical Cuvette Chute
10. Look for the cuvette at the bottom window of the vertical cuvette chute.
11. If the cuvette does not appear in the bottom window, there is an obstruction
in the vertical cuvette chute.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-20
12. Remove the obstruction:

a. Loosen the thumbscrew at the bottom window of the vertical cuvette
chute.
Thumbscrew
Figure 6-14
Vertical Cuvette Chute
b. Remove the window.

c. Pull any jammed cuvettes or other obstruction down and out of the system
or use a transfer pipette to dislodge the obstruction.
d. Loosen the 2 screws and remove the vertical cuvette chute.
e. Check the vertical cuvette chute for obstructions.
f.
Replace the vertical cuvette chute.
g. Replace the vertical cuvette chute window and tighten the thumbscrew.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-21
13. Manually move the conveyor upward and look for binding.
1
2
Conveyor slats.
Cuvette Conveyor
Figure 6-15
Cuvette Conveyor
14. Ensure that no cuvettes are jammed in the preheater.

16. At the Status Supplies window, select Prime Cuvettes.
WARNING
17. Select Perform.
18. Check for air blowing down from the ionizer, which means the conveyor is
online even if it does not move.
19. Ensure that cuvettes are loaded onto the cuvette conveyor and orientation
chute correctly.
20. Watch the movement of the cuvette conveyor.
The conveyor should move freely.
22. Return to normal operation.
23. If the error persists, call for technical assistance.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-22
Verifying the Status of Cuvettes in the Incubation Ring

The system cannot verify the status of the cuvettes in the incubation ring after you
press the fast stop button, or if any of the following events occurs:
Real Time (RT) processor error
User Interface (UI) error

If the UI recovers automatically, the status of the cuvettes in the incubation
ring does not need to be verified.
UI lock-up error
To improve the system recovery time after any of these events, perform the Empty
& Fill Ring procedure:
1. At the Workspace window, select System > Diagnostic Tools.
Performing the procedure immediately rather than waiting for the
system-initiated procedure to empty and fill the incubation ring reduces the
system recovery time.
3. Select Load Tip Tray.
Clearing Cuvettes from the Preheater

Use this procedure to recover from cuvette jams in the preheater.
4. Look for a cuvette jammed at the window at the bottom of the vertical cuvette
chute.
5. Loosen the thumbscrew on the preheater cover.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-23
6. Remove the preheater cover.
1
2
3
Ring loader
Preheater
Screw for the preheater cover
Figure 6-16
4
5
6
Preheater cover
Vertical cuvette chute window
Preheater assembly
Preheater Assembly
7. Look for any obstructions in the preheater.

8. Remove any jammed cuvettes.
9. Ensure that there are 14 cuvettes in the preheater and that there are no spaces
between the cuvettes.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-24
10. Ensure that the cuvettes do not overlap.
1
2
Cuvette position.
Preheater
Figure 6-17
11. Replace the preheater cover and tighten the thumbscrew.

Clearing a Cuvette Jam from the Luminometer or Elevator

3. Check the cuvette waste chute:
a. Clear any obstructions from the cuvette waste chute.
b. Clean the cuvette waste chute.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-25
5. Remove the reagent probes cover.
Figure 6-18
CAUTION
Do not turn the knob for the rotor until you move the waste probe up. Turning the
knob before moving the waste probe can damage the waste probe.
6. Move the waste probe to the up position.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-26
7. Turn the knob on the left bottom of the luminometer and listen for cuvettes
dropping into the waste bin.
Knob
Figure 6-19
Luminometer
8. If the cuvettes do not drop into the waste bin and the luminometer does not
turn, check for obstructions in the cuvette waste chute and clean the cuvette
waste chute.
9. Remove the black elevator cover by loosening the thumbscrew.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-27
10. If a cuvette dropped into the elevator as you were rotating the luminometer,
remove the cuvette.
Thumbscrew
Figure 6-20
Elevator Cover
11. Put your finger into the luminometer through the elevator and check for
evidence of fluid in the luminometer.
If your glove is wet, call for technical assistance.
12. Install the elevator cover, ensuring that the left side is flush with the edge of
the elevator.
13. Verify that the luminometer is operating correctly:
a. Select Turn System Mechanics On.
b. At the workspace, select System Status.
c. Select Diagnostic Tools.
d. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Home Luminometer.
WARNING
e. Select Perform.
f.
If the error persists, select Dark Count with Cuvettes.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-28
g. Select Perform.
WARNING
Do not close the System Diagnostic Tools window until you are clear of
subassemblies that can move. The system returns subassemblies to their home
positions and can cause injury.
Replacing System Elements

This section contains information for replacing basic system elements.
Replacing the Preheater Cover

Refer to Clearing Cuvettes from the Preheater page 6-22. At step 10, install the
new preheater cover. Continue with the instructions in Clearing Cuvettes from the
Preheater.
Replacing Probes
This section contains procedures for replacing these probes:
ancillary probe
reagent probes
aspirate probe
waste probe
Replacing the Ancillary Probe

BIOHAZARD

WARNING
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-29

NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the tubing from the volume check sensor
when disconnecting the tubing from the probe.

4. Disconnect the tubing from the top of the ancillary probe.
NOTE: It might be necessary to use pliers to loosen the probe sleeve.
5. Remove the old probe from the sleeve and discard it in a container approved
for sharp objects.
1
2
3
4
Top gasket
Bottom gasket
Sleeve
Probe
Figure 6-21
Ancillary Probe
6. Install a new ancillary probe.

7. Tighten the sleeve using the pliers.
8. Connect the tubing.
9. Ensure that the top and bottom gaskets are in place.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-30
11. Check for leaks:

a. At the workspace, select System Status.
b. Select Diagnostic Tools.
c. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Dispense Test.
WARNING
d. Select Perform.
e. Observe the ancillary probe as it moves.
If the probe movement is binding, check for interference from tubing
or wiring.
WARNING
Replacing a Reagent Probe

BIOHAZARD

3. Open the top cover.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-31
Figure 6-22
WARNING
5. Push the tubing off of the top of the reagent probe.
6. Loosen the probe sleeve.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-32
NOTE: It might be necessary to use pliers to loosen the probe sleeve.
1
2
3
Tubing
Probe sleeve
Probe
Figure 6-23
Reagent Probe
7. Pull the probe down and remove the old reagent probe and sleeve from the
holder.
8. Remove the old probe from the sleeve and discard it in a container approved
for sharp objects.
9. Install a new reagent probe.
10. Tighten the probe sleeve using the pliers.
11. Connect the tubing.
13. Verify that the probe is operating correctly:
c. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Dispense Test.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-33
d. Select the probe you replaced.

WARNING
e. Select Perform.
f.
Ensure that the fluid dispense is steady and straight, with no sputtering.
g. Ensure that there are no leaks at the tubing connection.

WARNING
Replacing an Aspirate Probe

BIOHAZARD

WARNING
Use care when working with the aspirate probe. The probe tips are sharp and can
cause skin punctures.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-34
4. Remove and discard the aspirate probe:

a. Slide the probe clip away from the probe.
1
2
3
Probe clip
Aspirate probe
Probe entrance port
Figure 6-24
Wash Block
NOTE: To prevent the aspirate probe from bending, grasp the probe with
the index finger and thumb and carefully disconnect the

grounding wire from the aspirate probe.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-35
b. If you are removing a grounded aspirate probe, disconnect the grounding

cable from the aspirate probe.
1
2
3
Tubing to the aspirate probe

Grounding cable
Aspirate probe
Figure 6-25
Grounded Aspirate Probe
c. Carefully push the tubing off of the probe.

d. Carefully lift the probe straight up until it clears the port and then lift the
probe towards the front of the system to remove it from the probe holder
without bending it.
e. Discard the probe in a container approved for sharp objects.
NOTE: Ensure that you use the correct type of aspirate probe. The
grounded aspirate probe has connections for a grounding cable

and tubing.
5. Install a new aspirate probe:
a. Insert the probe tip into the probe entrance port.
b. Push the probe into place.
c. Connect the tubing to the new aspirate probe.
NOTE: To prevent the aspirate probe from bending, grasp the probe with
the index finger and thumb and carefully push the grounding wire
onto the new aspirate probe.
d. If you are installing a grounded aspirate probe, connect the grounding
cable to the aspirate probe.
CAUTION
Ensure that you return the probe clip to its locked position to hold the probe firmly
in place. Failure to do so can cause mechanical error or poor results.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-36
e. Slide the probe clip into place, locking the probe.
1
2
Probe clip
Aspirate probe
Figure 6-26
Wash Block

8. Verify that the probe is operating correctly:
c. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Dispense Wash Fluid
& Aspirate.
d. Select the probe you replaced.
e. Select a fluid.
WARNING
f.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Select Perform.
6-37
g. If the probe is binding, check the routing of the tubing.

WARNING
Replacing the Waste Probe

BIOHAZARD

078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-38
4. To access the luminometer, remove the reagent probes cover.
Figure 6-27
5. Remove the waste probe:

a. Slide the probe clip away from the probe.
b. Push the tubing off of the probe.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-39
c. Carefully lift the probe up until it clears the waste probe guide and then
lift the probe forward to remove it from the probe holder without bending
it.
1
2
3
Waste probe
Probe clip
Waste tubing
Figure 6-28
Luminometer
d. Discard the probe in a container approved for sharp objects.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-40
e. Remove the luminometer cover.
1
2
Nut
Luminometer cover
Figure 6-29
Luminometer Assembly
6. Wipe the top of the waste probe guide with an alcohol prep pad.
7. Place the luminometer cover over the luminometer.
Do not secure it at this time.
NOTE: Ensure that you use the correct type of probe. The aspirate probes are
cupped at the tip. The waste probe is flat at the tip.

8. Install a new waste probe:
a. Attach the waste tubing to the new waste probe.
b. Lift up the luminometer cover slightly to insert the probe tip into the
waste probe guide.
c. Lower the luminometer cover and push the probe into place.
CAUTION
Ensure that you return the probe clip to its locked position to hold the probe firmly
in place. Failure to do so can cause mechanical error or poor results.
d. Slide the probe clip into place, locking the probe.
CAUTION
Do not pinch the base pump tubing and wiring under the luminometer cover.
Pinching the tubing or wiring can lead to malfunctions.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-41
9. Install the nut that secures the luminometer cover.

13. Verify that the waste probe is operating correctly:
a. Select Diagnostic Tools.
b. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Home Luminometer.
WARNING
c. Select Perform.
d. If the waste probe is binding, check the routing of the tubing and the
position of the probe clip.
WARNING
Replacing the Waste Bottle Fluid Sensor

BIOHAZARD

3. Remove the main waste bottle fluid sensor:
b. Lift the waste bottle lid.
c. Move the clamp on the sensor aside and remove the sensor from the
bottle.
d. Close the waste bottle lid.
e. Twist the sleeve on the connector counterclockwise to remove the old
waste bottle fluid sensor.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-42
f.
Discard the sensor in an approved container for biohazardous material.
1
2
Waste bottle fluid sensor

Connector sleeve
Figure 6-30
Waste Bottle Assembly
4. Twist the sleeve on the connector clockwise to tighten the new waste bottle
fluid sensor.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-43
5. Install the fluid sensor in the waste bottle and move the clamp to cover the
sensor.
Waste bottle fluid sensor
Figure 6-31
6. Push in the waste and water drawer.

8. Verify the installation:
a. At the workspace, select the Supplies Status button.
b. At the Status Supplies window, ensure that the Liquid Waste field
displays the OK status message.
9. Resume normal operation.
Troubleshooting Obstructions and Leaks

Recovering from a Sample Tip Tray Loading Jam
If a tip tray jam occurs while the system is processing samples, allow the system
to complete processing before clearing the jam.
2. Manually move the inprocess queue to the right.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-44
3. Remove cuvettes and sample tips that may be obstructing the inprocess queue.
4. Manually move the inprocess queue to the right.
5. Remove the used sample tip tray from the tip tray support.
1
2
Sample tip tray

Hole in sample tip tray
Figure 6-32
3
4
Pin
Inprocess queue
Sample Tip Tray Assembly
6. Lift the sample tip trays out of the sample tip loader.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-45
8. Remove used sample tip trays and covers.

CAUTION
Do not bend the latch while removing the jammed sample trays from the sample
tip loader. Bending the latch can cause more sample tip tray jams.
Latch
Figure 6-33
Sample Tip Tray Loader
CAUTION
Do not bend pull a jammed tray up through the top of the sample tip loader.
Pulling a jammed trays through the top of the sample tip loader can damage the
spring clips. Pull jammed trays down through the sample tip tray waste area.
9. If a sample tip tray is stuck in the loader, carefully pull the sample tip tray
down through the sample tip tray waste area.
NOTE: If you find a deformed sample tip or sample tip tray in the system,
notify your technical representative.

10. Load a new sample tip tray into the sample tip loader:
c. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Load Tip Tray.
WARNING
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-46
d. Select Perform.
11. Ensure that the sample tip tray loader and inprocess queue perform the
following sequence of events as a new tray is loaded:
latch snaps over the new sample tip tray cover
new sample tip tray drops down smoothly
sample tip trays in the loader are not stuck together
sample tip tray drops down over the pins on the tip tray support
when the inprocess queue moves right, the sample tip tray is locked
completely onto the pins
as the sample tip tray is pulled out of the loader when the inprocess queue
moves right, the cover stays in the loader
the cover drops down into the tip tray waste area
the empty sample tip tray drops smoothly down into the tip tray waste
area
WARNING
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-47
Clearing Obstructions from the Sample Exit Queue

BIOHAZARD

1. Remove all the sample racks from the sample exit queue.
Sample exit queue
Figure 6-34
ADVIA Centaur XP Entry, Stat, and Exit Queues
2. Remove any objects from the sample exit queue.

The sensor under the plate of the sample exit queue is magnetic and is able to
detect metal objects such as pens and eye glasses at the right end of the
sample exit queue.
3. Clean the sample exit queue.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-48
Troubleshooting Leaks
Use this procedure if you find substantial amounts of liquid in or around
the system.
BIOHAZARD

1. Press 1 of the fast stop buttons.
Fast stop button
Figure 6-35
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP System front view and back view
6-49

CAUTION
Do not disconnect the system. Disconnecting the system turns off the thermal
components of the primary reagent compartment and ancillary queue. Shut down
the system instead.
3. Select Turn System Off and then select Yes.
4. Access the area of the system where you believe the leak might be
originating from.
5. Look for the following problems:
tubing that is not connected to its fitting
leaky valves
reservoirs not installed correctly
clogs in rinse stations
6. Reconnect the tubing.

sample entry queue
sample exit queue
sample tip loader
ancillary entry
Figure 6-36
ADVIA Centaur XP back of the system
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-50

12. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Prime Functions and then
select Prime Fluid Line.
13. Select the fluid you want to prime.
WARNING
14. Select Perform.
WARNING
16. If the process completes successfully, resume normal operation.
Monitoring Ambient Temperature and Relative Humidity

Environmental changes have the potential to affect patient and control results.
Ensure the system is operating within the specified environmental ranges.
For more information about specific operating ranges, refer to Environmental
Specifications page E-1.
The ADVIA Centaur XP system monitors ambient temperature and relative
humidity to ensure the system is operating within the specified operating ranges.
The system event log displays warning messages under the following conditions:
Ambient temperature is outside the specified range.

The specified range for ambient temperature is 18.0 to 30.0 C.
Relative humidity is outside the specified range.

The specified range for relative humidity is 20 to 80%, non-condensing.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Ambient temperature has shifted more than 3 C in 1 hour.
6-51
The following event code messages are displayed in the event log:
700 06 05
This event code message is displayed when the ambient temperature of the
laboratory, as measured by the system, has shifted or is outside the specified
range.
700 06 06
This event code message is displayed when the humidity in the laboratory, as
measured by the system, is outside the specified range.

If either of these event messages are displayed in the event log, bring the ambient
temperature and relative humidity of the laboratory within the specified operating
ranges.
Quality control results may indicate when the performance of an assay is affected
by environmental changes in the laboratory. If quality control values are out of
range, recalibrate and repeat the assay.
For more information regarding specific assays that may be affected by
environmental changes, refer to the assay instructions for use.
Using Diagnostic Tools

WARNING
Do not use diagnostic tools or perform troubleshooting without observing all

safety rules. System components move and can cause injury. Only individuals
trained by Siemens should perform troubleshooting.
Diagnostic Tools allow you to prime the system, test the operation of system
components, and move system components when you perform corrective action
procedures.
Using the System Diagnostic Tools Window

The System Diagnostic Tools window puts the system in Diagnostics Mode.
Any errors that occur while the system is in Diagnostics Mode appear in the event
log. Wait until the system is not processing samples to use diagnostic tools.
To open the System Diagnostic Tools window from the workspace, perform the
following steps:
1. At the workspace, select the System Status button.
3. Select a test and then select Perform.
For some tests, the system prompts you to perform certain actions.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-52
Accessing Diagnostic Tools

For specific procedures for each diagnostic tool, perform the following steps:
2. Locate the procedure:
a. At the System Event Log window, select Procedure.
b. At the online information window, select Find.
c. Enter Diagnostic Tools.
You can also enter a word or phrase that describes your system problem.
d. Select Enter.
The system displays a list of Diagnostic Tools.
3. Select a topic to display a diagnostic procedure.
Cuvette Handling Tools

Use the following diagnostic tools to test cuvette handling.
Empty Ring
Use this test to empty the cuvettes from the incubation ring.
During this test, the system performs the following actions:
checks that the cuvette waste bin can accept another 115 cuvettes
homes all subassemblies
moves a cuvette into the luminometer and then the incubation ring indexes
to advance 1 cuvette
The system repeats these steps until all cuvettes are out of the incubation ring.
During this test, the cuvette pusher is not active.

You can observe that the system correctly empties cuvettes:
4. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Empty Ring.
WARNING
5. Select Perform.
This process takes approximately 12 minutes to complete.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-53
6. As the system moves all cuvettes out of the incubation ring, watch and listen
as the incubation ring, elevator, and luminometer move.
7. If cuvettes are jamming, check the event log for related errors and then correct
the problem or call for technical assistance.
8. If the process completes successfully, close and secure the top cover and then
resume normal operation.
WARNING
Empty & Fill Ring

Use this test to perform the following actions:
simultaneously empty the cuvettes from the incubation ring and load the ring
with new cuvettes
test the operation of the elevator
test the operation of the luminometer
test the operation of the incubation ring
test the operation of the cuvette pusher and cuvette loading bin
investigate sensor failures
expedite the startup process after performing troubleshooting or installing

new software
recover from a power outage
checks that the cuvette waste bin can accept another 115 cuvettes
elevator moves a cuvette into the luminometer, the incubation ring indexes
to advance 1 cuvette and then the cuvette loader loads a cuvette into the
incubation ring.
The system repeats these steps until all cuvettes are out of the incubation ring
and replaced with clean cuvettes.
During this test, the cuvette pusher is active.

You can observe that the system correctly empties cuvettes and fills the ring with
cuvettes:
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-54

WARNING
5. Select Perform.
6. As the system moves all cuvettes out of the incubation ring and loads new
cuvettes into the ring, watch and listen as the cuvette pusher, incubation ring,
elevator, and luminometer move.
This process takes approximately 12 minutes to complete.
7. If cuvettes are jamming, check the event log for related errors and then correct
the problem or call for technical assistance.
WARNING
Prime Cuvettes
Use this test to perform the following:
start the cuvette conveyor after the cuvette supply is replenished
start the cuvette conveyor after you recover from a cuvette loading jam
cuvette conveyor moves to fill the vertical cuvette chute with cuvettes
During this test, the cuvette pusher is not active.

You can observe that the system correctly loads cuvettes:
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-55
4. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Prime Cuvettes.

WARNING
5. Select Perform.
6. Watch and listen as the cuvette conveyor moves.
The ionizer is also activated when the cuvette conveyor is operating. You
can verify that the ionizer is on by feeling for air blowing down under it as
the cuvette conveyor moves.
7. If the cuvettes are jamming, check the event log for related errors and then
correct the problem or call for technical assistance.
WARNING
Reagent and Ancillary Probe Tools

Use the following diagnostic tools to test the reagent and ancillary probes.
Dispense Test
observe the integrity of the stream of water dispensed into the rinse station
by ancillary and reagent probes
verify correct installation of a new probe
investigate vacuum or water errors
homes all probes over the rinse stations
turns the vacuum and the water pump on
activates the rinse station vacuum valve
dispenses water into the rinse station
repeats the dispense for a selected number of repetitions
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-56
You can observe that the system correctly dispenses water:

NOTE: If the diluter drawer is not closed (up), the system does not prime
the wash station diluters correctly.

1. Ensure that the diluter drawer is in the closed, upright position.
.
1
Diluter drawer
Figure 6-37
Diluter Drawer
5. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Dispense Test.
6. Select the probe you want to test.
7. Select the number of times you want the probe to dispense.
WARNING
8. Select Perform.
The system homes all subassemblies.
9. Look at the stream of fluid as the system dispenses.
10. Ensure that the stream is straight and steady, with no dripping.
11. If the probe is dripping, look for a leaking valve.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-57
WARNING
Home Probes
move the 3 reagent probes, their associated diluters, and the ancillary probe
into primary positions
identify probe move errors caused by interfering tubing or wiring
replace a reagent or ancillary probe
verify the installation of a new reagent or ancillary probe
clean the reagent probe shutter
verify the installation of the reagent probe shutter
access the luminometer, preheater, or elevator
During this test, the reagent probe moves to the following positions:
homes vertically
homes horizontally toward the cuvette
homes horizontally toward the reagent pack
homes horizontally to its rinse station
homes the associated diluter
This test does not home the reagent probe shutter or the reagent mixer.
During this test, the ancillary probe performs the following actions:
homes vertically, then homes horizontally in the pack-cuvette direction and

then horizontally to its rinse station
homes the associated diluters
You can observe that the system correctly homes the primary and ancillary
reagent probes:
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-58
4. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Home Probes.

WARNING
5. Select Perform.
6. Watch and listen as the reagent and ancillary probes move.
7. If the probes do not move correctly, check the event log for related errors
and then correct the problem or call for technical assistance.
WARNING
Sample Probe Tools

Use the following diagnostic tools to test the sample probes.
Home Probe
move the sample probe into its primary position
investigate sample probe movement errors
During this test, the sample probe moves to the following positions:
homes vertically
homes the probe horizontally in the rack-to-cuvette direction
moves the probe horizontally toward the ring
moves down as if ejecting a tip
moves horizontally to the tip remover
moves up and stays above the tip remover
sample diluter homes
You can observe that the system correctly homes the sample probe:
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-59

4. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Home Probe.
WARNING
5. Select Perform.
6. Watch and listen as the sample probe and inprocess queue move.
7. If the probe does not move correctly, check the event log for related errors
WARNING
Load Tip Tray

load a new sample tip tray and reset the counter
check the operation of the sample tip loader
homes the sample probe, inprocess queue, rack loader, rack exit pusher,
stat pusher, and sample tip loader
checks for the presence of a tip tray and the absence of a tip band
removes the current tray
loads a new tip tray
You can observe that the system correctly loads a tip tray:
CAUTION
Do not leave tips on the sample tip tray on the inprocess queue when you eject the
tray. If tips are are on the tray when you eject the tray, a jam occurs. Ensure that
the sample tip tray on the inprocess queue is empty before you select this tool.
2. Remove the sample tip tray from the inprocess queue:
a. Manually move the inprocess queue so you can access the sample tip tray.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-60
b. Move the sample tip tray to the left to disengage the tray from the locking
pins.
1
2
Sample tip tray

Hole in sample tip tray
Figure 6-38
3
4
Locking pin
Inprocess queue
Sample Tip Tray Assembly
c. Lift the sample tip tray off the tray support.

5. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Load Tip Tray.
WARNING
6. Select Perform.
7. Select Continue.
The system resets the counter that determines which tip to pick up next.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-61
8. Watch and listen as the sample tip loader loads a new sample tip tray.
9. If the sample tip tray does not load correctly, check the event log for related
errors and then correct the problem or call for technical assistance.
WARNING
Luminometer Tools
Use the following diagnostic tools to test the luminometer.
Dark Count with Cuvette

Perform this test in conjunction with the Dark Count without Cuvette test. Use
this test to perform the dark count test for a selected number of cuvettes to
investigate the following areas:
PMT errors due to light leaks
luminometer errors
turns vacuum and water on, but they are not used
verifies that there are enough empty, sequential cuvettes to perform the
selected number of repetitions
loads an empty cuvette in to the luminometer
takes a PMT reading when the empty cuvette is moved to the PMT
During this test, the luminometer stays empty after the last cuvette is ejected.
New cuvettes are not automatically loaded into the incubation ring, but the system
knows the location of the empty slots.
You can evaluate the performance of the PMT and luminometer:
3. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Dark Count with Cuvette.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-62
4. In Number of Cuvettes, select the number of cuvettes you want to use for the
test.
WARNING
5. Select Perform.
The System Dark Count Data window opens at the completion of the test.
If you select 8 cuvettes, the system displays values for the RLU 1
fields.
fields and RLU 2 fields.
fields, RLU 2 fields, and RLU 3 fields.
6. Record the Total Mean.
Ensure that the difference between the values for Total Mean obtained in this
test and Total Mean obtained in the Dark Count without Cuvettes test is less
than 25. RLUs higher than 25 may indicate light leaks. Refer to the procedure
Dark Count without Cuvette page 6-62.
7. If the dark count test does not meet specifications, call for technical
assistance.
WARNING
Dark Count without Cuvette

Use this test to perform the dark count test for a selected number of readings to
investigate the following areas:
PMT errors due to light leaks
luminometer errors
ejects all cuvettes from the luminometer
turns vacuum and water on, but they are not used
takes PMT readings at empty slots in the luminometer
During this test, the incubation ring and elevator are not used.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-63
You can evaluate the performance of the PMT and luminometer:

3. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Dark Count without
Cuvette.
4. In Number of Cuvettes, select the number of readings you want for the test.
When you select the Dark Count without Cuvette test, the system uses the
selection from this list as the number of readings it performs at empty slots in
the luminometer.
WARNING
5. Select Perform.
The System Dark Count Data window opens at the completion of the test.
fields.
fields and RLU 2 fields.
fields, RLU 2 fields, and RLU 3 fields.
6. Record the Total Mean and Total SD values:
a. Ensure that the value for Total Mean is less than 600.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-64
RLUs higher than 600 may indicate a defective PMT, a wet or dirty
luminometer, electronic noise, or light leaks.
1
2
Total SD specification limit

Total mean
Figure 6-39
Standard Deviation Specifications
b. Find the Total Mean value that you obtained in the dark count test on the
x-axis and determine the corresponding Total SD specification limit from
the curve on the chart.
c. Verify that the Total SD value that you obtained in the dark count test is at
or below the Total SD specification limit.
For example, if the Total Mean value of the dark count test is 80,
according to the chart, the corresponding Total SD specification limit is
15.00. A Total SD value of 15.00 or less in the dark count test is within
specifications.
7. If the dark count test does not meet specifications, call for technical
assistance.
WARNING
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-65
Home Luminometer
move the luminometer and its associated subsystem components into their
primary positions
investigate waste probe home sensor errors
investigate luminometer home sensor errors
recover from a cuvette jam in the luminometer or elevator
checks and homes the elevator down position
homes the waste probe
moves luminometer to the next load position
rotates and pauses luminometer at the remaining 7 positions while the cuvette
ejector rod moves down
homes luminometer
You can observe that the system correctly homes the luminometer:
4. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Home Luminometer.
WARNING
5. Select Perform.
6. Listen as the luminometer moves.
7. If the luminometer does not move correctly, check the event log for related
WARNING
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-66
Aspirate Probe Tools

Use the following diagnostic tools to test the aspirate probes.
Home Probes
move the aspirate probes to their primary positions (up)

If they are already up, they move down slightly and then back up.
identify errors caused by interfering tubing or wiring
replace or clean aspirate probes
You can observe that the system correctly homes the aspirate probes:
4. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Home Probes.
WARNING
5. Select Perform.
6. Watch and listen as the aspirate probes move.
7. If the aspirate probes do not move correctly, check the event log for related
WARNING
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-67
Dispense Wash Fluid & Aspirate

dispense and aspirate wash fluid from selected dispense ports and aspirate
probes
investigate for pinched tubing
investigate for clogged probe
verify the installation of a new probe
turns vacuum on
moves inprocess queue right so you can see the aspirate probes
indexes and moves incubation ring
opens fluid valves
homes diluter
dispenses selected fluid into a cuvette through the selected fluid path and
dispense port or location
selected aspirate probe moves down and aspirates fluid out of the cuvette
incubation ring indexes and moves the cuvette to the elevator
elevator moves the cuvette into the luminometer
incubation ring indexes and moves the cuvette to the selected aspirate probe,
if necessary
luminometer moves and the system ejects the cuvette
This sequence is repeated for the selected number of repetitions.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-68
You can observe that the system correctly dispenses and aspirates wash fluid:
NOTE: If the diluter drawer is not closed, the system does not prime the wash
station diluters correctly.

Diluter drawer
Figure 6-40
Diluter Drawer
5. Select Dispense Wash Fluid & Aspirate.
6. Select the dispense port and aspirate probe pair you want to test.
7. You can select the fluid you want the probe to dispense.
8. Select the number of times you want the selected probe to dispense the
selected fluid.
WARNING
9. Select Perform.
10. Watch the port dispense the fluid.
The stream should be straight and steady.
NOTE: Some dispense ports dispense fluid from 2 locations.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1
2
6-69
Dispense port 1 dispenses from the right and left sides of aspirate probe 1.
Dispense port 1 for water

Dispense port 1 for wash 1 or wash 3
Figure 6-41
Wash Block
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-70
1
2

Figure 6-42
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Wash Block
1
2
6-71

Figure 6-43
Wash Block
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-72
1
2
3
4
5
The wash displacement port dispenses from the area between aspirate
probe 2 and aspirate probe 3 and the resuspension ports are on the right
end of the manifold.
Wash displacement port

Resuspension port 2 for water
Resuspension port 3 for wash 1
Acid
Resuspension port 1 for wash 3
Figure 6-44
Wash Block
11. Watch the aspirate probe aspirate the fluid.

All fluid should be aspirated.
12. If the system does not home or if there is a problem with the dispense or
aspirate, check the event log for related errors and then correct the problem
or call for technical assistance.
14. Install the cover behind the sample entry queue.
WARNING
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-73
Performing LIS Communication Diagnostics

You can use the Communication Diagnostics window to investigate LIS problems
and to suspend communications between the system and the LIS if your LIS is not
operational.
NOTE: If your LIS is not operational, it is important to suspend communications
to avoid system errors. If you do not suspend communications, the

ADVIA Centaur XP system continues to send information to the LIS. System
errors can occur if the LIS is unable to accept the information.
2. At the System Event Log window, select Communication Diagnostics.
3. To temporarily stop communications between your system and the LIS, select
Suspend Communications and then select Save.
The ADVIA Centaur XP system does not send information to the LIS, but can
receive information. Information received by the ADVIA Centaur XP system
is not scheduled in the worklist until you select Reset LIS Communications.
4. To investigate LIS communication problems, select Perform Diagnostics.
Troubleshooting Truncated PIDs in the LIS

The system transmits 011 characters in the SID field of a result record. If the LIS
sends a PID value longer than 11 characters with a worklist, or if a PID manual
entry exceeds 11 characters, the PID is truncated when transmitted back with the
result.
Using System Tools

Use the following diagnostic tools to test the system.
Homing the System

Use this test to move all system components to their primary positions. During
this test, the system homes the following components:
cuvette pusher
cuvette loader
aspirate probes 1, 2, 3, and 4
waste probe
elevator
luminometer
reagent probes 1, 2, and 3
reagent mixer
reagent barcode shutter
reagent probe shutter
reagent barcode scanner
sample probe
rack loader
rack exit pusher
stat pusher
sample tip loader
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-74
inprocess queue ancillary probe
ancillary entry pusher
ancillary door
ancillary queue
During this test, the vacuum and water pump are off.
You can observe that the system correctly homes the system:
3. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Home System.
WARNING
4. Select Perform.
5. If the subassemblies do not move correctly, check the event log for related
WARNING
Homing the Inprocess Queue

Use this test to move the inprocess queue to its primary position. During this test,
the system homes the following components:
sample probe
rack loader
rack exit pusher
stat pusher
sample tip loader
inprocess queue
You can observe that the system correctly homes the inprocess queue:
NOTE: If the inprocess queue is in the home position, move it out of the home
position before performing this procedure.

078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-75
4. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Home Inprocess Queue.

WARNING
5. Select Perform.
6. Watch and listen as the inprocess queue and sample probe move.
a. If the inprocess queue and sample probe do not move correctly, check the
event log for related errors and then correct the problem or call for
technical assistance.
b. If the process completes successfully, close and secure the top cover and
then resume normal operation.
WARNING
Homing the Ancillary Queue

Use this test to move the ancillary queue to its primary position. During this test,
the system homes the following components:
ancillary probe
ancillary queue pusher
ancillary door
ancillary queue
You can evaluate if the system correctly homes the ancillary queue:
3. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Home Ancillary Queue.
WARNING
4. Select Perform.
5. Listen as the ancillary queue moves.
a. If the ancillary queue does not move correctly, check the event log for
related errors and then correct the problem or call for technical assistance.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-76
b. If the process completes successfully, resume normal operation.

WARNING
Emptying the Inprocess Queue

Use this test to remove all sample racks from the inprocess queue.
During this test, the system performs the following actions
homes the following components:

sample probe
inprocess queue
rack loader
rack exit pusher
stat pusher
sample tip loader
checks that the exit queue is not full
moves the inprocess queue slot to the rack exit position
extends and retracts the rack exit pusher
stat/sample pusher pushes the rack right
The system repeats these steps until all sample racks are ejected from the
inprocess queue or until the sample exit queue is full
You can observe that the system correctly empties the inprocess queue:
4. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Empty Inprocess Queue.
WARNING
5. Select Perform.
NOTE: The sample exit pusher moves even if there is no rack in that position of
the inprocess queue.

6. Watch and listen as the sample exit pusher pushes the racks out of the
inprocess queue.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-77
7. If the inprocess queue and sample probe do not move correctly, check the
event log for related errors and then correct the problem or call for technical
assistance.
WARNING
Emptying the Ancillary Queue

Use this test to remove all ancillary packs from the ancillary queue. During this
test, the system performs the following actions:
homes the following components:

ancillary probe
ancillary queue
ancillary pusher
ancillary door
checks that an ancillary pack is not in the ancillary entry
moves the next slot in the ancillary queue to the exit position
opens the ancillary door
extends the ancillary entry pusher
moves the ancillary queue counterclockwise
retracts the ancillary entry pusher and pack
closes the ancillary door
waits until the ancillary pack is removed from the ancillary entry
The system repeats these steps for all slots in the ancillary queue.
You can observe that the system correctly empties the ancillary queue:
3. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select
Empty Ancillary Queue.
WARNING
4. Select Perform.
5. Remove the ancillary pack from the ancillary entry.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-78
6. Store the ancillary packs in a refrigerator if you need to continue checking

this area.
7. If the ancillary queue and ancillary probe do not move correctly, check the
event log for related errors and then correct the problem or call for technical
assistance.
WARNING
Resetting the Thermals

Use this test to reset system thermal components if there was a thermal error
which caused 1 or more components to go offline. During this test, the system
performs the following actions:
sends the restart command to all thermal loops
equilibrates thermal components

3. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Reset Thermals.
4. Select Perform.
Performing the Vacuum Test

Use this test to evaluate the system vacuum pressure. During this test, the system
performs the following actions:
turns the system vacuum on
evaluates the system vacuum pressure

3. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Vacuum Test.
4. Select Perform.
Wait until the system displays Vacuum Low, Vacuum Normal, or Vacuum
High at the System Vacuum Test window.
5. Select Cancel Test to stop the system vacuum and conclude the test.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-79
6. If the system displayed Vacuum Low or Vacuum High, check the event log for
related errors and then correct the problem or call for technical assistance.
7. If the Vacuum Test completes successfully, resume normal operation.
Performing the Sample Barcode Read Test

Use this test to evaluate the ability of the sample barcode scanner to read the
barcode on a sample rack and the barcodes on the sample tubes in the rack. During
this test, the system performs the following actions:
accepts a sample rack through the sample entry queue or the Stat entry
scans the barcode on the sample rack and the barcodes on the sample tubes in
the rack
evaluates the status of each barcode on the sample tubes in the rack
displays the scanned information and barcode status in a table
LASER WARNING
Never look directly at the laser beam or at its reflection from a shiny surface.
Looking directly at the laser beam or its reflection could cause damage to the
eyes. Only trained field service personnel should perform procedures related to
laser assemblies. Refer to Appendix A, Protecting Yourself from Barcode Scanner
Lasers, for more information.
3. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Sample Barcode Read
Test.
4. Perform the appropriate action:
If you want to...
Then select...
test sample barcode scanning when a rack enters the system

through the sample entry queue,
Routine.
test sample barcode scanning when a rack enters the system

through the Stat entry,
Stat.
WARNING
5. Select Perform.
Wait until the System Sample Barcode Read Test window opens with the
test results.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-80
6. If the test results are unacceptable, check the event log for related errors and
then correct the problem or call for technical assistance.
7. If the test results are acceptable, return to normal operation.
WARNING
Priming Functions Prime System

Use this test to prime all fluid lines. During this test, the system performs the
following actions:
turns vacuum and water pump on
dispenses water from reagent and ancillary probes into their rinse stations
opens and closes associated valves
dispenses fluid into cuvettes for all dispense ports and fluids
indexes incubation ring and moves all used cuvettes to the elevator
elevator moves the cuvette into the luminometer
luminometer moves and the system ejects the cuvette
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-81
You can evaluate if the system correctly primes:

NOTE: If the diluter drawer is not closed (up), the system does not prime the
wash station diluters correctly.

Diluter drawer
Figure 6-45
Diluter Drawer

4. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Prime Functions, and then
select Prime System.
WARNING
5. Select Perform.
6. If the system does not prime correctly, check the event log for related errors
WARNING
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-82
Priming Functions Prime Fluid Line

Use this test to prime a selected fluid line with water, wash solution, acid, or base.
moves all subassemblies to their home positions
turns on vacuum
turns on water pump
when priming the reagent tubing, the system uses water and dispenses it into
the rinse station (fluid primes for approximately 1 second)
when priming 1 of the system fluid lines, the system dispenses the selected
fluid into a cuvette and then aspirate it
dispenses fluid from associated pump or diluter
incubation ring moves the cuvettes to the elevator
elevator moves the cuvettes to the luminometer
luminometer moves and the system ejects the cuvettes
You can observe that the system correctly primes the fluid line:
NOTE: If the diluter drawer is not closed (up), the system does not prime the
wash station diluters correctly.

Diluter drawer
Figure 6-46
Diluter Drawer

4. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Prime Functions and then
select Prime Fluid Line.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-83
5. Select the fluid line you want to prime.

7. Select the number of times you want to prime the fluid.
WARNING
8. Select Perform.
9. You can observe the diluters while the system is performing the test:
a. Access the area of the system where you suspect a problem:
To test the...
Perform these steps...
sample or ancillary
diluters,
loosen the screw on the left side of the system that

secures the top cover and then open the top cover.
reagent probe diluters,
loosen the 2 thumbscrews on the left side of the system

and then lift the cover up and off.
other system diluters,
open the diluter drawer to observe the diluters move.
1
2
Reagent diluter cover

Thumbscrews
Figure 6-47
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-84
b. Ensure that the diluter plunger moves.
1
2
3
From left to right: Reagent Probe 3 Diluter, Reagent Probe 2 Diluter, Reagent
Probe 1 Diluter
From left to right: Sample Diluter, Ancillary Diluter
From left to right: Resuspend Dispense Diluter, Dispense 1 Diluter, Dispense 2
Diluter, Wash Displacement Diluter, Dispense 3 Diluter
Figure 6-48
System Diluter Locations
c. Ensure that the stream is straight and steady.

10. If the test fails or you see leaks, check for disconnected or kinked tubing.
WARNING
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-85
Priming Functions Prime System Fluid Bottle

Use this test to prime wash solution, cleaning solution, acid, or base from the
appropriate system fluid bottle to the reservoir and the associated valve or pump.
turns vacuum and water pump on
closes vent valve for the selected system fluid bottle
associated pump or diluter primes fluid from system fluid bottle
aspirates fluid out of the cuvette
incubation ring moves the cuvettes to the elevator
elevator moves the cuvettes to the luminometer
luminometer moves and the system ejects the cuvettes
You can evaluate if the system correctly primes the system fluid bottle:
3. At the System Diagnostic Tools window, select Prime Functions, and then
select Prime System Fluid Bottle.
WARNING
5. Select Perform.
6. If the fluid does not prime correctly, check the event log for related errors
WARNING
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-86
Remote Access
If you are not using the RealTime Solutions service and your system is connected
to a modem, select remote access to make your files accessible for technical
assistance. This feature allows Siemens to collect SID and RLU data. Refer to
Selecting Remote Access page 8-50.
Siemens cannot view the workspace by modem. To show a Siemens technical
assistance representative information on a window, perform the following steps:
1. At the Workspace, select Print.
2. Select Print Workspace.
3. Fax the printout to the Siemens technical assistance representative.
Resolving Barcode Problems

Use this section to identify and resolve barcode problems. This section also
contains specifications for creating and using your own SID barcode labels.
Check the event log for error messages indicating barcode problems and their
possible causes and solutions.
If there is a problem with sample barcodes and you are not using Siemens barcode
labels, test the system with a Siemens calibrator or control barcode label. If testing
the system with a Siemens barcode label or using the suggested solutions does not
solve the problem, call for technical assistance.
If the barcode scanner is not operating correctly, you can manually enter the
information at the appropriate window.
Resolving Hand-held Barcode Scanner Problems

LASER WARNING
Use the following procedures to resolve problems with the hand-held barcode
scanner.
Barcode Scanner Reads Sporadically

1. Check the scanning technique.
Refer to Barcode Scanning Technique page 6-97.
2. Assess the barcode print quality.
Refer to Barcode Quality page 6-93.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-87
3. Check and tighten the cable connection between the scanner and the system.
Barcode Scanner Does Not Read

1. Check symbologies and options at the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window.
2. For the check digit option, at the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window,
select Disable.
3. Check the barcode scanner, cable, and port.
4. If the problem persists, call for technical assistance.
Resolving Sample Barcode Scanner Problems

LASER WARNING
Use the following procedures to resolve problems with the sample barcode
scanner.
Barcode Scanner Reads Sporadically

1. Assess the barcode print quality.
Refer to Barcode Quality page 6-93. If necessary, obtain new barcode labels
and place them on the sample tube or sample cup.
2. Ensure that the barcode labels face the opening in the rack when you load
sample tubes or cups in the sample rack.
3. Ensure that the sample rack barcode label is not falling off.
Refer to Maintaining the Sample Racks page 5-57.

CAUTION
Do not allow racks to get stuck as they are loaded. If the rack hesitates or binds in
the input queue, the barcode scanner might not read all the sample barcode labels
in the rack or the rack label. If a rack gets stuck as it enters the inprocess queue,
remove the rack and then reload it.
4. Ensure that the sample racks load smoothly into the inprocess queue.
5. Ensure that the upright panel behind the sample entry queue is installed.
6. The panel prevents the barcode scanner from reading racks that are already
loaded in the inprocess queue.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-88
Barcodes Do Not Display at Status Samples Window

CAUTION
Do not remove, reposition, or clean the barcode scanner. These actions can
damage the scanner or cause additional problems.
1. Ensure that the sample barcodes do not have quality defects such as faded
or inconsistent print.
2. Ensure that the barcode labels are positioned correctly on the sample rack
and the sample tubes or cups.
3. Ensure that the information on the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window
is correct.
CAUTION
4. Press the sample start button and then look for a red light reflection on the
rack as the scanner reads the barcode label.
1
2
Red Light Reflection

Sample Rack
5. If you cannot determine the cause, you can enter the SID at the Status Enter
SID window.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-89
Resolving Reagent Barcode Scanner Problems

LASER WARNING
Use the following procedure to resolve problems with the reagent barcode
scanner.
Barcodes Do Not Display at Status Primary Reagent Window

CAUTION
When the system cannot read the primary pack barcode, the system displays the
Status Enter Primary Barcodes window. You can manually enter the barcode in
the appropriate field.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-90
To determine why the system could not read the barcode, use the following tips. If
the problem persists, contact your local technical support provider or distributor.
Ensure that the reagent packs are seated correctly on the reagent shelf in the
primary reagent compartment.
If only 1 pack is not being read, move it to another position in the primary
reagent compartment and then notify your field service representative.
Wipe off any condensation from the reagent pack labels and the reagent shelf.
If the barcode labels are not correctly placed on the reagent packs, call for
technical assistance.
Ensure that the reagent barcodes do not have quality defects such as faded
or inconsistent print.
Open and close the primary reagent door and then look for a red light
reflection on the back of the primary reagent compartment as the scanner
reads the barcode labels.
Ensure that the reagent barcode reader moves and that the reagent barcode
shutter opens.
1
2
3
Reagent barcode shutter

Red light reflection
Reagent barcode reader
Figure 6-49
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Primary Reagent Compartment back view
6-91
If you are unable to resolve the problem, manually enter the barcode at the
Status Enter Primary Barcode window. Contact your local service

provider about the problem.
Resolving Ancillary Barcode Scanner Problems

LASER WARNING
Use the following procedure to resolve problems with the ancillary barcode
scanner.
Barcodes Do Not Display at Status Ancillary Reagent Window

CAUTION
When the system cannot read the ancillary pack barcode, the system displays the
Status Enter Ancillary Barcodes window. You can manually enter the barcode in
the appropriate field.
To determine why the system could not read the barcode, use the following tips. If
the problem persists, contact your local technical support provider or distributor.
Check the ancillary pack labels for condensation.
Ensure that the barcode labels are positioned correctly on ancillary packs.
Ensure that the ancillary barcodes do not have quality defects such as faded or
inconsistent print.
Place an ancillary pack in the ancillary entry and then look for a red light
reflection as the scanner reads the barcode label.
Recommended Physical Specifications for Barcodes

For optimum system performance use Siemens barcode labels for calibrator and
control samples. However, if you are making your own labels, the specifications
in this section are provided as a guide. The read rates for barcode labels not
obtained from Siemens can vary depending upon the print quality of the labels.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-92
The ability of the ADVIA Centaur XP system to scan a barcode can be affected by
the following barcode characteristics:
size
color
quality
positioning
symbology
fixed or variable length
check digit
reserved characters
Barcode Size
The required dimensions of the label and the barcode are listed below:
Dimension
Size (cm)
Size (in)
maximum label length
8.89
3.50
quiet zone at each end
0.64
0.25
maximum barcode length
7.60
3.00
minimum barcode height
0.64
0.25
minimum narrow bar width
0.02
0.01
The minimum density ratio is 2:1.
Barcode Color
Since barcode scanners read at a visible wavelength, the preferred background
color is white. The preferred print color of symbols is black. Use of other colors
can affect the ability of the system to read the barcode.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-93
Barcode Quality
The ideal barcode label has clean, clear, straight fine lines with high contrast
between light and dark areas.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Barcode ink is smeared or smudged

Barcode ink is faded
Barcode lines are wavy
Barcode ink is scratched
Barcode ink is slanted
Barcode label contains void
Figure 6-50
Problem Barcodes
Problems with the barcode label that may interfere with scanning can include
problems with the material or surface on which barcodes are printed, poor quality
printing, environmental factors that damage the barcodes during storage or use,
and incorrect placement of the barcode label on the sample tube or sample cup.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-94
The following table contains the quality components and factors causing scanning
problems:
Quality Components
Factors Causing Scanning Problems
environmental factors during

storage and use
abrasion
aging
chemicals
frost
fungi and mildew
humidity
lubricants
packaging preservatives
protective coatings
salt spray
solvents and cleaners
tape
temperature
ultraviolet light
label material
conspicuous grain
high porosity
low opacity
label surface
coating or overlaminate too thick (> 0.076 mm

or 0.003 in)
high gloss laminates
highly textured laminates
high matte laminates
polarized laminates
very coarse surface
very smooth surface
placement of label on sample cup
crooked
print quality
faded areas
irregularities
low scan or symbol contrast
no leading or trailing quiet zone
scratches
smears
smudges
streaks
very dark or very light barcodes
very thin or thick lines
voids
wavy, slanted, or curved lines
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-95
Barcode Positioning
Position the barcode vertically on the primary sample tube or sample cup,
approximately 2 cm (0.8 inches) from the top. If the barcode label is twisted, the
barcode scanner might not read the label. Ensure that the labels are placed firmly
on the sample cup. It is recommended that you do not place more than 2 labels on
a primary sample tube or sample cup.
Barcode label position
Figure 6-51
Sample Tube
Barcode Symbology
At the Setup Tube Type and Barcode window, select the appropriate
symbologies:
Codabar
Interleaved 2 of 5
Code 39
Code 128
Code 128 is the system default symbology and is always active since it is used for
all Siemens labels for sample racks, primary reagent packs, ancillary reagent
packs, calibrators, and controls.
Fixed or Variable Length Barcode

For some barcode symbologies, you can select either a fixed or variable barcode
length. The maximum length for an SID is 13 characters. The maximum length of
a barcode label in any symbology on ADVIA Centaur XP systems is 20
characters. Use the mapping options for longer barcodes.
Use the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window, to specify your barcode type and
enter the barcode length. Use fixed-length values whenever possible.
If you specify a fixed-length value, the system recognizes only barcode labels
with the specified number of characters.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-96
This reduces the chance of substitution or omission errors.
If you specify a variable-length value, the system then reads and decodes all
labels in the active symbology, regardless of their length.
Barcode Scan Check Digit

A check digit is a character included in a barcode symbol that is used with a
mathematical algorithm to check the validity of the decoded data. The following
table displays the use of check digits and the symbologies available on the system.
In this symbology...
A check digit is...
Codabar
a recommended option.
Interleaved 2 of 5
Code 39
Code 128
included.
This information does not apply to the master curve, calibrator, and control
information that is read by the barcode scanner.
1. At the Workspace, select Setup.
2. Select Summary.
3. Select Tube Type & Barcode.
4. For each active symbology, select the appropriate Check Digit option:
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Enable
Disable
nw7 (Codabar standard check digits)
mod16 (Codabar standard check digits)
nw7mod16 (Codabar standard check digits)
6-97
Barcode Scanning Technique

LASER WARNING
The barcode scanner is active after selecting Scan at the Calibration Master
Curve Definition window or when the Calibration Calibrator Definition window
is open. Use the following techniques when scanning a barcode:
Center the barcode scanner over the barcode.
Move the barcode scanner from the top of the card to the bottom of the card.
Ensure that the system beeps after scanning a barcode before proceeding to
the next barcode.
Ensure that the tip of the scanner is directly contacting the barcode and that
you are not pressing down so hard that you mar the barcode.
Barcodes Reserved for ADVIA Centaur XP Systems

Certain characters are reserved by Siemens for all barcode symbologies. You
cannot use the reserved characters in an SID code for barcodes of the specified
length in the indicated position. The following displays the reserved SID character
sequences for barcodes that use a check digit and for barcodes that do not use a
check digit.
Barcode
Length
Character
Position
Reserved
ADVIA Controls
11
Bell
Escape
Carriage Return
K
1
2
3
4
ADVIA Controls
8 or 9
Bell
Escape
Carriage Return
C
1
2
3
4
ADVIA Calibrators
Printing Event Log Reports

Use the following procedure to print information from the event log.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-98
3. In the list of available reports, select Event Log.

4. Select the View.
If you want to print...
Then select...
all event codes, including informational events as well as errors,
All.
only informational event,
Events.
only warning and critical errors,
Errors.
5. Select the Sort.

If you want to print the event codes in the order of...
Then...
most recent first for a specified time period,
Date.
related subsystems,
Subsystem.
lowest event code number to highest event code number,
Events.
most severe to least severe,
Severity.
6. Enter the Starting Date and Ending Date.
Investigating Assay Problems

Use this section when trying to resolve assay problems. First review the following
questions, then use the other information in this section to match the symptoms
that you find with the problems that can cause them. To help find a pattern or a
trend, answer the following questions:
Does the problem affect only patient samples, controls, or calibrators or does
it affect a combination of sample types?
Has the problem occurred once or does it appear consistently?
Does the problem occur only you use when certain lot numbers of calibrators,
controls, or reagents?
Have you prepared, handled, and stored reagents, calibrators, controls, and
samples?
Does the problem affect more than 1 assay?
What type of assay (competitive or sandwich) does the problem affect?
Is there a common factor affecting performance?
Are the RLUs increasing or decreasing in an assay?
To help find a pattern or a trend, collect and print the following data:
patient sample results
quality control results
calibration data
replicate CVs
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-99
Using Calibration Evaluation Ranges

You can use calibration evaluation ranges to resolve problems that cause failed
calibrations.
2. Select Data.
3. At the Calibration Data window, review the status and the flags for the
calibration data.
4. If the percent coefficient of variation (CV) of the individual calibrator
replicates exceeds the defined acceptable value, refer to Discrepant
Calibration Results page 6-102.
5. If the calibration is invalid and has failed the defined or observed
ranges for slope, ratio, low cal deviation, or high cal deviation, select
Evaluation Ranges.
6. At the Calibration Evaluation Ranges window, compare the Values to the
Defined ranges and Observed ranges.
Defined ranges are specified for each lot at the time of reagent
manufacture.
Observed ranges are established by the system.
7. Determine if the values for slope, ratio, low cal deviation, or high cal
deviation are within the defined or observed ranges.
If the value is...
Then...
out of the defined range
use the tables that follow to evaluate flagged calibration

metrics for sandwich or competitive assays.
out of the observed

range but within the
defined range
you can accept the calibration. Accepting an

invalid calibration due to a failed observed range
is acceptable when parts have been replaced on the system,
such as probes, tubing, or filters. Refer to Accepting an
Invalid Calibration page 3-25.
Refer to Understanding Calibration Evaluation Criteria page 3-4.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-100
Evaluating Sandwich Assay Calibrations

Is the value within the defined range?
Slope
Ratio
Low Cal
Deviation
High Cal
Deviation
Possible Causes and Corrective

Actions
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Poor water quality. Ensure that the

water quality integrity meets
requirements. Refer to Reagent Water
Quality page C-4.
Calibrator stability has been
compromised. Ensure that calibrators
(lyophilized, reconstituted, or liquid)
are being stored as recommended in
the calibrator package insert.
Incorrect volume was used to
reconstitute lyophilized calibrators.
Ensure that the correct volume was
used by referring to the calibrator
package insert for reconstitution
instructions.
No
Yes
No
No
Reagents have exceeded their opened

stability. Ensure that reagent packs are
stored upright at 2 to 8 C, and discard
any reagents that exceed stability.
No
No
No
No
Cleaning solution in the water supply.

Ensure that the water bottle is rinsed
thoroughly after it is cleaned.
Calibrator used was incorrect for the
assay. Check the calibrator package
insert or the ADVIA Centaur XP Assay
Manual to determine the correct
calibrator to use with an assay. Ensure
that the correct calibrator was poured
into the correctly labeled sample tube.
If you cannot resolve the problem, load new reagent packs and calibrators and
then schedule another calibration at the Worklist Schedule window. If the
problem persists, call for technical assistance.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-101
Evaluating Competitive Assay Calibrations

Is the value within the defined range?
Slope
Ratio
Low Cal
Deviation
High Cal
Deviation

Actions
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Water supply is contaminated. Check

the integrity of your reagent water
system and ensure that it has been
maintained. Refer to Reagent Water
Quality page C-4.
Yes
Yes
No
No

Poor water quality. Ensure that the
water quality integrity meets
requirements. Refer to Reagent Water
Quality page C-4.
Water supply is contaminated. Check
the integrity of your reagent water
system and ensure that it has been
maintained. Refer to Reagent Water
Quality page C-4.
Calibrator stability has been
compromised. Ensure that calibrators
(lyophilized, reconstituted, or liquid)
are being stored as recommended in
the calibrator package insert.
Incorrect volume was used to
reconstitute lyophilized calibrators.
Ensure that the correct volume was
used by referring to the calibrator
package insert for reconstitution
instructions.
No
Yes
No
No
Reagents have been frozen. Check

reagent storage temperature and ensure
that reagents are stored upright at
2 to 8C.
Reagents have exceeded their opened
stability. Ensure that reagent packs are
stored upright at 2 to 8C, and discard
any reagents that exceed stability.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-102
Slope
Ratio
Low Cal
Deviation
High Cal
Deviation

Actions
No
No
No
No

Calibrator used was incorrect for the
assay. Check the calibrator package
insert or the ADVIA Centaur XP Assay
Manual to determine the correct
calibrator to use with an assay. Ensure
that the correct calibrator was poured
into the correctly labeled sample tube.
If you cannot resolve the problem, load new reagent packs and calibrators and
then schedule another calibration at the Worklist Schedule window. If the
problem persists, call for technical assistance.
Investigating Discrepant Results

Use this section when you are trying to resolve discrepant calibration, control,
and patient results.
Discrepant Calibration Results

Possible Cause
Corrective Actions
The calibrators were

reconstituted
incorrectly: with tap
water, with the incorrect
volume, with
an uncalibrated pipette,
or with contaminated
reagent water
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The calibrators were on

the system and then
were poured back into
the bottle
1.
2.
3.
4.
Incomplete calibrator
equilibration after
reconstitution
1.
2.
3.
4.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Ensure that the correct volume was used for

reconstitution. Refer to the calibrator package insert for
reconstitution instructions.
Ensure that the pipette is calibrated correctly.
Check the integrity of the reagent water.
Reconstitute fresh lyophilized calibrators or open fresh
liquid calibrators.
Recalibrate the assay.
Ensure that calibrators are discarded after being on the
system and are not poured back into their respective
bottles.1
Pour a fresh aliquot of calibrators.
If necessary, reconstitute fresh lyophilized calibrators or
open fresh liquid calibrators.
Check the calibrator vial for uniform reconstitution.
Check the calibrator package insert for calibrator
preparation instructions.
If necessary, reconstitute fresh lyophilized calibrators or
open fresh liquid calibrators.
Possible Cause
Corrective Actions
The calibrators were not

stored correctly
1.
2.
3.
4.
The calibrators were
expired
1.
2.
3.
4.
The incorrect calibrator
was used for an assay,
or high and low
calibrators were poured
into mislabeled tubes
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The sample tips were
bent from storage on
their side or damaged by
a tray exchange failure
1.
2.
3.
4.
6-103
Check the calibrator package insert for the storage

requirements of lyophilized, reconstituted, and liquid
calibrators.
If, according to the calibrator package insert, calibrators
can be aliquotted and frozen, mix calibrators gently by
inversion to ensure a homogeneous solution before
aliquotting.
If the storage temperature is outside the recommended
temperature range, reconstitute fresh lyophilized
calibrators or open fresh liquid calibrators that have
been stored correctly.
Check the calibrator bottle for the expiration date.
Check the calibrator package insert for the stability
calibrators.
Prepare fresh calibrators.
Refer to the calibrator package insert.
To determine the correct calibrator to use with an assay,
check the ADVIA Centaur XP Assay Manual.
Ensure that the correct calibrator was poured into
the correctly labeled sample tube.
If the calibrators were poured into mislabeled tubes,
discard the mislabeled tubes, and pour a fresh aliquot of
calibrators into new correctly labeled tubes.
Prepare fresh calibrators.
Refer to the calibrator package insert.
Store sample tips upright.
Do not place the tip tray on the counter, resting on the
tips.
Do not use trays that have tips that have been damaged
by a failure in the tip tray exchange.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-104
Possible Cause
Corrective Actions
Inadequate Solid Phase

particle resuspension,
storage of reagents on
their side or at freezing
temperatures, expired or
clumped reagents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The reagent pack was
stored at room
temperature for a
prolonged period
Reagent evaporation or
spill due to loss of the
pack membrane or tears
in the pack membrane
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
Improper resuspension
of pierced reagent packs
1.
2.
3.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Ensure that reagent packs are stored upright at

2 to 8C.
Ensure that reagents are not expired or clumped.
Ensure that reagents have been thoroughly mixed and
that Solid Phase particles are uniformly resuspended.
Refer to Appendix C, Handling Reagents in the
ADVIA Centaur XP Assay Manual.
Discard the old reagent pack and use a fresh reagent
pack.
2 to 8 C.
Discard any reagent that exceeds the opened stability.
Obtain a fresh reagent pack.
Discard the old reagent pack and use a fresh
reagent pack.
Cover all open primary and ancillary reagent
packs following the pierced reagent pack procedures
described in Appendix C, Handling Reagents in the
ADVIA Centaur XP Assay Manual, to resuspend
pierced reagent packs.
reagent pack.
6-105
Discrepant QC Results
Possible Cause
Corrective Actions
The controls were

reconstituted
incorrectly: with tap
water, with the incorrect
volume, with an
uncalibrated pipette, or
with contaminated
reagent water
1.
The controls were on

the system and then
were poured back into
the bottle
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.
3.
4.
Incomplete control
equilibration after
reconstitution
1.
2.
3.
4.
The controls were not

stored correctly
1.
2.
3.
4.
The controls were
expired
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ensure that the correct volume was used for

reconstitution. Refer to the control package insert
for reconstitution instructions.
Ensure that the pipette is calibrated correctly.
Check the integrity of the reagent water.
Reconstitute fresh controls.
Perform quality control again.
Ensure that controls are discarded after being on
the system and not poured back into the respective
bottles.1
Pour a fresh aliquot of controls.
If necessary, reconstitute fresh lyophilized controls
or open fresh liquid controls.
Check the control vial for uniform reconstitution.
Check the control package insert for control preparation
instructions.
If necessary, reconstitute fresh lyophilized controls or
open fresh liquid controls.
Check the control package insert for the storage
controls.
If, according to the control package insert, controls can
be aliquotted and frozen, then mix controls gently by
inversion to ensure a homogeneous solution before
aliquotting.
If the storage temperature is outside the recommended
temperature range, then reconstitute fresh lyophilized
controls or open fresh liquid controls that have been
stored correctly.
Check the control bottle for the expiration date, for the
stability.
Check the control package insert for the stability
controls.
Prepare fresh controls.
Refer to the control package insert.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-106
Possible Cause
Corrective Actions
The incorrect control

was used for an assay,
or the control was
poured into
a mislabeled tube
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Incorrect expected
values were entered for
the control
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.
3.
4.

temperatures, expired
or clumped reagents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
stored at room
temperature for a
prolonged period of
time
078D1064-01 Rev. C
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check the control package insert to be sure that

the analyte being tested is present in the control.
To determine the correct control to use with an assay,
check the ADVIA Centaur XP Assay Manual.
Check the control label to ensure that the correct control
is being used.
Ensure that the correct control was poured into the
correctly labeled sample tube.
If the controls were poured into mislabeled tubes,
discard the mislabeled tubes, and pour a fresh aliquot of
controls into new correctly labeled tubes.
Prepare fresh controls.
Refer to the control package insert.
Ensure that the expected values are correct. Refer to the
control package insert for the correct expected values or
enter the QC ranges established for your laboratory.
If the values are incorrect, enter the correct values into
the Quality Control Control Definition window.
Refer to Editing a QC Definition page 4-4.
tips.
Do not use trays that have tips that have been damaged
by a failure in the tip tray exchange.
2 to 8C.
Ensure that reagents have been thoroughly mixed
and that Solid Phase particles are uniformly
resuspended. Refer to Appendix C, Handling Reagents
in the ADVIA Centaur XP Assay Manual.
reagent pack.
2 to 8C.
Possible Cause
Corrective Actions
1.
2.
3.
Improper resuspension
1.
2.
3.
4.
6-107

reagent pack.
Cover all open primary and ancillary reagent packs
following the pierced reagent pack procedures
reagent pack.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-108
Discrepant Patient Results

Possible Cause
Corrective Actions
Incorrect sample
collection, handling, or
preparation
1.
2.
3.
For sample collection and handling information, refer to

the ADVIA Centaur XP Assay Manual.
Collect a fresh sample from the patient.
Perform the assay again.
The sample was frozen

more than once or not
mixed thoroughly after
thawing
1.
2.
3.
4.
Thoroughly mix thawed specimens before use.

Freeze specimens only once.
The sample contains

heterophilic antibodies
Call for technical assistance to further investigate the

probable cause.
Incorrect patient
sample, the sample was
labeled with the wrong
patient ID
1.
2.

The sample was stored

at room temperature
longer than 8 hours or
refrigerated longer than
48 hours
1.
2.

The sample and reagent

storage areas are outside
the recommended
storage temperature
range
1.
Monitor reagent and sample storage areas and

correct temperatures, as required.
Use a fresh reagent pack.
Recalibrate the assay if necessary.
The sample is lipemic or

hemolyzed or contains
fibrin clots or bubbles
1.

1.
2.
3.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.
3.
4.
4.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Rim the sample with applicator sticks and centrifuge the

sample.
Remove the bubbles.
Redraw a fresh sample.
Do not place tip tray on counter, resting on tips.
Do not use trays that have been damaged by a failure in
the tip tray exchange.
Possible Cause
Corrective Actions

temperatures, expired
or clumped reagents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
stored at room
temperature for a
prolonged period of
time
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Incorrect resuspension
1.
2.
3.
4.
6-109

2 to 8C.
pack.
2 to 8C.
reagent pack.
Cover all open primary and ancillary reagent
packs following the pierced reagent pack procedures
reagent pack.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-110
Problems with a Single Assay

Possible Cause
Corrective Actions
Incorrect normal range

or check range defined
for the patient samples
1.
2.
3.

1.
2.
3.
4.

temperatures, expired or
clumped reagents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
stored at room
temperature for a
prolonged period of
time
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Ensure that test ranges have been entered correctly.

Modify test parameters,
tips.
2 to 8C.
pack.
2 to 8C.
Discard any reagent that exceeds opened stability.
reagent pack.
Possible Cause
Corrective Actions
1.
2.
3.
4.
6-111

reagent pack.
Problems with Multiple Assays

Possible Cause
Corrective Actions

their side, or damaged
by a tray exchange
failure
1.
2.
3.
4.

temperatures, or expired
or clumped reagents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

stored at room
temperature for a
prolonged period
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

tips.
2 to 8C.
pack.
2 to 8C.
reagent pack.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-112
Possible Cause
Corrective Actions
1.
2.
3.
4.

reagent pack.
Reagent mixing was

turned off for longer
than 2 hours but reagent
refrigeration remains
on: mechanics off,
diagnostic tools window
open, database
maintenance, severe
software errors
indicated by event
codes starting 700 xx xx
1.
Mix all primary reagent packs following the unpierced

or pierced primary reagent pack procedures described in
Appendix C, Handling Reagents in the
2. Place the reagent packs back on the system.
3. Verify reagent performance based on acceptable QC
results or by criteria established for your laboratory.
Both reagent mixing

and reagent
refrigeration were
turned off for longer
than 2 hours: FSE
maintenance, power
outage
1.
Place primary reagent packs in the reagent storage tray

at 2 to 8C.
2. Mix all primary reagent packs following the unpierced
or pierced primary reagent pack procedures described in
Appendix C, Handling Reagents in the
ADVIA Centaur XP Assay Manual before placing the
reagent packs back on the system.
3. Verify reagent performance based on acceptable QC
results or by criteria established for your laboratory.
The integrity of 1 of
the system fluids was
compromised
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ensure that the fluid bottle is positioned correctly.

Ensure that the fluid is not expired.
Ensure that the fluid onboard stability is not exceeded.
Replace the fluid.
Maintenance procedures
were not performed
1.
Ensure that daily, weekly, and monthly maintenance is

performed.
Refer to Performing Maintenance Procedures
page 5-4.
Call for technical assistance.
2.
A fluid system lost
prime
1.
2.
3.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Check that the fluid bottle and reservoir have sufficient

fluid, and if necessary, replace the fluid bottle.
Refer to Replacing System Fluids page 2-35.
Prime the system fluid line at the System Diagnostic
Tools window and look for fluid flow.
Possible Cause
Corrective Actions
Insufficient aspiration
of wash solution
1.
2.
3.
6-113
Ensure that the aspirate probes clips are slid completely

across the probe holder and are firmly against the probe.
Perform dispense wash fluid and aspirate at the
System Diagnostic Tools window and look for
complete fluid aspiration.
Assay Specific Factors

Specific factors can affect the performance of each assay, including storage and
handling requirements of the reagents, specimen type and collection requirements,
and pretreatment of specimens, if required. In addition, the manufacturer may
recommend restrictions on the use of an assay and identify known interferences.
Refer to the ADVIA Centaur XP Assay Manual for information specific to each
assay.
Investigating Failed Proficiency Testing Results

Failed proficiency testing can be caused by the following factors:
reagents, calibrators, and controls are incorrectly handled
routine maintenance of the system is not performed
system is not clean
If you have had prior issues with proficiency testing results or have any questions
or concerns, call for technical assistance before you submit your results. To help
the product specialist in assisting you, be sure to have the following information
available:
Obtain calibration and control data from the day of testing, including lot
number and expiration date.
Check all control results and determine if they are within acceptable limits.
Ensure that all survey sample preparation procedures have been followed.
Note any unusual occurrences such as error flags and non-reproducible

results.
Check that reagent and instrument reporting categories have been entered
correctly.
References
1. Kaplan, Lawrence A. Pesce, Amadeo J. Clinical Chemistry; theory, analysis,
and correlation, 2nd edition. St. Louis: C.V. Mosby Company; 1989. 1212 p.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
6-114
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Managing Data
7 Managing Data
Maintaining the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Using the Status Maintenance Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Editing Database Maintenance Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Manually Initiating a Database Maintenance Activity. . . . . . . . . . . . .7-2
Defragmenting the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-3
Performing Data Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Initiating a Data Backup Manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Restoring Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Saving Results Data to an Archive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4

Archived Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-5
Archiving Result Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7

Autoschedule Archive Result Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7
Using the As Needed Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-8
Manually Creating an Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8

Creating a Date-defined Archive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Using Archive All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-9
Exporting Quality Control Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
Exporting Test Utilization Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
078D1064-01 Rev. C
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Managing Data
Data management includes the following functions:
Database maintenance
Performing data backup
Creating data archives
Exporting data
Maintaining the Database

NOTE: You must have the appropriate security level to add or edit system
The ADVIA Centaur XP system maintains the database automatically by default.
You can edit the default settings for the automatic maintenance to make it better fit
the schedule of your workload. You can also manually perfom database
maintenance, when necessary.
When performing the database maintenance, the system deletes worklist entries
and associated results based on the parameters set at the Status Maintenance
Definition window. The system creates an archive of results data before deleting
them.
If you choose not to autoschedule the Archive data maintenance activity, the
system does not save the results to an archive before deleting them. Refer to
Saving Results Data to an Archive page 7-4.
Using the Status Maintenance Window

The Status Maintenance window displays the status of system database
maintenance. If the system is unable to perform database maintenance at the time
set in the Status Maintenance Definition window, the system displays
Overdue in the Cycle column on the Status Maintenance window. You have
the option to initiate a maintenance procedure manually or to wait for the next
autoscheduled maintenance activity.
If an error occurs during database maintenance, the maintenance activity ends and
the system posts an event in the event log. The system restores the database to its
original state and the maintenance activity occurs at the next scheduled time.
Editing Database Maintenance Settings

NOTE: The system autoschedules database maintenance by default. The system
does not perform the autoscheduled database maintenance while the system is
inprocess or during a remote update.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
7-2
To edit database maintenance parameters, perform the following steps:

2. At the Status Maintenance window, select Perform database
maintenance.
3. Select Edit.
4. At the Status Maintenance Definition window, use the Database Threshold
dropdown list to select the threshold you want on your system.
The default database threshold is 15,000 tests, including replicates. When the
database exceeds 15,000, the database maintenance activity trims it down to
15,000.
5. Use the Retain for field drop-down list to select the number of days to keep
results not transmitted to the LIS at the time of the database maintenance
activity, before the results are deleted.
The default value is 4.
6. In the Time field, enter the time of day for the autoscheduled maintenance to
occur.
The time is a 24-hour format, HHMM. For example, enter 0230 for 2:30 a.m.
and enter 1430 for 2:30 p.m.
The default value is 0230.
7. Select Save.
Manually Initiating a Database Maintenance Activity

When you perform a manual database maintenance activity, the system uses the
settings in the database maintenance window. If the current database is not above
the database threshold set in the Status Maintenance Definition window, the
system does not delete tests from the database during the database maintenance
activity.
NOTE: The system does not perform the manual database maintenance if the
system is inprocess, performing an autoscheduled database maintenance

procedure, or during a remote update.
To manually initiate a database maintenance activity, perform the following steps:
2. At the Status Maintenance window, select Perform database
maintenance.
3. Select Perform.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
7-3
Defragmenting the Database

As data is added and then deleted from the computer, the data storage becomes
fragmented, which can begin to affect system performance. You can perform a
data storage defragmentation every 6 months.
If your laboratory does not autoschedule database maintenance, the disk
defragmentation occurs during the manual database maintenance activity
performed at 180 days.
After a data storage defragmentation, the system automatically reboots.
Performing Data Back Up

Backing up is the process of organizing and storing data on a storage medium.
If your system is connected to the RealTime Solutions server, the
ADVIA Centaur XP system automatically backs up the following data daily and
sends it to the server:
customer-defined test definition
customer-changeable parameters
customer-defined setup options
Event Log
Maintenance Log
system settings
tube types
reagent inventory
quality control data
assay calibration data
instrument calibrations
Initiating a Data Backup Manually

If you are not connected to the RealTime Solutions server, you can back up data
manually to a storage medium. You should perform the manual backup daily. You
must have the appropriate level of security to back up data.
3. At the Setup Data Administration window, select All.
4. Insert the storage medium in the appropriate drive on the applications module.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
7-4
5. Select Back Up.

The status changes to Backup Complete.
CAUTION
Do not place the storage medium on the sample entry queue. The magnets under
the queue can erase the information on the storage medium.
6. Label the storage medium with the following information:
date
NOTE: You cannot restore data from 1 system on to another system.
number of the system, if your laboratory has more than 1 system
Restoring Data
CAUTION
Do not perform the Restore function. Performing the Restore function incorrectly
can cause corruption of the system software. To avoid potential corruption of the
system software, only a trained technical support provider should perform the
Restore function at the Setup Data Administration window.
Restore data only when updating the system software.
To restore data, the system searches the storage devices for the most current back
up in the following order:
1. removable media (CD or DVD)
2. system local drive
The system stops the search when at least 1 backup is found. The system restores
the latest backup from that location.
Saving Results Data to an Archive

NOTE: You must have the appropriate security level to add or edit system
The ADVIA Centaur XP system can save results data automatically to an archive
according to the maintenance settings in the Status Maintenance Definition
window. You can also chose to save the data manually to an archive or chose not
to save your results data. You can use your local drive, a CD or a DVD to save
files to an archive.
Records that you save to an archive are not deleted until the system performs a
database maintenance activity. Refer to Maintaining the Database page 7-1
The results data archive is in a format compatible with Microsoft Excel or similar
spreadsheet application. Refer to Archived Data page 7-5.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
7-5
The system saves results data by worklist.
If you edit a record that is already saved to an archive, the edited record and
all records in that worklist are saved again at a future automatic or manual
archive maintenance activity.
If you edit an component test of a ratio that is already stored in an archive, the
ratio test and its component test are saved to an archive at a future automatic
or manual archive maintenance activity.
Control-bracketed tests are only eligible for an archive after the system
releases them.
The system does not save control-bracketed tests that are waiting for
controls.
The system does not save control-bracketed tests with discarded results.
Archived Data
This table displays the field name and field format that is displayed in the archive
spreadsheet. Explanatory comments are included, where necessary.
The field name is the column head of the spreadsheet and the field format is how
the data is displayed. Data is sorted in the spreadsheet in ascending order by the
SID with a secondary sort on the Result Date and Time.
Autoscheduled archive files and archives created by selecting Archive All on the
StatusArchive Options window are named using the following format:
A_RA_<system serial number>_<date><time>
Field Name
Field Format
Comment
SID
Alphanumeric;
maximum of 13 characters
Sample identification for

patient, control, or calibrator
samples
Rack
Alphanumeric;
5 characters
First 4 digits is the Rack ID

Fifth character is the
Position
Example: 0001A
Result Date and Time
DD MMM YY HH:MM
Patient Name
Last Name, First Name;

30 characters maximum
PID
Alphanumeric;
Sex
M, F, or U
Test Name
Alphanumeric;
078D1064-01 Rev. C
7-6
Field Name
Field Format
Comment
Dilution Protocol
Neat only
Neat and diluted
Dilute if over
Dilute only
Dilution profile
You can select a dilution

option at the Worklist
Dilutions window or it can
come from the LIS.
Manual Dilution
Alphanumeric;
The result is corrected for

the dilution factor specified
at the WorklistDilutions
window.
System Dilution
Alphanumeric;
Assay dependent; defined in

the TestRanges window.
You can select it in the
WorklistDilutions window.
Replicate Number
Numeric
2 digits, maximum
Result Aspect
Alpha, 4 characters
maximum
INTR
DOSE
INDX
COFF
RLU
Data Value
Alphanumeric;
Results data
Units
Printable ASCII;
For example: LU/mL

There is no value if it is a
qualitative result.
F or P
Alpha
The status of the result.
Normal Ranges
Name: Alphanumeric,
Low and High Limits:
Numeric, 7 characters,
a decimal delimiter,
and the number of decimal
places defined for this
system
Example:
Name of range: Male
Low Limit: 123.4
High Limit: 1234567.8
Result Abnormal Flags
L, H, <, >
Result Flag 1, 2, and 3
Alpha, <, >;

The top 3 result flags

displayed in the Worklist
Result Details window.
CV
Numeric
This is only for meaned

replicate results.
Primary Reagent Lot
Numeric
078D1064-01 Rev. C
7-7
Field Name
Field Format
Comment
Ancillary Reagent Lot
Numeric
Control Lot
Alphanumeric
Calibrator Lot
Alphanumeric
Control Name
Alphanumeric;
From the Control field of the

Quality ControlControl
Definition window.
Calibrator Name
Alphanumeric
From the Calibrator field of

the CalibrationCalibrator
Definition window.
Archiving Result Data

Use this procedure to save patient, control, and calibrator result data to an archive.
You can set up your system to perform an archive event automatically. You can
also save to an archive manually, as needed. After saving an archive to a storage
medium, you can load the saved data on to another computer and open it in a
spreadsheet application.
The system autoschedules the Archive result data procedure by default.
For information on the stored data format, refer to Archived Data page 7-5.
Autoschedule Archive Result Data

When you select Autoschedule for archiving result data, use the 3 settings to
determine the frequency, time, and starting day for the archive event to occur. You
can use the default settings or enter new information to change the archive
schedule.
NOTE: For autoschedule archives, you must ensure that the selected storage
device is in place for the scheduled archive event.
Frequency: Enter a number from 131 to indicate how many days between
archive events.
The default is 7.
Time: Enter a time of day for the archive event to occur.

Use a 24-hour format, from 0000 to 2359.
The default is 0200.
Starting on: Select the day of the week for the start of the archive event.
The default is Sunday.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
7-8
To edit the Autoschedule options, perform the following steps:

1. At the system view Workspace window, select Status Maintenance.
NOTE: You cannot archive results data while the system is performing a
maintenance procedure, such as the daily cleaning procedure.

2. At the Status Maintenance window, select Archive result data.
3. Select Definition.
4. At the Status Maintenance Definition window, select Edit.
5. Select Autoschedule.
6. Change 1 or more of the Autoschedule options: Frequency, Time, or Started
on.
7. Select Save.
Using the As Needed Option

If you do not want your result data archived automatically, you can set the archive
options to As needed.
To select the As-needed option:
4. At the Status Maintenance Definition window, select Edit.
5. Deselect Autoschedule.
The system deselects the Days option button and selects the As needed option
button. The Autoschedule fields are no longer available.
6. Select Save.
Manually Creating an Archive

You can create an archive manually at any time, whether or not the archive
procedure is set for Autoschedule.
NOTE: Do not perform a manual results data archive procedure while the system
is performing a maintenance activity. Archiving results data during a maintenance

activity cancels the maintenance activity and displays an event that the
maintenance activity failed. You must repeat the maintenance activity.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
7-9
Use manual archive in the following cases:
to set the archive procedure to As needed
to perform an archive when the system does not perform an automatic archive
on schedule
to create an archive for investigative work
There are 2 options for manually saving result data to an archive:
Date-defined Archive
This saves a specific date range of available result data to an archive using the
date range entered into the Status Archive Options window.
Archive All
Archives all result data that was not previously saved to an archive during an
autoscheduled archive activity.
Creating a Date-defined Archive

A date-defined archive is a set of available result data that falls within a specified
date range. You can assign an operator-defined file prefix to each archive file.
NOTE: The system archives any records in a single worklist that fall outside the
defined archive date and time with the rest of the worklist.
To create a date-defined archive, perform the following steps:
3. Select Perform.
4. At the Status Archive Options window, enter the starting date and ending
date into the appropriate fields.
5. Enter an alphanumeric value into the File Prefix field to identify the
date-defined archive.
6. If you want to allow the dated archive to overwrite the current archive storage
medium when it is full, select Overwrite Media
7. Select Continue.
Using Archive All

When you use Archive All, the resulting archive is the same as the autoscheduled
archive.
To manually save result data to an archive, perform the following steps:
2. Select Perform.
3. At the Status Archive Options window, select Archive All.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
7-10
4. Select Continue.
Exporting Quality Control Data

For information about exporting Quality Control data, access the ADVIA QC
application and refer to online help for the ADVIA QC application Tools window.
Exporting Test Utilization Data

CAUTION
Do not place the storage medium on the sample entry queue. The magnets under
the queue can erase the information on the storage medium.
You can export test utilization data to a CD or DVD. The system exports it in a
spreadsheet compatible format. The system exports test utilization data in the
following order:
test name assigned by the manufacturer
calibrator product code
number of patient orders
number of calibrators
number of controls
number of total tests used.
The first record of the file contains the system serial number and the date and time
that you performed the export activity.
The system separates each area by tabs and writes the exported data to the file
assay.csv. If the data exceeds the size of the CD or DVD, the system notifies you
and does not export the data. If this happens, you can reduce the time interval
between the starting date and ending date and then export the data again.
NOTE: You must have the appropriate level of security to export data.
1. At the system view Workspace window, select Setup.

3. Insert the storage medium into the appropriate drive.
4. At the Setup Data Administration window, select Test Utilization Data.
NOTE: Exporting data overwrites any existing storage medium.
5. Select Export.
6. At the Setup Data Administration Options window, select the starting date
and ending date. The system can export data only if the default starting and
ending dates are used. The system does not use any other starting or ending
date that you may enter.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
The default for the starting date is 30 days before the current date and
time.
7-11
The default for the ending date is the current date and time.
The date and time format is DD MMM YY HH:MM.

Example: 17 Mar 99 16:30.
7. Select Continue.
To view the exported data, set up the following options in the spreadsheet
program:
Delimit each area of information by a tab.
Format the column width to display the data and time correctly, if required.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
7-12
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Configuring the System
8 Configuring the System

Modifying Sample Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Reviewing Sample Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Selecting Sample Throughput Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Selecting Sample Optimization Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
Defining Stat Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Defining the Inprocess Queue Timeout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Specifying Sample Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Specifying Sample Tube Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
Specifying Barcode Symbology and Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
Defining SID Codes from Barcode Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
Moving Results to the Historical Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8
Modifying or Viewing Test Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9

Reviewing Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9
Enabling or Disabling a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
Enabling a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-10
Disabling a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
Deleting a Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12

Modifying a Test Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Modifying the Reagent Stability Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13
Modifying Sample Replicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14
Reusing Results in a Reflex Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
Procedural Notes on Reusing Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Defining Anonymous Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15

Defining Units and Decimal Places. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Defining Calibration Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Using Control Bracketing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18

Viewing Control Bracketing Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
Modifying the Control Reminder in Control Bracketing . . . . . . . 8-19
Defining Reference Ranges, Result Interpretations,

and Reflex Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Defining Reference Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
Defining Result Interpretations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
Modifying Test Interpretations to Result Calculations . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
Defining Reflex Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23

Defining Reflex Tests for Reference Ranges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23
Defining Reflex Tests for Interpretation Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
Defining Automatic Sample Repeats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25

Defining Check Range and Linearity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Defining Repeats for the Concentration

and Index Calculation Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
Using Final Result Rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-28
Preparing to Use the Final Result Rule Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Final Result Rule Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Preliminary Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting Assays Performed Using the Final Result Rule . . . . . . . .
Error Handling when Using the Final Result Rule Option . . . . . . . .
8-28
8-29
8-29
8-30
8-30
Defining Automatic Repeats for Sample Error Conditions . . . . 8-30

Defining the Number of Replicates for Automatic Repeats . . . 8-31
Defining Hold for Repeat Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-32
Defining Automatic Dilutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33

Defining Automatic Dilutions for Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33
Defining Dilution Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34
Deleting Dilution Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Defining Calculated Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35

Procedural Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
Defining Ratio Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-36
Rounding Rules in Ratio Test Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38
Defining T Uptake Result Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-38

Using Multicomponent Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39
Adding Variable l. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Enabling and Disabling a Multicomponent Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-40
Setting Conditions for Multicomponent Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-41
Result Time Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conversion Factors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Autorepeating a Component Assay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reflexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procedural Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-41
8-41
8-41
8-42
8-42
8-42
8-42
Defining Off-System Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-42

Defining Test Profile Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Defining Test Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-43
Deleting Test Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44
Modifying the Test Display Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-44

Modifying System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Reviewing System Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Viewing the System Serial Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Defining the System Name. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Specifying Screen Saver Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-45
Defining Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
Defining Low Reagent Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-46
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Defining the Control Bracket Reagent Reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47

Adjusting the Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-47
Specifying the Time Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-47
Entering a Time Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-48
Adjusting the Pointing Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-48

Specifying the Media Type for Data Export. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Specifying Print Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-49
Accepting Remote Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Selecting Remote Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Selecting Remote Software Administration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-50
Remote Software Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-51
Specifying Direct Plumbing or System Bottles . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Accessing the Applications Module Window . . . . . . . . 8-52

Enabling the Visible Status Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-52
Deactivating/Activating ADVIA QC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Defining Backup, Restore and Archive Options . . . . . . 8-53
Accessing the Siemens Server. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-53
Defining LIS Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-54
Defining LAS Communication Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-56
Resetting LAS Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-57
078D1064-01 Rev. C
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Configuring the System

The ADVIA Centaur XP setup options allow you to customize sample options,
test parameters, and system options for your laboratory. You must have the
appropriate level of security to modify test definitions and setup options. At
the workspace, you can select Setup to access various setup options.
CAUTION
Do not customize options without ensuring that you select the appropriate value
for your laboratory and continuing to evaluate the integrity of that value. Failure
to do so can cause reporting of unexpected results. For example, if you configure
the system to send all results and additional data except results on hold to your
LIS, and the LIS is not configured to accept the information, the LIS may identify
the additional data inappropriately and fail to distinguish between the final results
and the additional data.
Your laboratory is responsible for ensuring that all configurations are correct:
sample options, test parameters, and system options. This is true regardless of
whether your lab personnel set the values, Siemens personnel set the values to
specifications your laboratory provides, or Siemens personnel set the values to the
original default values established at the time of manufacture.
Modifying Sample Options

You can modify sample options such as the order that the system performs tests,
Stat-handling options, sample tube types, barcode symbology and format, and
sample identification by SID or Rack.
Reviewing Sample Setup

You can review sample setup options at the Setup Summary window. To open
the Setup Summary window from the workspace, perform the following steps:
2. Select Summary.
Selecting Sample Throughput Options

You can specify the order that the system performs tests so that throughput
is optimized or tests are performed in the order samples are loaded.
2. Select Summary.
3. At the Setup Summary window, select Sample Handling.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-2
4. At the Setup Sample Handling Options window, select the appropriate

throughput options:
Then . . .
automatically perform tests in the

most efficient order,
select With Optimized Throughput.
perform every test for each sample in

the order you load samples,
select In the Order the Operator Loads

Samples.
The system does not perform tests in the most
efficient order and your system does not have
optimal throughput.
NOTE: The system is required to aspirate
Restricted Mode controls to open a control
bracket. At the Setup-Sample Handling
Options window, if you select In the Order the
Operator Loads Samples, the system does not
process samples in the order the samples are
loaded on the system until the system aspirates
the start of bracket controls. The system
requirement to aspirate Restricted Mode
controls to open a bracket overrides the option
to process the samples in the order they are
loaded.
5. Select Save.
Selecting Sample Optimization Options

You can select the order in which the system aspirates tests when more than 1 test
is scheduled for a sample.
2. Select Summary.
sample optimization option.
Then . . .
optimize sample aspiration by processing tests in the order

of smallest sample volume required to largest sample
volume required,
select To Maximize the

Number of Tests
Completed.
minimize the unusable volume in the samples by processing

tests in the order of the largest sample volume required to
the smallest sample volume required,
select To Minimize the

Unusable Volume.
5. Select Save.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-3
Defining Stat Options

You can select an option to have the system notify you when a Stat is complete
and you can select the maximum number of rack positions in the inprocess queue
to reserve for Stat racks.
2. Select Summary.
Stat-handling options.
If your laboratory...
Then...
does not process Stat

samples,
select 0 Stat racks.

Selecting 0 maximizes sample throughput because
the system can use all of the positions in the inprocess
queue for routine samples.
receives an occasional
Stat request,
select 1 Stat rack.

The system can process 1 Stat rack (containing up to
5 samples) before the routine samples that are loaded in
the sample entry queue. This minimizes the impact on
sample throughput.
frequently receives
several Stat requests
at a time,
select 2 Stat racks.

The system can process 2 Stat racks (each containing up
to 5 samples) before the routine samples that are loaded
in the sample entry queue. Selecting 2 Stat racks can
affect sample throughput because the system does not
use the reserved Stat rack positions for routine samples.
5. Select Save.
Defining the Inprocess Queue Timeout

You can define the number of minutes the system holds a rack in the inprocess
queue. Do this for racks containing samples that do not have test requests. For
example, if you schedule by SID and the system cannot read a sample barcode
label, the system holds the sample in the inprocess queue for the number of
minutes specified in Inprocess Queue Timeout.
During the defined time, you can enter the sample identifier and the system
processes the sample without any further operator intervention. If you are unable
to enter the sample identifier during the specified time, the system ejects the
sample from the inprocess queue after the other samples in the rack are aspirated.
You must reload the sample.
2. Select Summary.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-4

4. At the Setup Sample Handling Options window, enter from 4 to 63 minutes
in Inprocess Queue Timeout.
5. Select Save.
Specifying Sample Identification

You can specify whether you want the system to identify samples by SID or
by Rack.
SID means the system identifies samples by the sample barcodes that you
place on the sample tubes or cups.
Rack, which means the system identifies samples by their position in

the sample racks.
1
2
Rack ID
Tube positions A, B, C, D, and E
Figure 8-1
CAUTION
Do not identify samples by rack ID unless absolutely necessary. If it is necessary

to identify a sample by rack ID, be aware that the system ejects the sample to the
exit queue after the sample is aspirated. Reflex or other testing does not occur
after the sample moves to the exit queue. To obtain final results for reflex or other
testing, you must reintroduce the sample rack to the front of the sample entry
queue. Whenever possible, set the system to identify samples by SID.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-5
NOTE: If you specify SID, you can override this selection for a sample by
selecting Schedule by Rack at the Worklist Schedule window. If you specify

Rack, the system always identifies samples by rack position number and you
cannot select Schedule by SID at the Worklist Schedule window.
2. Select Summary.
3. At the Setup Summary window, select Tube Type & Barcode.
4. At the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window, select SID or Rack.
5. Select Save.
NOTE: Ensure that you make all of the changes to the Setup Tube Type &
Barcode window before you reboot the system. If you do not make all of the
changes, you must reboot the system more than 1 time.
6. Reboot the system.
Specifying Sample Tube Types

NOTE: All tube type and rack information in this section refers to the racks
provided with the ADVIA Centaur XP system. If you use racks from the
ADVIA Centaur system, refer to ADVIA Centaur Sample Racks page 2-5.
You can specify up to 3 specific types of sample tubes to use on the system or you
can use multiple tube types. Refer to Tube Types page E-2.
2. Select Summary.
CAUTION
Do not move the tube type selector without verifying the tube type you are using.
Ensure that the tube type selector on each sample rack points to the correct tube
type as defined at this window. If the tube type selector points to an incorrect tube
type, the system can experience problems with sample handling and system errors
can result.
4. At the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window, use Tube Types 2, 3, and 4 to
select up to 3 types of sample tubes.
The ADVIA Centaur XP system reserves Tube Type 1 for multiple tube types.
Regardless of what you enter here, if the tube-type selector is in position A,
the rack allows multiple tube types. If you use an ADVIA Centaur rack, you
must select a tube type in Tube Type 1.
When you load samples, use the tube type selector on the rack to indicate
the tube type you are loading. Place the tube-type selector in position A for
multiple tube types. Refer to Managing Sample Racks page 2-2.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-6
5. In the LAS Tube Type field, select the tube type you want to use when no tube
type is specified in the LAS.
The default is Auto, meaning it allows multiple tube types.
6. Select Save.
Specifying Barcode Symbology and Format

You can select up to 4 barcode symbologies:
Codabar
Interleaved 2 of 5
Code 39
Code 128.
Code 128 is always active. For most symbologies, you can choose the format, the
use of check digits, and the use of SID mapping.
Refer to Resolving Barcode Problems page 6-86.
2. Select Summary.
NOTE: If you are using Code 128, you must exclude the ASCII characters
ESC, Bell, and CR (Return) from your barcode labels because the system
reserves these for use in the calibrator and control barcode labels.
4. At the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window, select a barcode symbology.
5. Select Fixed or Variable in Type.
If you select Fixed, select the number of characters in your SID barcode label,
not including the check digit.
6. Select the number of characters for a barcode of fixed length.
NOTE: Select Enable for the check digit for Code 128. Code 128 is the
barcode symbology for the Master Curve Card, Calibrator Card, and
calibrators.
7. If the barcode uses a check digit, select Enable in Check Digit.

8. Repeat steps 4. through 7. for each symbology.
9. Select Save.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-7
Defining SID Codes from Barcode Labels

Use this SID mapping procedure to specify the characters the system reads as the
SID code.
NOTE: The system requires you to perform this procedure. If you do not, the
system generates an event code when you load a patient sample with a barcode.
Without SID mapping information, the system cannot interpret the patient sample
barcode or process the sample.
The ADVIA Centaur XP system accepts barcodes with a maximum length of
20 characters. However, the system accepts SID codes with a maximum length of
13 characters. If the SID code is embedded in a longer barcode, you can use the
SID mapping procedure to specify up to 13 characters of the barcode for use. The
SID mapping procedure affects only patient sample barcode labels. This
procedure does not affect the barcode labels for calibrators or Siemens QC
controls.
2. Select Summary.
CAUTION
Use care when entering the SID mapping information. The system uses only the
characters specified in this procedure as patient sample SID codes.
NOTE: You can select a position of the barcode only once.
4. Enter the barcode positions that you want to use starting with the 1 position
field at the bottom of the window.
To map the SID, select up to 13 positions of the barcode to display as the 13
characters of the SID in the worklist. You can select the positions to display in
any order. For example, if you select the number 6 in the third position,
whatever is in the sixth position in the barcode displays in the third position in
the SID.
For positions you do not want to display, select a number greater than the
number of positions in the longest barcode. For example, if you have a
6-character barcode and you want to display the last 3 characters as the SID,
select 4, 5, and 6 for the 1, 2, and 3 position fields, and then select a number
greater than 6 for the 4 through 13 position fields.
If the 6-character barcode is as follows:
ABCDEF
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-8
The system reads the following SID code:

DEF
You can select some symbols to display as characters in the SID, for example
+, -, /, *, #. The symbols display in the specified positions for all SIDs. Do not
select the % symbol because the system does not accept a % symbol in the
SID.
5. Select Save.
changes at 1 time, you must reboot the system each time you make changes.
Moving Results to the Historical Database

You can organize the data on your system by moving older results in the current
database to the historical database. This option makes it easier for you to review
data by limiting what you have to view or sort in the current database. The system
retains the older information if you need it. The system only moves worklist
entries that contain completed test results.
You can manually move all worklist entries and results to the historical database
at the Worklist Summary window. Refer to Moving Final Results to the
Historical Worklist page 2-44.
You can also specify an automatic option for moving results to the historical
database. The system searches every 15 minutes for completed results that meet
the specified time interval. For example, if you specify 24 hours for moving the
results to historical, every 15 minutes the system searches the current worklist for
completed results that are more than 24 hours old.
The system moves up to 5000 worklist entries at a time, with a worklist entry
consisting of all of the test results, flags, demographic information, and comments
associated with 1 SID.
Use this procedure to define the interval, in hours, used by the system to
automatically move the worklist entries and results to the historical database.
2. Select Summary.
NOTE: If you enter a 0 (zero) for the number of hours, the system does not
automatically move results from the current database to the historical

database. If you enter a 0, manually move results from the current to the
historical database to ensure optimum system performance. Refer to Moving
Final Results to the Historical Worklist page 2-44.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-9
4. At the Setup Sample Handling Options window, enter or edit the number
of hours for the interval used by the system to automatically move the results
from the current database to the historical database.
The number of hours must be a factor of 24 (1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, or 24).
The time interval starts at midnight.
5. Select Save.
The system moves data to the historical database in the approximate time
interval that you specify, depending on when testing for the samples is
completed.
Modifying or Viewing Test Options

You can modify test parameters such as the result units, the number of decimal
places for results, and the number of sample replicates. You can also view the
parameters for special features such as control bracketing.
Reviewing Tests
At the Test Summary window, you can review the tests defined on your system.
Use this window to edit the test definitions, enable or disable tests, and add or
delete ratio and off-system tests.
2. Select Test Definition Summary.
Select Definition to modify the opened stability date and number of

replicates for each test.
Select Ranges to define reference ranges for each test.
Select Display Order to define the order in which tests are displayed and
printed.
Select the appropriate View and Type to display specific information at the
Test Summary window:
For example, if you select All, the system displays all tests.
The Type that you select determines the order in which the system displays
the tests.
For example, if you select All, the system displays all tests in alphabetical
order.
The following table describes the View and Type combinations you can use to
Task
View
Type
display all tests
All
All
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-10
Task
View
Type
display the tests the

system is using
Enabled
All
display the tests the

system is not using
Disabled
All
display tests of a specific

type
All
Standard, Ratio, Off-System, Component,

Combination, or Multicomponent
display the enabled tests

of a specific type
Enabled

display the disabled tests

of a specific type
Disabled

The following table describes the types of tests:

Type
Definition
All
All tests including standard, ratio, off-system, component, and

combination.
Standard
Typical sandwich and competitive assays, such as TSH.
Ratio
A calculated test, such as RBC folate, in which the system

compares the results of 2 assays to each other using a ratio formula.
Off-System
A test, such as hematocrit, that is not performed by the system, but

has results reported by the system or that the system uses in a ratio
test calculation.
Combination
An assay that consists of more than 1 component assay. The system

calculates the result of the combination assay using data from the
component assays.
Component
A test that is only ordered as part of a combination assay.
Multicomponent
A calculated test in which the system uses the results from one or
more standard tests or off-system tests in a formula to calculate a
test result. The standard tests and off-system tests that are used to
determine a multicomponent result are referred to as component
tests of the multicomponent test.
Enabling or Disabling a Test

You can enable or disable any test on your ADVIA Centaur XP system.
Enabling a Test
An enabled test is included in the test menu displayed at the ADVIA Centaur XP
windows and the system performs the test if it is scheduled.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-11
When you enable a test, you do not have to perform the following tasks:
reenter any Master Curves
activate an active reagent lot
recalibrate a valid calibration
NOTE: If your laboratory wants to enable the HBs or Conf test, ensure that you
turn system mechanics off, turn system mechanics on, and then perform a Daily
Cleaning Procedure after enabling the test.
3. At the Test Summary window, select the test.
4. Select Enable.
Disabling a Test
NOTE: You cannot disable assays that are part of a combination assay, ratio assay,
or profile.
NOTE: You cannot disable a component of a multicomponent assay unless the
multicomponent assay is disabled. You cannot disable a component of a

multicomponent assay if it is also part of a combination assay, ratio assay, or
profile.
NOTE: If you schedule the test before disabling it, the workorder for the disabled
test is displayed at the Worklist Summary window.

WARNING
Do not disable a test without updating interference information. If you do not

update the interference information, the system may fail to perform the necessary
washes and that could potentially cause erroneous results.
If you disable a test on your ADVIA Centaur XP system, the interference
information for that test changes. The following procedure ensures that the system
updates the interference information correctly. If you do not use this procedure,
the system requires you to load wash packs to perform unnecessary washes, and
may not perform a wash when required.
NOTE: To minimize maintenance time, plan to disable tests just before you
perform your routine daily cleaning procedure. Refer to Performing Daily

Cleaning page 5-5.
1. Ensure you delete all pending orders for the test before disabling it.
Refer to Deleting Requests page 2-66.
4. At the Test Summary window, select the test.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-12
NOTE: Disable HBs if your laboratory does not use it. If you are disabling
Conf, also select Reagent A and Reagent B.
5. Select Disable.
NOTE: Turning system mechanics off and then turning system mechanics on
ensures that the HBs test is disabled.

Wait until the system mechanics are off.
NOTE: The daily cleaning procedure (DCP) provides the system with the
required probe washes, preventing the need to have the disabled

assay-specific wash pack loaded on the system.
10. Select Perform Daily Cleaning.
11. Select Perform.
NOTE: If your laboratory wants to enable a test in the future, ensure that you
turn system mechanics off, turn system mechanics on, and then perform the
DCP after enabling the test. If you are enabling Conf, enable Reagent A and
Reagent B also.
Deleting a Test
Deleting a test permanently removes it from the test menu and permanently
removes any results associated with the test from the database. You can only
delete tests that are defined by your laboratory, such as ratio tests, or off-system
tests.
3. At the Test Summary window, select a test.
a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
c. Select Continue to close the TestSelection window.
4. Complete the appropriate tasks.
Then select . . .
temporarily stop performing the test,
Disable.
add the test to your system test menu,
Enable.
remove the test from your system test menu,
Delete.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-13
Modifying a Test Name

You can modify the test name the system displays and prints on reports.
a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
5. At the Test Definition window, select Edit.
CAUTION
Do not select the Reset Defaults button at the Test Definition window. Selecting
this button restores the original options the manufacturer defined and removes any
options that your laboratory defined or modified. This global change can have
unexpected consequences for your laboratory and, in some instances, creates an
unrecoverable error. To change your test definition, refer to Modifying or
Viewing Test Options page 8-9.
6. Change the test name information from the default test name, if necessary:
a. At Display, enter the test name that you want the system to display.
You can enter up to 8 alphanumeric characters for the name the system
displays.
b. At Print, enter the test name that you want to appear on printed reports.
You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters for the name the system
displays on printed reports.
7. Select Save.
If you want to restore the original system values for all options at this window,
select Reset Defaults.
Modifying the Reagent Stability Option

If Siemens notifies you of a lot-specific date or obsolete extension, you can
modify the reagent stability option if you need to use the reagents beyond the
opened or onboard stability date. This option is available only for certain assays.
a. Select Test.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-14

b. Select a test.
NOTE: If you select the Use Beyond option, refer to the ADVIA Centaur
Assay Manual for assay-specific information.

If you want to define . . .
Then . . .
use of reagents beyond the opened or onboard

stability date,
select Use Beyond at Stability.
use of reagents only within the opened or onboard

stability date,
select Do Not Use Beyond at

Stability.
6. Select Save.
Modifying Sample Replicates

Use this procedure to define the number of patient or quality control replicates
that you want the system to routinely perform for a selected test. Refer to Defining
the Number of Replicates for Automatic Repeats page 8-31.
a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
NOTE: If you enter a different number of replicates at the Worklist Reagent
Options window, the system inactivates the number of replicates in the

Replicates field for the current worklist.
6. Select the number of replicates in the Replicates field.
You can select up to 30 replicates.
7. If the number of replicates is greater than 1, enter the acceptable CV.
8. Select Save.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-15
Reusing Results in a Reflex Test

If you define a reflex ratio test for an assay, you can allow the system to use
results from that assay as a component of the reflex test. You can only allow the
system to reuse a result when the window displays the manufacturers result time
limit for the selected assay.
If the test you selected has a manufacturers result time limit, the Reuse Result
toggle button is available.
6. Select Reuse Result.
7. Select Save.
Procedural Notes on Reusing Results
The system reports ratio test results where 1 of the components is a reused test
result with a Result Reused flag.
You must have a ratio defined that uses this result as a component.
Defining Anonymous Results

You can define a test so that the system reports results without patient names or
identification codes (PID). You can use this option when test results require a high
level of confidentiality.
NOTE: When you select this option for at least 1 test for a sample, the system
saves all test results for that sample without a patient name or PID.
a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
6. Select Anonymous.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-16
7. Select Save.
Defining Units and Decimal Places

You can define the units and the number of decimal places for test results.
a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
6. Select Calculate Results.
NOTE: You can define how you want the system to report T Uptake results.
Refer to Defining T Uptake Result Options page 8-38, for more information
on T Uptake reporting.
7. Select the units for test results.
If required, change the conversion factor to convert Master Curve units
to the selected units reported by the system. Refer to SI Unit Conversion
Factors page C-10.
8. Complete the appropriate task:
If you want to define . . .
Then . . .
the number of decimal places for

a concentration result,
select the number of decimal places in

Conc Decimal.
the number of decimal places for an index

result,
select the number of decimal places in

Index Decimal.
9. Select Continue.
10. At the Test Definition window, select Save.
Defining Calibration Options

You can review or edit calibration options, such as the calibration interval, for
each test.
NOTE: Some fields are not available depending on the displayed test. For more
information about calibration, refer to Calibration page 3-1.

078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-17

a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
7. At the Test Result Calculation window, select Calibration.
8. At the Test Calibration window, complete the appropriate tasks.
NOTE: The number of calibrator replicates in Minimum and the system
limits for a retained calibration in Retained Cal Limits are established at the
time of manufacture.
Then . . .
define the number of days

between required calibrations,
Enter the new values in Cal Interval

You can only enter an interval that is less than the
default defined by the manufacturer.
define the number of calibrator

replicates to perform the first
time a calibrator lot is used,
select a number in New Lot.

This number must be larger or equal to the number
of replicates for Current Lot and Minimum.
New Lot Current Lot Minimum
define the number of calibrator

replicates for the current lot,
select a number in Current Lot.

This number must be smaller or equal to the
number of replicates for New Lot and larger
or equal to the number of replicates for Minimum.
New Lot Current Lot Minimum
enable the system to allow you to

use an expired calibration,
select Waive Cal.
enable the system to allow you

to accept a calibration that falls
outside the observed range but
within the defined range,
select Accept Cal.
enable the system to allow you to

assign a valid calibration to
results at the Worklist
Summary window,
select Assign Cal.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-18
Then . . .
enable the system to

automatically use data from a
previous calibration when new
calibration values are almost
mathematically identical to
previous values,
select Retain Cal.
enable the system to

automatically exclude a
calibrator replicate result when it
is outside of the defined ranges
for precision,
select Autoexclude Cal Replicates.
9. Select Continue.
Using Control Bracketing

Control bracketing allows you to begin and end a group of patient samples for a
specific test with a set of controls. The system does not process samples until it
establishes the acceptability of the results for the start-of-bracket controls. The
system does not report sample results until it establishes the acceptability of the
results of the end-of-bracket controls.
This feature allows laboratories to comply with procedural recommendations for
certain tests that are regulated very closely. The ADVIA Centaur XP system can
perform tests with control bracketing when you enable the feature in the test
definition.
Viewing Control Bracketing Features

You can view some of the control bracketing features of a test at the Test
Definition window.
a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
NOTE: Only certain tests allow control bracketing. Your local technical
support provider can activate or deactivate the Control Bracket button

selection only if Siemens allows control bracketing for the test.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-19
5. Ensure the Control Bracket button is activated or deactivated for a test,

depending on your laboratory requirements.
If your laboratory does not require control bracketing for a particular test or if
you want to activate control bracketing for a test that has this capability, your
local technical support provider can change the selection at the Control
Bracket button.
NOTE: Only certain tests allow control bracketing. Your local technical
support provider can edit the Control Levels field only if Siemens allows
control bracketing for the test.
6. View the Control Levels field for the number of control levels required for
each start-of-bracket or end-of-bracket control set when the
control-bracketing feature is activated for the test.
Your local technical support provider can edit the field for a test that has
control bracketing capability, provided the value is between 1 and 5,
inclusive.
7. View the Control Warning field for the maximum allowable time in hours
between the start and end-of-bracket controls, as defined by Siemens.
When the system issues the Control Warning, you must process the
end-of-bracket controls immediately or any retained patient test results are
discarded.
Modifying the Control Reminder in Control Bracketing

A control reminder for a control-bracketed test is a system reminder message to
schedule and process the end-of-bracket controls. This reminder helps to prevent
discarding of retained patient test results. Retained patient test results are patient
test results that are not reported by the system until the system processes an
end-of-bracket set of controls with acceptable results.
If a test has control bracketing enabled and the system is in the Ready state, you
can edit the time interval, in hours, from the time that the start-of-bracket control
set produces acceptable results to the time that you want to see a control reminder.
a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-20
5. At the Control Reminder field, enter the time interval in hours.

The time interval is from the time that the start-of-bracket control set
produces acceptable results to the time that you see a reminder to schedule
and process the end-of-bracket controls.
If you . . .
Then . . .
want the system to remind you to schedule

and process the end-of-bracket controls,
enter a value greater than 0 and less than

the value in Control Warning.
do not want the system to remind you to

schedule and process the end-of-bracket
controls,
enter 0.
Refer to Using Control-bracketed Tests page 2-57.
Defining Reference Ranges, Result Interpretations, and

Reflex Tests
You can define reference ranges for your patient population, result interpretations
for results within a certain range, and reflex tests for samples with certain test
results.
Defining Reference Ranges

Use this procedure to define the ranges for your patient population. Enter the
range your laboratory establishes or use the expected values in the
ADVIA Centaur Assay Manual. The system displays flags for results outside the
defined ranges.
a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
4. Select Ranges.
5. At the Test Ranges window, select Edit.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-21
6. You can enter or edit reference ranges for different patient populations.
You can enter up to 7 characters for the name of the reference range. Use the
range established in your laboratory or the 1 provided in the ADVIA Centaur
Assay Manual.
If you want to enter or edit . . .
Then . . .
the name of the reference range, such as

Child or Adult,
enter the name in Name of Range.
the low limit or the high limit for the

reference range,
enter the low limit or the high limit.
the gender,
select either M for male or F for female.
the age range,
enter the low end of the range on the left

and the high end of the range on the right.
NOTE: If you select Reset Defaults, the system resets all options at the Test
Ranges window in addition to the reference range options.

7. Reset the ranges to the original values, if necessary:
a. Select Reset Defaults.
b. Select Ranges.
8. Reset all the parameters and ranges to the original values, if necessary:
b. Select All.
9. If required, define reflex tests for test results that are outside the reference
ranges.
Refer to Defining Reflex Tests for Reference Ranges page 8-23.
10. Select Save.
Defining Result Interpretations

A result interpretation is a label that you want the system to use for results within
a certain range, for example, reactive or nonreactive. You can define up to 7
custom result interpretations for your laboratory in addition to the result
interpretations defined by the manufacturer.
a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-22

6. At the Test Result Calculation window, select Calculate Results.
Select the button at the lower left of the window if you want to review
results before releasing them to an LIS.
In the first field at the bottom of the window, the system displays
Predefined if the manufacturer defined the information and Operator if
you defined the information.
NOTE: You cannot edit the interpretation names and ranges that the
manufacturer predefined.
7. At the Test Result Calculation window, define a result interpretation in the
fields below the table using the following procedure:
a. Select Add New to activate the interpretation edit field, which is the third
field in the row below the table.
b. Enter an interpretation in the interpretation edit field.
Enter up to 15 alphanumeric characters for the interpretation that you
want the system to use for results within a certain range.
The remaining fields below the table become active.
c. Enter the lower and upper limits of the range.
Enter up to 6 numeric characters for the lower and upper limits for the
interpretation.
d. Select Hold at the left field in the row if you want to review results before
releasing them to the LIS.
e. If required, define a reflex test or profile for test results within a result
interpretation range. Refer to Defining Reflex Tests for Interpretation
Ranges page 8-24.
8. Select Add Row to add the result interpretation information to the table.
9. Select Continue.
Modifying Test Interpretations to Result Calculations

You can use the instructions in Defining Result Interpretations page 8-21 to
modify the Operator defined interpretation ranges unless the ranges have 5 or
more whole numbers.
To edit the field when you have more than 5 whole numbers for the low or the
high range, use the following procedure:
1. Select the row for the interpretation.
2. Highlight all of the numbers in the edit field.
3. Select Delete.
4. Enter the correct value.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-23
5. Select Add Row.
Defining Reflex Tests

Reflex tests are supplemental tests or profiles the system schedules in response to
low or high results for specific tests. You can define a reflex tests for results that
are outside a reference range or within an interpretation range.
NOTE: You can select a reflex test or profile only if the test definition for the
reflex test or profile is on the system. Refer to Defining Test Profiles page 8-43.
NOTE: The system performs a reflex test automatically if the sample is still in
the inprocess queue when the system receives the request. If the system ejects the
sample before it receives the request, the reflex test remains pending until you
reload the sample.
NOTE: If both automatic repeat tests and reflex tests are defined for a test, and a
result meets the criteria defined for both, the system does not process the reflex
test based on the initial result. The system repeats the test with the defined number
of replicates and if any of the repeat replicates meet the reflex criteria, the reflex
test is performed. The system does not perform the reflex test if none of the repeat
replicates have a result that meets the reflex criteria.
For example, the system handles reflex confirmatory tests for a reactive Hepatitis
B surface Antigen test (HBsAg) in the manner described below.
The recommended protocol for performing the HBsAg test is as follows:
1. Perform the HBsAg test.
2. If the result is reactive, repeat the test in replicates of 2 or more.
3. If 1 or more of the repeat replicates has a reactive result, perform the HBsAg
confirmatory test.
If a reactive test result initiates an automatic repeat, the system schedules an
HBsAg confirmatory test only after the system shows the initial reactive result of
the HBsAg screen test to be repeatably reactive.
If . . .
Then . . .
either repeat replicate is reactive,
the system schedules an HBsAg

confirmatory test.
the initial result is reactive and none of the

repeat replicates have a reactive result,
the system does not schedule an HBsAg

confirmatory test.
Defining Reflex Tests for Reference Ranges

A reflex test is a supplementary test that the system schedules automatically if a
test result is outside (either low or high) or inside (between low and high) the
defined range. Refer to Defining Reference Ranges page 8-20.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-24

a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
4. Select Ranges.
6. Select Reflex Tests.
7. At the Test-Reflex Test window, select the mathematical operators:
a. Select the left Schedule if dropdown list.
b. Select the left mathematical operator.
Under most circumstances, the left mathematical operator is <. To define
the lower limit when a result is inside the defined range, select >=.
c. Select the right Schedule if dropdown list.
d. Select the right mathematical operator.
Under most circumstances, the right mathematical operator is >. To define
the upper limit when a result is inside the defined range, select <=.
8. Select the reflex test for the defined range or ranges:
a. Select the test for the system to schedule if the result is less than the low
limit.
b. Select the test for the system to schedule if the result is greater than the
high limit.
c. Select a test from the left field only if the result is greater than or equal to
the low limit or less than or equal to the high limit.
Only the left field is available when you define a closed range.
9. Select Continue.
10. At the Test Ranges window, select Save.
Defining Reflex Tests for Interpretation Ranges

You can define a reflex test that the system schedules automatically. This is for a
test result that is within a range defined for an interpretation label, such as reactive
or nonreactive. Refer to Defining Result Interpretations page 8-21.
a. Select Test.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-25

b. Select a test.
7. At the Test Result Calculation window, select the table row that contains
the range that requires a reflex test.
The system copies the information to the fields below the table.
8. At the Reflex Tests field, select the reflex test or profile that you want
the system to perform automatically if a result is within the range.
9. Perform the appropriate action:
If you selected . . .
Then . . .
a reflex test.
use the list at the Replicates field to select the appropriate

number of replicates.
a reflex profile or ratio,
continue with step 10.

You cannot select replicates for a reflex profile or ratio.
10. To add the reflex test information to the table, select Add Row .
11. Select Continue.
Defining Automatic Sample Repeats

You can define several automatic repeat features that make sample handling
easier:
You can define the result ranges that you want to repeat, such as samples
outside the check range or linearity, or samples outside the concentration
calculation range or index calculation range on the Master Curve card.
You can define the number of replicates for an automatically repeated test.
You can select whether you want to hold samples in the inprocess queue
for repeat tests and the types of samples you want to hold.
If you select . . .
Then . . .
both automatic
repeat and hold
options,
you do not need to interact with the system to repeat a test.

The system holds the racks in the inprocess queue until it
completes the results. If the sample requires a repeat test, the
system automatically schedules and performs it. If the inprocess
queue is full, the system can load an additional sample rack after
it ejects a sample rack from the inprocess queue.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-26
If you select . . .
Then . . .
automatic repeat
options and do not
select hold
options,
you must reload the sample to repeat a test.

The system automatically schedules repeat tests for results
outside the defined ranges and the tests remain pending until you
reload the sample.
Refer to Manually Scheduling Samples page 2-47.
Defining Check Range and Linearity

You can define the check range and linearity range for a test and whether to repeat
the test on samples with results that are outside of these ranges.
A check range is a range above and below which a result is repeated to verify its
accuracy. For example, if you have a test whose reference range is 5 to 12 ng/dL,
you may want to repeat all results below 4 and above 15. The low limit of the
check range is 4 and the high limit of the check range is 15.
Linearity is a range above and below which the test is no longer linear or
sensitive. You can find this range in the product insert or you can define your own
laboratory-specific linear range.
NOTE: If repeats are not allowed for a test, repeat options are not available.

a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
4. Select Ranges.
NOTE: You do not need to define both a low and a high value for the check
range.
6. Define the check range.
The system flags results that are outside the check range limits.
a. Enter or edit the low limit of the check range.
b. Enter or edit the high limit of the check range.
7. Define whether to repeat tests on samples with results outside of the check
range:
If you want to repeat tests with results . . .
Then . . .
less than the low limit of the check range,
select Repeat if < in Check Range.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-27
Then . . .
greater than the high limit of the check range,
select Repeat if > in Check Range.
8. Define the linearity:

The system flags results that are outside the linearity limits.
a. Enter or edit the low limit of linearity.
b. Enter or edit the high limit of linearity.
9. Define if you want to repeat tests on samples with results outside the linearity
limits:
Then . . .
less than the low limit of linearity,
select Repeat if < in Linearity.
greater than the high limit of linearity,
select Repeat if > in Linearity.
NOTE: If you select Reset Defaults, the system resets all options at the
Test Ranges window in addition to the check range and linearity options.
10. You can reset the ranges at the Test Ranges window to the original values:
b. Select Ranges.
11. You can reset all options and ranges at the Test Ranges window to the
original values:
b. Select All.
12. Select Save.
Defining Repeats for the Concentration and Index

Calculation Ranges
You can define if you want the system to reschedule tests above or below the
concentration or index calculation range on the Master Curve card.
a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
4. Select Ranges.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-28
NOTE: If repeats are not allowed for a test, repeat options are not available.
6. Define whether you want the system to repeat tests outside the concentration
or index calculation range on the Master Curve card:
If you want the system to . . .
Then select . . .
automatically repeat tests with values below the

concentration calculation range,
Repeat if < Conc Range.
automatically repeat tests with values above the

concentration calculation range,
Repeat if > Conc Range.
automatically repeat tests with values below the index

calculation range,
Repeat if < Index.
automatically repeat tests with values above the index

calculation range,
Repeat if > Index.
NOTE: If you select Reset Defaults, the system resets all options at the
Test Ranges window in addition to the concentration and index calculation

range options.
7. You can reset the options to the original values:
b. Select All.
8. Select Save.
Using Final Result Rule

If you select the Final Result Rule option, the system allows you to order an assay
and, if the result is in the retest range, the system automatically orders 2 replicates.
The system reports only 1 result as final. The final result is flagged as Final
Result Ru in the following:
Result Details window
Printed Runtime Report
LIS
If the option is not selected, the system continues to allow you to schedule an
assay with n replicates, and the results are all reported as final.
NOTE: Some results for qualitative assays are at a level above the repeat range.
Results in this range do not require repeat or supplemental confirmatory testing

for the system to report the results.
Preparing to Use the Final Result Rule Option

To use the Final Result Rule option, you may need to modify some settings.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
At the Test Definition window, perform the following actions for the
method you are testing:
8-29
Ensure that interpretations are defined.
Set the replicate value for the assay to 1.

The system does not accept the Final Result Rule option setting on any
assay that has more than one replicate defined for it. The system does not
allow you to define more than one replicate for any assay that has the
Final Result Rule option turned on.
At the Test Dilution Profile Definition window, ensure that a dilution profile
is not defined for the test.
At the Test Result Calculation window, ensure that any test that is reflexing
to the test you are enabling for the Final Result Rule has the number of
replicates set to 1.
At the Test Ranges window, define at least 1 repeat criteria.
Using the Final Result Rule Option

At the Test Ranges window, select Final Result Rule. For specific retest
information, refer to the assay instructions for use for the assay on which you
want to use this option.
When the system evaluates your initial test result, if it is within the defined retest
range, the system automatically orders 2 replicates for the same sample.
If 2 or more of the results are within a range that has a defined interpretation,
the first replicate result within this range is reported as final and the system
displays the Final Result Rule flag.
If the 3 results are in different interpretation ranges, 1 of which is equivocal,
that result is selected as final and the system displays the Final Result Rule
flag.
Viewing the Preliminary Results

To view the other results obtained when you use the Final Result Rule, perform
the following steps:
1. At the workspace, select Worklist > Summary.
2. At the Worklist Summary window, select the result obtained using the Final
Result Rule.
3. Move the pointer from your pointing device over the result.
The window displays a pop-up box containing the Final Result Rule tag with the
date and timestamp for the other two tests.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-30
Deleting Assays Performed Using the Final Result Rule

If you delete a pending or resulted test that was obtained using the Final Result
Rule, the system automatically deletes the corresponding repeat replicates for that
test. Additionally, if you delete a pending or resulted repeat replicate test for a test
that used the Final Result Rule, the system automatically deletes the
corresponding Final Result Rule enabled test.
However, if you disable the Final Result Rule option when pending worklist
orders for that test are on the system, and then you delete a Final Result Rule
enabled test or pending repeat replicate or repeat replicate that has a result, you
must manually delete the associated replicate or repeat replicates.
Error Handling when Using the Final Result Rule Option

For any assay that has the Final Result Rule option enabled, if one of the repeat
replicates produces a signal error, the system still looks for 2-out-of-3 results that
agree. If the remaining repeat replicate agrees with the initial assay, the system
reports the assay using the result of the repeat replicate test.
However, if the remaining repeat replicate does not agree with the initial assay, the
Final Result Rule evaluation is not applied to the assay and you must reintroduce
the sample to the system.
Defining Automatic Repeats for Sample Error

Conditions
You can create a definition for the system to repeat tests when it detects
insufficient sample, a clot, or a sample integrity error, such as sample foam,
bubbles, or sample aspiration errors.
NOTE: The system uses a new tip each time it aspirates a sample for each test.
Therefore, the system discards any clot or other obstruction in the tip before
performing a repeat test.

2. Select Summary.
repeat options.
Select Repeat if Insufficient Sample is Detected to repeat the sample

aspiration when the system detects insufficient sample volume.
Select Repeat if Clot is Detected to repeat the sample aspiration when

the system detects obstructions in a sample tip.
Select Repeat if Sample Integrity Error is Detected to repeat the sample

aspiration when the system detects an irregular sample aspiration.
5. Select Save.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-31
Defining the Number of Replicates for Automatic

Repeats
You can define the number of replicates when a repeat test is performed
automatically.
If you want the number of repeat
replicates to be . . .
Then . . .
different than the number defined for

samples in routine tests at the
Test Definition window,
or
different than the number of repeat
replicates defined by Siemens,
enter a value in the Repeat Replicates field

the same as the number defined for

samples in routine tests or the same as the
number of repeat replicates defined by
Siemens,
leave the Repeat Replicates field blank.

The system uses the number of replicates
for repeat testing that was used when the
test was initially performed.
If you enter a different number of
replicates at the Worklist Reagent
Options window, the system uses that
number for the current sample.
NOTE: If you are manually scheduling a repeat test, the field at the Test Ranges
window does not apply. To manually schedule a repeat test, change the number of
replicates at the Worklist Reagent Options window, as described in Manually
Scheduling Samples page 2-47.
Use this procedure to define the number of replicates for samples processed in
automatically repeated tests.
a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
4. Select Ranges.
6. Enter the number of replicates for patient samples processed in automatically
repeated tests in the Repeat Replicates field.
7. Select Save.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-32
Defining Hold for Repeat Options

If you want the system to automatically retest samples without requiring you to
manually reload them, you must define the sample types that you want to hold
in the inprocess queue and select the Hold Sample for Repeat option for each test.
At the Setup Sample Handling Options window, select the sample types that
you want the system to hold.
The system holds the selected sample types in the inprocess queue only if you
also select the Hold Sample for Repeat option at the Test Definition
window. If you deselect a sample type, the system does not hold that type of
sample even if you select the Hold Sample for Repeat option at the Test
Definition window.
At the Test Definition window for each test that requires automatic repeats,
select Hold Sample for Repeat.
For each test with this option selected, the system holds only the sample types
selected at the Setup Sample Handling Options window.
NOTE: The system holds a sample for only 1 repeat test. If you need to repeat
a test on a sample 2 times, you must manually reload the sample for the
second repeat test even if you select the hold options. The system
automatically ejects samples after repeat tests are aspirated.
Define the sample types that you want to hold in the inprocess queue:
2. Select Summary.
4. In Hold Samples for Repeats & Reflex Tests, select each sample type that
you want the system to hold in the inprocess queue for additional testing.
5. Select Save.
Select the Hold Sample for Repeat option for each test:
a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-33
6. Select Hold Sample for Repeat.

This holds samples in the inprocess queue for additional testing based on the
repeat criteria you defined at the Test Ranges window.
7. Select Save.
Defining Automatic Dilutions

You can define automatic dilution options for certain tests. These options include
diluting test results greater than a specified concentration and scheduling dilution
profiles. A dilution profile enables the system to schedule multiple dilutions for
a test.
You can also define dilution options for specific samples at the
Worklist Dilutions window. Specifying a dilution for a specific sample overrides
the automatic dilution option for the test. Refer to Entering Dilution Options
page 2-55.
Defining Automatic Dilutions for Tests

a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
4. Select Ranges.
NOTE: The Dilution Point, Dilution, or Overdilution Point field may not be
available depending on the displayed test.

NOTE: If you define a Dilution Point, you must also define a Dilution and
Overdilution Point. If a you do not define a Dilution, the system does not have
enough information to automatically dilute a sample. If you do not define an
Overdilution Point, the system does not have enough information to check the
diluted result.
6. In Dilution Point, enter the concentration above which you want the system to
perform an automatic dilution.
If the result is above the concentration limit that you enter in this field, the
system flags the test result and automatically schedules a dilution.
7. In Dilution, select the dilution factor.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-34
8. In Overdilution Point, if it is not defined, enter the concentration below which

you do not want the system to determine a result for the specific dilution.
The Overdilution Point should be equal to the Low Limit of the Linearity
range specified at the Test Ranges window. If no Low Limit is defined, the
Overdilution Point should be equal to the sensitivity limit of the assay, as
reported in the product instruction in the ADVIA Centaur Assay Manual.
The Overdilution Point provides an indication that the system should have
diluted the sample at a lower level or not at all. The system compares the
uncorrected diluted concentration to the value displayed in Overdilution
Point. If the concentration is below the Overdilution Point, the system does
not report a result for the sample.
For example, if the Overdilution Point for ThCG is 5.0 mIU/mL (IU/L) and
the uncorrected result is 4.5 mIU/mL (IU/L) on a sample diluted 1:200, the
system does not determine a result for the sample because the concentration
is below the specified concentration. The system flags the test result and does
not schedule or repeat the test. To obtain a result, you can process the sample
undiluted or diluted at a lower level, such as 1:5.
NOTE: If you select Reset Defaults, the system resets all options at the Test
Ranges window in addition to the automatic dilution options.

9. Reset all options to the original values, if necessary:
b. Select All.
10. Select Save.
Defining Dilution Profiles

You can define a dilution profile that allows you to schedule multiple dilutions for
a test.
2. Select Profile Summary.
3. At the Test Profile Summary window, define or edit a dilution profile.
Then . . .
define a dilution profile,
select Add Dilution Profile.
edit a dilution profile,
Select a dilution profile.

Select Profile Definition.
At the Test Dilution Profile Definition window, select
Edit.
NOTE: Siemens defines the dilution levels available at the Test Dilution
Profile Definition window. If Siemens did not define dilution levels for a test,
selections for dilution levels are not available.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-35
4. At the Test Dilution Profile Definition window, enter or edit the appropriate
information.
a. Select Edit.
b. In Profile, edit or add the name of the profile.
c. In LIS Code, edit or add the LIS code for the profile.
d. In Test, enter the name of the test.
e. In Dilution, enter up to 5 dilution factors.
5. Select Save.
The system adds the dilution symbol next to the Dilution Profile name on the
Test Profile Summary window.
Deleting Dilution Profiles

NOTE: When the system is connected to an LIS and the Send Unresulted Test
Status to LIS option is on, ensure that you delete the worklist ordering the dilution
profile before deleting the dilution profile test. If you delete the dilution profile
test first, the system sends an incomplete order deletion notification about the
dilution profile to the LIS.
You can use this procedure to delete a dilution profile.
3. At the Test Profile Summary window, select the profile.
4. Select Delete.
Defining Calculated Parameters

You can enter mathematical formulas that the system uses to calculate test results
from other test results.
You can define the ratio tests for calculated parameters such as free thyroxine
index (FTI) and red blood cell folate (RBC folate). The ADVIA Centaur XP
system calculates the FTI and RBC folate values using direct measurement,
equations, and off-system tests. Refer to the ADVIA Centaur XP Assay Manual
for specific parameters for each test.
Procedural Notes
You cannot use Hepatitis B Surface Antigen test as a component of a ratio

test.
Do not select the Hepatitis B Antigen Confirmatory (Conf) assay as a

component of a ratio test.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-36
Conf assays results are not intended for ratio calculation.
When you edit an element of a ratio test, the system automatically recalculates
the ratio test result and reports the result with an Edited flag.
After you define a ratio test at the Test Ratio Definition window, reboot the
system.
NOTE: Do not select the Hepatitis B Surface Antigen Confirmatory (Conf)
assay as a component of a ratio test. Conf Assay results are not intended for
ratio calculations. The system does not allow you to use the Hepatitis B
Surface Antigen test (HBs) as a component of a ratio test.
Rebooting ensures that the system displays results for LIS requests for the
new ratio test.
Defining Ratio Tests

You can define the ratio tests for calculated parameters such as free thyroxine
index (FTI) and red blood cell folate (RBC folate). The ADVIA Centaur XP
system calculates the FTI and RBC folate values using direct measurement,
equations, and off-system tests. Refer to the ADVIA Centaur Assay Manual for
specific parameters for each test.
NOTE: You cannot define a component as part of a Ratio test.
When you request a ratio test, the system automatically schedules all tests defined
as part of the ratio. If you request a ratio test and also request a test that is part of
the ratio test, the system performs the test twice. One result is used in the
calculation of the ratio test and the other result is reported independently.
NOTE: When you edit an element of a ratio test, the system automatically
recalculates the ratio test result and reports the result with an Edited flag.
3. At the Test Summary window, define or edit a ratio test:
Then . . .
define a ratio test,
a.
Select Add Ratio.
b. Enter the test.

edit a ratio test,
a.
Select a ratio test.
c. At the Test Ratio Definition window, select Edit.
4. At the Test Ratio Definition window, enter the parameters:

Then . . .
enter the LIS code for a test,
enter the LIS code.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-37
Then . . .
review the result before the system

reports the result,
select Hold.
enter the units,
select a unit of measure.
enter the number of decimal places,
select the number of significant digits in

Decimal.
enter a reference range,
enter the low limit and the high limit.
NOTE: Use the formula displayed at the Test Ratio Definition window to
define each ratio test.

5. Enter the variables for the formula:
If you want . . .
Then . . .
the system to use a test

result in the calculation,
a.
Select Tests from the list in the first field under the
appropriate variable.
b. Select a test from the list in the second field under

the variable.
to enter a number for the
variable,
a.
Select Variable from the list in the first field under

the appropriate variable.
You can enter a 0 (zero) if you do not want to
include Variable a or Variable b in the calculation.
b. Enter a value in the second field under the variable.

You can enter a 1 if you do not want to include
Variable c or Variable d in the calculation
Examples are as follows:

a. RBC Folate = FOLATE 2100 / HCT
Enter the following variables for an RBC Folate:
a = Tests, FOL
b = Variable, 0
c = Tests, HCT
d = Variable, 2100
b. FTI = T4 %Uptake / 100
Enter the following variables for FTI:
a = Tests, T4
b = Variable, 0
c = Variable, 100
d = Tests, TUp (%)
6. Select Save.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-38
Rounding Rules in Ratio Test Calculations

If a result displays a value of 0.0, it may actually be a true zero value or it may
have a value that is equivalent to zero, such as 0.004. This means that, in a ratio
calculation, the system could display that a 0.0 value was used in a calculation but
achieve a different result.
In a circumstance where a value used in a ratio calculation is a true zero, the
system will not use the true zero value and will report the result as over the
database limit.
In the instance where the value is actually not a true zero, such as 0.004, the
system performs the ratio calculation and displays the valid result.
Defining T Uptake Result Options

You can define how you want to report the T Uptake results.
3. At the Test Summary window, select TUp.
4. Select Ranges.
6. Select a percent or a ratio in Result Formula.
The following list describes the selections:
Percent 1 the system calculates percent uptake by multiplying the

uptake ratio by the midpoint of the percent uptake reference range defined
in the first range field at this window.

uptake ratio by the midpoint of the reference range defined in the second
range field at this window.

uptake ratio by the midpoint of the reference range defined in the third

uptake ratio by the midpoint of the reference range defined in the fourth
Ratio the system calculates T Uptake results as a ratio by default.
Refer to the ADVIA Centaur Assay Manual.

7. Select Save.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-39
Using Multicomponent Tests

The system uses the results from one or more standard tests or off-system tests in
a formula to calculate a multicomponent test result. The standard tests and
off-system tests that are used to determine a multicomponent result are referred to
as component tests of the multicomponent test.
The formula is included in the multicomponent test definition. The formula
consists of a constant, coefficients, and test results. These are referred to as
variables in the Test-Multicomponent Definition window.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-40
The following is an example of a formula used to calculate a result for a

multicomponent:
Result = a + b ln c + d ln e + f ln g + h ln i + j ln k + l
Where a = constant
b, d, f, h, j = coefficients
c, e, g, i, k = test results from component assays
l = either an offsystem test result or a numeric variable
NOTE: Only the results from ADVIA Centaur XP assays can be used for
variables c, e, g, i and k. Results from ADVIA Centaur XP assays should not be

used in the formula as an off-system test.
Variables a through k are set by the manufacturer and cannot be customized.
Variable l may be available depending on the manufacturer settings in the
multicomponent test definition. The default value of variable l is 0.
Adding Variable l
A multicomponent formula consists of a constant, coefficients, and test results.
These are referred to as variables in the Test-Multicomponent Definition window.
Variable l is available depending on the manufacturer settings in the
multicomponent test definition.
Variable l can be either of the following:
A test result of an offsystem test
A numeric value
There are no result time limits applied to a test result that is used as variable l in
the multicomponent formula. The system calculates the multicomponent result
using the variable l element after all component test results are complete.
For more information about off-system tests, refer to Defining Off-System Tests
page 8-42.
Enabling and Disabling a Multicomponent Test

Enable the component assays before enabling the multicomponent assay. Disable
a multicomponent assay before disabling the component assays.
NOTE: Ensure there are no pending multicomponent tests or tests reflexing to a
multicomponent test before attempting to disable a multicomponent assay or

component assay.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-41
Setting Conditions for Multicomponent Tests

Specific conditions apply for a component of a multicomponent assay. This
section describes the following conditions or settings:
Result time limit
Units
Conversion factors
Patient Replicates
Autorepeat
Reflex
Result Time Limit
The result time limit for each component assay is set by the manufacturer. The
result time measurement begins when the result becomes available. If a sample is
repeated, the time measurement begins when the repeat component result is
available.
If a result time limit expires for any of the components of a multicomponent test,
the system does not calculate a multicomponent result. For example, XA is a
component of the multicomponent test XYZ. If the XA test result time limit
expires, the system does not calculate an XYZ result.
The system retains result time limits for all component results of a
multicomponent test after a reboot. These conditions apply to patient tests and
control tests.
Units
The user units and the master curve units must be the same for all component
assays that are defined in a multicomponent test definition. If a multicomponent
assay is enabled, you cannot change the user units for the component assays.
If you run component tests individually, you may change the user units. Disable
the multicomponent assay before changing the user units of a component assay
you intend to run individually.
Conversion Factors
The conversion factors must be the same for all component assays that are defined
in a multicomponent test definition. If a multicomponent assay is enabled, you
cannot change the conversion factors for the component assays.
If you run component tests individually, you may change the conversion factors.
Disable the multicomponent assay before changing the conversion factors of a
component assay you intend to run individually.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-42
Replicates
A component assay may have more than one replicate selected in the test
definition. When a multicomponent test is ordered, the system runs one replicate
of each component test regardless of the replicate settings in the test definition.
Autorepeating a Component Assay
If the repeat option is enabled for a component assay for a multicomponent test
and the test result falls in the repeat range, the system repeats the component test
and holds the results of the other component tests. The repeated result is used to
calculate the multicomponent result.
The system runs one repeat replicate for each component test regardless of the
replicate settings in the test definition.
Reflexing
The rules regarding reflex testing are specific for a multicomponent assay. A
component test may reflex to a multicomponent test. If the component test result
meets the reflex criteria, the system schedules the multicomponent test and all
component tests, including the component test that initiated the reflex test. The
multicomponent test result is calculated using the second result of the component
test that initiated the reflex multicomponent test.
A component assay, when ordered within a multicomponent assay, cannot reflex
to itself. A multicomponent assay cannot be a component of a multicomponent or
ratio assay.
Procedural Notes
You cannot order a multicomponent test in rack ID mode.

You cannot create a dilution profile for a multicomponent assay.
The following options must be disabled for components of a multicomponent
assay:
Control Bracketing
Reuse Result Rule
Final Result Rule
Defining Off-System Tests

An off-system test is a test that the ADVIA Centaur XP system does not perform,
but can report or use in a ratio test calculation. For example, you can define
hematocrit as an off-system test if you want the system to calculate RBC folate.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-43
3. At the Test Summary window, define or edit an off-system test:

Then . . .
a.
define an off-system test,
Select Add Off-System.
b. Enter the name in Test.

a.
edit an off-system test,
Select an off-system test.
c. At the Test Off-System Definition window,
select Edit.
4. At the Test Off-System Definition window, enter or edit the appropriate

information.
Then . . .
enter the LIS code for a test,
enter the LIS code.
enter the units,
select a unit of measure.
enter the number of decimal places,
select the number of significant digits in

Decimal.
enter a reference range,
enter the low limit and the high limit.
5. Select Save.
Defining Test Profile Options

You can define and delete test profiles that allow you to schedule multiple tests for
a sample. For example, if you define a thyroid profile, select all of the thyroid
assays that you want to include in the profile.
Defining Test Profiles

3. At the Test Profile Summary window, define or edit a test profile:
Then . . .
define a test profile,
select Add Test Profile.
edit a test profile,
a.
Select a profile.
b. Select Profile Definition.

c. At the Test Profile Definition window, select Edit.
4. At the Test Profile Definition window, enter or edit the appropriate

information.
a. Add or edit the name of the profile.
b. Add or edit the LIS code for the profile.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-44
c. Select the tests you want in the profile.

5. Select Save.
Deleting Test Profiles

3. At the Test Profile Summary window, select the profile.
4. Select Delete.
Modifying the Test Display Order

The default order of tests displayed at the Worklist Schedule window and on
printed reports is the order in which the system activates the tests. The system
displays each new test at the end of the list. Use this procedure to change the order
in which the system displays the active tests.
3. At the Test Summary window, select Display Order.
4. At the Test Display Order window, select Edit.
5. Select a test.
a. Select Test.
b. Select a test.
6. Select the target position.
7. Select the appropriate option:
Then . . .
change the position of the test with the

test in the target position,
select Move.
The test changes positions with the test in
the target position.
insert the test before an existing test in

the table,
select Insert.
The test is inserted before the target
position.
8. Select Save.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-45
Modifying System Options

You can modify system options such as the sound of the alarm, the speed and
sensitivity of the pointing device, the type of barcode scanner, and the elapsed
time required for the screen saver to activate.
Reviewing System Options

You can review setup options selected for your system at the Setup Summary
window. To open the Setup Summary window from the workspace, select Setup
and then select Summary.
Select the Print Options button to specify the printer, the paper size, the
automatic runtime results report options, and the report heading.
Select the Alarms button to define when you want the alarm to sound, the
volume of the alarm, and the type of sound.
Select the Additional Options button to define several options, including the
system name, time, screen saver options, pointing device options, reagent
warning counts, and water and waste options.
Viewing the System Serial Number

2. Select Summary.
3. At the Setup Summary window, select Additional Options.
4. At the Setup Additional Options window, view the serial number assigned
to your system in the System Serial Number field.
Defining the System Name

2. Select Summary.
4. At the Setup Additional Options window, enter up to 11 alphanumeric
characters for the system name.
The system displays the name at the workspace.
5. Select Save.
Specifying Screen Saver Options

The system has a screen saver that displays the system graphic. You can define the
time after which the screen saver activates and define whether or not you want the
screen saver to blink for critical conditions.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-46
2. Select Summary.
4. At the Setup Additional Options window, in the Screen Saver Timeout field,
enter the number of minutes the workspace remains idle before the screen
saver displays.
The default is 5 minutes. Enter 0 (zero) if you do not want to use the screen
saver option.
5. Select Blink for Failures, if you want the background of the screen saver to
blink between red and black in critical conditions.
6. Select Save.
Defining Alarms
You can define alarms for Message Boxes, and Warning or Failure conditions.
Refer to Monitoring Status page 2-9.
2. Select Summary.
3. At the Setup Summary window, select Alarms.
4. At the Setup Alarms window, select Message Box, Warning, or Failure.
5. Select Alarm On or Alarm Off.
6. Select Continuous Repetitions or Specify Repetitions.
7. If you select Specify Repetitions, enter a number from 1 to 99 in Repetitions
to specify the number of times you want the alarm to repeat.
8. Enter a number from 0 to 100 in Volume.
A higher number increases the volume of the alarm.
9. Repeat steps 4 through 8 for each condition.
10. Select Save.
Defining Low Reagent Status

You can specify warning levels at which the system alerts you that the primary
reagent or ancillary reagent volume is low. A Low Reagent message displays at
the Worklist Reagent Inventory window and the system sends the message to
the LIS when the total quantity of reagent loaded for a particular test is equal to or
less than the amount specified for the warning level.
When a Low Reagent status exists at the Worklist Reagent Inventory window,
the system highlights the test in yellow, the Reagent Status button blinks yellow,
and the reagent area of the system graphic displays yellow.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-47

3. At the Setup Additional Options window, in the Reagent Warning Counts
Primary field, enter the number of tests at which you want the system to notify
you that the primary reagent volume is low.
4. In the Reagent Warning Counts Required Ancillary field, enter the number of
milliliters at which you want the system to notify you that the ancillary
reagent volume is low.
5. Select Save.
6. Close all windows, and then reboot the system.
Defining the Control Bracket Reagent Reserve

You can define a Control Bracket Reagent Reserve for control-bracketed tests.
This feature ensures that the system has enough reagent for the end-of-bracket
controls of a control-bracketed test that is in process. When the reagent reaches
the reserved level, the system suspends aspiration of patient samples and reminds
you to process the end-of-bracket controls.
3. In the Control Bracket Reagent Reserve field at the Setup Additional
Options window, enter the number of control sets for which the system
reserves reagent to process the end-of-bracket controls.
You can enter from 1 to 5 sets.
For example, if you enter 2 control sets and a test has 3 control levels, the
system reserves reagent required to evaluate the following number of quality
control samples: 2 the number of control replicates defined at the
Test Definition window.
4. Select Save.
Adjusting the Time

The system calendar and clock are powered by a long-life battery in order to
maintain the correct date and time even if the power is turned off. You can select
the time zone appropriate for your laboratory and you can also increase or
decrease the time on the system clock.
Specifying the Time Zone

2. Select Summary.
4. At the Setup Additional Options window, select your time zone.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-48
5. Select Save.
Entering a Time Correction

You can increase or decrease the time on the system clock by a maximum of
1440 seconds during 1 setup.
2. Select Summary.
NOTE: The system changes the time on the system clock only if the number
of seconds that you enter at the Time Correction field is a new number. If you
want to adjust the time by the same number of seconds that had been entered
and used by the system earlier, you must enter 0 (zero) in the Time Correction
field, save the entry and then enter the actual number for the time adjustment.
4. At the Setup Additional Options window, enter the time correction for the
system clock:
If you are entering a . . .
Then . . .
new time correction that was not

used in the previous setting for this
window,
enter the number of seconds with a plus sign to

increase the time or a minus sign to decrease the
time (example: +300 to increase the time 5
minutes or -300 to decrease the time 5 minutes).
time correction that was used in the

previous setting for this window
(example: you entered a time
correction of +300 seconds, the
system adjusted the time by this
amount, and you want to adjust the
time by +300 seconds again),
a.
Enter 0 (zero) in the Time Correction

field.
b. Select Save.
c.
Enter the number of seconds with a plus

sign to increase the time or a minus sign
to decrease the time (example: +300 to
increase the time 5 minutes or -300 to
decrease the time 5 minutes).
5. Select Save.
The system gradually adjusts the time on the system clock according to the
number of seconds that you entered in the Time Correction field. It can take
3 hours or longer for a correction of 10 minutes.
NOTE: Do not reboot after entering a time correction until the system
completes the correction. Rebooting stops the time correction process.
Adjusting the Pointing Device

2. Select Summary.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-49
4. At the Setup Additional Options window, in Acceleration enter a low

number to decrease the speed or enter a high number to increase the speed that
the pointer moves across the screen.
5. In Sensitivity, enter a low number to make the pointer increase the sensitivity
or a high number to decrease the sensitivity when selecting with the pointer
device.
6. Select Save.
Specifying the Media Type for Data Export

You can specify the media type you want to use, CD or USB storage device, in
order to export data from the instrument.
2. Select Summary.
4. At the Setup Additional Options window, in the Media Type field select one
of the options in the drop-down menu.
5. Select Save.
Specifying Print Options

You can specify the printer, the paper size, the automatic runtime results report
options, and the laboratory name and heading you want to appear on printed
reports.
2. Select Summary.
3. At the Setup Summary window, select Print Options.
4. At the Setup Print Options window, select the appropriate printer and
paper size.
5. You can print an automatic runtime results report, which is a report of all
sample results as the results are being generated:
a. Select Automatic Runtime Results Report.
b. Enter the interval in hours at which you want page numbering to reset to 1
in Reset Page Numbering.
c. Enter the number of full pages of results to print at 1 time in Page
Interval.
6. If applicable, you can enter the customer number assigned to you by QC
Online.
7. You can enter the laboratory information you want to appear on printed
reports
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-50
In Laboratory Name, enter up to 30 characters of text for your laboratory

name that you want to print on reports.
In Report Header, enter up to 80 characters and up to 6 lines of text that

you want to print in the report header.
8. Select Save.
Accepting Remote Installation

The system performs remote installations at the Applications PC. Do not perform
any activity at the system while the system is performing a remote installation.
NOTE: If you have enabled the Visible Status Light, while a remote installation is
in progress, the Visible Status Light is green and blinking. Wait until the light
stops blinking to perform any operations on the system.
When you accept a remote installation, the system displays a message on the
Applications PC. The message only remains on the screen until the system
reboots. At the beginning of the system reboot, the Application PC displays the
following message:
Communication with the Centaur has been lost
Ignore this message and do not attempt to restore communication.
After the reboot, the Application PC again displays the message that the remote
installation is in progress. When this message window closes, you can resume
normal activity.
Selecting Remote Access

If your laboratory does not have the RealTime Solutions service, you can select
remote access to make your files accessible for technical assistance through a
modem. The system provides access only to the raw data without patient
demographics.
2. Select Summary.
4. At the Setup Additional Options window, select Remote Access.
5. Select Save.
Selecting Remote Software Administration

If your system is connected to the RealTime Solutions server, some software
administration, like the daily backup, occur by default. You do not have to initiate
the backup.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-51
Remote updates can occur by default, as well, or you can use system settings to
determine the actions of your system when a remotely initiated update occurs.
Remote Software Administration

The ADVIA Centaur XP system can perform remote updates when the system is
in an appropriate state.
At the Setup Additional Options window Remote Install field, select 1 of the
following:
Prompt
If you select Prompt, when a software update is available for download, the
system displays the Software Update Available window. In the Software
Update Available window, you can respond with 1 of the following actions:
Continue
If you select Continue, the system proceeds immediately with the software
update. Only select this option when the system is not inprocess.
Cancel
If you select Cancel, the system cancels the update.
Later
If you enter a date and timeMMM yy hh:mmand select Later, the system
schedules the update for a later time.
Proceed
If you select Proceed, the system automatically performs the software update
as soon as it is remotely initiated.
The system only performs an update when it is in an appropriate state. The
system enters the attempt into the event log and it makes no further attempts
to complete the software update. When you cannot update the software
automatically, you can update it using the RealTime Solutions service.
Deny
You can select Deny to prevent all remote updates. The system logs the
availability of new software.
The system can perform a remote update if it is in any of the following states:
Ready
Warming up
Mechanics off
Check Status
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-52
The system cannot perform a remote update if it is in 1 of the following states:
Inprocess
Restricted
Cleaning
Failed Cleaning
Diagnostics
Performing Data Administration
Specifying Direct Plumbing or System Bottles

You can specify direct plumbing or system bottles depending on the configuration
of your system.
2. Select Summary.
4. At the Setup Additional Options window, select the appropriate option:
If you use . . .
Then select . . .
the system bottles for water

and waste,
System Bottle under the Water and Waste headings.
direct plumbing for the system

water and waste,
Direct Plumbing under the Water and Waste
headings.
5. Select Save.
Accessing the Applications Module Window

The next four sections describe tasks performed on the Applications Module
Window. Follow these steps to access this window:
1. If you are in the System view, press the QC icon (F6) on the keyboard.
2. At the Applications View workspace, select Setup.
3. On the drop-down menu, select Applications Module.The Setup
Applications Module window will appear.
Enabling the Visible Status Light

To enable or disable the visible status light on the SetupApplications Module
window, perform the following steps:
1. Select the check box to enable the visible status light or clear the check box to
disable it.
2. Select Save.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-53
Deactivating/Activating ADVIA QC
To activate or deactivate the ADVIA QC quality control application on the Setup
Applications Module window, perform the following steps:
1. Select or deselect the check box Enable ADVIA QC.
2. Select Save.
3. A popup window will appear, reminding you that in order for the changes to
take effect the system must be rebooted.
Defining Backup, Restore and Archive Options

The Target Device drop-down menu is located on the Setup-Applications Module
window.
Currently, the Target Device drop-down menu only lists one device: CD/DVD.
This device is pre-selected and cannot be changed or de-selected.
Accessing the Siemens Server

Options for accessing the Siemens Server are listed in the following fields, located
on the SetupApplications Module window:
Access Siemens Server, a checkbox
Select this option to enable your system to communicate with the Siemens
Server.
This option must be selected in order to make available the other Siemens
Server options on this window.
After making your choice, a popup window will appear, reminding you that in
order for the changes to take effect the system must be rebooted.
If you have selected Access Siemens Server, then you must select the agent
used by your laboratory to communicate with the Siemens Server. Select one
of the radio buttons for choosing this service: either Remote Server or
Remote and Laboratory Server.
After making your choice, a popup window will appear, reminding you that in
order for the changes to take effect the system must be rebooted.
Send Result Data to Siemens Server, a checkbox
You can select or de-select this service.
Send Backup Data to Siemens Server, a checkbox
You can select or de-select this service.
Send Log Files to Siemens Server, a checkbox
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-54
If you do not have the appropriate level of security, this function will be
greyed out.
Time, a write-in field

NOTE: This field is only applicable if you are using Remote Server and have
selected the Send Log Files to Siemens Server field. You can specify
when the Siemens Server will receive your data, as long as the
Remote Server radio button has been activated.
Specify time in a 4-digit, 24-hour format HHMM. For example: 0130 is 1:30
a.m. and 1330 is 1:30 p.m.
Select Save when you have made your selections.
Defining LIS Communication Options

You can configure the ADVIA Centaur XP system and LIS to meet your
individual laboratory requirements. You can configure the ADVIA Centaur XP
system to operate in host query mode and to automatically transfer worklist
queries and results to the LIS.
To automatically transfer worklist requests and results, your laboratory can use
barcoded samples or transfer the information using the rack ID. Your LIS must
support the options that you select on the ADVIA Centaur XP system. For more
information about LIS communication options, refer the online document
ADVIA Centaur XP Interface Specifications.
2. Select Summary.
3. At the Setup Summary window, select LIS Communications.
NOTE: The LIS ID is a required field. The system name and the LIS ID must
match the name required by the LIS.

4. At the Setup LIS Communications window, select the appropriate options
for the LIS.
a. In System Name, enter up to 10 alphanumeric characters.
The system name must match the name required by the LIS.
b. In LIS ID, enter up to 10 alphanumeric characters.
The LIS ID must match the name required by the LIS.
c. In the upper section of the Setup LIS Communications window, select
options and enter the appropriate parameters for your LIS.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-55
5. Select all of the appropriate options for the ADVIA Centaur XP system.
In the lower section of the Setup LIS Communications window, select
options for your ADVIA Centaur XP system.
Refer to the documentation for the LIS to determine the appropriate options.
If you want to enable the
system to . . .
Then select . . .
automatically query the LIS for

worklist entries as the system
identifies each sample,
System Automatically Queries Host for Worklist.
automatically send all final

results to the LIS, except the
results on hold,
System Automatically Sends All Results except

Results on Hold.
automatically send all interim

and final results to the LIS,
except the results on hold,
You can define the results that the system holds at

the Test Definition and the Test Result
Calculation windows.
System Automatically Sends All Results except
Results on Hold and System Automatically
Sends All Results & Additional Data except
Results on Hold.
Interim and final results include all results except

invalid manual dilution results and RLU-only
results.
The following results are examples of interim
results:
replicate results
results of all of the levels in a dilution profile
dilution results that are under range or
overdiluted
results that the system cannot calculate
because the RLUs are above or below the
Master Curve
If the LIS does not receive the interim results,
contact the LIS administrator to review the result
records in the LIS interface.
You can define the results that the system holds at
the Test Definition and the Test Result
Calculation windows.
automatically send reagent status
messages to the LIS,
System Automatically Sends Status to LIS.
send a worklist in response to a

query from the LIS,
Respond to LIS Query for Worklist.
send results in response to a

query from the LIS,
Respond to LIS Query for Results.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-56
If you want to enable the

system to . . .
Then select . . .
send Rack IDs with sample

results to the LIS,
Send Rack IDs with Results.
remove leading spaces from SIDs

when the system receives or
sends SIDs,
Remove Leading Spaces from SIDs.
transmit diagnostic messages to

the LIS when the system starts
up,
Perform Diagnostics at Startup.

The LIS acknowledges the messages, indicating
successful communications.
6. Select Save.
NOTE: If you modified the Setup LIS Communications window on your
ADVIA Centaur XP system, turn system mechanics off and then turn system
mechanics on. This procedure ensures that the LIS option is updated.
NOTE: The Turn System Mechanics On option is not available until the
system mechanics are off.

Defining LAS Communication Options

Laboratory automation is the process by which samples are brought to the
analyzers in your laboratory by a sample transport system. When you enhance
your ADVIA Centaur XP system with the ADVIA Centaur XP STS sample
transport system hardware and select LAS at the Setup LAS Communications
window, you enable your system to access samples from the sample transport
system in addition to the sample entry queue and the Stat entry.
You can configure the communication options for the ADVIA Centaur XP system
and the LAS.
2. Select Summary.
3. At the Setup Summary window, select LAS Communications.
4. At the Setup LAS Communications window, select the appropriate options:
If you want to enable . . .
Then select . . .
the ADVIA Centaur XP system to access samples from the sample

transport system,
LAS.
the system to save and log messages from the LAS so you can
view the messages at the System Communication Log window,
Data Capture.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-57
If you want to enable . . .
Then select . . .
hardware flow control between the system and the LAS,
Handshaking.
5. Select the appropriate baud rate, ensuring that the communication

configuration of the LAS agrees with your selection.
If your LAS cannot operate at the baud rate selections listed, call for technical
assistance.
6. Enter the appropriate timeout information:
At . . .
Enter the number of . . .
No Response Timeout,
seconds the system waits for the LAS to reply to a

command or response.
No Supplies Timeout,
minutes the system allows a sample tube to remain in the

lab automation queue while the operator replenishes low
supplies or reagents or empties full waste containers.
No Request Timeout,
minutes the system allows a sample tube to remain in the

lab automation queue while the system determines if the
sample has any test requests.
Index Queue Timeout,
15-second intervals (cycles) the system allows to wait for a

response to the Index Queue command.
In an Index Queue command, the system requests the LAS
to release the sample tube at the sample access position and
then move the next sample into the sample access position.
Tube Travel Timeout,
15-second intervals (cycles) the system allows a sample

tube to travel from the first barcode reader to the second
barcode reader (the sample access position).
Send SID Timeout,
15-second intervals (cycles) the system allows to wait for a

response to the Send SID command.
In a Send SID command, the system requests the LAS to
send the SID of the sample tube at the sample access
position.
7. Select Save.
Resetting LAS Communications

Use this procedure to reset communications between the ADVIA Centaur XP
system and LAS.
2. At the Setup-Event Log window, select Lab Automation Communications.
3. Select Reset LAS Communications.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
8-58
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Appendix A: Safety Instructions

This information summarizes the established guidelines for handling laboratory
biohazards. This summary is based on the guidelines developed by the Centers for
Disease Control, the Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute Document
M29-A3, Protection of Laboratory Workers from Occupationally Acquired
Infections, and the Occupational Safety and Health Administrations Bloodborne
Pathogens Standard.13
Protecting Yourself from Biohazards

Use this summary for general information only. It is not intended to replace or
supplement your laboratory or hospital biohazard control procedures.
By definition, a biohazardous condition is a situation involving infectious agents
biological in nature, such as the hepatitis B virus, the human immunodeficiency
virus, and the tuberculosis bacterium. These infectious agents may be present in
human blood and blood products and in other body fluids.
The following are the major sources of contamination when handling potentially
infectious agents:
needlesticks
hand-to-mouth contact
hand-to-eye contact
direct contact with superficial cuts, open wounds, and other skin conditions
that may permit absorption into subcutaneous skin layers
splashes or aerosol contact with skin and eyes
078D1064-01 Rev. C
A-2
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Safety Instructions
To prevent accidental contamination in a clinical laboratory, strictly adhere to the

following procedures:
Wear gloves while servicing parts of the instrument that have contact with
body fluids such as serum, plasma, urine, or whole blood.
Wash your hands before going from a contaminated area to a

noncontaminated area, or when you remove or change gloves.
Perform procedures carefully to minimize aerosol formation.
Wear facial protection when splatter or aerosol formation are possible.
Wear personal protective equipment such as safety glasses, gloves, lab coats
or aprons when working with possible biohazard contaminants.
Keep your hands away from your face.
Cover all superficial cuts and wounds before starting any work.
Dispose of contaminated materials according to your laboratorys biohazard

control procedures.
Keep your work area disinfected.
Disinfect tools and other items that have been near any part of the instrument
sample path or waste area with 10% v/v bleach.
Do not eat, drink, smoke, or apply cosmetics or contact lenses while in the
laboratory.
Do not mouth pipet any liquid, including water.
Do not place tools or any other items in your mouth.
Do not use the biohazard sink for personal cleaning such as rinsing coffee
cups or washing hands.
To prevent needlestick injuries, needles should not be recapped, purposely bent,

cut, broken, removed from disposable syringes, or otherwise manipulated by
hand.
References
1. Centers for Disease Control. 1988. Update: Universal precautions for
prevention of transmission of human immunodeficiency virus, hepatitis B
virus and other bloodborne pathogens in healthcare settings. MMWR,
37:377382, 387, 388.
2. Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (formerly NCCLS). Protection of
Laboratory Workers from Occupationally Acquired Infections; Approved
Guideline - Third Edition. CLSI Document M29-A3.[ISBN 1-56238-567-4].
Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute, 940 West Valley Road, Suite
1400, Wayne, Pennsylvania 19087-1898 USA, 2005).
3. Federal Occupational Safety and Health Administration. Bloodborne
Pathogens Standard. 29 CFR 1910. 1030.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
A-3
Protecting Yourself from Barcode Scanner Lasers

To avoid damage to the eyes, never look directly at the laser beam or at its
reflection from a shiny surface. Never point a hand-held barcode scanner at
anyone.
Laser Safety Classification of the ADVIA Centaur XP

System
During normal operation with all of the protective housings in place, the
ADVIA Centaur XP system is classified as CDRH Class I and EN 60825-1 Class
1. No direct exposure to laser hazard exists for persons in the immediate area.
.
laserclass1
Figure A-1
CDRH Class 1 Label
Some field service procedures require the removal of the protective housings that
prevent human access to the laser radiation. The removal of the protective
housings may change the classification of the system to CDRH Class 2 and
EN60825-1 Class 2. All field service procedures must be followed precisely. Only
Siemens-trained field service personnel should perform procedures related to laser
assemblies.
Figure A-2
CDRH Class 2 Label
The laser labels are positioned on the instrument as shown below.
Laser Safety Classification of the Barcode Scanners

The laser safety classification of the reagent and sample barcode scanners when
they are unprotected by the system housings is CDRH Class 2 and EN 60825-1
Class 2. The laser safety classification of the hand-held barcode scanner used with
the system is CDRH Class 2 and EN 60825-1 Class 2.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
A-4
Reagent and Sample Barcode Scanners

ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide procedures for testing the reagent or sample
barcode scanners contain the following laser warning:
LASER WARNING
The specifications for the laser optical assemblies in the ADVIA Centaur XP
ancillary reagent, primary reagent, and sample barcode scanners are summarized
in the following table:
Characteristic
Specification
Maximum Power Output
1.0 mW
Wavelength
670 nm
Pulse Duration
Continuous Wave (cw)
Units of Beam Divergence
0.7 mr
The locations of the reagent and sample barcode scanners and their associated
laser safety labels are shown below. The laser apertures for the sample and
ancillary reagent barcode scanners are directed into the system away from the
operator.
During normal operation, reflections from the sample barcode scanner laser beam
may be visible to persons in the immediate area, but no laser safety hazard is
associated with this exposure. The laser aperture for the primary reagent barcode
scanner is directed toward the barcode labels at the end of the reagent packs inside
the primary reagent compartment.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
A-5
During normal operation, the barcode scanner does not scan the reagent packs
until the primary reagent compartment door is closed. When the primary reagent
compartment door is closed, no operator exposure to the laser exists.
1
2
3
Primary Reagent Barcode Scanner

Sample Barcode Scanner
Ancillary Reagent Barcode Scanner
Figure A-3
Class 1 and Class 2 Laser Hazard Labels
Hand-held Barcode Scanner

ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide procedures that use the hand-held barcode
scanner are introduced with the following laser warning:
LASER WARNING
078D1064-01 Rev. C
A-6
This table contains a summary of the specifications for the laser optical assembly
in the ADVIA Centaur XP hand-held barcode scanner:
Characteristic
Specification
Maximum Power Output
1.0 mW
Wavelength
650 nm
Pulse Duration
7.4 ms
Units of Beam Divergence
2 mr
The laser aperture and laser safety label for the hand-held barcode scanner are on
the other side of the barcode scanner window:
Hand-Held3
Barcode scanner window.
Figure A-4
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Handheld Barcode Scanner Laser Warning Label
Appendix B: Service, Ordering, and Warranty

This section provides the following information:
address of the Siemens authorized representative, which is the Siemens

contact within the European community
addresses for obtaining service and technical information and for ordering
supplies
system warranty and service delivery policy information
Siemens Authorized Representative

Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc.
511 Benedict Avenue
Tarrytown, NY 10591-5097 USA
Limited Instrument Warranty and Service Delivery

Policy
Siemens and its authorized distributors may provide customers who acquire new
Siemens instruments with a limited warranty either in a specific agreement or in
standard language on their invoices. This limited warranty is designed to protect
customers from the cost associated with repairing instruments that exhibit
malfunctions due to defects in materials and/or workmanship during the warranty
period.
Siemens, at its election, provides warranty service either by providing repair
service of the instrument on site, or by exchanging the defective instrument or
component, subject to the limitations and exclusions set forth in Replacement of
Parts and Warranty and Service Exclusions below. Repairs, replacements or
exchanges of instruments or components provided during the warranty or any
additional service period, does not extend the warranty or service period beyond
the initially agreed upon period.
When the customer calls for service, the Siemens representative or authorized
distributor informs the customer of the type of service available for the customers
instrument, and instructs the customer as to how to obtain that service.
Warranty Period
The limited warranty period generally commences upon installation of the
original instrument at the customers location and extends for a period of 1 year
thereafter, unless otherwise specifically agreed to by and between Siemens (or its
authorized distributors) and customer in a writing signed by duly authorized
representatives of both parties (sales representatives are generally not authorized
representatives of Siemens for these purposes).
078D1064-01 Rev. C
B-2
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Service, Ordering, and Warranty
Additional Service Period

The customers, with some exceptions, may purchase additional service coverage
beyond any initial warranty period as part of the original instrument acquisition
for second or subsequent years beyond the original installation date. The
customers original Purchase Invoice or appropriate Agreement Addendum must
indicate the term in months for additional service coverage.
Service During Normal Hours

The customer may obtain service for instruments during normal business hours by
contacting the nearest Siemens location or authorized distributor. Refer to the list
of Siemens locations in this section.
Extent of a Service Call

Warranty or service calls generally include onsite repair or exchange of
instruments or components, travel to the location of the instrument, and onsite
labor during normal business hours. A warranty or service call is initiated by the
customer by following the instructions on how to obtain service for the customers
instrument. The service call is considered complete when any defects in material
or workmanship have been corrected by repair or replacement and the instrument
conforms to the applicable specifications. When service is complete, the customer
receives a copy of the documentation detailing all work performed by the Siemens
representative or authorized distributor.
Service Outside Normal Hours

Customers, with some exceptions, may also request service to be delivered or an
exchange to be initiated outside normal business hours, including evenings,
weekend days, or nationally observed holidays, by contacting the nearest Siemens
location or authorized distributor. Service performed outside normal hours is
subject to a surcharge unless the customer has in place a service product option
that provides service at the time requested.
Replacement of Parts
In performing service, Siemens or its authorized distributors provide appropriate
parts to repair the instrument, or arranges for the exchange of the instrument or
affected parts, at no charge with the exception of certain parts or subassemblies
that are considered Customer Maintenance Items. Customer Maintenance Items
include, but are not limited to, the following items: lamps, electrodes or sensors
(which are covered by a separate warranty), reagents, calibrators, controls, paper,
and pens. Consult the appropriate system operators manuals for a complete list of
Customer Maintenance Items for any specific model of instrument.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
B-3
Design Changes and Retrofitting of Instruments

Siemens reserves the right to change the design or construction of specific models
of instruments at any time without incurring any obligation to make such changes
available to individual customers or instruments. If Siemens notifies customers of
a change that improves the performance or reliability of their instrument, and
requests to retrofit that instrument, the customer must agree to allow Siemens or
an authorized distributor, at Siemens expense, to retrofit components or make
design changes, which does not adversely affect the instruments performance
characteristics.
Key Operator Designation

Each customer designates a key operator who is available to Siemens
representatives to describe instrument malfunctions by telephone and/or to
perform simple adjustments and corrections as requested. If a key operator is not
designated or is unavailable when the customer requests service, the delivery of
service may be delayed.
OSHA Requirements (US only)

When service is required at a customer location, the customer must provide the
Siemens representative with adequate facilities that comply with the regulations
of the Secretary of Labor under the Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
of 1970, as amended.
Warranty and Service Exclusions

The following exclusions are in addition to any exclusions provided for in any
written warranty or service agreement.
IF ANY OF THE FOLLOWING EVENTS OCCUR, THE WARRANTY OR
SERVICE PROVISIONS DO NOT APPLY:
1. Repairs or modifications have been made to the instrument by someone other
than an authorized Siemens representative.
2. The instrument has been operated using accessories and supplies other than
Siemens brand accessories, or consumable supplies and/or reagents not
having the same grade, quality, and composition as defined in the system
operators manuals.
3. Siemens has notified customers of a change that improves the performance or
reliability of their instrument and customer has not agreed to retrofit or make
design changes to the instrument.
4. Customer did not purchase the instrument from Siemens or one of its
authorized distributors.
5. The instrument has not been installed within 90 days of shipment to the
customers facility unless otherwise specified.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
B-4
6. The customer has not performed appropriate customer maintenance

procedures, as outlined in the system operators manuals.
7. The instrument has been misused or used for a purpose for which it was not
intended.
8. The instrument has been damaged in transit to the customer or damaged by
the customer while moving or relocating it without supervision by a Siemens
representative.
9. Damage was caused by floods, earthquakes, tornados, hurricanes, or other
natural or man-made disasters.
10. Damage was caused by Acts of War, vandalism, sabotage, arson, or civil
commotion.
11. Damage was caused by electrical surges or voltages exceeding the tolerances
outlined in the system operators manuals.
12. Damage was caused by water from any source external to the instrument.
13. The customer has purchased an alternative agreement whose terms of
warranty or service supersede these provisions.
Siemens or its authorized distributors can invoice customers, at current standard
labor and parts rates, for instruments repaired to correct damage or malfunctions
due to any of the reasons listed above.
OTHER THAN AS STATED ABOVE, THERE ARE NO OTHER
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE
INSTRUMENT, ITS SALE TO THE CUSTOMER, ITS LEASE TO THE
CUSTOMER, OR THE SALE OF THE INSTRUMENT TO THE CUSTOMER
AT THE EXPIRATION OR TERMINATION OF THE LEASE AGREEMENT.
SIEMENS HEALTHCARE DIAGNOSTICS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS
ANY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR USE OR PURPOSE.
SIEMENS HEALTHCARE DIAGNOSTICS LIABILITY FOR BREACH OF
ANY WARRANTY OR SERVICE AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED ONLY
TO THE REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF DEFECTIVE EQUIPMENT AND
SHALL NOT INCLUDE ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER
DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONTINGENT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL.
SIEMENS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR DELAY FROM ANY CAUSE IN
PROVIDING REPAIR OR EXCHANGE SERVICE.
ANY LIMITATIONS OR OTHER PROVISIONS NOT CONSISTENT WITH
APPLICABLE LAW IN PARTICULAR JURISDICTIONS OR A SPECIFIC
WRITTEN AGREEMENT DO NOT APPLY TO CUSTOMERS IN THOSE
JURISDICTIONS OR SUBJECT TO THOSE AGREEMENTS.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
B-5
Copyright Information for Open Source Software

This device includes open source software. Such software is provided by Siemens
under the terms of the open source software licenses applicable to such software,
and is distributed WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY as set forth in the
corresponding licenses. Those terms require that Siemens provide the following
notices and information to the purchaser of this device. Versions of the GNU
General Public License (GPL) and Lesser General Public License (LGPL) are
available at www.gnu.org.
For the SciPlot v1.3 software licensed under the GNU LGPL v2.1 license:
1996 Robert W. McMullen
Portions of the SciPlot Widget source code, as marked, are:
1993 Alan Richardson
2008 Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics Inc.
For the Mozilla Firefox 2.0 software licensed under the GNU GPL v2 license:
20052008 Mozilla
For the VNC Free Edition 4.1.2 licensed under GNU GPL v3 license:
2006 RealVNC Limited
Information for Technical Assistance

Refer to the procedures in this appendix to provide system information that you
may need when you call for technical assistance.
Printing the System Serial Number and Versions

Use this procedure to print information about the system, such as the serial
number and the current version of software used on your ADVIA Centaur XP
system.
2. Select About the System.
The serial number is displayed on the System Status button. The version
information is displayed at the About the System window.
Printing the Event Log

Use this procedure to print the list of system events displayed at the System
Event Log window.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
B-6
You can display specific information at the System Event Log window by
selecting the appropriate View and Sort combinations:
For example, if you select Errors, the system displays only the events that are
errors.
events. For example, if you select Severity, the system displays the events in
order of most severe to least severe.
The following table describes the View and Sort combinations you can use
to perform some routine tasks:
Task
View
Sort
Display the events in reverse chronological in order of

when the events occurred
Events
Date
Display the critical and warning events in order of

most severe to least severe
Errors
Severity
Display the events by subsystem
Events
Subsystem

2. Select the appropriate view and identify the problem you want to solve.
To search for a specific event code in the event log, select Event Code
in Search for and then enter the event code.
3. Select Print.
Printing Windows on the System View Workspace

Use this procedure to print the sysem view workspace including any windows that
are open. Windows that can be helpful in resolving problems include the
following:
Quality Control Data
Calibration Summary
Calibration Data
Worklist Summary
Open the appropriate windows before you print the workspace and follow this
procedure:
078D1064-01 Rev. C
B-7
Printing Windows on the Applications View

Workspace
This section contains information about printing the applications view workspace
and any windows that are open. You can open more than one window at a time.
The active window displays and the inactive windows are hidden.
1. Open the window.
NOTE: Do not place the pointer in the open window and do not press the
right mouse button.

2. On the keyboard, press and hold the Control key and then press the
Prev Win key.
Printing a Runtime Report

Use this procedure to print the report of all results generated (including replicates,
ratios, and means) for all samples run.
3. At the Print Report Options window, select Runtime Report.
Printing Calibration Data

You can print detailed information on specific calibration data as described in
Section 5, Calibration.
Contacts
This section provides the following information:
the address of the Siemens authorized representative, which is the Siemens

contact within the European community
the Siemens addresses for obtaining service and technical information and for
ordering supplies
078D1064-01 Rev. C
B-8
Addresses
For technical assistance, contact your local technical support provider. For
customer service or additional information, contact your local technical support
distributor.
www.siemens.com/diagnostics
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Appendix C: Reagents and System Fluids

Handling Reagents
This information describes handling requirements for the following
ADVIA Centaur XP reagents.
Primary ReadyPackTM Reagent Packs
Unpierced
Pierce
Ancillary ReadyPack Reagent Packs
Unpierced
Pierced
WARNING
Use care when using diagnostic tools or performing troubleshooting. System

components move and can cause injury. Only Siemens-trained personnel should
perform troubleshooting.
Primary Reagent Packs

During storage the particles in the Solid Phase reagent settle as a pellet at the
bottom of the primary reagent pack. These particles must be resuspended
homogeneously before use to provide maximum reagent and assay efficiency.
Observe the bottom of the primary reagent pack and note the pellet on the bottom
of the pack.
Mix all primary reagent packs by hand before loading them onto the system. You
can hold and mix up to 6 reagent packs at a time. It is important to minimize
foaming. Perform the following mixing procedure gently to resuspend the
particles. Do not shake the primary reagent pack unless stated to do so in the
product instructions.
Unpierced
For all other assays, use this procedure if the primary reagent pack is unpierced.
1. With the film side up, hold the reagent pack loosely at the ends with the
thumb and index or middle finger of each hand.
2. Carefully raise 1 end of the pack 90 so that the pack is in a vertical position.
3. Carefully raise the other end of the pack 90 so that the pack is again in a
vertical position. Carefully return the pack to a horizontal position.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
C-2
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Reagents and System Fluids
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 a minimum of twenty times or until:
the pellet is broken up and no longer visible on the bottom of the pack
no large aggregates are visible floating inside the pack.
5. Adjust the mixing speed to minimize foaming.

6. Mix 5 to 10 times more to ensure complete mixing.
7. Load the unpierced primary reagent pack onto the system.
When testing is complete you may remove the reagents from the system or leave
them on the system. If you remove the reagents, cover the pierced film area of the
primary reagent pack with self-sealing laboratory film and place the pack in the
reagent storage tray at 2 to 8C. Store pierced primary reagent packs upright in
the storage tray to minimize spillage. Follow the pierced primary reagent pack
procedure before placing the reagent pack back on the system. Reagents left on a
system with the power on are automatically mixed by the system and do not
require further mixing.
Pierced
Use this procedure if the primary reagent pack is pierced.
1. Press gently on the self-sealing laboratory film that covers the pierced film
area while mixing.
This prevents reagent leakage.
2. With the film side up, hold the reagent pack loosely at the ends with the
thumb and middle finger of each hand.
3. From a horizontal position, carefully raise 1 end of the pack 45 and carefully
return the pack to a horizontal position.
4. Carefully raise the other end of the pack 45 and carefully return the pack to a
horizontal position.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 a minimum of twenty times or until 1 of the following
actions is true:
the pellet is broken up and no longer visible on the bottom of the pack.
no large aggregates are visible floating inside the pack.
6. Adjust the mixing speed to minimize foaming.

7. Mix 5 to 10 times more to ensure complete mixing.
8. Remove the self-sealing laboratory film and load the pierced reagent pack
onto the system.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
C-3
primary reagent pack with self-sealing laboratory film and place the pack in the
reagent storage tray at 2 to 8C. Store pierced primary reagent packs upright in
the storage tray to minimize spillage. Follow the pierced primary reagent pack
procedure before placing the reagent pack back on the system. Reagents left on a
system with the power on are automatically mixed by the system and do not
require further mixing.
NOTE: If reagent mixing is turned off for longer than 2 hours but reagent
refrigeration remains on, mix all primary reagent packs following the unpierced/
pierced primary reagent pack procedures and place the reagent packs back on the
system. Verify reagent performance based on acceptable quality control results or
by criteria established for your laboratory.
If both reagent mixing and reagent refrigeration are turned off for longer than 2
hours, put the primary reagent packs in the reagent storage tray at 2 to 8C. Mix
all primary reagent packs following the unpierced/pierced primary reagent pack
procedures before placing the reagent packs back on the system. Verify reagent
performance based on acceptable quality control results or by criteria established
for your laboratory.
NOTE: The onboard stability of a primary reagent pack is calculated from the
time that the system reads the barcode after the reagent pack is placed on the
system for the first time. If a pack is removed from the system, it is recommended
that you reload the pack onto the same system. If you load the reagent pack onto a
different system, you must track onboard stability and you must adjust reagent test
inventory to account for tests previously removed from the pierced reagent pack
while on the other system.
Ancillary Reagent Packs

Mix all ancillary reagent packs by hand before loading them onto the system.
Unpierced
Gently invert ancillary reagent packs several times before loading them into the
ancillary queue. It is important to minimize foaming. Do not shake the ancillary
reagent pack.
ancillary reagent pack with self-sealing laboratory film and store the pack at
2 to 8C. Store pierced ancillary reagent packs upright to minimize spillage.
Follow the pierced ancillary reagent pack procedure before placing the reagent
pack back on the system.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
C-4
Pierced
Use this procedure if the ancillary reagent pack is pierced.
1. Press gently on the self-sealing laboratory film that covers the pierced film
area while mixing.
This prevents reagent leakage.
2. Gently invert the pack several times.
3. Remove the self-sealing laboratory film and load the pierced ancillary reagent
pack onto the system.
ancillary reagent pack with self-sealing laboratory film and store the pack at
2 to 8C. Store pierced ancillary reagent packs upright to minimize spillage.
Follow the pierced ancillary reagent pack procedure before placing the reagent
pack back on the system.
Do not add reagent to ancillary reagent packs. Each ancillary reagent pack
contains enough reagent to process a predetermined number of tests. Each time
the system accesses an ancillary reagent pack, reagent volume inventory tracks
the amount of reagent used until the pack is empty. The system does not recognize
additional fluid placed in an ancillary reagent pack.
NOTE: If reagent refrigeration is turned off for longer than 2 hours, store the
ancillary reagent packs at 2 to 8C. Mix all ancillary reagent packs following the
unpierced/pierced ancillary reagent pack procedures before placing the reagent
packs back on the system. Verify reagent performance based on acceptable quality
control results or by criteria established for your laboratory.
NOTE: The onboard stability of an ancillary reagent pack is calculated from the
time that the pack is first pierced. If a pierced pack is removed from the system, it
is recommended that you reload the pack onto the same system. If you load the
reagent pack onto a different system, you must track onboard stability and you
must adjust reagent volume inventory to account for any reagent previously
removed from the pierced reagent pack while on the other system.
Reagent Water Quality

Water quality is an important consideration in the laboratory because it can
significantly affect the outcome of laboratory procedures and the measurement of
patient samples.
This document provides an overview of reagent water quality guidelines as
specified by the Clinical Laboratory and Standards Institute (CLSI, formerly
NCCLS).1 Use these guidelines to evaluate the reagent water quality in your
laboratory and to determine the best method for obtaining the water quality you
need.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
C-5
Good laboratory practices suggest that you establish a protocol that supports the
manufacturers requirement for the instrument to:
ensure optimum performance of automated laboratory instruments
eliminate water quality as a source of problems when troubleshooting
help you to meet requirements for state and federal laboratory certification
What is Reagent Water?

Reagent water is laboratory water that meets specifications for clinical laboratory
use.2,3
The CLSI has defined 3 grades of reagent water:
Type I, the highest grade
Type II, the intermediate grade
Type III, the lowest grade
NOTE: The ADVIA Centaur XP supports the use of Type I and Type II grade
reagent water.
The following table lists the CLSI specifications for the 3 types of reagent water.
Use this information to determine the water quality in your laboratory. Refer to
the CLSI guidelines for common laboratory uses of Type I, Type II, and Type III
reagent water.
Specification
Type I
Type II
Type III
Maximum bacterial content

colony forming units per
mL (CFU/mL)*
10 (preferably bacteria free)
1000
not
applicable
pH
not applicable
not
applicable
5.0 8.0
Minimum resistivity
(megohm/centimeter at
10 (inline measurement by
sensor or resistor)
1.0
0.1
25 C)
078D1064-01 Rev. C
C-6
Specification
Type I
Type II
Type III
0.05
0.1
1.0
Particulate matter (m)
smaller than 0.22 m

(water is passed through a
0.22 m filter)
not
applicable
not
applicable
Organic compounds**
pretreat with activated

carbon
or distillation
or reverse osmosis
not
applicable
not
applicable
Maximum silicate
(mg/L)
Bacterial content: The number of colony forming units in water. Bacterial content is a water
contaminant you measure to determine water quality.
Resistivity: The ability of water to resist electrical conduction due to the ion content. Resistivity
is the standard test measurement for determining water quality. The higher the resistivity, the
lower the ion content and the better the water quality.
Silicates: Compounds you remove to produce Type I reagent water.
Particulate matter: Undissolved (insoluble) substances larger than 0.22 m are removed by the
filter.
** Organic compounds: Compounds you remove to produce Type I reagent water.
Purifying Water
As with all diagnostic testing procedures, good laboratory practices suggest that
you establish a protocol that supports the manufacturers requirements for
selecting the appropriate type of reagent water. You can then produce reagent
water in your laboratory by setting up and maintaining a water purification system
which uses the purification methods described in the following table.
The following table describes some of the typical laboratory water purification
methods.
Method
Description
Distillation
Changes water from liquid to vapor and leaves behind

impurities such as particulates and bacteria
Deionization
Uses synthetic resins to remove ionized impurities by ion

exchange
Reverse Osmosis
Forces water under pressure through a semipermeable

membrane to remove dissolved solids and organic impurities
Adsorption
Uses activated carbon, clays, silicates, or metal oxides to

remove organic impurities
Filtration
Forces water through a semipermeable membrane to remove

insoluble matter, emulsified solids, pyrogens, and
microorganisms
The quality of the reagent water you produce depends on the quality of the water
you start with (source water), and the performance of your water purification
system.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
C-7
To produce the type of water you require, you may need a purification system that
uses a combination of methods. For example, if you want to produce Type I water,
you need a system that uses adsorption to remove organic impurities, deionization
to remove ionized impurities, and filtration to remove particulates.
Figure C-1 displays a water purification system that combines adsorption,
deionization, and filtration to produce Type I water.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Pump
Source Water
Check Valve
Flow Controller
Resistivity Indicator
Valve
Filter
Type I Water Output
Ion Exchange
Carbon
Figure C-1
Water Purification System
Maintaining Water Quality

You can ensure that the reagent water supply in your laboratory consistently meets
CLSI guidelines by:
storing reagent water properly
testing for resistivity and contamination
maintaining your water purification system
078D1064-01 Rev. C
C-8
Establishing procedures for maintaining reagent water quality is also required for
laboratory inspection and accreditation by the College of American Pathologists
(CAP).4
Storing Reagent Water

You cannot store Type I reagent water. Use it immediately after you produce it
because it degrades quickly and no longer meets Type I reagent water
specifications. Additionally, you cannot purchase Type I reagent water because its
purity is not reliable.
Store Type II and Type III reagent water in glass or polyethylene bottles. Use it as
soon as possible after preparation to reduce the risk of contamination by
microorganisms.
Testing Reagent Water

To monitor water quality and detect problems with your water purification system,
test reagent water regularly for resistivity and bacterial contamination. You may
also want to send reagent water out of the laboratory periodically for independent
evaluation. Record your test results and any corrective action.
Refer to the CLSI specifications for information about recommended water
testing methods.1
Maintaining the Purification System

Efficient operation and regularly scheduled maintenance of your water
purification system is the key to optimizing the performance of the system and
consistently obtaining reagent quality water. Preventative maintenance reduces
the chance of the purification system introducing additional contaminants into
source water and ensures that reagent water retains its purity when it is introduced
into the laboratory instrument.
The following are suggested guidelines for maintaining water purification systems
to ensure smooth operation and prevent system problems.
For Customized Water Systems:
Change filters on carbon or membrane filter systems as required.
Use a recirculating pump to optimize performance and reduce contamination.
Filter the source water before treatment in reverse osmosis systems, and
recirculate deionizers in closed loops to extend resin life.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
C-9
For Distillation Systems:
Check the water vessels regularly for the presence of a slippery film.
Clean and disinfect the vessels as required with an agent that rinses well, such
as H2O2.
Clean the boiler regularly to remove deposits
Test routinely for contamination
For complete information about operation and maintenance requirements for your
water purification system, refer to the manufacturers specifications.
Problems Caused by Water

Using water that does not meet CLSI guidelines can cause problems with clinical
laboratory systems. Some common problems include:
contamination of system components
inaccurate patient and calibration results
out-of-range quality control results
deterioration of lyophilized quality control material
color changes and poor stability and performance of reagents
These problems are caused by failure to use the appropriate type of reagent water,
bacterial contamination, and inadequate maintenance of the water purification
system.
Refer to the troubleshooting section in your system manual for more detailed
information about problems caused by water that does not meet reagent water
specifications.
References
1. Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute (formerly NCCLS). Preparation
and Testing of Reagent Water in the Clinical Laboratory; Approved
Guideline- Third Edition. NCCLS document C3-A3 (ISBN 1-56238-336-1).
Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute, 940 West Valley Road, Suite
1400, Wayne, Pennsylvania 19087-1898 USA, 1997.
2. Tietz, Norbert W. Fundamentals of clinical chemistry, 3rd ed. Philadelphia:
W.B. Saunders Company; 1987. 1010 p.
3. Kaplan, Lawrence A. Pesce, Amadeo J. Clinical Chemistry; theory, analysis,
and correlation, 2nd edition. St. Louis: C.V. Mosby Company; 1989. 1212 p.
4. College of American Pathologists, Laboratory General Inspection Checklist
Section 1, Quality of water, p. 8. Northfield, IL. 1989.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
C-10
SI Unit Conversion Factors

This appendix provides the SI (system international) unit conversion factors,
which convert Mass/IUPAC units to SI units.
CAUTION
Do not enter values in SI units when you enter Master Curve data or calibrator
assigned values. Using SI units may cause erroneous results.
NOTE: Do not enter an SI conversion factor for assays that do not list a factor.
The system does not accept an SI conversion factor for these tests.
If you report results in SI units, enter the appropriate units and conversion factor
for each test at the Test Result Calculation window.
NOTE: Some assays are not available for some locales.
Assay
Common Units
SI Units
Conversion
Factor
AFP
ng/mL
IU/mL
0.83
BNP
pg/mL
pmol/L
0.289
BR (CA 15-3)
U/mL
U/mL
CA 125 II
U/mL
U/mL
CA 15-3
U/mL
U/mL
CA 19-9
U/mL
U/mL
Carbamazepine (CARB)
g/mL
mol/L
4.23
CEA
ng/mL
g/L
CKMB
ng/mL
nmol/L
0.0125
Cortisol (COR)
g/dL
nmol/L
27.59
C-peptide (CpS)
ng/mL
ng/mL
Digitoxin (DGTN)
ng/mL
nmol/L
1.307
Digoxin (DIG)
ng/mL
nmol/L
1.28
Estradiol-6 (E2-6)
pg/mL
pmol/L
3.67
Estradiol-6 III (E2-6 III)
pg/mL
pmol/L
3.67
Ferritin (FER)
ng/mL
pmol/L
2.20
Folate (FOL)
ng/mL
nmol/L
2.265
FrT4
ng/dL
pmol/L
12.9
FSH
mIU/mL
IU/L
FT3
pg/mL
pmol/L
1.54
Gentamicin (GENT)
g/mL
mol/L
2.09
Her-2/neu (H2n)
ng/mL
ng/mL
078D1064-01 Rev. C
C-11
Assay
Common Units
SI Units
Conversion
Factor
HAV Total (aHAVT)
mIU/mL
mIU/mL
HAV IgM (aHAVM)
S/CO
S/CO
HBc Total (HBcT)
Index
none
HBc IgM (aHBcM)
Index
none
Anti-HBs (aHBs)
mIU/mL
mIU/mL
HBs AG (HBs)
Index
none
HBS AG Confirmatory (Conf)
Index
none
HCV
Index
none
HCY
mol/L
mol/L
HIV 1/O/2 Enhanced (eHIV)
Index
none
Intact PTH (iPTH)
pg/mL
pmol/L
0.106
Insulin (IRI)
mU/L
mU/L
LH
mIU/mL
IU/L
Myoglobin (MYO)
ng/mL
g/L
Phenobarbital (PHNB)
g/mL
mol/L
4.31
Phenytoin (PHTN)
g/mL
mol/L
3.96
Progesterone (PRGE)
ng/mL
nmol/L
3.18
Prolactin (PRL)
ng/mL
IU/mL
21.2
PSA
ng/mL
g/L
cPSA
ng/mL
g/L
Rubella G (Rub G)
IU/mL
IU/mL
Rubella M (Rub M)
Index
none
T3
ng/mL
nmol/L
1.54
T4
g/dL
nmol/L
12.9
anti-TG (aTG)
U/mL
U/mL
anti-TPO (aTPO)
U/mL
U/mL
Testosterone (TSTO)
ng/dL
nmol/L
0.0347
Theophylline 2 (THEO-2)
g/mL
mol/L
5.55
TnI-Ultra
ng/mL
g/L
Tobramycin (TOBR)
g/mL
mol/L
2.14
Total hCG (ThCG)
mIU/mL
IU/L
Toxoplasma G (Toxo G)
IU/mL
IU/mL
Toxoplasma M (Toxo M)
Index
none
TSH
IU/mL
mIU/L
078D1064-01 Rev. C
C-12
Assay
Common Units
SI Units
Conversion
Factor
TSH-3
IU/mL
mIU/L
TUp
Index
none
Valproic Acid
g/mL
mol/L
6.93
Vancomycin
g/mL
mol/L
0.69
VB12
pg/mL
pmol/L
0.738
Sample Volume Requirements

For assays processed on the ADVIA Centaur XP system, the minimum required
sample volume for a reportable result depends on the following factors:
sample volume for the assay
sample volume needed to prime the sample tip
volume of unusable sample for the sample container.
Determining Minimum Sample Volume

Use this information to calculate the minimum required volume (MRV)
for a reportable result. The sample volume for each assay is specified in the
ADVIA Centaur Assay Manual. Refer to Table 1 to determine the tip prime
volume and the unusable volume for the specific tube type and sample volume.
NOTE: If you selected To Maximize the Number of Tests Completed at the
Setup Sample Handling Options window, use the unusable volume

corresponding to the largest sample volume scheduled for that sample. To reduce
the unusable volume for samples select To Minimize the Unusable Volume at the
Setup Sample Handling Options window.
For a single replicate of 1 test, use the following formula:

Sample Volume + Tip Prime Volume + Unusable Volume = MRV
For example, for a TSH-3 scheduled in a small transfer tube, the values
are as follows:
200 L + 20 L + 100 L = 320 L
For multiple replicates of 1 test, use the following formula:

(Sample Volume + Tip Prime Volume) No. of Replicates
+ Unusable Volume = MRV
For example, for 2 replicates of a T4 scheduled in a large transfer tube,

the values are as follows:
(25 L + 10 L) 2 + 250 L = 320 L
078D1064-01 Rev. C
C-13
For multiple tests scheduled for a sample, use the following formula:
Sum of (Sample Volume + Tip Prime Volume) for all replicates for all tests + Unusable Volume = MRV
For example, for 2 replicates of a TSH-3 and 3 replicates of a T4 scheduled in

an SMSD Sample Cup, the values are as follows:
(200 L + 20 L) 2 +(25 L + 10 L) 3 + 150 L = 695 L
Sample Volume Requirements

NOTE: It is not necessary to pour off serum from serum gel separator tubes.
However, the unusable volume depends on the position of the gel separator layer.
Set the probe position so that the lowest probe travel position is above the gel
layer.
Sample Tube Type*
Sample Volume
Tip Prime
Volume
Unusable
Volume
Sample Cup SMSD
50 L
> 50 L
10 L
20 L
50 L
150 L
Small Transfer
50 L
> 50 L
10 L
20 L
100 L
100 L
Large Transfer
50 L
> 50 L
10 L
20 L
250 L
450 L
Hitachi
50 L
> 50 L to 100 L
> 100 L
10 L
15 L
20 L
50 L
50 L
100 L
Sarstedt S
50 L
> 50 L
10 L
20 L
100 L
125 L
Sarstedt C
50 L
> 50 L
10 L
20 L
50 L
50 L
Olympus Sample Cup
50 L
> 50 L
10 L
20 L
150 L
125 L
SmithKline Beecham
50 L
> 50 L
10 L
20 L
200 L
300 L
Refer to Appendix E, Specifications, for the list of tube types you can use.
System Fluids
The fluids described in the table below are for In Vitro Diagnostic Use only. Use
the fluids until the expiration date stated on the bottle labels. Use Acid and Base
reagents until the expiration date stated on the bottle label or until 28 consecutive
days after loading the reagent on the system.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
C-14
Dispose of Acid and Base reagents and cleaning solution using approved disposal
techniques for hazardous corrosive liquid wastes. Dispose of Acid and Base
reagents in accordance with local, state, and federal regulations. Refer to the
Material Safety Data Sheets for each material for additional information.
Siemens is not responsible for the performance of the ADVIA Centaur XP system
when reagents other than Acid and Base reagents are used.
WARNING
Do not allow contact of Acid and Base reagents with skin and eyes. Acid and Base
reagents are irritating to the skin. Wear suitable eye, face, and skin protection,
which include wearing gloves, protective eye shield, and laboratory coat. In case
of contact with the eyes, rinse the eyes immediately with plenty of water and seek
medical advice. In case of accident or if you feel unwell, seek medical advice. If
possible, show the bottle label and the Material Safety Data Sheet. In case of
accidental ingestion of reagent, call a physician immediately.
Fluid Name
Volume
Ingredients
Storage
Acid Reagent
1500 mL
5000 tests/bottle
0.5% hydrogen peroxide

0.1 N nitric acid
225 C
Base Reagent
1500 mL
5000 tests/bottle
< 0.25 N sodium hydroxide

and surfactant
225 C
Wash 1 Reagent
2500 mL
phosphate buffered saline

(pH 7.2) with < 0.1% sodium
azide and surfactant
425 C
Wash 3 Reagent
2500 mL
phosphate buffered saline

(pH 7.4) with < 0.1% sodium
azide and surfactant
425 C
Cleaning Solution
Concentrate
100 mL
~52.5 g/L sodium hypochlorite
28 C
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Appendix D: Supplies
The following is a list of supplies with catalog numbers and REF to assist in the
ordering process. The catalog numbers in parentheses are included in the list for
reference only.
Description
REF
Catalog Number
Barcode Labels, Sample Identification
10322296
(23531)
Brush, Small Maintenance (10)
10321605
(27081)
Cleaning Solution Concentrate (12 x 70 mL)
10310041
(112748)
Cuvettes (package of 3000)
10309546
(078-K138-01)
Cuvette Waste Bin
10324322
(572615)
Filter, Air Intake
10319829
(572165)
Filter, Water
10310789
(26970)
range 001 100
10386903
(078-0333-01)
range 101 200
10291140
(078-0334-01)
range 201 300
10291141
(078-0335-01)
range 301 400
10291280
(078-0336-01)
range 401 500
10291279
(078-0337-01)
Laser Printer (Lexmark E460 DN/110 V)
10469854
(664-1782-01)
10469855
(664-1783-01)
10702397
(664-2867-01)
Organizer, Master Curve Cards,

Barcode Labels, and Calibrator Cards
10318813
(672003)
Printer Paper (8.5 x 11 paper, 1-part)
10317879
(20764)
Printer Paper (8.5 x 11 paper, 3-part)
10312607
(751046)
Probe, Ancillary and Reagent
10311405
(571233)
Probe, Ungrounded Aspirate
10311429
(571843)
Probe, Grounded Aspirate
10317854
(125669)
Reagent Storage Tray
10323775
(119147)
Reagents, Acid and Base (5000 tests

per bottle)
10310026
(112219)
Sample Cups (bag of 1500)
10309545
(078-K137-01)
Sample Cup Caps (package of 1000)
10311563
(672010)
Sample Racks, unlabeled (box of 60)
10326655
(078-K225-01)
Labels, Sample Rack
078D1064-01 Rev. C
D-2
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Supplies
Description
REF
Catalog Number
Sample Rack Handling Kit
10327527
(078-K191-01)
Sample Rack Tray
10316872
(115896)
Sample Rack Tray Holder
10326017
(078-0432-01)
Sample Rack Spring
10315794
(571638C)*
Sample Tip Waste Tube
10320349
(572258B)
Shield, Air Deflector
10312914
(078-0370-01)
Syringe Plunger, 5 mL
10310027
(112247)
Syringe Plunger, 2 mL
10310028
(112248)
Syringe Assembly, 250 L
10310750
(26134)
Tips, Probe (box of 6480)
10309547
(078-K139-01)
Waste Bin Liner, Tip
10314351
(078-0066-02)
Waste Bin Liner, Cuvette
10314355
(078-0067-02)
Waste Bottle, Main
10313594
(078-K116-01)
Waste Bottle Fluid Sensor Assembly
10363115
(078-B029-01)
Waste Bottle Lid
10317901
(078-0359-01)
Water Bottle, Main
10326128
(078-B046-01)
Water Bottle, Reservoir
10319087
(571101)
Water Reservoir Cleaning Cover (2)
10327542
(112524)
*Only used with ADVIA Centaur racks.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Appendix E: Specifications
This section summarizes the design specifications for the ADVIA Centaur XP
system.
Safety Certifications
Refer to the DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY for the ADVIA Centaur XP
system. Contact your local technical support provider or distributor for a copy.
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)

Refer to the DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY for the ADVIA Centaur XP
system. Contact your local technical support provider or distributor for a copy.
Dimensions
Depth
104.2 cm (41.0 in)
Height
130.9 cm (51.5 in)
Width
194.3 cm (76.5 in)
Weight
559 kg (1,232 lbs); system has casters
Environmental Specifications
Ambient Operating Temperature
18.0 to 30.0 C
Relative Humidity
20% to 80%, non-condensing
Storage Temperature
0.0 to 50.0 C
Indoor Use Only

Altitude
up to 2000 meters
Ventilation
10,000 BTU/hour
IEC 1010-1 Installation Category II

IEC 1010-1 Equipment Classification Class I
IEC 1010-1 Pollution Degree 2
078D1064-01 Rev. C
E-2
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Specifications
Electrical Requirements
Electrical Rating
220 to 240VAC 10% ~8A
Power Requirements
50/60Hz
Tube Types
This section lists the primary sample tubes, sample transfer cups, transfer tubes,
and microsample containers you can use on your system.You can specify up to 3
tube types at the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window. Refer to Specifying
Sample Tube Types page 8-5.
The tube type fields at the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window list the tubes
you can use on your system. The + symbol before the tube type indicates that you
need to place it into a holder before loading it into the sample rack.
Ensure that translucent plastic sample tubes have barcode labels or a printed label
facing the barcode reader when you load the tubes onto the system. The system
might not detect a translucent tube with no label or a white label with very little
printing.
Pre-Set Tube Types

The ADVIA Centaur XP system is pre-set to accept the following tube types
when you select them at the Setup Tube Type & Barcode window.
Select this tube type...
To use this tube...
Sample Cup SMSD
14 x 100 mm
Siemens
conical
Small Transfer
12 x 75 mm
Various
manufacturers
round
Large Transfer
13 x 100 mm
Various
manufacturers
round
+Sample Cup Hitachi
13 x 38 mm
Hitachi
conical in 16 x
75 holder
+Microcup Sarstedt S
2.0 mL
Sarstedt
skirted in 13 x
75 holder
+Microcup Sarstedt C
1.5 mL
Sarstedt
conical in 13 x
75 holder
+EzeeNest 13 mm
1.0 mL
Elkay
conical in 13 x
75 holder
Sample Cup Olympus
14 x 100 mm
Olympus
round
Sarstedt 15 x 93
15 x 93 mm
Sarstedt
conical
Starplex Transfer
15.5 x 96.5 mm
Starplex
Scientific
conical
078D1064-01 Rev. C
E-3
Instrument Adjustment for Gel Tubes

A field service representative can calibrate your system for the following gel tube
types. When you calibrate your system for 1 of the following tubes, the selection
displays on the Tube Type drop-down lists at the Setup Tube Type & Barcode
window.
Select this tube type...
To use this tube...
Large Gel
13 x 75 mm
Becton
Dickinson
Vacutainer
13 x 75 mm
Sherwood
Medical
Monoject
13 x 100 mm
Becton
Dickinson
Vacutainer
13 x 100 mm
Sherwood
Medical
Monoject,
Corvac
16 x 75 mm
Becton
Dickinson
Vacutainer
16 x 75 mm
Sherwood
Medical
Monoject
16 x 100 mm
Becton
Dickinson
Vacutainer
16 x 100 mm
Sherwood
Medical
Monoject,
Corvac
16.5 x 92 mm
Sarstedt
Luer Monovette
10.25 x 75 mm
Becton
Dickinson
Vacutainer
10.25 x 75 mm
Sherwood
Medical
Monoject
1.5 mL
Becton
Dickinson
Round bottom,
13x75 holder
Small Gel
+Micro Gel 1.5 mL
Additional Tube Types Requiring Instrument Adjustment

You can adjust your system for up to 5 additional tube types not listed in the
previous tables. Contact technical assistance if you use tube types not listed in the
previous tables.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
E-4
Multiple Tube Types

You can use multiple tube types in the ADVIA Centaur XP sample racks. Move
the Tube-Type selector on the rack to position A to use any tube that meets the
following parameters:
maximum height of 102 mm
minimum inner tube diameter of 7.69 mm
maximum inner tube diameter of 15.5 mm
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: System Symbols
F-1
Appendix F: System Symbols

This section describes the symbols that can display on the exterior of the
ADVIA Centaur XP system or on the system packaging. The symbols on the
system identify the location of certain components and, where necessary, display
warnings for proper operation. The symbols on the system packaging provide you
with other important information.
For information about symbols that appear in the ADVIA Centaur XP system
workspace and windows, refer to Understanding Worklist Symbols page 2-40.
Symbol
Description
This symbol is used for both Warnings and Cautions.
A Warning indicates the risk of personal injury or loss of life if
operating procedures and practices are not correctly followed.
A Caution indicates the possibility of loss of data or damage to or
destruction of equipment if operating procedures and practices
are not strictly observed.
This symbol alerts you to a biohazard.
This symbol alerts you to a biohazard.
This symbol alerts you to the risk of exposure to lasers.

This symbol alerts you to a potential electrical hazard.
This symbol indicates a moving component that can cause injury.
This symbol indicates the presence of a part emitting high
temperature.
This symbol indicates that the input electricity is alternating current.
This symbol identifies the location of a protective earth (GND)
conductor terminal.
This symbol indicates the main power switch.
This symbol indicates that the main power supply is on.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
F-2
Symbol
Description
This symbol indicates that the main power supply is off.
This symbol indicates the fast stop button.
This symbol indicates the computer startup button.

This symbol indicates the system hard drive.
This symbol indicates the location of the fan filter.
This symbol indicates the location of the cable connections.
This symbol indicates the location of a printer port.
This symbol indicates the location of the barcode scanner connector.
This symbol indicates the location of the laboratory information
system (LIS) connector.
This symbol indicates the location of the uninterrupted power supply
(UPS) connector.
This symbol indicates the location of the external modem connector.
CAUTION: Do not connect external devices to the user interface (UI)
to real time (RT) connector. Connecting external devices can cause

system damage.
This symbol indicates the location of the user interface (UI) to real
time (RT) connector. This connector is for system connections only.
This symbol indicates the location of the small computer system
interface (SCSI) connector. This connector is not used at this time.
This symbol indicates the location of the keyboard connector.
This symbol indicates the location of the monitor connector.
This symbol indicates the location of the sample transport system
(STS) connector.
This symbol indicates where ancillary reagent packs are loaded or
removed.
This symbol indicates the sample loading area.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Symbol
F-3
Description
This symbol indicates the Stat entry.
This symbol indicates where cuvettes are loaded.
This symbol indicates where sample tips are loaded.
This symbol identifies the system fluid bottle for Acid reagent.
This symbol identifies the system fluid bottle for Base reagent.
This symbol identifies the system fluid bottle for wash 1 solution.
This symbol identifies the system fluid bottle for wash 3 solution.
This symbol identifies the system fluid bottle for cleaning solution.
This symbol identifies the ADVIA Centaur Cleaning Solution
concentrate used to prepare the cleaning solution.
This symbol identifies the water bottle.
This symbol identifies the lid that provides access to the liquid waste
bottle.
This symbol identifies the door that provides access to the sample tip
tray waste.
This symbol identifies the door that provides access to the cuvette
waste bin.
This symbol identifies the door that provides access to the sample tip
waste bin.
This symbol is used as a guide for placement of the sample rack
pusher in the sample entry queue when the system is configured with
the ADVIA Centaur XP Universal Rack Option.
This symbol indicates that the product has a temperature limitation.
In this example, you need to store the product between 2 to 8 C.
This symbol indicates that a stacking limit is present for this product.
In this example, you cannot stack more than 4 products on top of 1
another.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
F-4
Symbol
Description
This symbol indicates that you should protect the product from strong
magnetic fields.
This symbol indicates an in vitro diagnostic device or an in vitro
diagnostic medical device.
This symbol indicates that you should consult instructions for use.
This symbol indicates that the product is fragile and you need to
handle it with care.
This symbol indicates that you should keep the product dry.
This symbol indicates the number used for ordering a part or product.
This symbol indicates the serial number of a part or product.
This symbol indicates the revision letter of a part or product.
This symbol indicates the name and location of the product
manufacturer.
This symbol indicates the date of manufacture of the product.
This symbol indicates the manufacturers authorized representative

within the European community.
This symbol indicates that the product or container should be oriented
in the direction of the arrows.
This symbol indicates not to use the product if the package is

damaged.
This symbol is intended to encourage recycling.
This symbol indicates that the materials are recycled.
This symbol is intended to facilitate recycling of corrugated

materials. The number is licensed in Germany and printed on
corrugated shippers.
This symbol indicates that the package is printed with soy ink.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Symbol
F-5
Description
This symbol indicates that the product complies with the applicable
directives of the European Union.
This symbol indicates that the product was IEC 61010-1 safety tested
by TUV for conformity to global markets including Canada, US, and
EU.
This symbol indicates compliance with the restriction of hazardous
substances used in electrical or electronic equipment.
The WEEE symbol indicates that this equipment is classified as
Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment under the European
WEEE Directive. It must be recycled or disposed of in accordance
with applicable local requirements.
The following symbols can also display on the exterior of the ADVIA Centaur XP
system or 1 of its components.
Symbol
Description
This symbol indicates that the product is a Class 1
laser product, with no laser exposure during
normal operation.
This symbol indicates that the product is a Class 2
laser product, with potential exposure to a laser
beam.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
F-6
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Appendix G: Installation and Relocation

CAUTION
Do not move or install your ADVIA Centaur XP system. Unauthorized movement

or installation can damage your system and void your warranty and/or service
contract. Unauthorized movement can also affect your instrument calibrations. A
Siemens technical support provider should install or relocate your
Contact Siemens when you receive your ADVIA Centaur XP system or if you
need to relocate your system within your facility.
Location of the I/O Panels

Cables for specific components of the ADVIA Centaur XP system connect to 1 of
the 3input/output (I/O) panels located at the back of the ADVIA Centaur XP
system.
1
2
3
I/O Panel at the back of the system

I/O Panel on the applications module
I/O Panel on the user interface module
Figure G-1
ADVIA Centaur XP System back view
078D1064-01 Rev. C
G-2
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Installation and Relocation
Understanding the Input/Output Panels

The I/O panels connect to each other and to other system components as in the
following illustration:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Touch-screen monitor
Keyboard
Mouse
Applications module
User interface module
Input/Output panel
Handheld barcode scanner
Figure G-2
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP System Input/Output Connectors
G-3
Understanding the System Input/Output Panel

The System I/O panel is located at the back of the system, as shown in Figure 1-1.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Barcode scanner cable

I/O Panel at the back of the system
Touch-screen connector in
Touch-screen connectors out to the Applications Module and the User Interface
Module (as labeled)
Video connector in
Video connectors out to the applications module and the user interface module
(as labeled)
Keyboard connector
Cable routing channel
Lab Automation cable connector
Figure G-3
ADVIA Centaur XP I/O Panel
078D1064-01 Rev. C
G-4
Understanding the Applications Module Input/Output

Panel
The Applications module is the smaller of the two modules located at the side of
the ADVIA Centaur XP, as shown in Figure 1-1.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Temperature sensor connector
Printer connector USB port
Printer connector parallel port
Status indicator connector
Mouse connector
Power switch
User Interface module connector
Video connectors
Touch-screen connector
Keyboard connector
Figure G-4
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Applications Module Input/Output Panel
G-5
Understanding the User Interface Module Input/Output

Panel
The User Interface module is the larger of the two modules located at the side of
the ADVIA Centaur XP, as displayed in Figure 1-1.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Power control connector

Touch-screen connector
Modem connector
Monitor connector
User Interface (UI) to Real Time (RT) connector (This is for system connections
only. Do not connect external devices to this connector.)
Small Computer System Interface (SCSI) Connector (This connector is not used
at this time.)
Keyboard connector
Printer connector
Figure G-5
User Interface Module Input/Output Panel
078D1064-01 Rev. C
G-6
Accessing the I/O Panel at the Back of the Main

System
The I/O panel at the back of the main system contains connectors for each of the
following cables:
barcode scanner
lab automation
Video, in and out, for the Applications module and the UI module
Touch screen, in and out, for the Applications module and the UI module
Keyboard
To access the Input/Output panel, perform the following steps:

1. At the back of the system, lift the I/O panel cover.
I/O Panel Cover
Figure G-6
Cover
ADVIA Centaur XP System Back View I/O Panel Access
2. Locate the appropriate cable connector.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
G-7
Accessing the I/O Panels on the Modules

The I/O panel on the user interface module and the applications module contain
connectors for the necessary cables to and from system components. These
connectors and cables are protected by a guard panel attached to the back of the
system by 3 screws.
Accessing Both Modules I/O Panels

When you are performing extensive work to both modules, you could remove the
cable panel to expose the input/output connectors and cables:
1. At the back of the system, loosen the 3 screws that secure the guard panel to
the back of the system.
Cable panel with 3 screws
Figure G-7
ADVIA Centaur XP Cable Panel
2. Lift the cable panel away and put it safely to the side to expose the back of the
2 modules.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
G-8
Accessing a Single Modules I/O Panel

When you only are moving or checking one or two connectors on a single module,
you can slide the affected module toward the front of the system to access its
input/output panel.
CAUTION
Do not slide the user interface module too far. You can damage the user infterface
module if you slide it off the support rails. Be careful with the cables and the
user interface module when sliding the user interface module.
1. At the back of the system, locate and loosen the anchor screw or screws for
the selected module.
The Applcations module has 1 anchor screw and the User Interface module
has 2 anchor screws. These are captive screws that remain in place when you
unscrew them from the module.
NOTE: The figure displays the back of the system without the cable panel. In
most cases, it is not necessary to remove the cable panel.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Applications module
Applications module support rail
Applications module anchor screw
User Interface module
User Interface module support rails
User Interface module anchor
Figure G-8
ADVIA Centaur XP Modules Rails and Anchor Screws
2. Slide the module toward the front of the system until the I/O panel is
accessible.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Appendix H: Glossary
accept
Function used to indicate that a value is valid. For example,

you can accept a result or accept an invalid calibration.
acid probe
Mechanical component that dispenses acid reagent into

a cuvette to resuspend the magnetic particles and prepare the
acridinium ester for light emission.
acid reagent
Solution of 0.5% hydrogen peroxide and 0.1N nitric acid.

Acid reagent is added to the magnetic particles in the cuvette
after the wash cycle and reacts with the acridinium ester at a
low pH. This readies the acridinium ester for light emission.
acridinium ester
Chemical tag responsible for the flash when base reagent is

added to the acidified magnetic particle/analyte/AE mixture
in the cuvette. Abbreviation: AE.
activate
Function used to enable a test or a pack for full use on

the system.
active
Available for full use on the system. An enabled test

or a reagent pack can be active or inactive.
active test
Test from the menu that is enabled for use on the system.
analyte
Substance of unknown concentration in a sample.
ancillary entry
Subassembly and area of the system where the operator

loads and unloads ancillary packs.
ancillary pack
Container for the additional reagents required for an assay,

such as Releasing Agent, DTT, or sample diluent.
ancillary reagent
Additional reagents required for an assay, such as Releasing

Agent, DTT, or sample diluent.
ancillary reagent probe
Component that aspirates ancillary reagents from

the ancillary queue and dispenses them into cuvettes.
antibody
Protein (immunoglobulin molecule) produced by the body in

response to the presence of an antigen. Antibodies are used
as part of the bodys resistance to disease. Abbreviation: Ab.
antibody-capture assay
Antibody-antigen reaction in which the antibody

of unknown concentration in a sample is captured by
an additional antibody specifically directed against it.
The additional antibody is bound to Solid Phase. Excess
interfering substance is washed from the sample. Antigen
labeled with acridinium ester is added and binds with
the captured antibody from the sample. The measurable
signal produced by the reaction is directly proportional
to the concentration of antibody in the sample.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
H-2
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Glossary
antigen
Substance that stimulates the production of and combines

specifically with corresponding antibodies. Abbreviation:
Ag. See also immunogen.
archive
A comprehensive collection of data. A file designed for

space-efficient, long-term storage.
aspirate probe
Mechanical device used to draw fluid (water or wash

reagent) from the cuvette. The system has 4 aspirate probes:
aspirate probe 1, aspirate probe 2, aspirate probe 3, and
aspirate
probe 4.
assay
Generic term that refers to the chemical analysis for

a specific analyte in a sample. Each assay possesses a unique
test protocol. Also called test.
assay format
The sequence of events during an assay, including

incubation time, wash and aspirate cycles, and addition
of reagents.
automatic dilutions
Dilutions performed by the system when a result exceeds the

dilution point defined at the Test Ranges window.
Dilutions performed by the system when scheduled by the
operator at the Worklist Dilutions window.
automatic transfer
Option used to automatically send test results from the

system to a remote device, or to automatically receive
worklist requests from a remote device.
background
Electronic signal of the photomultiplier tube (PMT) in

the absence of light.
back up
Process of copying the data files contained on the system

hard disk to diskettes.
barcode
Encoded information that is read by an optical scanner.
barcode label
A label containing encoded information that is placed on

reagent vials and sample cups. See also barcode.
barcode scanner
Optical device that scans and decodes barcoded information

from the label on a reagent pack, a sample cup, or a primary
sample tube. ADVIA Centaur barcode scanners include:
ancillary barcode scanner, hand-held barcode scanner,
sample barcode scanner, and reagent barcode scanner.
base probe
Mechanical component that dispenses base reagent into

a cuvette causing the chemiluminescent reaction.
base reagent
Solution of < 0.25N sodium hydroxide. Base reagent

is dispensed into the cuvette in the luminometer. The
pH shift and accompanying electron excitation cause
the chemiluminescent reaction.
batch
Method of order entry that provides the convenience

of specifying 1 or more tests on multiple samples.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
H-3
baud rate
Speed of data transmission in bits per seconds (bps) between

the system and a remote device.
bidirectional interface
Interface configuration allowing information to be

transferred to and from another device.
buffer (chemistry)
Solution composed of a weak acid or base and its salt that is

used for controlling ionic strength. Buffers maintain the pH
of a solution.
buffer (electronic)
Data storage used to compensate for differences in

information flow rate or in the time that events occur when
data is transmitted between devices.
calibration
The use of 2 samples of known concentrations that you

process on your system. The calibration data is then used to
normalize your system against a stored master curve. The
system calculates results from the normalized curve.
calibration curve
Data that normalizes the system against stored Master Curve

data for the tested analyte. The calibration data compensates
for current running conditions and instrument variability.
The system calculates the required sample dose from the
normalized curve.
calibration data
Details of the calibration including the SID, concentration,

RLU, CV, and flags for the low and high calibrators.
calibration interval
Number of days or hours between required calibrations.
calibrator
Solution that contains a known concentration or a

known reactivity of 1 or more analytes and that provides a
reference for converting measured signals
into concentrations. Calibrators are analyzed with reagents
to obtain calibration data points. See calibration data.
Calibrator Assigned
Values card
Card that contains the calibrator information for a

specific lot of calibrators. The card contains the lot number
and expiration date, and the high and low calibrator values
for each analyte contained in the calibrator. This information
is on the card in text and barcodes for you to enter in the
system.
cancel
Function used to ignore changes made at a window.
catalog number
A unique number associated with each Siemens product.

The number is used when ordering the product.
CD-ROM
Compact disc read-only memory. An electronic storage

medium on which you can store data but does not allow you
to edit or write over the data
CD-RW
Compact disc rewritable. An electronic storage medium that

allows you to overwrite the current files on the CD.
central processing unit
Main printed circuit board of a computing system that

interprets instructions and directs the system operations.
Abbreviation: CPU.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
H-4
character parity
Transmission setting used to check for transmission

errors between the system and a remote device. This setting
must be the same at the system and the remote device to
maintain compatibility between the systems.
check digit
Digit at the end of the barcode used to verify that the

barcode was correctly scanned.
check range
Value entered in the test definition beyond which the

operator can program the system to automatically repeat
tests. Also called alert range or action range.
checksum
Variable, 2-digit, hexadecimal number that is part of the data

link message frames and supports error detection.
Variable hexadecimal number that ensures the Master Curve
and the Calibrator definition values entered are valid.
chemiluminescence
Oxidation reaction of an organic chemical compound.

The chemiluminescent reaction emits light.
chemiluminescent
immunoassay
Assay that uses an antibody-antigen reaction to determine

the presence of an analyte. The amount of analyte is
quantitated by a chemiluminescent reaction.
chemiluminescent
reaction
Light-emitting chemical transformation caused by the

oxidation of an organic chemical compound.
coefficient of variation
Percent coefficient of variation among the replicates for

a sample.
communication ports
Serial RS-232 ports on the system that can connect the

system to an external, remote device, such as an LIS or
a data management system.
competitive assay
Antibody-antigen reaction in which the antigen (Ag) of

unknown concentration in a sample and a labeled antigen in
an assay reagent compete for a limited amount of antibody
(Ab) in an assay reagent. The measurable signal produced by
the Ab/labeled-Ag reaction is inversely proportional to the
unknown concentration of Ag in the sample.
Antibody-antigen reaction in which the antibody
of unknown concentration in a sample and a labeled
antibody in an assay reagent compete for a limited amount
of antigen in an assay reagent. The measurable signal
produced by the Ag/labeled-Ab reaction is inversely
proportional to the unknown concentration of Ab in the
sample.
completed assay
Assay for which a valid result was generated or for which all
required sample aspirations are complete. Required reagent
aspirations may not have completed.
concentration
Amount of analyte measured. Abbreviation: Conc.
confidence interval
A statistical value that describes how likely the statistical

results are to be accurate.
configuration
Settings of software and hardware.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
H-5
context-sensitive online
information
Information that is about the operators current task and that

is accessible without interrupting the current task.
continuous level sensing
Measurement of a wide range of resolvable fluid levels. For

example, sample levels can be measured at any volume.
continuous operation
Operation allowing the system to process samples

without interruptions to add or remove samples, empty
waste containers, or replenish supplies.
control
Quality control material used to determine if the system

is reporting valid results.
A test that requires you to begin and end a group of patient

samples with a set of controls. The system does not process
samples until it establishes the acceptability of the results of
the start-of-bracket controls. The system does not report
sample results until it establishes the acceptability of the
results of the end-of-bracket controls is established.
control bracket reagent

reserve
A setting that allows you to ensure that the system has

enough reagent to complete the end-of-bracket controls of a
control-bracketed test that is in process.
control reminder
A system reminder that you should process end-of-bracket

controls soon to prevent the system from discarding retained
patient test results. The control reminder applies only to
control-bracketed tests. The timing for the control reminder
is configurable at the Test Definition window.
control warning
A system warning that you must process the end-of-bracket

controls as soon as possible or the system discards retained
patient test results. The control warning applies only to
control-bracketed tests. The timing for the control warning is
established by the manufacturer.
control value range
Range of acceptable results established by the quality

control material manufacturer. The control value range
is provided in the assay manual.
corrective action
Activity performed by the operator to solve a problem.
cursor
A bar at the window that indicates where you can enter data.
cut-off point
Medical decision point for a qualitative assay. Results above

the cut-off point are reported with a different qualitative
interpretation than those below the cut-off point.
cuvette
Plastic, disposable container that holds the reaction mixture

on the system. The chemiluminescent reaction occurs inside
the cuvette.
cycle count
Each time the sample probe picks up a sample tip, the cycle
count increments by 1.
dark count
Electronic background signal of the photomultiplier tube

(PMT) in the absence of light.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
H-6
data bits
Number of bits transmitted between a system and a remote

device.
default value
Value defined and preset by Siemens.
define
Establish a value for a variable or symbol, or to establish

what the variable represents.
delete
Function used to remove an object, such as a file, from the

database.
demographics
Information about a patient or sample such as name,

identification number, date of birth, sex, location, and
physician.
diluent
Protein-based solution used to dilute a sample.
dilution point
See dilution setpoint.
dilution setpoint
Value that indicates the concentration beyond which the

system dilutes the sample and repeats the test.
disable
Command or condition that does not allow a specific event

to proceed.
Function used to remove a test from the menu.
diskette drive
Device that writes information to, and reads information

from, a 3.5-inch diskette.
DVD-RW
Digital Versatile Disc Rewritable. A rewritable optical

storage medium having greater capacity than a CD.
enable
Command or condition that permits a specific event

to proceed.
Function used to add a test to the menu.
equivocal
Interpretation of a qualitative assay for which a definitive

result is not possible. Certain qualitative assays have
equivocal zones that are established as a range on either side
of the cut-off point. Also called indeterminate.
Abbreviation: Equiv.
ethernet
A network connection that allows a computer to connect to

other computers on the same network.
event
System activity such as a manual operation or an error

recorded by the system in the event log.
event log
List of system occurrences (events) including errors,

from the most recent to the oldest. This information includes
the date and time of each occurrence.
exit queue
Area on the system where sample racks are moved after

leaving the inprocess queue. You can remove the sample
racks from the exit queue.
expiration date
The date beyond which the manufacturer does not guarantee

correct performance of the reagent or material.
firmware
Software that the system downloads to the Machine

Controller boards.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
H-7
flag
Remark or message about the status of a result. The flag is

next to the result at the window and on printed reports.
flash
Short burst of light produced during the chemiluminescent

reaction when acridinium ester is oxidized. Acridinium ester
is oxidized when the pH rapidly changes from acidic to basic
with the addition of base reagent.
graphical user interface
Tool for communicating information to the operator

using graphics on the system monitor. Abbreviation: GUI.
hand-held barcode
scanner
System hardware tool that outputs a laser beam across a

barcode and decodes the reflected laser light on return to the
laser scanner engine.
hard disk drive
Device that stores data and contains all system

programming.
hardware
Physical components of the system.
host query
System interface setup that specifies that the system request

a remote device such as an LIS to upload requests or
information.
ID
Identification. Used in SID (sample identification) and PID

(patient identification).
immunoassay
Chemical test that uses an antibody-antigen reaction

to determine the presence of a specific analyte or to quantify
a specific analyte. The test measures an antibody or an
antigen.
immunochemiluminometric
assay
Type of sandwich assay in which the measurable signal

produced by the reagent-labeled antibody-antigen reaction is
proportional to the unknown concentration of antigen or
antibody in a sample. See also sandwich assay.
Abbreviation: ICMA.
immunogen
Substance of appropriate size and species specificity which,

when introduced to the body, stimulates the production of
antibodies. An immunogen can be an antigen or a hapten
conjugated to a large protein.
inactivate
Function used to limit the use of a test or a pack on

the system.
inactive
Not available for full use on the system. You can schedule
only calibrators and controls for inactive tests and reagent
packs.
inactive test
Test that is not enabled for use on the systems.
include
Function used to add a value for consideration with other

values.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
H-8
incubation ring
Area where cuvettes are incubated at 37C to prepare the

sample and reagent for the chemiluminescent reaction. The
incubation ring also positions the cuvettes for sample and
reagent dispenses and magnetic particle washes and
resuspensions. Also called ring.
index
Qualitative result that represents the relative concentration

of an analyte based on a cutoff.
inprocess
Status of a test when the sample is in the inprocess queue

and is detected by the system or the sample is in progress.
Status of the system when it is processing samples.
intercept
Factor used with slope to correlate the assay results with

another method. You obtain the intercept and the slope from
a regression equation based on method comparison studies.
key operator
Designated operator available to Siemens representatives to

describe instrument malfunctions by telephone and/or to
perform simple adjustments and corrections as requested.
keyboard
System component you use to type information or to

respond to a system prompt.
label
Substance coupled to an antigen or antibody that

provides the measurement signal for an immunoassay.
laboratory information
system
Laboratory computer system that can be interfaced to

the system. Abbreviation: LIS.
light count
Measured electronic signal of the photomultiplier tube

(PMT) during the chemiluminescent reaction.
light emitting diode
Electronic device made from semiconductor materials

that emits light when current flows through it. Abbreviation:
LED.
link
Method of directly accessing information or data. A link in

the user interface transfers information to a related window
based on a selection. Required data must be present for the
information to transfer. In the online information system, a
link is a quick way to access more information about a topic.
LIS Code
Alphanumeric code that identifies a test, profile, or

calibrator to your hospital or laboratory computer.
Lite Reagent
Assay reagent containing antibody or antigen labeled

with acridinium ester in buffer.
luminometer
Subassembly and component of the system where the

chemiluminescent reaction occurs and is measured.
lyophilized material
A liquid material that is freeze-dried to a powder for long

term stability. Reconstitute lyophilized material with water
or other liquid before use.
manual dilution
A dilution of the sample made before placing the sample on

the system.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
H-9
Master Curve
Multi-point curve that is generated for each lot of Solid

Phase and Lite Reagent for a particular test. The Master
Curve is the reference curve used to convert a measured
signal into sample concentration. Calibration data
normalizes the system against stored Master Curve data for
the tested analyte.
minimum detectable
volume
Smallest reagent or sample volume detectable by the system.

Also called base volume.
modem
Device that converts the digital signals generated by the

computers serial port to the modulated analog signals
required for transmission over a telephone line and
transforms incoming analog signals to their digital
equivalent.
monitor
Device that produces an on-screen display.
monoclonal antibody
Antibody produced through the fusion of a myeloma

cell and a B lymphocyte. Antibodies produced by a
single fusion event have identical structure, affinity,
and specificity for a given antigen.
Multicomponent
A calculated test in which the system uses the results from

one or more standard tests or off-system tests in a formula to
calculate a test result. The standard tests and off-system tests
that are used to determine a multicomponent result are
referred to as component tests of the multicomponent test.
nonreactive
Nonreactive result. A result below the cut-off limit for a

reactive result.
normal range
See reference range.
numeric keys
Keys that are labeled with numbers and mathematical

symbols and are on the right side of the keyboard.
observed limits
Range calculated by your system for each test after the

fourth valid calibration of a reagent and calibrator lot
combination. The system uses data from additional valid
calibrations of the reagent and calibrator lot combination to
continually recalculate this range.
off-system test
Test that is not run on the system but whose results are
entered in the result database and printed on a patient report.
You can use off-system test results in ratio tests.
optimize placement
Function that indicates where to place reagent packs so that

reagent probes can most efficiently operate.
Pack ID
Identification code contained in the barcode on a reagent

pack that the system recognizes as unique to that pack.
paramagnetic particles
Magnetic particles used in the Solid Phase reagent.

Abbreviation: PMP.
patient identification
code
Unique code that identifies the patient from whom a sample

is obtained. Abbreviation: PID.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
H-10
pending samples
Samples for which tests are scheduled or inprocess, but not

complete.
pending tests
Tests that are scheduled or inprocess, but not complete.
photomultiplier tube
Sensitive photodetector that captures individual photons of

light. The photodetector consists of a vacuum-filled photo
tube with a cathode (usually 9 diodes) and an anode that the
system uses to generate a signal (pulse) during the
measurement phase. The signal is directly proportional to
the amount of illumination produced by the reaction and can
be converted into sample concentration. Abbreviation: PMT.
photon
Unit of light; quantum of radiant energy.
PID
Patient identification code.
pointing device
Apparatus, such as a mouse or a trackball used to interact

with system software through the user interface.
polyclonal antibody
Antibody produced through injection of antigen into

animals.
power supply
Electronic subsystem that converts the AC voltages in

the power line to the DC voltages used inside the system.
pretreatment
Process that occurs to prepare a sample for testing.

For example, pretreatment can include sample dilution
to meet assay requirements or addition of a pretreatment
agent to a sample to protect the analyte from releasing agent.
primary pack
Primary reagent pack containing the Solid Phase and Lite

Reagent.
primary sample tube
Tube used to collect patient blood samples by venipuncture.
prime
Function that introduces reagents into the fluidic system in

preparation for analyzing samples.
profile
Group of related tests or a group of the same test with

different dilution specifications.
prompt
Questions, instructions, or commands that help you

complete the current task.
QC
Quality control.
quality control
Process of verifying the performance of the system using

products containing specific analytes within a predetermined
concentration range. Abbreviation: QC.
quality control material
Product containing 1 or more specific analytes with

a predetermined concentration range or reactivity used
to verify the performance of the system.
quality control sample
Protein-based product containing specific analytes within a

predetermined concentration range used to verify the
performance of the systems.
query timeout
Maximum number of seconds required for a remote device

to respond to a query from the system.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
H-11
rack
Sample rack. Device used to present sample tubes to

the system. The sample rack contains space for up to
5 sample tubes.
Rack ID
Positional identification code. The unique code that

identifies each sample rack and the positional location of the
sample in the rack. Called Rack at the windows.
random access
Mode of operation in which the system processes samples

for multiple assays in the most efficient order.
ratio definition
Formula the system uses to calculate the results of a ratio

test.
ratio test
Test that calculates results from the results of other tests. FTI
is an example of a ratio test.
raw data
Total photon count that the system received for a flash. The
raw data is not corrected.
reagent probe 1, 2, or 3
Three independent components that aspirate reagents from

the primary packs and dispense them into cuvettes.
reagent water
Water that meets specification for clinical laboratory use.
reference range
Range of values for each assay from a defined population.

Each laboratory should establish its own reference ranges
for the diagnostic evaluation of patient results. The normal
range is a reference range for the healthy population and can
be defined by sex, age, or other patient attribute. Reference
ranges can also exist for various pathological states. For
example, there may be reference ranges for hypothyroid,
euthyroid, and hyperthyroid states. The assay manual
provides the expected values for each assay.
relative light unit
Counts generated when the PMT detects light during

the chemiluminescent reaction. A relative light unit is
calibrated against a tritium source and is unique to its
measurement. Abbreviation: RLU.
replicate
Number of times that a sample is performed for a scheduled

test. The system calculates the mean value from the results
of the replicates of the calibrator, the control, or the patient
sample.
reservoir
A container holding water, waste fluid, waste cuvettes,

waste sample tips, or system fluids to allow for continuous
operation while the operator empties the waste containers or
replenishes the supplies.
results
Dose concentration, ratio cutoff, or qualitative answer

(positive, negative, reactive, nonreactive) for an assay
performed on a sample.
sample
Specimen used for testing such as a patient sample, control,

or calibrator.
sample cup
Disposable container that holds patient, control, or calibrator

samples.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
H-12
sample identification
code
Unique code that identifies each sample. Abbreviation: SID.
sample probe
Component that picks up a sample tip and then aspirates

a sample and dispenses it into a cuvette.
sandwich assay
Antibody-antigen reaction in which the antigen of unknown

concentration in a sample is sandwiched between antibody
bound to solid phase and antibody labeled with acridinium
ester. The measurable signal produced by the reaction is
directly proportional to the concentration of antigen in the
sample.
save
Function used to add an object to the database or to include

updates to an object in the database.
screen
Component of the monitor that displays windows, programs,

menus, data, prompts, messages, and other operating
information.
search
Function used to locate an item in a list.
sign in
To enter a password or code to access the system or an area

of the system.
sign out
To indicate that you are finished working in the system or an

area of the system.
SI units
International system for units of measure.
SID
Sample identification.
slope
Factor used along with intercept to correlate the assay results

with results from another method. You obtain the slope and
the intercept from a regression equation based on method
comparison studies.
software
Computer instructions that generate and carry out

commands to control system operation.
Solid Phase
An assay reagent consisting of paramagnetic particles

covalently bound to antigen or antibody suspended
in a buffer.
sort
Function used to change the order of items in a list.

For example, you can sort the worklist by patient name or by
SID.
stability
Degree of a reagents resistance to chemical change

or degradation.
startup
The events that occur when the system uses the software to
initialize the hardware.
status
Information about the current operating condition of

the system.
stop bits
Number of data bits that maintain synchronization between

the system and a remote device during data transmission.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
H-13
subsystem
A hardware functional area of the system, such as incubation

ring, luminometer, and reagent probes. Machine controller
boards drive subsystems.
subsystem failure
Message classification category meaning subsystem failure;

may be operator-recoverable. The message has a red
background.
subsystem warning
Message classification category meaning subsystem goes

offline if the operator does not interact. The message has a
yellow background.
symbology
Set of rules for encoding information in a barcode.
system clock
Twenty-four hour clock that the system uses to monitor

various system functions, such as calibration intervals, and
to track the time of events.
troubleshooting
Determining the cause of a system or assay performance

problem.
2-point calibration
An assay calibration that uses 2 known concentrations to

normalize the Master Curve for current operating conditions.
update
Function used to overwrite information with new

information. For example, when a new master test definition
is issued, you update the master test definition for access to
the latest version.
USB
Universal Serial Bus, provides a serial bus standard for

connecting devices, usually to a computer.
valid
Acceptable. Refers to calibration results.
view
Function used to limit the items that display in a list.

For example, you can display all the samples in the worklist
or just samples with requests.
waive
Function that allows you to use an expired calibration.
waste bottle
Container on the system that is the main receptacle for liquid

waste.
water bottle
Container on the system that holds the main supply

of the reagent water.
window
Screen display area that you can independently move

or manipulate. Windows can overlap each other.
worklist
List of scheduled patient samples, controls, and calibrators,

including identification and requested tests for each entry.
078D1064-01 Rev. C
H-14
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Index
Appendix I: Index
A
accepting an invalid calibration 3-25
acid probe 1-4, 1-14
Acid Reagent
composition C-13
acid reagent
dispensing 1-14
replacing 2-36
acridinium ester 1-34, 1-36
adding
control requests 4-5
Adding a New Control Definition 4-1
adding variable l 8-40
ADVIA Centaur system
topview figure 1-4
AE
antibody binding 1-35
air filter
cleaning 5-24
alarms
defining 8-46
ancillary barcode scanner 6-91
ancillary entry
cleaning 5-44
ancillary pack 1-12, 2-19
barcode 1-9
loading 1-9
removing 1-9
storing 1-9
ancillary probe 1-4, 1-12
cleaning 5-21
ancillary probe exterior
cleaning 5-21
ancillary queue
troubleshooting 6-75
ancillary reagent 1-12
status 1-18, 1-19, 2-17
ancillary reagent entry 1-9
ancillary reagent pack
removing 2-23
ancillary reagent queue 1-4, 1-9, 1-12
anonymous results
defining 8-15
antibody 1-35
AElabeled 1-37
antibodycapture assay 1-36, 1-45
antigen 1-35, 1-37
aspirate probe exterior
cleaning 5-23
aspirate probes 1-4, 1-13
cleaning 5-23
illustration 1-14
replacing 6-33
aspirated message 2-13
assay
antibodycapture 1-36
competitive 1-36, 1-39
reaction time 1-36
sandwich 1-36
technology 1-36
assay problem 6-110, 6-111
assay specific factors 6-113
assigned value card
calibrator values 3-14
assigning calibrations 3-25, 8-17
authorized representative B-1
autoexclude
calibrator replicates 3-10
Automated Cleaning 1-2
automatic dilutions
defining 8-33
automatic runtime results report
resetting page numbers 2-80
specifying 8-49
automatic sample repeats
check range 8-26
concentration calculation range 8-27
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ii
defining 8-25
defining number of replicates 8-31
holding options 8-32
index calculation range 8-27
linearity 8-26
sample error conditions 8-30
autoschedule
daily cleaning procedure 5-3
Autoschedule Daily Cleaning 1-2
B
backing up
calibration data 7-3
quality control data 7-3
reagent inventory 7-3
test definition 7-3
backing up event log 7-3
backing up maintenance log 7-3
backing up setup 7-3
backing up system 7-3
backing up tube types 7-3
barcode
ancillary pack 1-9
check digit 6-96
color 6-92
error messages 6-86
length 6-95
positioning 6-95
quality 6-93
reserved 6-97
sample 1-6
scanning technique 6-97
size 6-92
specifications 6-91
symbology 6-95
barcode labels
defining custom 8-7
barcode read test 6-79
barcode scanner 1-16
barcode symbology
selecting 8-6
base probe 1-4, 1-14
Base Reagent
078D1064-01 Rev. C
composition C-13
base reagent
replacing 2-36
batches
loading sample racks 2-54
scheduling 2-54
blinking yellow status button 2-9
button
fast stop 6-5
buttons
function 1-20
status
blinking 1-18
task 1-19
workspace 1-18
C
calculating the multicomponent result 2-60
calibration
accepting invalid 3-25, 8-17
assigning 3-25, 8-17
autoexclude calibrator replicates 3-10
defined ranges 3-6
discrepant 6-102
due to expire, managing 3-26
evaluation criteria 3-4
examples of managing calibrations 3-26
expired, managing 3-27
history 3-18
invalid, managing 3-26
master curve 3-1
observed ranges 3-7
print report 3-27
retained 3-8
retaining 8-18
software map 1-29
status 3-16
T Uptake 3-4
two-point 3-1
waiving expired 3-24, 8-17
Calibration button 1-19
calibration data
backing up 7-3
printing 3-27
replicate results 3-20

review 3-20
status messages 3-20
calibration display
sort 3-17
view 3-17
calibration evaluation criteria 3-4
calibration history 3-18
calibration options
defining 8-16
calibration status 3-18, 3-20
cal required 3-16
current 3-16
due 3-16, 3-17
expired 3-17, 3-20
expired, retained 3-20
historical 3-17, 3-18
invalid 3-17
invalid, exceeded defined ranges 3-20
invalid, exceeded observed ranges 3-21
no master curve 3-17
operator accepted 3-17
valid 3-21
valid, met retained cal limits 3-21
valid, operator accepted 3-21
valid, operator accepted, retained 3-21
valid, retained 3-21
waived 3-17, 3-21
calibrator
autoexcluding a replicate 8-18
display at Worklist Summary window
2-42, 3-25
excluding RLU 3-23
scheduling 2-55, 3-18
calibrator values
defining 3-14
canceling a multicomponent test 2-59
capacity
cuvette 2-24
cuvette waste 2-24
fluid waste 2-24
inprocess queue 1-6
reagent water 2-24
sample exit queue 1-7
iii
sample rack 1-6

sample tip tray waste 2-24
sample tip trays 2-24
system fluid reservoir 2-36
tip waste 2-24
central processing unit 1-14
check digit 6-96
check range
defining 8-26
chemiluminescent
immunoassay 1-35
chemiluminescent reaction 1-14
Cleaning
aspirate probe exterior 5-23
cuvette waste area 5-44
sample time waste area 5-50
water bottles and reservoirs 5-8
cleaning
air filter 5-24
ancillary entry 5-44
ancillary probe 5-21
ancillary probe exterior 5-21
aspirate probes 5-23
covers 5-44
cuvette waste chute 5-44
cuvette waste reservoir 5-44
drip trays 5-44
pointing device 5-44
primary reagent compartment 5-42
probe rinse stations 5-35
reagent pack holders 5-42
reagent probe exterior 5-18
reagent probe shutter 5-39
reagent probes 5-18
rinse stations 5-35
sample entry queue 5-44
sample racks 5-57
sample tip remover 5-50
sample tip waste chute 5-50
sample tip waste reservoir 5-50
sample tip waste tube 5-50
Stat entry 5-44
system fluids tray 5-44
078D1064-01 Rev. C
iv
waste probe and cuvette ejector rod 5-54

water bottle and reservoir 5-8
cleaning solution
for system components 5-17
preparing 2-31
replacing 2-30
clearing cuvette jams
vertical cuvette chute 6-16
clearing jams
elevator 6-24
orientation chute 6-16
clot detected message 2-13
clot detection
repeating samples 8-30
color
on primary pack 1-8
comments
deleting 6-3
editing 6-3
entering 2-73
symbol 2-40
comments for patient samples
entering 2-53
competitive assay 1-36, 1-39
master curve 3-1
concentration calculation ranges
automatic repeats 8-27
Configuring the System 8-1
Control Bracket button 8-18
control bracket reagent reserve
defining 8-47
Control Bracketing 8-18
archive 7-5
control reminder 8-19
control-bracketed tests 2-57, 2-58
evaluating results 2-67
reagent options 2-57
reasons for discarded results 2-43
rescheduling samples 2-42
scheduling controls for 4-6
scheduling patient samples 2-48
viewing features 8-18
Control Levels field 8-18
Control reminder
078D1064-01 Rev. C
modifying 8-19
control requests
adding 4-5
Control Warning field 8-18
scheduling and loading samples 2-57, 2-58
Control-Bracketing Messages
Incomplete Set 2-13
controls
editing 4-4
scheduling requests 4-5
covers
cleaning 5-44
critical condition 2-9
current
calibration status 3-16
custom barcode labels
defining 8-7
customer service B-8
customer tube types
restoring 7-4
cut-off point
qualitative assays 3-3
cuvette
loading 1-14
cuvette ejector rod
cleaning 5-54
wiping 5-54
cuvette jams 6-16
cuvette loading
clearing jams 6-16
cuvette loading bin 1-4, 1-14
filling 2-31
cuvette waste area
cleaning 5-44
cuvette waste bin 1-14
emptying 2-34
cuvette waste chute
cleaning 5-44
cuvette waste reservoir
cleaning 5-44
cuvettes
loading 6-54
D
Daily Cleaning Procedure
autoscheduling 5-3
daily cleaning procedure 5-5
Dark Count with Cuvette 6-61
data collection 6-86
data files
maintaining 7-1
decimal places
defining 8-16
defaults
resetting 8-21, 8-27, 8-28, 8-34
defined ranges
for calibration 3-6
defined validity criteria
qualitative assay 3-3
quantitative assay 3-2
defining
alarms 8-46
anonymous results 8-15
automatic dilutions 8-33
automatic repeats, number of replicates 8-31
automatic sample repeats 8-25
calibration options 8-16
calibrator replicates 8-17
check range 8-26
control bracket reagent reserve 8-47
custom barcodes 8-7
decimal places 8-16
dilution factor 8-33
dilution point 8-33
dilution profiles 8-34
inprocess queue timeout 8-3
LAS communication options 8-56
linearity 8-26, 8-27
LIS communication options 8-54
low reagent status 8-46
maintenance activities 5-3
off-system tests 8-42
opened stability 8-14
overdilution concentration 8-34
print options 8-49
ratio tests 8-36, 8-39
reference ranges 8-20

reflex tests 8-23
repeats for the concentration calculation
ranges 8-27
result interpretations 8-21
screen saver options 8-45
sensitivity 8-27
Stat options 8-3
system name 8-45
T Uptake result options 8-38
test profiles 8-43
units 8-16
defining calibrator values 3-14
Defining control definitions for multicomponent
tests 4-8
defining master curve
using keyboard 3-11
using scanner 3-10
defining sample handling
maximizing tests 8-2
minimizing unusable volume 8-2
optimizing throughput 8-2
Defining SID Codes from Barcode Labels 8-7
deleting
dilution profiles 8-35
entire worklist 2-77
requests 2-66
selected sample results 2-77
selected worklist 2-77
test 8-11, 8-12
deleting tests
from a QC definition 4-5
determining
supplies status 2-10
diluters 6-84
dilution
symbol 2-40
dilution factor
defining 8-33
dilution options
entering 2-55
specifying 2-56
dilution point
defining 8-33
078D1064-01 Rev. C
vi
dilution profiles
defining 8-34
deleting 8-35
dilutions
automatic 8-33
manual 2-55
direct plumbing
specifying 8-52
disabled
symbol 2-40
disabling a test 8-11, 8-12
discarded
results 2-79
Discarded results
reasons for 2-43
discrepant
calibration 6-102
patient results 6-108
QC results 6-105
discrepant results 6-98, 6-102
Dispense Test 6-55
displaying
samples
by rack identifier 2-7
by sample identifier 2-7
error messages 2-7
in chronological order 2-7
drip trays
cleaning 5-44
due
due, calibration
managing 3-26
E
editing
control definition 4-4
QC expected values 4-4
requests 2-65
results 2-73
elevator 1-14
clearing jams 6-24
Empty Ancillary Queue 6-77
Empty Inprocess Queue 6-76
078D1064-01 Rev. C
Empty Ring 6-52

emptying
cuvette waste bin 2-34
sample tip tray waste 2-34
sample tip waste bin 2-33
waste trap 5-15
enabling and disabling a multicomponent test
8-40
entering
comments for patient samples 2-53
dilution options 2-55
patient demographics 2-52
rack numbers 2-54
reagent options 2-56
error codes
identifying 6-2
evaluating
results 2-66
event code
not in online help 6-3
event log 6-2
backing up 7-3
restoring 7-4
status 2-18
Exceeds 2-72
excluded
symbol 2-40
excluding a calibrator replicate automatically
8-18
excluding a calibrator RLU 3-23
exit queue
clearing obstructions 6-47
locating sample racks 2-8
locating samples 2-44
expired
expired calibration
managing 3-27
waiving 3-24
expired, retained
exporting
quality control data 4-9, 7-3, 7-10
F
failure condition 2-9
fast stop button 6-5
field help 1-23
filter
water 5-31
flags
defining 8-21
fluid sensor
replacing 6-41
function buttons 1-20
functions
software map 1-30, 1-32
H
Hand-held barcode scanner
Master Curve 1-16
patient samples 1-16
scanning patient samples 2-51
HBsAg
reflex confirmatory test 8-23
help
explaining 1-22
field 1-23
help button 1-23
help key 1-23
historical database
moving results 8-8
historical results
deleting 2-78
historical worklist
manually moving results 2-44
holding samples for repeat 8-32
Home Probes 6-57
Home System 6-73
I
Incomplete Set message 2-13
incubation ring 1-4, 1-14
magnets 1-11
temperature 1-11
index value
vii
nonreactive 3-3
reactive 3-3
indicators
pack 2-21
information
online 1-22
information display area 1-21
inprocess queue 1-4, 1-5, 1-6, 1-7
capacity 1-6
removing sample racks 2-8
symbol 2-40
inprocess queue timeout
defining 8-3
insufficient message 2-13
insufficient sample volume
repeating samples 8-30
interpretation ranges
reflex tests 8-24
Interpreting the Multicomponent Result 2-61
Invalid 2-42
invalid
invalid calibration
accepting 3-25, 8-17
assigning 3-25
managing 3-26
invalid, exceeded defined ranges
invalid, exceeded observed ranges
L
label
chemiluminescent 1-34
Laboratory Automation 1-2
laboratory automation
loading samples 2-6
LAS
communication options 8-56
light emission 1-14, 1-34
lightemitting diode 1-8
linearity
defining 8-26
078D1064-01 Rev. C
viii
LIS
communication options 8-54
querying 2-46
releasing results on hold 2-74
requesting a worklist 2-46
scheduling samples 2-45
Sending results not on hold 2-76
sending results to 2-76
Sending selected results 2-76
LIS Interface 1-2
Load Tip Tray 6-59
loading
batches 2-54
primary pack 1-8
primary reagent pack 2-21
sample racks
illustration 2-5
samples 1-5
illustration 2-4
laboratory automation 2-6
samples for control-bracketed tests 2-57,
2-58
locating sample racks
exit queue 2-8
locating samples
exit queue 2-44
lot-specific barcodes
master curve 3-1
low reagent warning
defining 8-46
luminometer 1-4, 1-14
cleaning 5-54
troubleshooting 6-61, 6-65
M
magnetic particles 1-13
magnets 1-4, 1-11, 1-13
maintaining
acid and base reagents 2-36
cuvette loading bin 2-31, 2-32
data files 7-1
sample tip waste bin 2-34
waste bottle 2-26
078D1064-01 Rev. C
water bottle 2-24

maintenance
status 2-18
maintenance log
backing up 7-3
restoring 7-4
maintenance procedures 1-24
Maintenance Status button 1-18, 1-19
managing
the worklist 2-38
managing calibrations
examples 3-26
manifold
cleaning 5-14
manually adding
test requests 2-46
master curve
calibration 3-1
competitive assay 3-1
concentrations 3-10
defining 3-10
quantitative assays 3-1, 3-2
relative light units 3-10
sandwich assay 3-2
specific lot 3-1
standard concentrations 3-1
standard curve 3-1
master curve card
barcodes 3-1
master curve definition 3-10
maximizing number of tests 8-2
message
Aspirated 2-13
Clot Detected 2-13
Incomplete Cal Set 2-13
Incomplete Set 2-13
Insufficient 2-13
Integrity Error 2-13
LIS Query Pending 2-14
Low Reagent 8-46
No Barcode 2-14
No Bracket 2-14
No Request 2-14
Removal Pending 2-14

SID Mismatch 2-14
Stat 8-3
Messages
Incomplete Set 2-13
messages
reagent status 2-18
sample status 2-13
minimizing unusable volume 8-2
Mismatch
SID 2-51
modem
accessing files 8-50
modifying
control reminder 8-19
reagent stability option 8-13
sample replicates 8-14
sample replicates for automatic repeats 8-25
system options 8-45
test options 8-9
Modifying control reminder 8-19
monitor 1-17
monitoring
status 2-9
multiple flags
symbol 2-40
N
No Barcode message 2-14, 2-16
No Bracket message 2-14
no calibration
No Interpretation 2-71
no master curve
No Request message 2-14
O
observed ranges
for calibration 3-7
off-system tests
defining 8-42
onboard plumbing
specifying 8-52
ix
online information
explaining 1-22
operating sequence 1-2
Operating the ADVIA Centaur XP System 2-1
optimized throughput
defining 8-1
order
modifying test display 8-44
ordering
supplies D-1
orientation chute 1-14
clearing cuvette jams 6-16
overdilution concentration
defining 8-34
P
pack
indicators 2-21
Pack ID
selecting 2-56
paramagnetic particles 1-36
patient demographics 2-52
entering 2-52
patient samples
scheduling 2-48
pending requests
deleting
in worklist 2-78
photomultiplier tube 1-14
pointing device 5-44
adjusting 8-48
cleaning 5-44
pop-up window
view 2-66
positioning
the rack indicator
illustration 2-4
power failure
recovering from 6-8
preheater 1-14
clearing jams 6-22
temperature 1-14
primary pack
loading 1-8
078D1064-01 Rev. C
primary pack status 2-21

primary reagent
status 1-8, 1-18, 1-19
primary reagent compartment 1-3, 1-4
cleaning 5-42
temperature 1-8
primary reagent door 1-8
primary reagent pack
loading 2-21
removing 2-22
primary reagent probes 1-4
primary reagent shelf 1-8
primary reagent status 1-8
primary sample tube 1-6
Prime Cuvettes 6-54
Prime Fluid Line 6-82
Prime System 6-80
Prime System Fluid Bottle 6-85
principles
antibody binding 1-35
printed results
deleting 2-78
printer
specifying 8-49
printing
reagent loading report 2-20
sample results 2-78
test results 2-79
printing information for technical assistance B-5
printing report type
reagent loading report 2-20
results report 2-78
test report 2-79
printing system information B-5
printing windows on the applications view
workspace B-7
printing windows on the system view workspace
B-6
probe rinse stations
cleaning 5-35
probes
problem
078D1064-01 Rev. C
multiple assay 6-111

single assay 6-110
procedure button 1-24
procedures 1-22
maintenance 1-24
processing
batch requests 2-54
Stat requests 2-53
proficiency testing
investigating failed 6-113
profiles
dilution, defining 8-34
dilution, deleting 8-35
test, defining 8-43
test, deleting 8-44
Q
QC
discrepant 6-105
QC definition
editing 4-4
QC statistics
exporting 4-9, 7-10
qualitative assay
cut-off point 3-3
index value 3-3
master curve 3-3
two-point calibration 3-3
quality control
deleting tests 4-5
editing control definitions 4-4
editing expected values 4-4
software map 1-28
quality control data
backing up 7-3
exporting to diskette 7-3
quantitative assay
calibration 3-1
master curve 3-1
two-point calibration 3-1
user-initiated calibration 3-1
quantitative two-point calibration. See
two-point calibration.
querying
an LIS 2-46
R
rack
specifying for sample identification 8-4
rack barcode 1-6
racks
loading
illustration 2-5
range
concentration calculation 8-27
interpretation 8-21
patient population 8-21
reference 8-21
ratio test
calculated 3-4
reference serum 3-4
T Uptake 3-4
ratio tests
defining 8-36, 8-39
reaction
chemiluminescent 1-14
reagent
defining opened stability 8-14
stability option, modifying 8-13
reagent barcode scanner 6-89
reagent holder 1-8
reagent inventory
backing up 7-3
reagent lots and packs
specifying 2-56
reagent options
entering 2-56
reagent pack holders
cleaning 5-42
reagent probe 1-13
reagent probe exterior
cleaning 5-18
reagent probe shutter
cleaning 5-39
reagent probes
cleaning 5-18
replacing 6-30
reagent status 2-15
xi
Reagent Status button 1-18, 1-19

Reagent status messages 2-18
Depleted 2-18
Lot Expired 2-18
No Test Definition 2-18
Removal Pending 2-18
Stability Expired 2-18
Verify Stability 2-18
reagent water 1-3
Reasons for Discarded Results 2-43
red status button 2-9
reference ranges
defining 8-20
reflex tests 8-23
reference serum calibration
T Uptake 3-4
reflex tests
defining 8-23
interpretation ranges 8-24
reference ranges 8-23
reflex tests for HBsAg test 8-23
refrigeration
ancillary reagent queue 1-9
remote access 6-86
selecting 8-50
Remote and Laboratory Server 1-2
Remote Server 1-2
Removal Pending message 2-14
removing sample racks
from inprocess queue 2-8
repeat
symbol 2-40
repeating
a test 2-72
repeating a component test 2-60
repeating a multicomponent test 2-59
repeating samples
check range 8-26
concentration calculation range 8-27
holding options 8-32
index calculation range 8-27
linearity 8-26
sample error conditions 8-30
078D1064-01 Rev. C
xii
Replacing
cleaning solution 2-30
replacing
acid and base reagents 2-36
aspirate probe 6-33
cleaning solution 2-30
reagent probe 6-30
waste bottle fluid sensor 6-41
waste probe 6-37
replicate
symbol 2-40
replicate calibrator results 3-20
replicates
entering 2-57
modifying 8-14
specifying 2-56, 2-57
reports
laboratory name and heading 8-49
print options 8-49
printing 2-78
representative
authorized B-1
requesting
tests
manually 2-46
requests
deleting 2-66
editing 2-65
rescheduling samples
control-bracketed tests 2-42
Reset Thermals 6-78
resetting defaults 8-21, 8-27, 8-28, 8-34
restoring customer tube types 7-4
restoring event log 7-4
restoring maintenance log 7-4
restoring setup 7-4
restoring system data 7-4
result flags
defining 8-21
result interpretations
defining 8-21
result on hold
releasing 2-74
symbol 2-40
078D1064-01 Rev. C
results
defining flags 8-21
defining interpretations 8-21
deleting 2-78
discarded 2-79
discrepant assay 6-110, 6-111
discrepant calibration 6-102
discrepant patient 6-108
discrepant QC 6-105
editing 2-73
evaluating 2-66
printing 2-78
reporting without patient names or PIDs
8-15
T Uptake options 8-38
Results Discarded symbol 2-41
results in worklist
deleting 2-78
resume update
worklist 2-38, 2-42
retained calibration 3-8
retaining a calibration 8-18
reviewing
rinse station 1-12, 1-13
rinse stations
cleaning 5-35
RLU
See also relative light unit.
runtime report
resetting page numbers 2-80
specifying 8-49
S
sample
identification 8-4
integrity error, repeating samples 8-30
loading 1-5
minimum volume C-12
optimization 8-2
options, modifying 8-1
status 2-13
messages 2-13
throughput options 8-1
tube types 8-5, E-2
sample barcode 1-6
sample barcode read test 6-79
sample barcode scanner 1-7, 6-87
sample cup 1-6
barcode
illustration 2-4
loading
illustration 2-4
sample entry queue 1-3, 1-4, 1-5, 1-6
cleaning 5-44
sample exit queue 1-3, 1-4, 1-5
capacity 1-7
cleaning 5-44
clearing obstructions 6-47
locating sample racks 2-8
locating samples 2-44
sample loading area 1-5
sample position
identifying 2-54
sample probe 1-4, 1-7
sample rack 1-4, 1-6
capacity 1-6
clips 5-61
loading 1-6
sample racks 2-2
cleaning 5-57
maintaining 5-57
sample results
printing 2-78
sample start button 1-6
Sample Status button 1-18
sample status messages 2-13
sample tests
repeating 2-72
sample tip
sample tip remover 1-10
cleaning 5-50
sample tip tray 1-4, 1-7
loading jam 6-43
sample tip waste
xiii
emptying 2-33
sample tip waste area
cleaning 5-50
sample tip waste chute
cleaning 5-50
sample tip waste reservoir
cleaning 5-50
sample tip waste tube
cleaning 5-50
samples
deleting
selected results 2-77
sandwich assay 1-36, 1-37
master curve 3-2
scanner
sample barcode 1-7
Scanning patient samples
hand-held barcode reader 2-51
schedulein controls for multicomponent tests
4-8
scheduling
batches 2-54
calibrator 3-18
calibrators 2-55
control requests 4-5
patient samples 2-48
samples for control-bracketed tests 2-57,
2-58
Stat samples 2-53
scheduling calibrators for a multicomponent test
2-59
Scheduling Calibrators for a Mutlcomponent
Test 3-20
scheduling controls for a multicomponent test
2-59
scheduling patient samples for a multicomponent tests 2-59
screen saver options
specifying 8-45
selecting multiple samples
in the worklist 2-64
selecting multiple tests
in the worklist 2-64
sending
078D1064-01 Rev. C
xiv
results
manually to an LIS 2-76
sensitivity
defining 8-27
separation
bound from free 1-38
serial number
viewing 8-45
service B-1, B-8
under warranty B-1
setting conitions for multicomponent tests 8-41
Settings and Condition for Multicomponent
Tests 8-41
setup
backing up 7-3
restoring 7-4
Setup button 1-19
setup summary
software map 1-29
SI unit conversion factors C-10
SID
Mismatch 2-51
specifying for sample identification 8-4
SID Mismatch
preventing 2-51
signing in 2-1
signing out 2-1
software maps 1-24
Calibration 1-29
functions 1-29, 1-32
Quality Control 1-28
SetupSummary 1-29
status 1-26
system 1-25
worklist 1-27
Software Overview 1-17
sort
calibration display 3-17
View and Sort 2-7
specific reagent
symbol 2-40
specifications E-1
barcode 6-91
specifying
078D1064-01 Rev. C
ancillary reagents 2-56

dilution options 2-56
reagent lots and packs 2-56
replicates 2-56
stability
stability option
modifying 8-13
standard concentrations
master curve 3-1
standard curve
master curve 3-1
Stat
defining a message 8-3
defining the number of racks 8-3
options, defining 8-3
symbol 2-40
Stat entry 1-3, 1-4
cleaning 5-44
Stat samples
scheduling 2-53
stat/sample barcode scanner 6-87
Status
system 1-18
status
event log 2-18
maintenance 1-18, 1-19, 2-18
monitoring 2-9
primary pack 2-21
primary reagent 1-8
reagents 1-18, 1-19, 2-15
samples 1-18, 2-13
messages 2-13
software map 1-26
supplies 1-18, 1-19, 2-10
status button color 2-9
status buttons
blinking 1-18
status message
calibration 3-18, 3-20
stop button 6-5
storing
ancillary pack 1-9
summary window
type 8-9
view 8-9
supplies
ordering D-1
status 2-10
suspend update
worklist 2-38, 2-42
symbol
at Status Exit Queue window 2-40
comment 2-40
dilution 2-40
ejected from inprocess queue 2-40
excluded 2-40
inprocess queue 2-40
multiple flags 2-40
repeat 2-40
replicate 2-40
reschedule 2-40
result on hold 2-40
results discarded 2-41
specific reagent 2-40
stat 2-40
time due for test completion 2-40
waiting for controls 2-40
symbols F-1
event log 6-2
system
backing up 7-3
bottles, specifying 8-52
clock, changing 8-48
name, defining 8-45
options, modifying 8-45
restoring 7-4
signing in 2-1
signing out 2-1
software map 1-25
system fluid reservoir
capacity 2-36
system fluids tray
cleaning 5-44
system state
description 2-9
System Status button 1-18
xv
T
T Uptake
calculating result 3-4
defining result options 8-38
master curve card 3-4
ratio test 3-4
reference serum calibration 3-4
task buttons 1-19
technical assistance
printing information B-5
temperature
ancillary queue 1-9
test definition
backing up 7-3
test display order
modifying 8-44
test name
modifying 8-13
test options
modifying 8-9
test profiles
defining 8-43
deleting 8-44
test results
printing 2-79
test type 8-10
tests
deleting 8-11, 8-12
deleting from a QC definition 4-5
modifying name 8-13
reviewing 8-9
sample
repeating 2-72
threshold
reagent warning 8-46
time
entering time correction 8-48
specifying time zone 8-47
tip tray
loading 6-59
title bar 1-21
078D1064-01 Rev. C
xvi
top cover
opening 5-34
troubleshooting
aspirate probe 6-33
barcode 6-86
clearing jams from vertical cuvette chute
6-16
cuvette jams in cuvette loading 6-16
cuvette jams in preheater 6-22
tube sizes 1-6
tube types 8-5
backing up 7-3
tube-type selector 1-6
two-point calibration
adjusted signal 3-2, 3-3
defined validity criteria 3-2, 3-3
instrument specific correction formula 3-3
quantitative assay 3-1, 3-2
user-initiated 3-1
type
summary window 8-9
tube 8-5
U
units
defining 8-16
User Interface 1-2
user interface workstation 1-4
Using 4-1
using
sample cups 2-4
Using Quality Control Features 4-1
V
vacuum test 6-78
Valid 2-42
valid, met retained cal limits
valid, operator accepted
valid, operator accepted, retained
valid, retained
078D1064-01 Rev. C

Verify 2-42, 3-25
verifying
barcode scanning 2-6
vertical cuvette chute 1-14
clearing cuvette jams 6-16
view
calibration display 3-17
pop-up window 2-66
summary window 8-9
view, Calibration Summary
historical 3-18
Viewing control bracketing features 8-18
Visible Status Light 1-2
W
Waiting for Controls
symbol 2-40
waived
waiving calibrations 3-24, 8-17
warning
defining low reagent 8-46
warning condition 2-9
warranty B-1
wash block 1-4
wash fluid 1-13
wash station 1-13
waste bin
cuvette
emptying 2-34
sample tip
emptying 2-33
sample tip tray waste
emptying 2-34
waste bottle
emptying 2-26
waste bottle fluid sensor
replacing 6-41
waste fluid
from cuvette 1-14
waste probe 1-4, 1-14
aspirating waste fluid 1-14
cleaning 5-54
xvii
replacing 6-37
wiping 5-54
waste trap
emptying 5-15
water bottle 5-7
filling 2-24
water bottle and reservoir
cleaning 5-8
water bottles and reservoirs
cleaning 5-8
water filter 5-31
water trap
emptying 5-15
windows
closing 1-22
elements 1-22
moving 1-22
opening 1-22
structure 1-21
title bar 1-21
wiping
cuvette ejector rod 5-54
waste probe 5-54
worklist
deleting requests 2-66
editing requests 2-65
managing 2-38
results
deleting 2-78
resume update 2-38, 2-42
software map 1-27
suspend update 2-38, 2-42
Worklist Reagent Options window
plus sign 2-57
Worklist button 1-19
workspace 1-17
workspace buttons 1-18
Y
yellow status button 2-9
078D1064-01 Rev. C
xviii
078D1064-01 Rev. C

ADVIA Centaur XP Immunoassay System Operator S Guide, English, REF 078D1064-01 Rev. C, 2013-04 DXDCM 09008b83807ebd85-1457712853956

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

ADVIA Centaur XP Immunoassay System Operator S Guide, English, REF 078D1064-01 Rev. C, 2013-04 DXDCM 09008b83807ebd85-1457712853956

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ADVIA Centaur XP Immunoassay System

078D1064-01 Rev. C, 2013-04

ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide

2013 Siemens Healthcare Diagnostics. All rights reserved.

ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide:

Using This Guide

Operating the ADVIA Centaur XP System

Using Quality Control Features

Identifying System Problems

Configuring the System

Appendix A: Safety Instructions

ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide:

Using This Guide

learn about system features such as no-pause reloading

process samples, monitor status, or manage sample

review Master Curve and 2-point calibration principles,

learn about accessing ADVIA QC,

perform scheduled maintenance activities,

investigate and correct system problems,

learn about saving results data files to an archive,

ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Using This Guide

modify test definition parameters,

review biohazard precautions,

view warranty, legal, and support information,

view information about primary reagents, ancillary

view information about ordering supplies,

view system specifications,

view system symbols,

view the glossary,

Biohazard statements alert you to potentially

Laser Warning statements alert you to the risk of

Warning statements alert you to conditions that

Caution statements alert you to conditions that may

ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Using This Guide

Bold type indicates commands on the user

Italic type refers to the title of a document or a

ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: Using This Guide

ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: System Overview

Computer Hardware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15

Software Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Software Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Online Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Software Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: System Overview

and Data Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Assay Reaction Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-36

You can load samples, reagents, and supplies at any time,

The throughput is up to 240 tests per hour and the walkaway

The system automatically schedules reflex tests based on

Reagents remain in the refrigerated reagent areas, so you can

True Stat Capabilities

The system efficiently processes Stat requests via a

Clot Detection and

The system ensures sample integrity by detecting complete

The system ensures the integrity of the reagent aspiration

ADVIA Centaur XP Operators Guide: System Features

The system automatically performs the daily cleaning.

You can set up the system to automatically schedule and log

The intuitive graphical user interface is via a touch-screen

Bidirectional laboratory information system (LIS) interface

The ADVIA Centaur XP STS sample transport system is an

Remote and Laboratory

The ADVIA Centaur XP system has integrated, pro-active